CX2600-220_Command_Reference_v7.6B_eng - Copy.pdf

8/21/2019 CX2600-220_Command_Reference_v7.6B_eng - Copy.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/cx2600-220commandreferencev76beng-copypdf 1/758

CX2600/200Multi-Service Aggregation Switch

Command Reference

Notes

Read this manual in advance thoroughly to use this product correctly.

Keep the manual at hand for quick reference.MADE IN JAPAN



Corresponding versions Version 07.06



Revision History

Revision History

Rev. Published date Description

B May 2009 First edition published



Revision History

(Blank page)



Preface

Preface

i



Preface

█ Before reading the command reference:

• Product name

The CX2600/200 comprise three models, CX2600/220, CX2600/210, and CX2600/202.

In this manual, the "CX2600/220" is sometimes used in equipment setting examples and so on.

In such a case, the contents are also applicable to the "CX2600/210" and "CX2600/202".

Special mention is provided for the sections specific to a particular model; however, the contents

are also applicable to the "CX2600/210" or "CX2600/202" accordingly, unless otherwise

indicated.

• This device has three types of modes to use commands.

General mode: Mode to use display commands and terminal local set commands that

do not involve configuration update (default)

Privileged mode: Mode to use all commands related to usual maintenance operation such

as display commands and configuration commands

Maintenance mode: Mode to use commands for file operations

GeneralMode

PrivilegedMode

MaintenanceMode

enable maintenance

disable end

Mode Transition and Command for Transition

• Marks located at the top of descriptions for each command indicate following meanings:

Privilege Indicates that this command can be used in privileged mode.

General Indicates that this command can be used in general mode.

(When both are displayed, the command can be used in both modes.)

Maintenance Indicates that this command can be used in maintenance mode.

(For details, see 24 “Maintenance Mode”.)

Save Indicates that the settings can be saved.

(Without an indication, the settings for the command cannot be saved.)

Synchronize Indicates that the settings automatically synchronize with the other

system when the device is operated in dual mode.

SBY execution Indicates that the command can be used by the standby system when

the device is operated in dual mode.

ii



Preface

• Notation in “Input format” includes following meanings.

Parameters enclosed in brackets can be omitted.

When multiple parameters are enclosed in a pair of brackets, all the parameters enclosed can

be omitted.

Example)

[P1] : P1 can be omitted.

[P1 P2] : P1 and P2 can be omitted. Either one of P1 or P2 cannot be omitted.

[P1[P2]] : P1 and P2 can be omitted. P2 can be omitted without omitting P1, but P1

cannot be omitted without omitting P2.

Commands described with multiple input formats vary parameters to be specified according to

the settings.

In such a case, the key parameter is indicated as “Px (bold italic)” with an explanation.

Example)

P1 (aaa/bbb) P2 P3 : When aaa or bbb is specified by P1, specify P2 and P3.

P1 (ccc) P4 P5 : When ccc is specified by P1, specify P4 and P5.

• Notation in “Parameters” includes following meanings.

Braces indicate that one of the keywords delimited by vertical bars must be selected.

indicates that subsequent parameter to be specified varies according to parameters

previously specified.

In such a case, the affected parameter is indicated as “indent | (vertical bar)”. All the

parameters are affected as long as “indent |” continues.

* indicates a supplement for the parameter.

A keyword with _ (underline) indicates that the keyword needs to be input upon command

input.

iii



Preface

iv

• In command input, use ASCII characters (excluding control characters).

Usable characters:

[space] !"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMN

OPQRSTUVWXYZ [\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~

Also, the following characters can be used as VLAN and PVC names.

Usable characters: (The first character must be an alphabetic character.)

Alphanumeric characters, “-”, and “_”

Finer restrictions are applied to some commands.

(For details, see the Note field of each command.)

• The port (line) types specified in command entry correspond to the following line module types:

Port (Line) Type Line Module Type

atm atm155

atmp atmp

atmp155 atmp155

fe fe8-pv, fx8a-pv, fx8b-pv, fx8s-pv

gbe gbe-pv, gbe-pv2

gmx (gm8-t), (gm8-x)

tdmp tdmp

tdmp155 tdmp155

* Line modules in parentheses are not yet supported.



Preface

Cautions

(1) No part of this manual may be reproduced without prior written permission of the publisher.

(2) The contents of this manual may be revised without prior notice.

(3) All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of all information in this manual.

If you notice any part unclear, incorrect, or omitted in this manual, contact NEC.

(4) NEC assumes no liability for the result of operations despite (3).

(5) If you find any missing pages or pages out of order in this manual, please contact NEC for a

replacement.

v



Preface

(Blank page)

vi



Contents

Contents

Preface..............................................................................................i

█ Before reading the command reference:...................................................................... ii

1 Operation Modes ......................................................................1-1

Logout ....................................................................................................................... 1-2

Switch from general mode to privileged mode .......................................................... 1-3

Switch from privileged mode to general mode .......................................................... 1-4

Switch from privileged mode to maintenance mode.................................................. 1-5

Setting of privileged mode password......................................................................... 1-6

Clearing of privileged mode password ...................................................................... 1-7

Setting of login password .......................................................................................... 1-8

Clearing of login password........................................................................................ 1-9

Setting of terminal prompt ........................................................................................1-10

Setting of scroll control defaults ...............................................................................1-11

Setting of local terminal scroll control.......................................................................1-12

Setting of autonomous message output...................................................................1-13

Setting of automatic logout time ...............................................................................1-14

Display of terminal information .................................................................................1-15

Registration of user account.....................................................................................1-16

Display of user account............................................................................................1-17

Clearing of user account ..........................................................................................1-18

Setting of command mode .......................................................................................1-19

Display of command mode settings .........................................................................1-20

2 Global Configuration ................................................................2-1

Setting of administrator contact................................................................................. 2-2

Setting of system name............................................................................................. 2-3

Setting of system location ......................................................................................... 2-4

Display of system information ................................................................................... 2-5

Setting of date and time ............................................................................................ 2-6

Setting of timezone.................................................................................................... 2-7

Setting of daylight saving time................................................................................... 2-8

Display of date and time...........................................................................................2-11

Clearing of daylight saving time ...............................................................................2-12

vii



Contents

3 Administration Ports ................................................................3-1

Setting of out-band IP address.................................................................................. 3-2

Clearing of out-band IP address................................................................................ 3-3

Setting of in-band IP address .................................................................................... 3-4

Display of in-band port setup information.................................................................. 3-5

Clearing of in-band IP address.................................................................................. 3-6

Setting of default gateway......................................................................................... 3-7

Clearing of default gateway....................................................................................... 3-8

Setting of static route................................................................................................. 3-9

Display of network information .................................................................................3-10

Clearing of static route .............................................................................................3-12

Block/unblock of in-band port ...................................................................................3-13

Setting of in-band port VLAN....................................................................................3-14

Setting of out-band port speed/communication direction..........................................3-15

Setting of out-band port flow control.........................................................................3-16

Display of out-band port setup information...............................................................3-17

Checking of connection............................................................................................3-18

Setting of virtual IP address .....................................................................................3-19

Confirmation of connection with host........................................................................3-20

Clearing of virtual IP address ...................................................................................3-21

Setting of in-band mode ...........................................................................................3-22

4 Ports...........................................................................................4-1

Setting of port blocking/unblocking............................................................................ 4-2

Setting of port speed and MDI/MDI-X........................................................................ 4-3

Setting of GbE port media......................................................................................... 4-5

Setting of flow control ................................................................................................ 4-6

Setting of port link protection time ............................................................................. 4-7

Setting of SNMP link trap transmission ..................................................................... 4-8

Setting of ATM transmission path clock .................................................................... 4-9

Setting of ATM transmission path framing mode......................................................4-10

Display of port setting and status information...........................................................4-11

Display of link trap transmission setting ...................................................................4-16

Display of port link protection time ...........................................................................4-18

Setting of port cable length.......................................................................................4-19

Display of port cable length settings.........................................................................4-21

Setting of TDMP155 port logical interface................................................................4-23

viii



Contents

Display of TDMP155 port logical interface setting....................................................4-25

Setting of impedance................................................................................................4-26

Display of impedance setting ...................................................................................4-27

Setting of SDH path trace for TDMP155 ..................................................................4-28

Display of SDH path trace setting for TDMP155 ......................................................4-31

Display of port (line) alarm status for TDMP155 port................................................4-36

5 VLAN..........................................................................................5-1

Setting of tagbase VLAN........................................................................................... 5-2

Clearing of tagbase VLAN......................................................................................... 5-3

Setting of portbase VLAN.......................................................................................... 5-4

Display of VLAN table per port (line) ......................................................................... 5-5

Display of VLAN table per VLAN............................................................................... 5-7

Setting of portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc .............................................. 5-8

Setting of VLAN tag swapping................................................................................... 5-9

Display of VLAN tag swapping information ..............................................................5-10

Clearing of VLAN tag swapping ...............................................................................5-11

Display of number of VLAN entries ..........................................................................5-12

Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition....................................................5-13

Display of Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition.................................5-14

Setting of VLAN name..............................................................................................5-15

Clearing of VLAN name............................................................................................5-16

6 QoS ............................................................................................6-1

Setting of maximum bandwidth limit operation mode................................................ 6-2

Display of maximum bandwidth limit operation mode................................................ 6-4

Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN ................................... 6-6

Setting of priority mapping function per input VLAN.................................................. 6-9

Setting of priority discard function per input VLAN...................................................6-12

Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN..................................6-16

Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN................................6-19

Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per output VLAN................................6-21

Setting of priority mapping function per output VLAN...............................................6-24

Setting of priority discard function per output VLAN.................................................6-27

Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per output VLAN ...............................6-32

Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per output VLAN..............................6-35

Setting of priority mapping........................................................................................6-37

Display of priority mapping.......................................................................................6-38

ix



Contents

Creating of priority mapping profile...........................................................................6-40

Display of priority mapping profile ............................................................................6-42

Creating of CoS profile.............................................................................................6-43

Display of CoS profile...............................................................................................6-46

Clearing of CoS profile .............................................................................................6-48

Setting of input CoS priority mapping.......................................................................6-49

Display of input CoS priority mapping ......................................................................6-50

Clearing of CoS priority mapping .............................................................................6-51

Setting of output CoS priority mapping.....................................................................6-52

Display of output CoS priority mapping ....................................................................6-53

Clearing of output CoS priority mapping...................................................................6-54

Setting of output-side fairness control mode function...............................................6-55

Display of output-side fairness control mode function..............................................6-56

Setting of priority discard function of output-side fairness control function of output

port...........................................................................................................................6-57

Setting of output-side fairness control function rate of output port ...........................6-60

Setting of output-side fairness control function weight of output port .......................6-62

Setting of upper threshold of output-side fairness control function of output port.....6-64

Display of output-side fairness control function of output port..................................6-66

Clearing of output-side fairness control function of output port ................................6-69

Setting of default priority mapping............................................................................6-71

Display of default priority mapping ...........................................................................6-73

Setting of default burst tolerance..............................................................................6-75

Display of default burst tolerance .............................................................................6-78

Setting of subtraction cycle ......................................................................................6-80

Display of subtraction cycle......................................................................................6-81

7 Switch Control ..........................................................................7-1

Setting of frame size.................................................................................................. 7-2

Display of frame size................................................................................................. 7-3

Setting of maximum MAC learning count mode ........................................................ 7-4

Display of maximum MAC learning count mode........................................................ 7-5

Setting of aging time.................................................................................................. 7-6

Display of aging time................................................................................................. 7-7

Display of MAC learning count per port..................................................................... 7-8

Display of MAC learning count per VLAN.................................................................7-10

Display of MAC learning count per device................................................................7-11

Display of MAC learning information ........................................................................7-12

x



Contents

Display of MAC learning information per port...........................................................7-13

Clearing of MAC learning information per port .........................................................7-15

Display of MAC learning information per VLAN........................................................7-16

Clearing of MAC learning information per VLAN ......................................................7-17

Setting of IFG overrate mode...................................................................................7-18

Display of IFG overrate mode ..................................................................................7-19

8 Route Control............................................................................8-1

Setting of spanning tree protocol enable/disable support.......................................... 8-2

Setting of spanning tree mode .................................................................................. 8-3

Display of spanning tree mode.................................................................................. 8-4

Setting of switch priority ............................................................................................ 8-5

Setting of spanning tree timer ................................................................................... 8-6

Setting of hold count.................................................................................................. 8-7

Display of spanning tree switch information .............................................................. 8-8

Setting of spanning tree enable/disable per port ......................................................8-10

Setting of priority per port .........................................................................................8-11

Setting of path cost per port .....................................................................................8-12

Display of spanning tree port information.................................................................8-13

Setting of edge port..................................................................................................8-15

Display of edge port .................................................................................................8-16

Setting of point-to-point ............................................................................................8-17

Display of point-to-point............................................................................................8-18

Setting of BPDU transparency enable/disable per VLAN.........................................8-20

Display of BPDU transparency function setting in specified VLAN...........................8-21

Setting of MAC address transparency function ........................................................8-22

Display of MAC address transparency function........................................................8-23

Setting of link aggregation group..............................................................................8-24

Display of link aggregation setting status .................................................................8-26

Clearing of link aggregation group ...........................................................................8-28

Setting of system priority..........................................................................................8-29

Display of system priority .........................................................................................8-30

Setting of port priority ...............................................................................................8-31

Display of port priority...............................................................................................8-32

Setting of link aggregation protection time ...............................................................8-33

Display of link aggregation protection time...............................................................8-34

Setting of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable ..................................................8-35

Display of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable information...............................8-36

xi



Contents

Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified MAC .................................................8-37

Clearing of IGMP Snooping entry for specified group address.................................8-38

Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified VLAN................................................8-39

Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified port number......................................8-40

Clearing of IGMP Snooping entry for specified VLAN ..............................................8-41

9 Filters .........................................................................................9-1

Setting/clearing of port isolate ................................................................................... 9-2

Display of port isolate setting state............................................................................ 9-3

Creating of filtering profile ......................................................................................... 9-4

Display of filtering profile ........................................................................................... 9-6

Clearing of filtering profile.......................................................................................... 9-8

Setting of input filtering.............................................................................................. 9-9

Display of input filtering ............................................................................................9-10

Clearing of input filtering...........................................................................................9-12

Setting of output filtering...........................................................................................9-13

Display of output filtering..........................................................................................9-14

Clearing of output filtering ........................................................................................9-16

Setting of MAC address learning limiting count function ..........................................9-17

Display of MAC address learning count limiting function..........................................9-18

Clearing of MAC address learning count limiting function ........................................9-20

Setting of static MAC address of MAC address learning count limiting function ......9-21

Clearing of static MAC address of MAC address learning count limiting function ....9-22

10 EtherOAM ..............................................................................10-1

Setting of MEG.........................................................................................................10-2

Display of MEG setting information ..........................................................................10-3

Clearing of MEG.......................................................................................................10-5

Setting of MEP .........................................................................................................10-6

Display of MEP setting information ..........................................................................10-8

Clearing of MEP .....................................................................................................10-12

Setting of test target MEP ......................................................................................10-13

Display of test target MEP setting information........................................................10-14

Clearing of test target MEP ....................................................................................10-15

Setting of associated MEP ID.................................................................................10-16

Clearing of associated MEP ID ..............................................................................10-17

Setting of MIP.........................................................................................................10-18

Display of MIP setting information..........................................................................10-19

xii



Contents

Clearing of MIP ......................................................................................................10-21

Setting of EtherOAM frame common information...................................................10-22

Display of EtherOAM frame common information ..................................................10-23

Setting of Reply frame returning period..................................................................10-24

Display of Reply frame returning period .................................................................10-25

Setting of EtherOAM Continuity Check transmission .............................................10-26

Setting of RDI operation.........................................................................................10-28

Display of final fault information .............................................................................10-29

Display of CCM error cause ...................................................................................10-30

Clearing of CCM error cause..................................................................................10-32

Executing of EtherOAM Loop Back test .................................................................10-33

Executing of EtherOAM Link Trace test .................................................................10-35

Executing of EtherOAM Frame Delay Measurement test.......................................10-37

Executing of EtherOAM Frame Loss Measurement test ........................................10-39

Setting of EtherPS enable/disable..........................................................................10-42

Setting of EtherPS control VLAN............................................................................10-44

Setting of EtherPS lockout .....................................................................................10-45

Setting of EtherPS timer.........................................................................................10-46

Changeover of EtherPS state.................................................................................10-47

Resetting of EtherPS state changeover .................................................................10-48

Display of EtherPS configuration information .........................................................10-49

Display of EtherPS status.......................................................................................10-51

Setting of EtherRing enable/disable .......................................................................10-53

Setting of EtherRing control VLAN .........................................................................10-54

Setting of EtherRing RPL port ................................................................................10-55

Setting of EtherRing timer ......................................................................................10-56

Clearing of EtherRing loop detection status ...........................................................10-57

Display of EtherRing configuration information ......................................................10-58

Display of EtherRing status information .................................................................10-60

11 APS ........................................................................................11-1

Setting of APS enable/disable..................................................................................11-2

Setting of APS lockout..............................................................................................11-4

Setting of APS timer values......................................................................................11-5

Changeover of APS..................................................................................................11-6

Resetting of APS changeover ..................................................................................11-8

Display of APS settings and status ..........................................................................11-9

xiii



Contents

12 ATM Control ..........................................................................12-1

Registration of PVC..................................................................................................12-2

Clearing of PVC .......................................................................................................12-3

Registration of PVC name........................................................................................12-4

Clearing of PVC name..............................................................................................12-5

Setting of PVC blocking/unblocking .........................................................................12-6

Setting PVC blocking/unblocking en bloc .................................................................12-7

Display of PVC setting information...........................................................................12-8

Setting of PVC-VLAN mode ...................................................................................12-10

Setting of VLAN VC................................................................................................12-11

Clearing of VLAN VC settings ................................................................................12-12

Display of VLAN VC setting status per PVC...........................................................12-13

Display of VLAN VC setting status per VLAN.........................................................12-15

Setting/clearing of PVC isolate...............................................................................12-17

Display of PVC isolate setting status......................................................................12-18

Display of MAC learning information per PVC........................................................12-19

Display of MAC learning information per VLAN......................................................12-20

Display of MAC learning count per PVC.................................................................12-22

Display of MAC learning count per VLAN...............................................................12-24

Clearing of MAC learning information per PVC......................................................12-26

Setting/clearing of ATM loop guard ........................................................................12-27

Display of ATM loop guard setting status...............................................................12-28

Display of ATM loop trap transmission state ..........................................................12-29

Clearing of ATM loop detection ..............................................................................12-30

Setting of ATMoP mode .........................................................................................12-31

Setting of ATMoP format ........................................................................................12-33

Display of ATMoP format information.....................................................................12-35

Clearing of ATMoP format setting ..........................................................................12-37

Setting of path between ATMs ...............................................................................12-38

Display of path information between ATMs............................................................12-41

Clearing path setting between ATMs......................................................................12-42

13 ATM-QoS ...............................................................................13-1

Setting of rate mode.................................................................................................13-2

Setting of ATM shaper..............................................................................................13-3

Display of ATM shaper.............................................................................................13-6

Display of effective band ..........................................................................................13-8

xiv



Contents

Clearing of ATM shaper .........................................................................................13-10

Setting of AAL5 mode ............................................................................................13-11

Display of AAL5 mode............................................................................................13-12

Setting of CLP........................................................................................................13-13

Display of CLP setting............................................................................................13-14

Clearing of CLP setting ..........................................................................................13-15

Setting of CLP-priority mapping .............................................................................13-16

Display of CLP-priority mapping setting status.......................................................13-18

Setting of CLP conversion mode............................................................................13-20

Setting of CLP conversion priority ..........................................................................13-21

Display of CLP conversion setting status ...............................................................13-22

14 ATM-OAM ..............................................................................14-1

Setting of ATM-OAM operation ................................................................................14-2

Setting of ATM-OAM flow point ................................................................................14-4

Display of ATM-OAM setting information .................................................................14-6

Display of ATM-OAM status information ..................................................................14-8

15 ATM-IMA ................................................................................15-1

Setting of IMA group.................................................................................................15-2

Display of IMA group setting information..................................................................15-4

Display of IMA group status information...................................................................15-5

Clearing of IMA group ..............................................................................................15-8

Setting of IMA clock mode........................................................................................15-9

Display of IMA clock mode setting information.......................................................15-10

Starting and result display of IMA loopback test.....................................................15-11

16 TDM-Path...............................................................................16-1

Setting of TDM group ...............................................................................................16-2

Display of TDM group setting information ................................................................16-4

Clearing of TDM group.............................................................................................16-6

Setting of TDM group name .....................................................................................16-8

Display of TDM group name setting .......................................................................16-10

Clearing of TDM group name setting......................................................................16-12

Setting of TDM path ...............................................................................................16-14

Display of TDM path setting information.................................................................16-16

Clearing of TDM path .............................................................................................16-18

xv



Contents

17 TDM over Packet...................................................................17-1

Setting of TDMoP mode...........................................................................................17-2

Clearing of TDMoP mode setting .............................................................................17-4

Setting of TDMoP group...........................................................................................17-5

Display of TDMoP group setting information ............................................................17-7

Clearing of TDMoP group.........................................................................................17-9

Setting of TDMoP connection.................................................................................17-11

Display of TDMoP connection setting.....................................................................17-13

Clearing of TDMoP connection ..............................................................................17-16

Setting of variation tolerance..................................................................................17-17

Display of variation tolerance .................................................................................17-19

Display of TDMoP path setting status information..................................................17-21

Setting of TDMoP format........................................................................................17-23

Display of TDMoP format setting............................................................................17-25

Clearing of TDMoP format......................................................................................17-28

Setting of TDMoP blocking/unblocking...................................................................17-30

Setting of adaptive clock ........................................................................................17-32

Display of adaptive clock setting ............................................................................17-34

Clearing of adaptive clock ......................................................................................17-35

18 Clock Control ........................................................................18-1

Setting of external clock mode .................................................................................18-2

Setting of reference clock priority .............................................................................18-3

Setting of reference clock operation.........................................................................18-5

Display of reference clock information......................................................................18-6

Resetting of reference clock.....................................................................................18-8

Change of external clock..........................................................................................18-9

19 Network Management ........................................................19-11

Setting of SNMP enable/disable.............................................................................19-12

Setting of SNMP manager......................................................................................19-13

Setting of SNMP trap manager ..............................................................................19-14

Clearing of SNMP manager settings ......................................................................19-15

Clearing of SNMP trap manager settings...............................................................19-16

Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission.......................................19-17

Display of SNMP setting information......................................................................19-18

Setting of access list...............................................................................................19-20

xvi



Contents

Display of access list..............................................................................................19-21

Clearing of access list ............................................................................................19-22

Display of session ..................................................................................................19-23

Clearing of session.................................................................................................19-24

Setting of remote log enable/disable ......................................................................19-25

Setting of syslog server and message facility.........................................................19-26

Display of syslog server configuration information .................................................19-27

Clearing of syslog server........................................................................................19-28

Setting of syslog message level remapping ...........................................................19-29

Display of syslog message level mapping status ...................................................19-30

Clearing of syslog message level remapping .........................................................19-31

Display of local log .................................................................................................19-32

Clearing of local log................................................................................................19-34

Setting of NTP access time....................................................................................19-35

Setting of IP address of NTP server.......................................................................19-36

Display of NTP server setting information ..............................................................19-37

Clearing of IP address of NTP server.....................................................................19-38

20 Network Test .........................................................................20-1

Setting of M/C management function basics ............................................................20-2

Starting of M/C loopback test ...................................................................................20-3

Prompting of M/C to send M/C status notification ....................................................20-6

Display of M/C information .......................................................................................20-7

Starting of ATM loopback test ..................................................................................20-9

Setting of ATM loopback source ID........................................................................20-13

Display of ATM loopback source ID .......................................................................20-14

Setting of ATM loopback monitoring mode.............................................................20-15

Display of ATM loopback monitoring configuration ................................................20-16

Setting of ATM loopback monitoring function .........................................................20-19

Display of ATM loopback monitoring information ...................................................20-21

Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring function.......................................................20-23

21 Monitors.................................................................................21-1

Display of port counter .............................................................................................21-2

Clearing of port counter............................................................................................21-5

Display of discard counter ........................................................................................21-6

Registration of VLAN counter...................................................................................21-9

Display of VLAN counter registration information...................................................21-11

xvii



Contents

Clearing of VLAN counter registration....................................................................21-13

Display of VLAN counter ........................................................................................21-14

Clearing of VLAN counter.......................................................................................21-19

Registration of PVC counter...................................................................................21-20

Display of PVC counter registration information.....................................................21-21

Clearing of PVC counter registration......................................................................21-22

Display of byte/frame counter information per PVC ...............................................21-23

Clearing of byte/frame counter information per PVC..............................................21-26

Display of cell counter information .........................................................................21-27

Display of cell counter information per F4 ..............................................................21-31

Display of cell counter information per F5 ..............................................................21-34

Display of cell counter information per IMA port.....................................................21-37

Clearing of cell counter information........................................................................21-39

Registration of EtherOAM counter .........................................................................21-40

Display of EtherOAM counter registration information............................................21-41

Clearing of EtherOAM counter registration.............................................................21-43

Display of EtherOAM counter.................................................................................21-44

Setting of mirroring start or stop .............................................................................21-45

Display of mirroring settings ...................................................................................21-47

22 Maintenance and Operation ................................................22-1

Uploading of running configuration to ftp server.......................................................22-2

Uploading of startup configuration to ftp server........................................................22-3

Uploading of system log to ftp server .......................................................................22-4

Uploading of setting information to ftp server...........................................................22-5

Uploading of fault information to ftp server...............................................................22-6

Downloading of software..........................................................................................22-7

Downloading of FPGA of UGSW module.................................................................22-8

Downloading of FPGA of line module.......................................................................22-9

Downloading of running configuration from ftp server ............................................22-11

Downloading of startup configuration from ftp server .............................................22-13

Display of running configuration .............................................................................22-14

Display of startup configuration ..............................................................................22-15

Display of configuration difference .........................................................................22-16

Setting of trap transmission selection.....................................................................22-17

Display of trap transmission selection setting status..............................................22-21

Display of all setting information.............................................................................22-24

Saving of setting information ..................................................................................22-26

xviii



Contents

Clearing of line module configuration .....................................................................22-27

Clearing of startup configuration ............................................................................22-30

Setting of backup server.........................................................................................22-31

Clearing of backup server ......................................................................................22-32

Setting of backup schedule ....................................................................................22-33

Display of backup information ................................................................................22-35

Display of current fault and alarm information ........................................................22-36

Clearing of WR fault ...............................................................................................22-38

Display of past fault information .............................................................................22-39

Clearing of past fault information............................................................................22-41

Display of device installation status and other various statuses.............................22-42

Display of bridge information for device .................................................................22-44

Display of module ID information ...........................................................................22-45

Display of various version information....................................................................22-47

Display of device temperature................................................................................22-49

Setting of autonomous rebooting enable/disable ...................................................22-51

Display of autonomous rebooting settings..............................................................22-52

Display of CPU usage ............................................................................................22-53

Display of memory usage.......................................................................................22-55

23 Device Control ......................................................................23-1

Setting of line module type .......................................................................................23-2

Setting of TDMP line mode ......................................................................................23-3

Setting of ATMP line mode.......................................................................................23-6

Setting of TDMP155 line mode ................................................................................23-8

Setting of GbE line mode .......................................................................................23-10

Display of line mode setting ...................................................................................23-11

Changeover of UGSW module system...................................................................23-13

Resetting of entire device.......................................................................................23-14

Resetting of UGSW module ...................................................................................23-16

Resetting of line module.........................................................................................23-18

Display of reset factor.............................................................................................23-19

OUS setting of UGSW module ...............................................................................23-20

OUS setting of line module.....................................................................................23-21

Removing of external memory ...............................................................................23-22

xix



Contents

24 Maintenance Mode ...............................................................24-1

Downloading of software..........................................................................................24-2

Downloading of FPGA of UGSW module.................................................................24-3

Downloading of FPGA of line module.......................................................................24-5

Uploading of running configuration to external memory ...........................................24-7

Uploading of startup configuration to external memory ............................................24-8

Uploading of system log to external memory ...........................................................24-9

Downloading of running configuration from external memory ................................24-10

Downloading of startup configuration from external memory .................................24-11

Uploading of fault information to external memory .................................................24-12

Uploading of setting information.............................................................................24-13

Saving of setting status to external memory...........................................................24-14

Switch from maintenance mode to privileged mode...............................................24-15

Display of list of contents in directory .....................................................................24-16

Creating of directory...............................................................................................24-17

Removing of directory ............................................................................................24-18

Change of current directory....................................................................................24-19

Copying file ............................................................................................................24-20

Change of file name ...............................................................................................24-21

Deleting file ............................................................................................................24-22

Removing of external memory ...............................................................................24-23

Display of asynchronous switch status of UGSW module......................................24-24

25 Appendix ...............................................................................25-1

Appendix 1 Commands shown by configuration display and show all ...................25-2

Appendix 2 Line module type conditions .............................................................25-12

Index ..................................................................................... Index-1

xx



Operation Modes

1 Operation Modes

1-1



Operation Modes

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Save Synchro-

nizeSBY execution

exit

Logout

This command is used for logout from CLI.

Input format exit

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage condition None

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# exit

Output item

Related

commands

enable Switch from general mode to privileged mode

disable Switch from privileged mode to general mode

1-2



Operation Modes

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Save Synchro-

nizeSBY execution

enable

Switch from general mode to privileged mode

Enables you to switch from general mode to privileged mode.

Input format enable

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage condition Interactively enter your privileged mode password. When not setting this password,press [Enter].

Note None

Input example *Switch@1> enable

Input enable password:

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

exit Logout

disable Switch from privileged mode to general mode

1-3



Operation Modes

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Save Synchro-

nizeSBY execution

disable

Switch from privileged mode to general mode

Enables you to switch from privileged mode to general mode.

Input format disable

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# disable

*Switch@1>

Output item

Relatedcommands

exit Logoutenable Switch from general mode to privileged mode

1-4



Operation Modes

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

maintenance

Switch from privileged mode to maintenance mode

Enables you to switch from privileged mode to maintenance mode.

Input format maintenance

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage condition If another session is in maintenance mode, you cannot switch from privileged mode tomaintenance mode.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# maintenance

*Switch@1%

Output item

Relatedcommand

end Switch from maintenance mode to privileged mode

1-5



Operation Modes

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set enable password

Setting of privileged mode password

Sets your privileged mode password.

Input format set enable password

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage condition Set your privileged mode password interactively.

Note Set this password with 4 to 16 ASCII characters other than [space], [!], [?], and [controlcharacter].

Input example *Switch@1# set enable password

Input old enable password:

Input new enable password:

Retype new enable password:

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands


clear enable password Clearing of privileged mode password

1-6



Operation Modes

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear enable password

Clearing of privileged mode password

Clears your privileged mode password.

Input format clear enable password

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage condition Clear your privileged mode password interactively.


Input example *Switch@1# clear enable password

Input old password:

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands


set enable password Setting of privileged mode password

1-7



Operation Modes

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set login password

Setting of login password

Sets your login password.

Input format set login password

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage condition Set your login password interactively.


Input example *Switch@1# set login password

Input old password:

Input new password:

Retype new password:

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

exit Logout

clear login password Clearing of login password

1-8



Operation Modes

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear login password

Clearing of login password

Clears your login password.

Input format clear login password

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage condition Clear your login password interactively.


Input example *Switch@1# clear login password

Input old password:

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

exit Logout

set login password Setting of login password

1-9



Operation Modes

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set terminal prompt

Setting of terminal prompt

Sets a terminal prompt.

Input format set terminal prompt P1

Parameter P1: Terminal prompt name (1 to 20 characters)

Default value P1: Switch


Notes Terminal prompts for other than the set terminal are set at reconnection.

Set this prompt name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character].

When using [space], enclose the entire character string in double quotation marks.

Input example *Switch@1# set terminal prompt CX2600-220

*CX2600-220@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

None

1-10



Operation Modes

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set terminal scroll system

Setting of scroll control defaults

Sets scroll control defaults.

- Specifying that screen scroll stop is off

set terminal scroll system P1 (off)

Input Formats

- Specifying that screen scroll stop is on

set terminal scroll system [P1 (on) ] [P2]

Parameters P1: Scroll control { off | on }

off: Screen scroll stop is off

on: Screen scroll stop is on

* When P1 is omitted, on is assumed.

When on is specified in P1.

P2: Number of scroll lines (1 to 99)

* When P2 is omitted, 22 is assumed.

Default value P1: on

P2: 22


Note Scroll control defaults are set in all terminals at reconnection.

Input example *Switch@1# set terminal scroll system on

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show terminal config Display of terminal information

1-11



Operation Modes

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Save Synchro-

nizeSBY execution

set terminal scroll local

Setting of local terminal scroll control

Sets local terminal scroll control.

- Specifying that screen scroll stop is off

set terminal scroll local P1 (off)

Input Formats

- Specifying that screen scroll stop is on

set terminal scroll local [P1 (on) ] [P2]

Parameters P1: Scroll control { off | on }


on: Screen scroll stop is on

* When P1 is omitted, on is assumed.

When on is specified in P1.

P2: Number of scroll lines (1 to 99)


Default value P1: on

P2: 22


Notes Local terminal scroll control only for the set terminal is set.

A local terminal operates in scroll control default setting at reconnection.

Input example *Switch@1# set terminal scroll local on

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand


1-12



Operation Modes

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Save Synchro-

nizeSBY execution

set terminal monitor

Setting of autonomous message output

Sets autonomous message output.

Input format set terminal monitor P1

Parameter P1: Autonomous message control { enable | disable }

enable: Enables autonomous message output

disable: Disables autonomous message output

Default values P1: [RS-232C] enable

[telnet] disable


Notes Autonomous message output is suppressed during command execution.

Terminals operate by default at reconnection.

Input example *Switch@1# set terminal monitor enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand


1-13



Operation Modes

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set terminal logout

Setting of automatic logout time

Sets automatic logout time.

Input format set terminal logout P1

Parameter P1: Automatic logout time (0 to 60 minutes)

0: Disables automatic logout time setting

Default value P1: 5 minutes


Note Automatic logout time for other than the set terminal is set at reconnection.

Input example *Switch@1# set terminal logout 60

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand


1-14



Operation Modes

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show terminal config

Display of terminal information

Shows terminal information.

Input format show terminal config

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show terminal config

Current Terminal Configuration

==============================

Console TimeOut (minutes) : 60

Output Length : off

Alarm Monitor : disabled

Default Terminal Configuration==============================

Console TimeOut (minutes) : 60

Output Length : 99

*Switch@1#

Output items Console Timeout (minutes): Automatic logout time

Output Length: Scroll control


XX: Scroll line

Alarm Monitor: Autonomous message output control

enable: Enables autonomous message output

disable: Disables autonomous message output

Relatedcommands

set terminal scroll system Setting of scroll control defaults

set terminal scroll local Setting of local terminal scroll control

set terminal monitor Setting of autonomous message output

set terminal logout Setting of automatic logout time

1-15



Operation Modes

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set user account

Registration of user account

Registers a user account or changes the password of the registered user account.

Input format set user account P1 P2

Parameters P1: User account name (1 to 10 characters)

P2: Permission specification { read-only | read-write }

read-only: General mode

read-write: Privileged mode

Default value None

Usage condition Set your password interactively.

Notes Set a user account with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character].


You can register up to six user accounts except the default user account.

You can change the password of the registered user account by specifying the sameuser account name and user privilege as the registered user account and entering theold password.

Set the password with 4 to 16 ASCII characters other than [space], [!], [?], and [controlcharacter].

Input example *Switch@1# set user account cx2600 read-write

Input password:

Retype password:

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands show user account Display of user accountclear user account Clearing of user account

1-16



Operation Modes

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show user account

Display of user account

Shows registered user account information.

Input format show user account

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show user account

User Information

================

User Name Rights

--------------------------------

admin read-write

ippan read-only

tokken read-writecx2600 read-write

*Switch@1#

Output items User Name: User account name

Rights: Mode rights

read-only: General mode

read-write: Privileged mode

Related

commands

set user account Registration of user account

clear user account Clearing of user account

1-17



Operation Modes

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear user account

Clearing of user account

Clears a user account.

Input format clear user account P1

Parameter P1: User account name (1 to 10 characters)

Default value None


Note You cannot clear the default user account “admin”.

Input example *Switch@1# clear user account cx2600

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set user account Registration of user accountshow user account Display of user account

1-18



Operation Modes

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set command-mode

Setting of command mode

Sets command mode.

Input format set command-mode P1

Parameter P1: Command mode { normal | safety }

normal: Normal mode

safety: Safety mode

Default value P1: normal


Notes If command mode is safety mode, the command sequence control function, executionconfirmation function, and overwrite setting suppression function are valid. For thetarget commands of each function, refer to “Command Mode Functions” of “Method ofOperating Maintenance and Management Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.

Input example *Switch@1# set command-mode safety

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show command-mode Display of command mode settings

1-19



Operation Modes

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show command-mode

Display of command mode settings

Shows command mode settings.

Input format show command-mode

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show command-mode

Command Mode Configuration

==========================

Command Mode : normal

*Switch@1#

Output item Command Mode: Command modenormal: Normal mode

safety: Safety mode

Relatedcommand

set command-mode Setting of command mode

1-20



Global Configuration

2 Global Configuration

2-1




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set system contact

Setting of administrator contact

Sets an administrator to contact.

Input format set system contact P1

Parameter P1: Administrator to contact (0 to 255 characters)

Default value None


Notes To return the set administrator contact to the default value, set “ ” in P1.

Set an administrator contact with ASCII characters (excluding control characters) likenormal command entry.

Input example *Switch@1# set system contact abc

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show system information Display of system information

2-2




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set system name

Setting of system name

Sets system name.

Input format set system name P1

Parameter P1: System name (0 to 255 characters)

Default value None


Notes To return the set system name to the default value, set “ ” in P1.

Set a system name with ASCII characters (excluding control characters) like normalcommand entry.

Input example *Switch@1# set system name CX2600

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand


2-3




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set system location

Setting of system location

Sets system location.

Input format set system location P1

Parameter P1: System location (0 to 255 characters)

Default value None


Notes To return the set system location to the default value, set “ ” in P1.

Set a system location with ASCII characters (excluding control characters) like normalcommand entry.

Input example *Switch@1# set system location NEC

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand


2-4




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show system information

Display of system information

Shows system information.

Input format show system information

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show system information

System Information

==================

SysDescr : NEC CX2600/220 Ver.00.01.07

System Location: NEC

System Name : CX2600/220

System Contact : abc

System Up Time : 0 days, 00:53:41.57

*Switch@1#

Output items SysDescr: Device information

NEC: Company name (fixed)

CX2600/220: Device name (fixed)

Ver.vv.rr.mm: Software version

vv: Version

rr: Revision

mm: Minor version

System Location: System locationSystem Name: System name

System Contact: Administrator contact

System Up Time: Elapsed time after system start (unit: 10 ms)

Relatedcommands

set system contact Setting of administrator contact

set system name Setting of system name

set system location Setting of system location

2-5




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Save Synchro-

nize SBY execution

date

Setting of date and time

Sets system date and time.

Input format date P1 P2

Parameters P1: Date (mm/dd/yy)

mm: Month (01 to 12)

dd: Day (01 to 31)

yy: Year (00 to 99)

P2: Time (hh:mm:ss)hh: Hour (00 to 23)

mm: Minute (00 to 59)

ss: Second (00 to 59)

Default value None


Note Second input (ss) can be omitted. If omitted, 0 second is assumed.

Input example *Switch@1# date 04/18/06 12:00*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show system date Display of date and time

2-6




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set system timezone

Setting of timezone

Sets timezone.

Input format set system timezone P1

Parameter P1: Timezone (±hh:mm)

±: Sign (- or +)

hh: Hour (00 to 23)


Default value P1: +9:00

Usage condition Always specify a sign of time difference.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set system timezone +09:00

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

date Setting of date and time


2-7




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set system daylight-time

Setting of daylight saving time

Sets daylight saving time.

- Specifying daylight saving time by date

set system daylight-time P1 (date) P2 P3 P4 [P12]

Input Formats

- Specifying daylight saving time by week

set system daylight-time P1 (week) P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 [P12]

Parameters P1: Start date (daylight saving time specification by date) specification or daylight savingtime specification by week { first | second | third | fourth | last }

- Start date (daylight saving time specification by date) (mm/dd)mm: Month (01-12)

dd: Date (01-31)

- Daylight saving time specification by week

first: The first week

second: The second week

third: The third week

fourth: The fourth week

last: The last week

When start date (daylight saving time specification by date) is specified in P1.

P2: Start time (hh/mm)

hh: Hour (00-23)

mm: Minute (00-59)

P3: End date (mm/dd)

mm: Month (01-12)

dd: Date (01-31)

P4: End time (hh:mm)

hh: Hour (00-23)

mm: Minute (00-59)

2-8




When daylight saving time specification by week is specified in P1.

P5: Start day of the week { sunday | monday | tuesday | wednesday | thursday |friday | saturday }

sunday: Sunday

monday: Monday

tuesday: Tuesdaywednesday: Wednesday

thursday: Thursday

friday: Friday

saturday: Saturday

P6: Start month (1-12)

P7: Start time (hh:mm)

hh: Hour (00-23)

mm: Minute (00-59)

P8: End week { first | second | third | fourth | last }

first: The first week

second: The second weekthird: The third week

fourth: The fourth week

last: The last week

P9: End day of the week { sunday | monday | tuesday | wednesday | thursday |friday | saturday }

sunday: Sunday

monday: Monday

tuesday: Tuesday

wednesday: Wednesday

thursday: Thursday

friday: Fridaysaturday: Saturday

P10: End month (1-12)

P11: End time (hh:mm)

hh: Hour (00-23)

mm: Minute (00-59)

P12: Time difference by daylight saving time (hh:mm)

hh: Hour (00-23)


* When P12 is omitted, 01:00 is assumed.

Default value None

Usage condition In date specification, you cannot specify the same date for start/end date of daylightsaving time. Also, in specification of a day of week, you cannot specify the samemonth/date/day of week for start/end date of daylight saving time.

2-9




Notes When daylight saving time starts, the clock is not set to the set start time, movingforward corresponding to the time difference by daylight saving time.

Example) When the start time is 1:00 and time difference by daylight saving time is 0:30

0:58 -> 0:59 -> 1:30

When daylight saving time ends, the clock is not set to the set end time, movingbackward corresponding to the time difference by daylight saving time.

Example) When the end time is 2:00 and time difference by daylight saving time is 0:30

1:58 -> 1:59 -> 1:30

If daylight saving time is shorter than time difference by daylight saving time, thespecified end date is changed to that of the next year.

If the start date or the end date is Feb. 29, daylight saving time is applied only to leapyears. If Feb. 29 is set as the start date and the daylight saving time is shorter thantime difference by daylight saving time, the end date is changed to that of the next yearof the leap year. If Feb. 29 is set as the end date and the daylight saving time is shorter

than time difference by daylight saving time, the start date is changed to that of theprevious year of a leap year.

During daylight saving time, (DST) is shown in the current time.

Input example *Switch@1# set system daylight-time first sunday 4 1:00 last saturday 102:00 0:30

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



clear system daylight-time Clearing of daylight saving time

2-10




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show system date

Display of date and time

Shows system date and time.

Input format show system date [P1]

Parameter P1: Showing type { detail }

detail: Detailed showing

* When P1 is omitted, setting of daylight saving time is not shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show system date detail

System Date

===========

Current Date : 09/21/2006

Current Time : 14:14:47 (DST)

Time Zone : GMT +09:00

Daylight Time Start : 04/02/2006 01:00

Daylight Time End : 10/28/2006 02:00

Daylight Time Offset: 00:30

*Switch@1#

Output items Date: Date

Time: Time

Time Zone: Time difference from Greenwich mean time

Daylight Time Start: Start date and time of daylight saving time

Daylight Time End: End date and time of daylight saving time

Daylight Time Offset: Time difference by daylight saving time

Relatedcommands


set system timezone Setting of timezone

set system daylight-time Setting of daylight saving time

2-11




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear system daylight-time

Clearing of daylight saving time

Clears daylight saving time settings.

Input format clear system daylight-time

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear system daylight-time

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

date Setting of date and timeshow system date Display of date and time

set system daylight-time Setting of daylight saving time

2-12



Administration Ports

3 Administration Ports

3-1




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set ip address out-band

Setting of out-band IP address

Sets the IP address and subnet mask of an out-band port.

Input format set ip address out-band P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Switch module number or system { system }

Switch module number: 1 to 2

system: System

P2: IP address

P3: Subnet mask

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot use the network addresses set in the “set ip address in-band” command(Setting of in-band IP address) and “set ip route” command (Setting of static route).

You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxxas the IP address. (“xxx” is any number.)

You cannot set 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as the network address.

You cannot set 0 or 1 to all bits of the host part as the IP address.

Note If you log in via telnet communication, the login session close confirmation message isoutput.

Input examples *Switch@1# set ip address out-band 1 10.40.50.4 255.0.0.0

*Switch@1# set ip address out-band 2 10.40.50.5 255.0.0.0

*Switch@1# set ip address out-band system 10.40.50.6 255.0.0.0

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

clear ip address out-band Clearing of output-bound IP addressset ip route default Setting of default gateway

set ip route Setting of static route

show ip config Display of network information

3-2




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear ip address out-band

Clearing of out-band IP address

Initializes the IP address of an out-band port.

Input format clear ip address out-band P1

Parameter P1: Switch module number or system { system }


system: System

Default value None



Input examples *Switch@1# clear ip address out-band 1

*Switch@1# clear ip address out-band 2

*Switch@1# clear ip address out-band system

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address

set ip route default Setting of default gateway



3-3




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set ip address in-band

Setting of in-band IP address

Sets an IP address and subnet mask for the logical interface.

Input format set ip address in-band P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Switch module number or system { system }


system: System

P2: IP address

P3: Subnet mask

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot use the network addresses set in the “set ip address out-band” command(Setting of out-band IP address) and “set ip route” command (Setting of static route).



You cannot set 0 or 1 to all bits of the host part as the IP address.

Note If you log in via telnet communication, the login session disconnection confirmationmessage is output.

Input examples *Switch@1# set ip address in-band 1 1.1.1.1 255.0.0.0

*Switch@1# set ip address in-band 2 1.1.1.2 255.0.0.0

*Switch@1# set ip address in-band system 1.1.1.3 255.0.0.0

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

show in-band information Display of in-band port setup informationclear ip address in-band Clearing of in-band IP address




set in-band vid Setting of in-band port VLAN

3-4




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show in-band information

Display of in-band port setup information

Shows in-band port setup information.

Input format show in-band information

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show in-band information

In-Band Configuration

=====================

Module Admin

-------------------

Switch#1 : enabled

Switch#2 : disabled

In-Band VLAN Configuration

==========================

VID : 4094

Name: abcd

*Switch@1#

Output items Module: Module

Admin: Port block/unblock setting

enabled: Port unblocked

disabled: Port blocked

Relatedcommands

set in-band admin Block/unblock of in-band port


3-5




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear ip address in-band

Clearing of in-band IP address

Clears logical interface settings.

Input format clear ip address in-band P1

Parameter P1: Switch module number or system { system }


system: System

Default value None



Input example *Switch@1# clear ip address in-band 1

*Switch@1# clear ip address in-band 2

*Switch@1# clear ip address in-band system

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address





3-6




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set ip route default

Setting of default gateway

Sets a default gateway.

Input format set ip route default P1

Parameter P1: IP address

Default value None

Usage conditions If a default gateway is set in in-band communication, a default gateway cannot beused in out-band communication. If a default gateway is set in in-bandcommunication, the default gateway that is already set in out-band communication isdisabled.

If a default gateway is set in out-band communication, the default gateway that isalready set in in-band communication is disabled.


If you set 0 or 1 to all bits of the host part as the IP address, this setting may notprovide correct communication.

You can set the network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as the

gateway address but this setting does not provide correct communication.


Input example *Switch@1# set ip route default 10.20.30.40

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP addressclear ip address in-band Clearing of in-band IP address


clear ip address out-band Clearing of out-band IP address

clear ip route default Clearing of default gateway


3-7




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear ip route default

Clearing of default gateway

Clears a default gateway.

Input format clear ip route default

Parameter None

Default value None



Input example *Switch@1# clear ip route default

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



3-8




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set ip route

Setting of static route

Sets a static route.

Input format set ip route P1 P2 P3 P4

Parameters P1: Routing domain (1 to 32)

P2: Destination address

P3: Subnet mask

P4: IP address (next hop)

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot use the network addresses set in the “set ip address in-band” command(Setting of in-band IP address) and “set ip address out-band” command (Setting ofout-band IP address).


If you set 0 or 1 to all bits of the host part as the gateway address or set 1 to all bits asthe destination address, this setting may not provide correct communication.

You cannot set the network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as thedestination address. Also, you can set the gateway address for the network address

192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24 but this setting does not provide correctcommunication.


Input example *Switch@1# set ip route 1 1.2.3.4 255.255.255.0 10.20.30.40

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands


clear ip address in-band Clearing of in-band IP address



clear ip route Clearing of static route


3-9




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show ip config

Display of network information

Shows network information for out-band/in-band.

Input format show ip config

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage conditions 0.0.0.0 is shown in unset IP address and subnet mask. 00:00:00:00:00:00 is shownin the MAC addresses of uninstalled switch modules.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ip config

Out-Band IP Table

=================

Module MAC Address IP Address Netmask

--------------------------------------------------------------

System : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:64 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

Switch#1 : 00:00:00:00:00:00 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

Switch#2 : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:64 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

In-Band IP Table

================


----------------------------------------------------------------------

System : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:a4 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

Switch#1 : 00:00:00:00:00:00 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

Switch#2 : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:a4 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

IP Routing Table

================

Destination Gateway

Index Address Netmask Address Port

----------------------------------------------------------------------

- 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.20.30.40 ---

In-Band Mode

============

Mode : virtual

VLAN Virtual-Address Table

==========================

Index VID Name Address

----------------------------------------------------------------------3 300 1.1.1.10

3-10




*Switch@1#


MAC Address: MAC address

IP Address: IP address

Netmask: Subnet mask

Index: Routing domain

Destination Address: Destination address

Gateway Address: Gateway address

Port: Band

out-band: Out-band communication

in-band : In-band communication

-: No band

Mode: In-band mode

Virtual: User connection test function enabled

Real: Administration port control function enabled

VID: VLAN ID

Name: VLAN name (32 characters)

Address: Virtual IP address

Relatedcommands






clear ip route default Clearing of default gateway

set ip route Setting of static routeclear ip route Clearing of static route

set ip in-band mode Switching of in-band mode

set ip virtual-address Setting of virtual IP address

clear ip virtual-address Clearing of virtual IP address

3-11




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear ip route

Clearing of static route

Clears a static route.

Input format clear ip route P1

Parameter P1: Routing domain (1 to 32)

Default value None


Note After this command is entered, execution is confirmed.

Input example *Switch@1# clear ip route 1

Would you like to terminate remote session : (Y/N) : y

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



3-12




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set in-band admin

Block/unblock of in-band port

Blocks and unblocks an in-band port.

Input format set in-band admin P1 P2

Parameters P1: Switch module number (1 to 2)

P2: In-band port block/unblock setting { enable | disable }

enable: Unblocks in-band port

disable: Blocks in-band port

Default value P2: enable



Input example *Switch@1# set in-band admin 1 enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands







3-13




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set in-band vid

Setting of in-band port VLAN

Sets the VLAN to which the CPU port belongs.

Input format set in-band vid P1

Parameter P1: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }

VLAN ID: 1 to 4094

VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters

Default values VLAN ID: 1

Usage conditions The VLAN to which the CPU port belongs is set in the “set in-band vid” command.This VLAN transfers all broadcast, multicast, and unknown unicast frames to the CPUport. To reduce CPU load, use this VLAN separately from user ports (lines).

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set in-band vid 1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands






set in-band admin Blocking/unblocking of in-band port

3-14




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set out-band speed

Setting of out-band port speed/communication direction

Sets out-band port speed/communication direction.

- Specifying port speed (Auto-negotiation)

set out-band speed P1 (auto)

Input formats

- Specifying the following port speed

-10m-half

-10m-full

-100m-half

-100m-fullset out-band speed P1 (10m-half | 10m-full | 100m-half | 100m-full) [P2]

Parameters P1: Port speed { 10m-half | 10m-full | 100m-half | 100m-full | auto }

10m-half: 10 Mbps and Half Duplex

10m-full: 10 Mbps and Full Duplex

100m-half: 100 Mbps and Half Duplex


auto: Auto-negotiation

When 10m-half, 10m-full, 100m-half, or 100m-full is specified in P1.

P2: Interface { mdi | mdi-x }

mdi: MDI mode

mdi-x: MDI-X mode

* When P2 is omitted, mdi is assumed.

Default value None



Input example *Switch@1# set out-band speed auto

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show out-band information Display of out-band port setup information

3-15




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set out-band flowcontrol

Setting of out-band port flow control

Sets out-band port flow control.

Input format set out-band flowcontrol P1

Parameter P1: Flow control setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables flow control

disable: Disables flow control

Default value P1: disable


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set out-band flowcontrol enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show out-band information Display of out-band port setup information

3-16




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show out-band information

Display of out-band port setup information

Shows out-band port setup information.

Input format show out-band information

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show out-band information

Out-Band Table

==============

Port Link Flowcontrol Flowcontrol

Module Speed Status MDI Configuration Status

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Switch#1 : auto 100m-full auto disabled disabled

Switch#2 : auto --- auto disabled ---

*Switch@1#


Port Speed: Port speed setting

10m-half: 10Mbps Half Duplex

10m-full: 10Mbps Full Duplex




Link Status: Port physical link status10m-half: 10Mbps Half Duplex




link-down: Link down

--- : Uninstalled

MDI: MDI setting

mdi: MDI mode

mdi-x: MDI-X mode


Flowcontrol Configuration: Flow controlconfiguration

enabled: Flow control configurationenabled

disabled: Flow control configurationdisabled

Flowcontrol Status: Flow control status

enabled: Flow control enabled

disabled: Flow control disabled

--- : Flow control uninstalled

Relatedcommands

set out-band speed Setting of out-band port speed/communication direction

set out-band flowcontrol Setting of out-band port flow control

3-17




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

ping

Checking of connection

Checks if connection with the host is correct. To cancel the connection test halfway, press Ctrl + c key

combination.

Input format ping P1 [P2]

Parameters P1: IP address

P2: Execution count (1 to 2147483647)


Default value None

Usage conditions To cancel the connection test, press Ctrl + c .

You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxxas the IP address. (“xxx” is any number.) Also, you can set the network addresses192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 but this setting does not provide correctcommunication.

Note None

Input example*Switch@1# ping 192.168.1.212

PING 192.168.1.212: 56 data bytes

64 bytes from 192.168.1.212: icmp_seq=0 ttl=255 time<5 ms




--- 192.168.1.212 ping statistics ---

4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0% packet loss

round-trip min/avg/max/stddev = 0.000/0.000/0.000/0.000 ms

*Switch@1#

Output item ping response information is output.

Relatedcommands





3-18




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set ip virtual-address

Setting of virtual IP address

Sets a VLAN ID and virtual IP address in the specified index.

Input format set ip virtual-address P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Index (1 to 16)

P2: Virtual IP address

P3: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }

VLAN ID: 1 to 4094


Default value None

Usage condition You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx asthe IP address. (“xxx” is any number.)

If you set 0 or 1 to all bits of the host part as the IP address, this setting may not providecorrect communication.

Notes You can assign up to 16 virtual IP addresses corresponding to VLAN IDs.

The same virtual IP address can be assigned for another VLAN.

Out-band IP addresses can also be duplicated with virtual IP addresses.

Input example *Switch@1# set ip virtual-address 3 172.16.1.10 test-vlan-1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands


set ip in-band mode Setting of in-band mode

virtual-ping Confirmation of connection with host


3-19




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

virtual-ping

Confirmation of connection with host

Performs the user connection test on the CX2600/200 side to confirm the connection with the host.

To cancel the user connection test halfway, press [Ctrl]+[c].

Input format virtual-ping P1 P2 [P3] [P4]

Parameters P1: Virtual IP address


VLAN ID: 1 to 4094

VLAN name: 1 to 32 charactersP3: Consecutive transmission times count (1 to 65535)


P4: Response wait timeout value time (1 to 60 sec)


Default value None

Usage conditions You can enter this command when the in-band user connection test function isenabled (when virtual is effective).

This virtual-ping cannot be transferred beyond a gateway.


Note The size of ICMP ECHO packet to be transmitted is fixed at 64 bytes.

Input example *Switch@1# virtual-ping 172.16.1.17 30 count 2 time out 1

PING 172.16.1.17: 64 data bytes



--- 172.16.1.17 ping statistics ---

2 packets transmitted, 2 packets received, 0% packet loss

round-trip min/avg/max/stddev = 0.000/0.000/0.000/0.000 ms

*Switch@1#

Output item virtual-ping response information is displayed.

Relatedcommands

set ip in-band mode Setting of in-band mode



3-20




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear ip virtual-address

Clearing of virtual IP address

Clears the virtual IP address of the specified index.

Input format clear ip virtual-address P1

Parameter P1: Index (1 to 16)

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear ip virtual-address 6

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

show ip config Display of network informationset ip in-band mode Setting of in-band mode



3-21




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set ip in-band mode

Setting of in-band mode

Switches in-band mode (real or virtual) to specify whether to enable the in-band user connection testfunction or in-band administration port control function.

Input format set ip in-band mode P1

Parameter P1: In-band mode specification

real: Enables the in-band administration port control function

virtual: Enables the in-band user connection test function

Default value None


Notes If the “set in-band mode” command enables the in-band user connection test function,various in-band telnet/SNMP/NTP/syslog/ftp functions are disabled and the connectedin-band telnet session is disconnected. When the telnet session is disconnected,interactive confirmation is performed.

An attempt to download running-config including this command in in-band mode will failbecause the connected ftp session is also suspended.

Input example *Switch@1# set in-band mode virtual

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands





3-22



Ports

4 Ports

4-1



Ports

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set port admin

Setting of port blocking/unblocking

Blocking a port disables communication due to link down in a physical layer or unblocking it enablescommunication.

Input format set port admin P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Port (line) type { fe | gbe | gmx | atm | atmp | tdmp | atmp155 | tdmp155 }

fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port

gmx: GbE-MUX portatm: ATM155 port

atmp: ATMP port

tdmp: TDMP port

atmp155: ATMP155 port

tdmp155: TDMP155 port

P2: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)

P3: Port blocking/unblocking setting { enable | disable }

enable: Port unblocking

disable: Port blocking


Usage condition When port blocking is set, the “LINK DOWN” message may be displayed. When portunblocking is set, the “LINK UP” message may be displayed.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set port admin gbe 10/1 enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show port information Display of port setting and status information

4-2



Ports

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set port speed

Setting of port speed and MDI/MDI-X

Sets a port speed and electrical interface (MDI/MDI-X) switching. If auto-negotiation is set as the portspeed, you cannot set MDI/MDI-X because the interface is automatically switched.

Input formats - Setting auto

set port speed P1 P2 P3 (auto)

- When specifying the following port speed

- 10m-full

- 100m-full

- 1000m-fullset port speed P1 P2 P3 (10m-full | 100m-full | 1000m-full) [P4]

Parameters P1: Port (line) type { fe | gbe | gmx }

fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port

gmx: GbE-MUX port


P3: Port speed { 10m-full | 100m-full | 1000m-full | auto }




auto: Auto-negotiation When 10m-full, 100m-full, or 1000m-full is specified in P3.

P4: Interface { mdi | mdi-x }

mdi: MDI mode

mdi-x: MDI-X mode

Default values P3: auto <FE (100BASE-TX)>, <GbE>, <GbE-MUX>

100m-full <FE (100BASE-FX)>

Usage conditions - You can set only 100m-full in the FX (100BASE-FX) line module.

- We recommend you to set auto-negotiation in the GbE/GbE-MUX line module.

Notes If 100m-full is set in the FE (100BASE-TX) line module, SPEED-LED always goes onwithout reference to the port (line) status.

If the port (line) speed is fixed at 1000 Mbps in the GigabitEther electrical interface,1000 Mbps fixed connection is performed using auto-negotiation. For connectionwith an associated device that performs 1000 Mbps fixed connection withoutauto-negotiation, 1000m-full link down may become unstable. In 1000 Mbpsconnection, auto is always set for mdi/mdi-x because auto-negotiation is always used.

For the optical interface, auto-negotiation is not used in 1000m-full setting. However,if the associated device performs 1000 Mbps fixed connection using auto-negotiation,link down may become unstable.

For the optical interface, mdi/mdi-x setting is ignored.

4-3



Ports

Input example *Switch@1# set port speed fe 1/1 10m-full mdi

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand


4-4



Ports

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set port type

Setting of GbE port media

Specifies a port (1000BASE-T or 1000BASE-X) used in the GbE module. If auto-negotiation is specified,the connected port (line) is automatically selected.

Input format set port type P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Port (line) type { gbe }

gbe: GbE port


P3: Interface type { electric | optical | auto }Electric: 1000BASE-T

optical: 1000BASE-X


Default value P3: auto

Usage condition If ports (lines) are connected to both 1000BASE-T and 1000BASE-X whenauto-negotiation is specified, 1000BASE-X precedes 1000BASE-T.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set port type gbe 1/1 electric

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand


4-5



Ports

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set port flowcontrol

Setting of flow control

Sets whether to enable or disable the flow control function. When enabled, the flow control port controlstransmission stop and restart between itself and an associated device using a flow control frame (inactiveframe). When the receiving buffer becomes full, the port transmits the inactive frame to the associateddevice. When it receives the inactive frame, the port suppresses transmission.

Input format set port flowcontrol P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Port (line) type { fe | gbe }

fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port


P3: Flow control setting { enable | disable | auto }

enable: Enables flow control

disable: Disables flow control



Usage conditions When setting auto-negotiation in this command, you must specify auto-negotiation asthe port speed in advance.

If the flow control function of the associated device is disabled when auto-negotiationis specified in this command, flow control cannot be performed.

Note You cannot enter this command to the GbE-MUX port because this port does notsupport the flow control function.

Input example *Switch@1# set port flowcontrol fe 1/8 enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set port speed Setting of port speed and MDI/MDI-X


4-6



Ports

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set port protection-time

Setting of port link protection time

Sets the protection time that lasts from when a port link down occurs to when it is recovered.

Input format set port protection-time P1 P2 P3 P4


fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port

gmx: GbE-MUX port

P2: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)P3: Link status { link-up | link-down }

link-up: Link up

link-down: Link down

P4: Link protection time (0 to 7000 msec)

Default value P4: 3000 (P3=link-up)

500 (P3=link-down)

Usage condition You can set this protection time (0 to 7000 msec) in increments of 500 msec.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set port protection-time fe 1/2 link-up 0

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show port protection-time Display of port link protection time

4-7



Ports

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set port link-trap

Setting of SNMP link trap transmission

Sets whether to enable or disable SNMP link trap transmission. This setting corresponds toifLinkUpDownTrapEnable setting in the standard MIB ifMIB group.

Input format set port link-trap P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Port (line) type { fe | gbe | gmx | atm | atmp | tdmp | tdmp155 | atmp155 }

fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port

gmx: GbE-MUX portatm: ATM155 port

atmp: ATMP port

tdmp: TDMP port




P3: SNMP link trap transmission setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables SNMP link trap transmission

disable: Disables SNMP link trap transmission



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set port link-trap fe 1/1 enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show port trap Display of link trap transmission setting

4-8



Ports

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set port clock

Setting of ATM transmission path clock

Sets clock supply mode for the ATM transmission path.

Input format set port clock P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Port (line) type { atm | atmp155 }

atm: ATM155 port



P3: Clock setting { master | slave }master: Clock independent supply mode

slave: Clock external supply mode

Default values ATM155 port

P3: slave

ATMP155 port

P3: master

Usage condition You can set clock supply mode only for the ATM155/ATMP155 port.

Note None

Input example Switch@1# set port clock atm 3/1 slave

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands


set line type Setting of line module type

4-9



Ports

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set port frame

Setting of ATM transmission path framing mode

Sets framing mode for the ATM transmission path.

Input formats - Setting idle cell method

set port frame P1 P2 P3 (idle)

- Setting unassigned idle cell method

set port frame P1 P2 P3 (unassigned) P4

Parameters P1: Port (line) type { atm | atmp155 }

atm: ATM port



P3: Cell method setting { idle | unassigned }

idle: Idle cell method

unassigned: Unassigned idle cell method

When unassigned is specified in P3.

P4: Framing mode { sdh | sonet }

sdh: SDH physical frame layer

sonet: SONET physical frame layer

Default value P3: idle

Usage condition You can set framing mode only for the ATM155/ATMP155 port.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set port frame atm 3/1 idle

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



4-10



Ports

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show port information

Display of port setting and status information

Shows port setup information and the port (line) status.

Input format show port information [P1]

Parameter P1: Line module number or port (line) number

Line module number: 1 to 12 (single specification)

Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)

* When P1 is omitted, information on all line module numbers is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show port information 1

Port Information Table

======================

Port Link

Port Admin Speed Status MDI

------------------------------------------------------

1/1 enabled 10m-full 10m-full mdi

1/2 enabled 10m-full 10m-full mdi-x

1/3 enabled 100m-full 100m-full mdi

1/4 enabled 100m-full link-down mdi-x

1/5 enabled 10m-full link-down mdi

1/6 enabled 10m-full link-down mdi-x

1/7 enabled 100m-full link-down mdi

1/8 enabled auto link-down auto mdi/mdi-x

Flowcontrol Flowcontrol

Port Configuration Status

--------------------------------

1/1 disabled disabled







1/8 auto disabled

*Switch@1#

4-11



Ports

Output items Port: Port (line) number

Admin: Port block/unblock setting

enabled: Port unblocked

disabled: Port blocked

Port Speed: Port speed setting

10m-full: 10Mbps Full Duplex100m-full: 100Mbps Full Duplex



155s: Single-mode optical fiber

155m: Multi-mode optical fiber

Link Status: Port physical link status



1000m-full: 1000Mbps Full Duplexlink-down: Link down

155s: Single-mode optical fiber155m: Multi-mode optical fiber

1.5m-t1: T1 1.5Mbps

2.048m-e1: E1 2.048Mbps

MDI: Port MDI/MDI-X setting

mdi: mdi setting

mdi-x: mdi-x setting

auto mdi/mdi-x: Automatic recognition (when Speed is auto))

Flowcontrol Configuration: Flow control configuration

enabled: Flow control configuration enabled

disabled: Flow control configuration disabled

auto: Determined from alignment with the associated deviceFlowcontrol Status: Flow control status

enabled: Flow control enabled

disabled: Flow control disabled

(The following Type Status is shown only in the GbE module.)

Type Status: Current port (line) type

electric: Electrical module

optical: Optical module

---: Unsupported port (line) type

(The following Type Configuration is shown only in the GbE module.)

Type Configuration: Port (line) type setting

electric: Electrical port (line) selected

optical: Optical port (line) selected

auto: Automatic selection of port (line)

4-12



Ports

(The following SFP type, Tx Error, and Rx Error are shown only in theGbE/ATMP155/TDMP155 module.)

SFP type: Type of optical module currently being used

1000BASE-SX: 1000BASE-SX module

1000BASE-LX: 1000BASE-LX module

1000BASE-ZX: 1000BASE-ZX module

1000BASE-BX10-D: 1000BASE-BX10-D module

1000BASE-BX10-U: 1000BASE-BX10-U module

OS3-SR: OC3 MultiMode based ShortReach SONET SR compliant

OS3-SR1: OC3 SingleMode based ShortReach SONET SR-1 compliant

OS3-IR1: OC3 SingleMode IntermediateReach SONET IR-1 compliant

OS3-IR2: OC3 SingleMode IntermediateReach SONET IR-2 compliant

OS3-LR1: OC3 SingleMode LongReach SONET LR-1 compliant



Other: Unsupported optical module

Tx Error: Optical module output error detection status

normal: No output error occurred

fail: An output error occurred

Rx Error: Optical module input error detection status

normal: No input error occurred

fail: An input error occurred

SFP Vendor Information: Optical module vendor information

Vendor Name: Manufacturer name

Vendor OUI: OUI

Vendor Part Number: Manufacturing number

Vendor Revision: Version

Vendor Serial Number: Serial number

(The following Clock, Framing, and Cell Padding are shown only in the ATM155/ATMP155 line module.)

Clock: Clock control

master: Independent mode setting

slave: External supply mode setting

Framing: Physical frame layer setting

sdh: SDH

sonet: SONET

Cell Padding: Cell method

idle: Idle cell method

unassigned: Unassigned idle cell method

(The following F1-F3 Status Tables are shown only in the ATM155/ATMP155 linemodule.)

F1 Status Table: F1 alarm status

LOS: Loss of signal

LOF: Loss of frame alignment


MS-AIS: Receiving multiplex section failure

MS-SD: Multiplex section error rate degradation

4-13



Ports

MS-RDI: Sending multiplex section failure

MS-ERR: Receiving multiplex section error

MS-REI: Sending multiplex section error


LOP: AU pointer error

P-AIS: Receiving transmission path errorLCD: Out-of-cell delineation

detect: Alarm detected

---: Alarm not detected

(The following Framing, Frame Type, and Code/Alarm Status are shown only in the ATMP/TDMP line module.)

Framing: Frame format setting

crc4: CRC4 multiframe

crc4-no-cas: CRC4 multiframe-no-CAS

non-crc4: non-CRC4 (G.704 basic frame)

unframed: unframed

esf: extended superframe

sf: superframe

sf-jpn: superframe-japanese

Frame Type: Frame type setting

t1: T1 port (line)

e1: E1 port (line)

Code: LineCode setting

hdb3: HDB3

ami: AMI

b8zs: B8ZS

Alarm Status: Alarm status

normal: No alarm

los: LOS detection

ais: AIS detection

lof: LOF detection

rai: RAI detection

lcd: LCD detection

(The following Framing, SECTION(RS) Status Table, and LINE(MS) Status Table areonly shown in the TDMP155 line module.)

Framing: Physical frame layer setting

sdh: SDH

sonet: SONET

SECTION(RS) Status Table: RS alarm status

LOS: Foss of frame detection

LOF: Loss of frame alignment continuous detection

OOF: Loss of frame alignment detection

RS-TIM: Detection of mismatch in path trace character string

RS-BIP: BIP error (B1) detected

LINE(MS) Status Table: MS alarm status

MS-AIS: Receiving multiplex section failure detected

MS-EXC: B2 error rate 10-3 or higher detection

MS-DEG: B2 error rate 10-6 or higher detection

4-14



Ports

MS-RDI: Sending multiplex section failure detection

MS-REI: Sending multiplex section error detection

MS-BIP: BIP error (B2) detection

Related

commands

set port admin Setting of port blocking/unblocking

set port speed Setting of port speed and MDI/MDI-Xset port type Setting of GbE port media

set port flowcontrol Setting of flow control

set port clock Setting of ATM transmission path clock

set port frame Setting of ATM transmission path framing mode

4-15



Ports

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show port trap

Display of link trap transmission setting

Shows whether SNMP link trap transmission setting is enabled or disabled.

Input format show port trap [P1]

Parameter P1: Line module number (1 to 12) (single specification)

* When P1 is omitted, the settings of all line module numbers are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# show port trap 1

Port Trap Table

===============

Port Link Trap

-------------------------

1/1 enabled

1/2 disabled

1/3 enabled1/4 enabled

1/5 enabled

1/6 enabled

1/7 enabled

1/8 enabled

*Switch@1# show port trap 10

Port Trap Table

===============

Port Link Trap

-------------------------10/1 enabled

10/2 enabled

10/3 enabled

10/4 enabled

10/5 enabled

10/6 enabled

10/7 enabled

10/8 enabled

*Switch@1#

4-16



Ports


Link Trap: Port trap transmission setting

Enabled: Port trap transmission setting enabled

Disabled: Port trap transmission setting disabled

Relatedcommand

set port link-trap Setting of SNMP link trap transmission

4-17



Ports

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show port protection-time

Display of port link protection time

Shows the protection time that lasts from when a port link down occurs to when it is recovered.

Input format show port protection-time [P1]


* When P1 is omitted, the protection time for all line module numbers is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show port protection-time 1

Link Protection Time Table

==========================

Port Link Up(msec) Link Down(msec)

--------------------------------------------------------

1/1 3000 500

1/2 0 500

1/3 3000 5001/4 3000 500

1/5 3000 0

1/6 3000 500

1/7 3000 500

1/8 3000 500

*Switch@1#


Link Up: Link up protection time (msec)

Link Down: Link down occurrence protection time (msec)

Relatedcommand

set port protection-time Setting of port link protection time

4-18



Ports

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set port cable-length

Setting of port cable length

Sets port cable length.

- Specifying length (short)

set port cable-length P1 P2 (short) [P3]

- Specifying length (long)

set port cable-length P1 P2 (long) [P3] [P4]

Input format

- Specifying length (default)

set port cable-length P1 P2 (initial)

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)

P2: Length type { short | long | initial }

short: short

long: long

initial: default

When short is specified in P2.

P3: Cable length { 133ft | 266ft | 399ft | 533ft | 655ft }

133ft: 0 to 133 feet

266ft: 134 to 266 feet

399ft: 267 to 399 feet

533ft: 400 to 533 feet655ft: 534 to 655 feet

* When P3 is omitted, 133ft is assumed.

When long is specified in P2.

P3: Transmission attenuator { 0db | 7.5db | 15db | 22.5db }

0db: 0 db

7.5db: 7.5 db

15db: 15 db

22.5db: 22.5 db

* When P3 is omitted, 0db is assumed.

P4: gain value { gain21db | gain31db }

gain21db: gain 21 dbgain31db: gain 31 db

* When P4 is omitted, gain 31db is assumed.

Default value If short is specified in P2, P3: 133ft.

If long is specified in P2, P3: 0db, P4: gain 31db.

If initial is specified in P2, the same value as the default when length (short) is specified.

Usage condition The frame type of a specified port (line) needs to be set to t1.

Note None

4-19



Ports

Input example *Switch@1# set port cable-length 1/3 short

*Switch@1# set port cable-length 1/1-2,1/4-8 short 399ft

*Switch@1# set port cable-length 3/1 long 7.5db

*Switch@1# set port cable-length 3/2 long gain21db

*Switch@1# set port cable-length 3/2-4,3/5-8 long 7.5db gain31db

*Switch@1# set port cable-length 12/1 initial

Output item

Relatedcommands

set line mode tdmp Setting of TDMP line mode

set line mode atmp Setting of ATMP line mode

show port cable-length Display of port cable length settings

4-20



Ports

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show port cable-length

Display of port cable length settings

Shows port cable length settings.

Input format show port cable-length [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)

* When P1 is omitted, settings of all ports (lines) for which the frame type is set to T1are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show port cable-length

Cable Length Information Table

==============================

Cable Receive

Port Kind Length Tx ATT Sensitivity

----------------------------------------

3/1 short 133ft --- ---

3/2 short 266ft --- ---

3/3 short 399ft --- ---

3/4 short 533ft --- ---

3/5 short 655ft --- ---

3/6 short 133ft --- ---

3/7 short 133ft --- ---

3/8 short 133ft --- ---

4/1 long --- 0db gain21db


4/3 long --- 7.5db gain21db






*Switch@1#


Kind: Length type

Cable Length: Cable length

Tx ATT: Transmission attenuator

Receive Sensitivity: Gain value

4-21



Ports

Relatedcommands



set port cable-length Setting of port cable length

4-22



Ports

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set port logical-interface

Setting of TDMP155 port logical interface

Sets a TDMP155 port logical interface.

- Setting frame format

set port logical-interface P1 P2 (sdh | sonet) P3 [P4]

Input formats

- Clearing frame format setting

set port logical-interface P1 P2 (none)

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (1/1 to 12/1) (single specification)

P2: Frame type { sdh | sonet | none }

sdh: Specification for the SDH mode

sonnet: Specification for the SONET mode

none: No frame format setting

When sdh or sonet is specified in P2

P3: Logical port number

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

When sdh is specified in P2

P4: Frame format { crc4 | crc4nocas | non-crc4 | unframed }


crc4nocas: CRC4 multiframe-no-CAS


unframed: unframed

* When P4 is omitted, crc4 is assumed.

When sonet is specified in P2

P4: Frame format { esf | sf | unframed }


sf: superframe

unframed: unframed

* When P4 is omitted, esf is assumed.

Default values P4: crc4 (for SDH)

esf (for SONET)

4-23



Ports

Usageconditions

The TDMP155 line mode must have been set.

If either of the following has already been set for the logical port number specified in P3,an error occurs.

set tdm group

set tdmop group

If the TDM mode is set for the line mode in the TDMP155 line mode setting, unframedcannot be specified in P4.

If the TDM mode is set for the line mode in the TDMP155 line mode setting, and sonet isspecified in P2 and unframed is specified in P4, the SAToP mode must be set in theTDMoP operation mode setting.

If the SDH mode is set for the frame type in the TDMP155 line mode setting andCESoPSN is set for the TDMoP operation mode setting, unframed cannot be specifiedin P4.

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set port logical-interface 1/1 sdh 1/1/1 crc4nocas

*Switch@1# set port logical-interface 1/1 sdh 1/1/2*Switch@1# set port logical-interface 2/1 sonet 1/1/1 sf

*Switch@1# set port logical-interface 2/1 sonet 1/1/4

Output item

Relatedcommands

set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line mode

set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode

set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group

show port logical-interface Display of TDMP155 port logical interface setting

4-24



Ports

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

show port logical-interface

Display of TDMP155 port logical interface setting

Shows the TDMP155 port logical interface setting.

Input format show port logical-interface [P1 [P2]]



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

* When P2 is omitted, the TDMP155 port logical interface setting on all frame formatsset for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.

* When all parameters are omitted, the TDMP155 port logical interface setting on allports (lines) in which the TDMP155 line module is installed is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show port logical-interface

Logical Interface Table

=======================

Logical Frame

Port Port Format

------------------------

1/1 1/1/1 crc4

1/1 1/1/2 crc4nocas

1/1 1/1/3 unframed

1/1 1/2/1 non-crc4

: : :

1/1 3/7/3 crc4

*Switch@1#


Logical Port: Logical port number

Frame Format: Frame format

Relatedcommands


set port logical-interface Setting of TDMP155 port logical interface

4-25



Ports

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set port impedance

Setting of impedance

Sets impedance.

Input format set port impedance P1 [P2]


P2: Impedance setting { e1-75 | e1-120 }

e1-75: 75Ω

e1-120: 120Ω

* When P2 is omitted, e1-120 is assumed.

Default value P2: e1-120

Usage condition The frame type of the specified port (line) must be set to the E1 mode.

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set port impedance 1/1 e1-75

*Switch@1# set port impedance 12/2-5 e1-75

*Switch@1# set port impedance 5/1-8 e1-120

*Switch@1# set port impedance 6/1-5,7,8 e1-120

Output item

Relatedcommands



show port impedance Display of impedance setting

4-26



Ports

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

show port impedance

Display of impedance setting

Shows the impedance setting.

Input format show port impedance [P1]


* When P1 is omitted, the impedance setting of all ports (lines) in which the frame typeis set to the E1 mode is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show port impedance

Port Impedance Information Table

================================

Port Impedance(ohm)

--------------------

1/1 e1-120

1/2 e1-1201/3 e1-75

1/4 e1-120

1/5 e1-75

1/6 e1-75

1/7 e1-120

1/8 e1-75

*Switch@1#


Impedance(ohm): Impedance value

Relatedcommands



set port impedance Setting of impedance

4-27



Ports

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set port path-trace

Setting of SDH path trace for TDMP155

Sets the character string to be transmitted to or to be received (expected value) from J0/J1/J2 in the frameheader of TDMP155.

Input formats - Setting the default value (specifying all)

set port path-trace P1 P2 (all) P4 (initial)

- Setting the default value (specifying j0)

set port path-trace P1 P2 (j0) P4 (initial)


set port path-trace P1 P2 (j1) P3 P4 (initial)


set port path-trace P1 P2 (j2) P3 P4 (initial)

- Setting the character string to be transmitted (specifying binary mode)(specifying all)

set port path-trace P1 P2 (all) P4 (transmit) [P5] [P6] P7 (binary-mode) P8

- Setting the character string to be transmitted (specifying ASCII mode)(specifying all)

set port path-trace P1 P2 (all) P4 (transmit) [P5] [P6] P7 (ascii-mode) P8

- Setting the character string to be transmitted (specifying binary mode)(specifying j0)

set port path-trace P1 P2 (j0) P4 (transmit) [P5] [P6] P7 (binary-mode) P8

- Setting the character string to be transmitted (specifying ASCII mode)(specifying j0)

set port path-trace P1 P2 (j0) P4 (transmit) [P5] [P6] P7 (ascii-mode) P8


set port path-trace P1 P2 (j1) P3 P4 (transmit) [P5] [P6] P7 (binary-mode) P8


set port path-trace P1 P2 (j1) P3 P4 (transmit) [P5] [P6] P7 (ascii-mode) P8


set port path-trace P1 P2 (j2) P3 P4 (transmit) [P5] [P6] P7 (binary-mode) P8


set port path-trace P1 P2 (j2) P3 P4 (transmit) [P5] [P6] P7 (ascii-mode) P8

- Setting the character string to be received (expected value) (specifying binarymode) (specifying all)

set port path-trace P1 P2 (all) P4 (expected) [P5] [P6] P7 (binary-mode) P8

- Setting the character string to be received (expected value) (specifying ASCIImode) (specifying all)

set port path-trace P1 P2 (all) P4 (expected) [P5] [P6] P7 (ascii-mode) P8

4-28



Ports

- Setting the character string to be received (expected value) (specifying binarymode) (specifying j0)

set port path-trace P1 P2 (j0) P4 (expected) [P5] [P6] P7 (binary-mode) P8

- Setting the character string to be received (expected value) (specifying ASCIImode) (specifying j0)

set port path-trace P1 P2 (j0) P4 (expected) [P5] [P6] P7 (ascii-mode) P8- Setting the character string to be received (expected value) (specifying binarymode) (specifying j1)

set port path-trace P1 P2 (j1) P3 P4 (expected) [P5] [P6] P7 (binary-mode) P8

- Setting the character string to be received (expected value) (specifying ASCIImode) (specifying j1)

set port path-trace P1 P2 (j1) P3 P4 (expected) [P5] [P6] P7 (ascii-mode) P8

- Setting the character string to be received (expected value) (specifying binarymode) (specifying j2)

set port path-trace P1 P2 (j2) P3 P4 (expected) [P5] [P6] P7 (binary-mode) P8

- Setting the character string to be received (expected value) (specifying ASCII

mode) (specifying j2)set port path-trace P1 P2 (j2) P3 P4 (expected) [P5] [P6] P7 (ascii-mode) P8


P2: Path identifier { all | j0 | j1 | j2 }

all: All path traces

j0: J0 path trace

j1: J1 path trace

j2: J2 path trace

When j1 is specified in P2

P3: Higher path number (single specification)

SDH: 1

SONET: 1-3



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

P4: Setting type { initial | transmit | expected }

initial: Setting the default value

transmit: Setting the character string to be transmitted

expected: Setting the character string to be received (expected value)

When transmit or expected is specified in P4

P5: CRC check added/not added { crc-on | crc-off }crc-on: CRC added

crc-off: CRC not added

* When P5 is omitted, crc-on is assumed.

P6: Character string length length { 1 | 16 | 64 }

length 1: 1 byte

length 16: 16 bytes

length 64: 64 bytes


* When crc-on is specified in P5, 1 byte cannot be specified for the characterstring length.

* When crc-off is specified in P5, 16 bytes cannot be specified for thecharacter string length.

4-29



Ports

* When all or j2 is specified in P2, 64 bytes cannot be specified for thecharacter string length.

P7: Character type { binary-mode | ascii-mode }

binary-mode: Binary mode

ascii-mode: ASCII mode

When binary-mode is specified in P7

P8: Message (2 to 124 digits)

* Odd digits cannot be entered.

* Characters other than “0” to “9”, “a” to “f”, and “A” to 'F' cannot beentered.

* Characters other than 0x00 to 0x7f when two characters are convertedinto a hexadecimal number cannot be entered.

When ascii-mode is specified in P7

P8: Message (1 to 62 characters)

* Control characters, double quotations ("), and ? cannot be entered.

* Characters with space must be enclosed in double quotations.

Default values P5: crc-on

P6: 16

Usage condition The TDMP155 line mode must have been set.

Notes When initial is specified for the setting type in P4, the following are set for both thecharacter string to be transmitted and the character string to be received (expectedvalue).

- CRC check added/not added: crc-on

- Character string length: 16 bytes- Character type: binary-mode

- Message: All “0”s

Input examples Switch@1# set port path-trace 1/1 all expected crc-on length 16 ascii-mode"NEC cx2600 v75"

*Switch@1# set port path-trace 12/1 j2 3/7/4 transmit ascii-modeNECcx2600220v75

*Switch@1#

Output items

Relatedcommands

show port path-trace Display of SDH path trace setting for TDMP155

show stm status Display of port (line) alarm status for TDMP155 port


4-30



Ports

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show port path-trace

Display of SDH path trace setting for TDMP155

Shows the settings of the character string to be transmitted to and to be received (expected value) from andthe character string received from J0/J1/J2 in the frame header of the TDMP155 port.

Input formats - Specifying j0

show port path-trace P1 P2 (j0)

- Specifying j1

show port path-trace P1 P2 (j1) P3

- Specifying j2

show port path-trace P1 P2 (j2) P3


P2: Path identifier { j0 | j1 | j2 }

j0: J0 path trace

j1: J1 path trace

j2: J2 path trace


P3: Higher path number (single specification)

SDH: 1

SONET: 1-3



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

Default value None

Usage condition The TDMP155 line mode must have been set.

Note None

Input examples Switch@1# show port path-trace 12/1 j0STM-1 Path Trace Config Table

=============================

Port : 12/1

J0 Transmit Message

===================

mode : binary

length : 16 (byte)

crc : on

message : 4e 45 43 20 43 58 32 36 30 30 20 20 20 20 20

J0 Expected Message===================

4-31



Ports

mode : ascii

length : 16 (byte)

crc : on

message : "NEC CX2600 "

J0 Received Message

===================binary : 4e 45 43 20 43 58 32 36 30 30 20 20 20 20 20

ascii : "NEC CX2600 "

Switch@1#

Switch@1# show port path-trace 12/1 j1 3

STM-1 Path Trace Config Table

=============================

Port : 12/1

STS-1 : 3

J1 Transmit Message

===================

mode : binary

length : 64 (byte)

crc : off

message : 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 20

20 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 40 40

40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 01 02

J1 Expected Message

===================mode : binary

length : 64 (byte)

crc : off

message : 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 20

20 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 40 40

40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 01 02

J1 Received Message

===================

binary : 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 20

20 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 40 40

40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 01 02

ascii : ".......... 0000000000@@@@@@@@@@PPPPPPPPPP''''''''''.."

Switch@1#

Switch@1# show port path-trace 12/1 j2 3/7/4

STM-1 Path Trace Config Table

=============================

Port : 12/1

Logical Port : 3/7/4

J2 Transmit Message

4-32



Ports

===================

mode : ascii

length : 16 (byte)

crc : on

message : "abcdefghijklmno"

J2 Expected Message===================

mode : ascii

length : 16 (byte)

crc : on

message : "abcdefghijklmno"

J2 Received Message

===================

binary : 4e 45 43 20 43 58 32 36 30 30 20 20 20 20 20

ascii : "NEC CX2600 "

Switch@1#

Output items STM-1 Path Trace Config Table

Port: Port number (1/1-12/1)

STS-1: SONET higher path number (1-3)

TUG-3: SDH higher path number (1)


SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

J0 Transmit Message

mode: Type of characters to be transmittedbinary: Binary mode

ascii: ASCII mode

length: Length of characters to be transmitted

1 (byte): 1 byte

16 (byte): 16 bytes

64 (byte): 64 bytes

crc: CRC added/not added for characters to be transmitted

on: CRC added

off: CRC not added

message: Character string to be transmitted

J0 Expected Message

mode: Type of characters to be received (expected value)

binary: Binary mode

ascii: ASCII mode

length: Length of characters to be received (expected value)

1 (byte): 1 byte

16 (byte): 16 bytes

64 (byte): 64 bytes

crc: CRC added/not added for characters to be received (expected value)

on: CRC added

off: CRC not addedmessage: Character string to be received (expected value)

4-33



Ports

J0 Received Message

binary: Received character string (binary display)

ascii: Received character string (ASCII display)

J1 Transmit Message

mode: Type of characters to be transmitted

binary: Binary mode

ascii: ASCII mode

length: Length of characters to be transmitted

1 (byte): 1 byte

16 (byte): 16 bytes

64 (byte): 64 bytes


on: CRC added

off: CRC not added


J1 Expected Message


binary: Binary mode

ascii: ASCII mode

length: Length of characters to be received (expected value)

1 (byte): 1 byte

16 (byte): 16 bytes

64 (byte): 64 bytes


on: CRC addedoff: CRC not added

message: Character string to be received (expected value)

J1 Received Message



J2 Transmit Message

mode: Type of characters to be transmitted

binary: Binary mode

ascii: ASCII modelength: Length of characters to be transmitted

1 (byte):1 byte

16 (byte): 16 bytes


on: CRC added

off: CRC not added


4-34



Ports

J2 Expected Message


binary: Binary mode

ascii: ASCII mode

length: Length of characters to be received (expected value)1 (byte): 1 byte

16 (byte): 16 bytes


on: CRC added

off: CRC not added

message: Character string to be received (expected value)

J2 Received Message



Relatedcommands

set port path-trace Setting of SDH path trace for TDMP155


4-35



Ports

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show stm status

Display of port (line) alarm status for TDMP155 port

Shows the port (line) alarm detection status for a TDMP155 port.

Input format show stm status [P1 [P2]]



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

* When P2 is omitted, the port (line) alarm detection status for all logical ports set forthe port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.

* When all parameters are omitted, the port (line) alarm detection status for all ports(lines) to which the TDMP155 line module is installed is shown.

Default value None

Usage condition The TDMP155 line mode must be set.

Note None

Input example Switch@1# show stm status 12/1

STM Path Alarm Status Table

===========================

Alarm Status

============

Port HO-PATH LO-PATH PDH

------------------------------

12/1 --- --- ---

HO-PATH Status

==============

Port TUG-3 AU-AIS AU-LOP

---------------------------

12/1 1 --- ---

…

Port TUG-3 HP-TIM HP-UNEQ HP-PLM HP-EXC HP-DEG HP-REI HP-RDIHP-BIP

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

12/1 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

…

LO-PATH Status

==============

Logical

Port Port TU-AIS TU-LOP TU-LOM-------------------------------------

4-36



Ports

12/1 1/1/1 --- --- ---

…

Logical

Port Port LP-TIM LP-UNEQ LP-PLM LP-EXC LP-DEG LP-REI LP-RDILP-BIP

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

12/1 1/1/1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---…

PDH Status

==========

Logical

Port Port AIS LOF RAI SEF FAS CRC

-------------------------------------------------------------

12/1 1/1/1 --- --- --- --- --- ---

…

Output items Alarm Status: Outline display of alarm status

Port: Port number (1/1-12/1)HO-PATH: Higher path alarm detection status

LO-PATH: Lower path alarm detection status

PDH: PDH alarm detection status

detect: Detection status

---: No detection status

HO-PATH Status: Detailed display of higher path alarms


TUG-3/STS-1: TUG-3/STS-1 number AU-AIS: AU-AIS alarm detection status

AU-LOP: AU-LOP alarm detection status

HP-TIM: HP-TIM alarm detection status

HP-UNEQ: HP-UNEQ alarm detection status

HP-PLM: HP-PLM alarm detection status

HP-EXC: HP-EXC alarm detection status

HP-DEG: HP-DEG alarm detection status

HP-REI: HP-REI alarm detection status

HP-RDI: HP-RDI alarm detection status

HP-BIP: HP-BIP alarm detection status



LO-PATH Status: Detailed display of lower path alarms



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

TU-AIS: TU-AIS alarm detection status

TU-LOP: TU-LOP alarm detection statusTU-LOM: TU-LOM alarm detection status

4-37



Ports

LP-TIM: LP-TIM alarm detection status

LP-UNEQ: LP-UNEQ alarm detection status

LP-PLM: LP-PLM alarm detection status

LP-EXC: LP-EXC alarm detection status

LP-DEG: LP-DEG alarm detection status

LP-REI: LP-REI alarm detection statusLP-RD: LP-RDI alarm detection status

LP-BIP: LP-BIP alarm detection status



PDH Status: Detailed display of PDH alarms

Port: Port number


SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

AIS: AIS alarm detection status

LOF: LOF alarm detection status

RAI: RAI alarm detection status

SEF: SEF alarm detection status

FAS: FAS alarm detection status

CRC: CRC alarm detection status



Relatedcommand


4-38



VLAN

5 VLAN

5-1



VLAN

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set vlan tagbase

Setting of tagbase VLAN

Sets a tagbase VLAN.

Input format set vlan tagbase P1 [P2]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (single specification)


VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.)


* When P2 is omitted, no VLAN member is assumed.

Default value None

Usage conditions If VLAN tag swapping is set in a port, you cannot set a VLAN ID that is already beingused as the swapping destination VLAN ID.

If command mode is safety mode, the following conditions are applied:

1) When setting a tagbase VLAN in a port (line) where a portbase VLAN is set, youcannot set a VLAN ID. You can set a VLAN ID only when no VLAN exists.

2) When setting a tagbase VLAN in the VLAN tag swapping setting port (line), youcannot set a VLAN ID that is duplicated with the swapping source VLAN ID.

The following conditions are applied when a tagbase VLAN is set in the GbE-MUX linemodule.

1) You can register up to 32 VLANs per port (line).

2) In the same line module, you cannot set a VLAN ID that is duplicated with any ofthe following VLAN IDs in several ports (lines):

- VLAN ID for which a tagbase VLAN is set

- Swapping source VLAN ID for which VLAN tag swapping is set

Note If the “set vlan tagbase” command without a VLAN ID is entered to the portbase VLANsetting port (line) when command mode is safety mode, execution is confirmed.

Input example *Switch@1# set vlan tagbase 12/1 4094

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

clear vlan tagbase Clearing of tag base VLAN

show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port (line)

show vlan table vid Display of VLAN table per VLAN

5-2



VLAN

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear vlan tagbase

Clearing of tagbase VLAN

Clears a tagbase VLAN.

Input format clear vlan tagbase P1 [P2]



VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification)


* When P2 is omitted, all VLANs are cleared.

Default value None


Note If P2 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.

Input example *Switch@1# clear vlan tagbase 12/1

Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase VLAN



5-3



VLAN

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set vlan portbase

Setting of portbase VLAN

Sets a portbase VLAN.

Input format set vlan portbase P1 P2 [P3]





P3: Frame type { admit-all | untag }admit-all: All frames are transmissive

untag: Frames without tags and tags whose Ethernet types are not 0x8100 aretransmssive

* When P3 is omitted, admit-all is assumed.

Default value P3: admit-all

Usage conditions You cannot set untag as the frame type for the ports (lines) where an Ethernet typeother than 0x8100 is set.

If command mode is safety mode, you can set a portbase VLAN only in ports (lines)

where tagbase VLAN without VLAN ID is set.

Note To clear a portbase VLAN, set a tagbase VLAN (no VLAN).

Input example *Switch@1# set vlan portbase 1/1 1 admit-all

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



5-4



VLAN

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show vlan table port

Display of VLAN table per port (line)

Shows a VLAN table per port (line).

Input format show vlan table port [P1]


* When P1 is omitted, all ports (lines) are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show vlan table port

VLAN Table

==========

Port Base VID Name Frame-Type

--------------------------------------------------------------

1/1 port 1 VLAN0001 admit-all


1/3 port 1 VLAN0001 admit-all1/4 port 1 VLAN0001 admit-all





4/1 port 2 untag

12/1 tag 4094 VLAN4094 ---

*Switch@1#


Base: VLAN type

port: Portbase VLAN

tag: Tagbase VLAN

swap: VLAN tag swapping

VID: VLAN ID

Name: VLAN name

Frametype: Frame type

admit-all: All frames are transmissive

untag: Untagged frames or frames whose Ethernet types are not 0x8100 aretransmissive

5-5



VLAN

Relatedcommands


clear vlan tagbase Clearing of tagbase VLAN

set vlan portbase Setting of portbase VLAN

set vlan swap Setting of VLAN tag swapping

clear vlan swap Clearing of VLAN tag swapping

5-6



VLAN

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show vlan table vid

Display of VLAN table per VLAN

Shows a VLAN table per VLAN.

Input format show vlan table vid [P1]

Parameter P1: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID|VLAN name }



* When P1 is omitted, all VLANs are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show vlan table vid 4094

VLAN Table

==========

VID : 4094 Name : VLAN4094

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Portbase Ports : 1/1-8,12/1

Tagbase Ports :

*Switch@1#

Output items VID: VLAN ID

Name: VLAN name

Portbase Ports: Portbase VLAN ports (lines)

Tagbase Ports: Tagbase VLAN ports (lines)

Related

commands




set vlan name Setting of VLAN name

clear vlan name Clearing of VLAN name

5-7



VLAN

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set vlan member

Setting of portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc

Sets the portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc.

-Setting portbase VLAN en bloc

set vlan member P1 P2

-Setting tagbase VLAN en bloc

set vlan member P1 P3

Input format

-Setting portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc

set vlan member P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }



P2: Portbase VLAN port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)

portbase port (line) number

P3: Tagbase VLAN port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)

tagbase port (line) number

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot set the same port (line) number in the portbase VLAN (port) number andtagbase VLAN port (line) number.

You cannot set a port (line) where the total number of tagbase VLANs and VLAN tagswapping settings exceeds 100 as a portbase VLAN port (line).

The usage conditions of the portbase VLAN setting command are applied to theportbase VLAN in this command. The usage conditions of the tagbase VLAN settingcommand are applied to the tagbase VLAN in this command.

If the portbase VLAN is set, admit-all (default value) is set as the frame type.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set vlan member 100 portbase 1/1-8,3/1,5/1 tagbase 4/1-4,6/1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands




5-8



VLAN

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set vlan swap

Setting of VLAN tag swapping

Sets VLAN tag swapping.

Input format set vlan swap P1 P2 P3





P3: Swapping destination VLAN IDVLAN ID: 0 to 4094 (single specification)

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot reassign the VLAN ID that is already being used as the swappingdestination VLAN ID in the port to another VLAN as the swapping destination VLAN ID.

If command mode is safety mode, the following conditions are applied:

1) You cannot set VLAN tag swapping for the portbase VLAN setting port (line).

2) When setting VLAN tag swapping in the tagbase VLAN setting port (line), youcannot set a swapping source VLAN ID that is duplicated with the VLAN ID.

3) When setting VLAN tag swapping in the VLAN tag swapping setting port (line), youcannot overwrite the VLAN ID that is already being used as the swapping sourceVLAN ID.

The following conditions are applied when VLAN tag swapping is set in the GbE-MUXline module.

1) You can register up to 32 VLANs per port (line).

2) In the same line module, you cannot set a VLAN ID that is duplicated with any ofthe following VLAN IDs in several ports (lines):

- VLAN ID for which a tagbase VLAN is set

- Swapping source VLAN ID for which VLAN tag swapping is set

3) In the same port (line), you cannot set the swapping destination VLAN ID that isthe same as the swapping destination VLAN ID for which VLAN tag swapping.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set vlan swap 1/1 1 4094

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands


show vlan swap Display of VLAN tag swapping information


5-9



VLAN

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show vlan swap

Display of VLAN tag swapping information

Shows VLAN tag swapping information.

Input format show vlan swap [P1 [P2]


* When P1 is omitted, all ports (lines) are shown.



VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters* When P2 is omitted, all VLAN names are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show vlan swap 1/1 VLAN100

VLAN Swap Table

===============

Port : 1/1 Ether-Type : 0x0600

VID Name (Interior) VID (Exterior)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

100 VLAN100 200

*Switch@1#


Ethertype: Ethernet type value

VID: VLAN ID

Name (Interior): VLAN name

VID (Exterior): Swapping destination VLAN ID

Relatedcommands



5-10



VLAN

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear vlan swap

Clearing of VLAN tag swapping

Clears VLAN tag swapping.

Input format clear vlan swap P1 [P2]





* When P2 is omitted, all VLAN names are cleared.

Default value None



Input example *Switch@1# clear vlan swap 1/1


*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



show vlan swap Display of VLAN tag swapping information

5-11



VLAN

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show vlan summary

Display of number of VLAN entries

Shows the number of VLAN entries.

Input format show vlan summary

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show vlan summary

VLAN Summary Information

========================

Total VLAN Entry : 2

*Switch@1#

Output item Total VLAN Entry: Number of VLAN entries

Relatedcommands






5-12



VLAN

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set vlan ethertype

Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition

Sets the Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition.

Input format set vlan ethertype P1 P2

Parameters P1: Port (line) number or line module number


Line module number: 1 to 12 (Multiple values can be specified.)

P2: Ethernet type value (0x0600 to 0xffff)

Default value P2: 0x8100

Usage conditions If untag is specified as the frame type in the port (line) where a portbase is set, youcannot set an Ethernet type value other than 0x8100 in the port (line).

If a portbase is specified in the PVC-VLAN mode setting command when the ATM linemodule is set, you cannot set an Ethernet type value other than 0x8100.

For GbE-MUX, you can specify only a line module number.

For other line module types, you can specify only a port (line) number.

Note If the Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition is set in GbE-MUX with line module

number specification, the Ethernet type values of all ports (lines) belonging to the linemodule are set to the same value.

Input example *Switch@1# set vlan ethertype 1/1 0x0600

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



show vlan swap Display of VLAN tag swapping informationshow vlan ethertype Display of Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition

5-13



VLAN

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show vlan ethertype

Display of Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition

Shows Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition.

Input format show vlan ethertype [P1]


* When P1 is omitted, all port (line) numbers are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show vlan ethertype

VLAN Ether-Type Table

=====================

Port Ether-Type

-----------------------------

1/1 0x600

1/2 0x8100

1/3 0x81001/4 0x8100

1/5 0x8100

1/6 0x8100

1/7 0x8100

1/8 0x8100

12/1 0xffff

*Switch@1#


Ethertype: Ethernet type value

Relatedcommand

set vlan ethertype Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition

5-14



VLAN

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set vlan name

Setting of VLAN name

Sets a VLAN name in a VLAN ID.

Input format set vlan name P1 P2

Parameters P1: VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification)

P2: VLAN name (1 to 32 characters)

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set vlan name 4094 VLAN4094

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port (line)show vlan table vid Display of VLAN table per VLAN

show vlan summary Display of number of VLAN entries


5-15



VLAN

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear vlan name

Clearing of VLAN name

Clears a VLAN name.

Input format clear vlan name P1




Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear vlan name 4094

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



show vlan summary Display of number of VLAN entries


5-16



QoS

6 QoS

6-1



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set qos maximum-mode

Setting of maximum bandwidth limit operation mode

Sets maximum bandwidth limit operation mode.

Input format set qos maximum-mode P1 P2

Parameters P1: Line module number (1 to 12) (Multiple values can be specified.)

P2: Maximum bandwidth limit operation mode { in | out | both }

in: Maximum bandwidth limit operation mode for input

out: Maximum bandwidth limit operation mode for output

both: Maximum bandwidth limit operation mode for both input and output

Default value P2: both

Usage conditions If the maximum bandwidth limit function is set, you cannot change maximum bandwidthlimit operation mode.

If the port type is ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155, an error occurswhen this command is entered.

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos maximum-mode 1-3 in*Switch@1# set qos maximum-mode 2,4,5 out

*Switch@1# set qos maximum-mode 6 both

*Switch@1#

Output item

6-2



QoS

Relatedcommands

show qos maximum-mode Display of maximum bandwidth limit operationmode

set qos in-rate maximum Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function perinput VLAN

set qos in-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function per input VLAN

set qos in-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function per input VLAN

clear qos in-rate maximum Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function perinput VLAN

show qos in-rate maximum Display of maximum bandwidth limit function perinput VLAN

set qos out-rate maximum Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function peroutput VLAN

set qos out-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function per outputVLAN

set qos out-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function per output VLAN

show qos out-rate maximum Display of maximum bandwidth limit function peroutput VLAN

clear qos out-rate maximum Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function peroutput VLAN

6-3



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show qos maximum-mode

Display of maximum bandwidth limit operation mode

Shows maximum bandwidth limit operation mode.

Input format show qos maximum-mode

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show qos maximum-mode

Line Maximum Mode Table

=======================

Slot Mode

----------

4 in

6 out

7 both

*Switch@1#

Output items Slot: Line module number

Mode: Maximum bandwidth limit operation mode

in: Maximum bandwidth limit operation mode for input

out: Maximum bandwidth limit operation mode for output

both: Maximum bandwidth limit operation mode for both input and output

6-4



QoS

Relatedcommands

set qos maximum-mode Setting of maximum bandwidth limit operationmode


set qos in-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function per inputVLAN






set qos out-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function per outputVLAN



6-5



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set qos in-rate maximum

Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN

Sets the maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN.

- Specifying VLAN

set qos in-rate maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (maximum bandwidth limit value)

- Specifying Remaining-VLAN

set qos in-rate maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (maximum bandwidth limit value)

- Specifying separate mode (specifying VLAN)

set qos in-rate maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate mode)

[P6] [P7] [P8] [P9]

Input formats

- Specifying separate mode (specifying Remaining-VLAN)

set qos in-rate maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate mode)

[P6] [P7] [P8] [P9]


fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port

gmx: GbE-MUX port

P2: Port (line) number (single specification)

P3: VLAN specification { vid | remain }

vid: VLAN identifier specification

remain: Remaining-VLAN specification

When vid is specified in P3.




6-6



QoS

P5: Maximum bandwidth limit value or separate mode { separate | separate-red }

Maximum bandwidth limit value (Kbps)

FE port: 0 to 100000 (Kbps)

GbE port: 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)

* The setting granularity is 25 (Kbps).

* If you do not specify a multiple of the setting granularity, this parameter results in anerror.

Separate mode

separate: Separate mode

separate-red: Separate mode (RED use)

When separate mode { separate | separate-red } is specified in P5.

P6: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class A

FE port: class-a 0 to 100000 (Kbps)

GbE port: class-a 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)

P7: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class B

FE port: class-b 0 to 100000 (Kbps)

GbE port: class-b 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)P8: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class C

FE port: class-c 0 to 100000 (Kbps)

GbE port: class-c 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)

P9: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class D

FE port: class-d 0 to 100000 (Kbps)

GbE port: class-d 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)

* The setting granularity in P6 to P9 is 25 (Kbps).

* When any of P6 to P9 is set, the parameter results in an error if you do notspecify a multiple of the setting granularity.

Default values P5 to P9: 100000 (FE), 1000000 (GbE)* The default values depend on port (line) type (fe/gbe) specification.

Usage conditions The number of VLANs that can be registered on a corresponding port depends on themaximum bandwidth limit operation mode to be set. The following table shows thenumber of VLANs that can be set for one port in the specified maximum bandwidth limitoperation mode.

Maximum band limitation of input portMaximum bandwidth limitoperation mode FE port GbE port

Input/output mode (both) 64 1024

Input mode (in) 128 2048

Output mode (out) 0 0

In input mode (in) and input/output mode (both), one place is used for Remaining-VLANamong the number of settable VLANs.

Notes If P6 to P9 are omitted, the values that are already set are retained.

If P6 to P9 are omitted when maximum bandwidth limit operation mode is switched, thedefault values are set.

6-7



QoS

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos in-rate maximum fe 3/7 vid 100 separate-red class-a 1000class-b 2000

*Switch@1# set qos in-rate maximum gbe 5/1 vid VLAN200 separate class-c 3000class-d 4000

*Switch@1# set qos in-rate maximum fe 1/7 vid 50 10000

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands





set qos in-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function per input

VLANset qos in-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function per input VLAN



6-8



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set qos in-class-map maximum

Setting of priority mapping function per input VLAN

Sets the priority mapping function per input VLAN.

- Specifying VLAN

set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P6 (class-a) P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12P13


set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P6 (class-a) P7 P8 P9 P10 P11P12 P13

- Specifying separate mode (specifying VLAN)set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate mode) P6 (class-a) P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13


set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate mode) P6 (class-a) P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13

- Specifying default (specifying VLAN)

set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial)

- Specifying default (specifying Remaining-VLAN)

set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial)

- Specifying default (RED use) (specifying VLAN)

set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)

Input format

- Specifying default (RED use) (specifying Remaining-VLAN)

set qos in-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)


fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port

gmx: GbE-MUX port




remain: Remaining-VLAN specification When vid is specified in P3.




P5: Setting mode { separate | separate-red }



* P5 (setting mode) can be specified only when separate mode is specified in the “setqos in-rate maximum” command.

When P5 is omitted.

6-9



QoS

P6: Class A priority { class-a } or default setting { initial }

class-a: Class A priority specification

initial: Default specification

When class-a is specified in P6.

P7: Priority specification { priority | none }

priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.)none: Unset

P8: Class B priority { class-b }


priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.)

none: Unset

P10: Class C priority { class-c }



none: Unset

P12: Class D priority { class-d }

P13: Priority specification { priority | none }priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.)

none: Unset

When P5 is specified.


Class-a: Class A priority specification



P7: Priority specification { priority | broadcast | multicast | bc+mc | none }


broadcast: Broadcast

multicast: Multicast

bc+mc: Broadcast & multicast

none: Unset







none: Unset







none: Unset

P12 Class D priority { class-d }






none: Unset

6-10



QoS

* For priority specification of classes A to D (P7, P9, P11, and P13), you canspecify broadcast/multicast/bc+mc respectively only once in one of classes A toD. Also, you cannot specify other priorities in the class wherebroadcast/multicast/bc+mc is specified.

* You cannot specify none for priority specification of classes A to D (P7, P9, P11, andP13). Specify priority for any of classes A to D.

* The priority to be specified in any of classes A to D cannot be duplicated with thepriority specified in any other class. For example, you can set broadcast andmulticast in different classes but cannot set broadcast&multicast in a different classbecause it is duplicated.

* The priority not specified in any of classes A to D does not belong to any class (NoEntry). Because a (No Entry) frame, frame that a priority does not belong to anyclass, is not assigned to any classes, it becomes out of control and is discarded.

Default values P7: 6, 7

P9: 4, 5

P11: 0, 3

P13: 1, 2

Usage conditions You can set the priority mapping function per input VLAN after setting the maximumbandwidth limit function per input VLAN in the set qos in-rate maximum.

You cannot specify mode different from the mode set in the set qos in-rate maximum.

Notes To inhibit a priority from belonging to a class, specify “none” explicitly. (You cannotomit “none”.)

Selecting the default specification (initial) sets the value set in the “set qosinitial-class-map in-maximum” command.

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos in-class-map maximum fe 1/5 vid 100 separate-red class-a1,2,3 class-b 0,5-7 class-c broadcast class-d multicast

*Switch@1# set qos in-class-map maximum gbe 4/1 vid 100 separate class-a0-4 class-b 5-7 class-c bc+mc class-d none

*Switch@1# set qos in-class-map maximum gbe 5/1 vid 100 initial

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



set qos maximum-mode Setting of maximum bandwidth limit operation mode

show qos maximum-mode Display of maximum bandwidth limit operation mode

set qos in-rate maximum Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per inputVLAN


show qos in-rate maximum Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per inputVLAN

clear qos in-rate maximum Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per inputVLAN

6-11



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set qos in-priority maximum

Setting of priority discard function per input VLAN

Sets the priority discard function per input VLAN.


set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 [P5 (separate)]

[P6 (burst tolerance for class-a)] [P7] [P8] [P9]


set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) [P5 (separate)]

[P6 (burst tolerance for class-a) ] [P7] [P8] [P9]

- Specifying separate mode (RED use) (specifying VLAN)

set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate-red)

[P6 (burst tolerance (upper threshold) for class-a) P7 [P8]] [P9 P10 [P11]] [P12 P13[P14]] [P15 P16 [P17]]

- Specifying separate mode (RED use) (specifying Remaining-VLAN)

set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate-red)



set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial)


set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial)


set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)

Input format


set qos in-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)


fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port

gmx: GbE-MUX port


P3: VLAN specification { vid | remain }vid: VLAN identifier specification









When separate is specified in P5 or P5 is omitted.

6-12



QoS

6-13

P6: Burst tolerance specification for class A { class-a 1 to 127 } or default setting{ initial }

Burst tolerance specification for class A: class-a 1 to 127 (Kbyte)


When burst tolerance for class A is specified in P6.

P7: Burst tolerance specification for class B class-b (1 to 127) (Kbyte)P8: Burst tolerance specification for class C class-c (1 to 127) (Kbyte)

P9: Burst tolerance specification for class D class-d (1 to 127) (Kbyte)

* When burst tolerance specification for classes A to D (P6 to P9) is omitted, thevalues that are already set are retained.

When separate-red is specified in P5.

P6: Burst tolerance specification for class A or default setting { initial }

Burst tolerance A for class A (upper threshold)

FE port: class-a 1 to 3000 (Kbyte)

GbE port: class-a 1 to 30000 (Kbyte)


When burst tolerance (upper threshold) for class A is specified in P6.

P7: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class A or burst lower

threshold/probability disable { disable }

Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class A

FE port: 1 to 2999 (Kbyte)

GbE port: 1 to 29999 (Kbyte)

disable: Burst lower threshold/probability disable

When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class A is specified in P7.

P8: Probability A (1 to 32)

P9: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class B

FE port: class-b 1 to 3000 (Kbyte)GbE port: class-b 1 to 30000 (Kbyte)

P10: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B or burst lowerthreshold/probability disable { disable }

Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B




When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B is specified in P10.

P11: Probability B (1 to 32)

P12: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class C

FE port: class-c 1 to 3000 (Kbyte)GbE port: class-c 1 to 30000 (Kbyte)

P13: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C or burst lowerthreshold/probability disable { disable }

Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C




When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C is specified in P13.

P14: Probability C (1 to 32)

P15: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class D



QoS

6-14

FE port: class-d 1 to 3000 (Kbyte)

GbE port: class-d 1 to 30000 (Kbyte)

P16: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D or burst lowerthreshold/probability disable { disable }

Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D




When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D is specified in P16.

P17: Probability D (1 to 32)

* When burst tolerance (upper/lower threshold) of classes A to D and probabilityvalues (P6 to P17) are omitted, the values that are already set are retained.

Default values When separate is specified in P5 or P5 is omitted:

P6: 127 (Kbytes), P7: 64 (Kbytes), P8: 32 (Kbytes), P9: 16 (Kbytes),

When separate-red is specified in P5:

P6: 127 (Kbytes), P6, P8: disableP9: 64 (Kbytes), P10, P11: disable

P12: 32 (Kbytes), P13: 16 (Kbytes), P14: 32 (Kbytes)

P15: 16 (Kbytes), P16: 8 (Kbytes), P17: 32 (Kbytes)

Usage conditions You can set the priority discard function per input VLAN after setting the maximumbandwidth limit function per input VLAN in the set qos in-rate maximum.

You cannot specify mode different from the mode set in the set qos in-rate maximum.

Notes If P5 is omitted, arbitrarily specify P6 to P9 per class (omissible).

If separate is specified in P5, you can arbitrarily specify P6 to P9 per class as separate

mode { separate } (omissible).If separate-red is specified in P5, you can arbitrarily specify P6 to P17 per class asseparate mode (RED use) (omissible).

If P5 is specified, you cannot specify mode different from the mode specified in the “setqos in-rate maximum” command.

If separate-red is specified in P5, you cannot set a value greater than the value set inP6 in P7.

You cannot also set a value greater than the value set in P6 in P9, P10, P12, P13, P15,and P16.

If P6 is specified, the value set in the “set qos initial-priority (in-maximum /in-maximum-red)” command is used.

Input examples *Swi t ch@1# set qos i n- pr i ori t y maxi mumf e 1/ 1 vi d 100 separat e- r ed cl ass- a3000 20 4 cl ass- b 1500 di sabl e

*Swi t ch@1# set qos i n-pri or i t y maxi mumgbe 3/ 1 vi d 70 separate- r ed cl ass- c48 di sabl e cl ass- d 8 1 32

*Swi t ch@1# set qos i n- pr i or i t y maxi mumf e 1/ 8 vi d 1000 separate- r ed cl ass- a127 di sabl e cl ass- b 64 di sabl e cl ass- c 3000 16 10 cl ass- d 2000 8 5

*Swi t ch@1# set qos i n-pri or i t y maxi mumgbe 6/ 1 vi d 100 separate cl ass- a 1cl ass- b 1 cl ass- c 127 cl ass- d 127

*Swi t ch@1# set qos i n- pr i or i t y maxi mum gbe 5/ 1 vi d 100 i ni t i al

*Swi t ch@1#

Output item



QoS

Relatedcommands

set qos maximum-mode Setting of maximum bandwidth limit operation mode

show qos maximum-mode Display of maximum bandwidth limit operation mode


set qos in-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function per input VLAN



6-15



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show qos in-rate maximum

Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN

Shows the maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN.

- Displaying specified port/specified VLAN

show qos in-rate maximum [P1 [P2 (vid) P3]]

- Displaying specified port/specified Remaining-VLAN

show qos in-rate maximum [P1 [P2 (remain)]]

- Displaying specified VLAN

show qos in-rate maximum [P2 (vid) P3]

Input format

- Displaying specified Remaining-VLAN

show qos in-rate maximum [P2 (remain)]









* Multiple VLAN IDs can be specified only if P1 is omitted.* When P1 is omitted, information for all the VLANs and Remaining-VLANs set in all the

ports is shown. If P2 and P3 are specified, information is displayed in ascendingorder of VLAN IDs. Within the same VLAN, information is displayed in ascendingorder of ports.

* When P2 is omitted, information for all the VLANs and Remaining-VLANs set in theport specified in P1 is shown.

Default value None


Note None

6-16



QoS

Input example *Switch@1# show qos in-rate maximum

QoS Input Port Maximum Table

============================

Port Registered-VID Available-VID

-------------------------------------------------------

6/1 2 1022

QoS Input VLAN Maximum Table

============================

Port : 6/1

VID : 100

Mode : separate

===================

Rate Maximum- Minimum-

Priority (Kbps) Burst(KByte) Burst(KByte) Probability

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Class-All : --- --- --- --- ---

Class-A : broadcast 1000000 127 --- ---

Class-B : multicast 1000000 127 --- ---Class-C : none 1000000 1 --- ---

Class-D : 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 1000000 1 --- ---

No Entry : none --- --- --- ---

Port : 6/1

VID : remain

Mode : normal

===================



-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Class-All : --- 1000000 --- --- ---Class-A : 6,7 --- 127 --- ---

Class-B : 4,5 --- 64 --- ---

Class-C : 0,3 --- 32 --- ---

Class-D : 1,2 --- 16 --- ---

No Entry : none --- --- --- ---

*Switch@1#

6-17



QoS

Output items (QoS Input Port Maximum Table)

Port: Port (line) number

Registered-VID: Number of VLANs registered in maximum bandwidth limit mode

Available-VID: Number of VLANs that can be registered

(QoS Input VLAN Maximum Table)


VID: VLAN ID

Mode: Setting mode

normal: Normal mode


separate-RED: Separator mode (RED use)

Priority: Class mapping

---: Unset

broadcast: Broadcast settingmulticast: Multicast setting

bc+mc: Broadcast and multicast setting

none: Priority does not belong to any class

Numeric value: Priority

Rate: Maximum bandwidth limit value per class

If Mode is Normal, the maximum bandwidth limit value is shown in Class-All.

Maximum-Burst: Maximum burst tolerance

Minimum-Burst: Minimum burst tolerance

Probability: Probability

Relatedcommands







6-18



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear qos in-rate maximum

Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN

Clears the maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN.

- Clearing maximum bandwidth limit setting of specified port/specified VLAN

clear qos in-rate maximum P1 P2 [P3 (vid) P4]

Input formats

- Clearing maximum bandwidth limit setting of specified port/specifiedRemaining-VLAN

clear qos in-rate maximum P1 P2 [P3 (remain)]


fe: FE portgbe: GbE port

gmx: GbE-MUX port





* If Remaining-VLAN is specified in P3 when a VLAN has already been registered inthe specified port, you cannot clear the maximum bandwidth limit function per inputVLAN.

* When P3 is omitted, the setting of the maximum bandwidth limit function of all the

VLANs and the Remaining-VLAN in the port specified in P2 are cleared. When vid is specified in P3.




Default value None


Notes If P3 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.

The priority mapping function setting of the specified VLAN and the priority discardfunction setting are also cleared.

Input examples *Switch@1# clear qos in-rate maximum fe 4/1 vid 100

*Switch@1# clear qos in-rate maximum gbe 5/1 vid 200

*Switch@1# clear qos in-rate maximum gbe 3/1


*Switch@1#

Output item

6-19



QoS

Relatedcommands







6-20



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set qos out-rate maximum

Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per output VLAN

Sets the maximum bandwidth limit function per output VLAN.

- Specifying VLAN

set qos out-rate maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (maximum bandwidth limit value)


set qos out-rate maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (maximum bandwidth limit value)


set qos out-rate maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate mode)

[P6] [P7] [P8] [P9]

Input formats


set qos out-rate maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate mode)

[P6] [P7] [P8] [P9]


fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port

gmx: GbE-MUX port









P5: Maximum bandwidth limit value or separate mode { separate | separate-red }

Maximum bandwidth limit value

FE port: 0 to 100000 (Kbps)

GbE port: 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)


* If you do not specify a multiple of the setting granularity, this parameter results inan error.

Separate mode



When separate mode { separate | separate-red } is specified in P5.

P6: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class A

FE port: class a 0 to 100000 (Kbps)

GbE port: class a 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)

P7: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class B

FE port: class-b 0 to 100000 (Kbps)

GbE port: class-b 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)

6-21



QoS

P8: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class C

FE port: class-c 0 to 100000 (Kbps)

GbE port: class-c 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)

P9: Maximum bandwidth limit value of class D

FE port: class-d 0 to 100000 (Kbps)

GbE port: class-d 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)* The setting granularity in P6 to P9 is 25 (Kbps).

* When any of P6 to P9 is set, the parameter results in an error if you do notspecify a multiple of the setting granularity.

Default values P5 to P9: 100000 (FE), 1000000 (GbE)

* The default values depend on port (line) type (fe/gbe) specification.

Usage conditions The number of VLANs that can be registered on a corresponding port depends on themaximum bandwidth limit operation mode to be set. The following table shows thenumber of VLANs that can be set for one port in the specified maximum bandwidth limit

operation mode.

Maximum band limitation of output portMaximum bandwidth limitoperation mode FE port GbE port

Input/output mode (both) 64 1024

Input mode (in) 0 0

Output mode (out) 128 2048

In output mode (in) and input/output mode (both), one place is used forRemaining-VLAN among the number of settable VLANs.

Notes If P6 to P9 are omitted, the values that are already set are retained.

If P6 to P9 are omitted when maximum bandwidth limit operation mode is switched, thedefault values are set.

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos out-rate maximum fe 3/7 vid 100 separate-red class-a 1000class-b 2000

*Switch@1# set qos out-rate maximum gbe 5/1 vid VLAN200 separate class-c3000 class-d 4000

*Switch@1# set qos out-rate maximum fe 1/7 vid 50 10000

*Switch@1#

Output item

6-22



QoS

Relatedcommands









6-23



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set qos out-class-map maximum

Setting of priority mapping function per output VLAN

Sets the priority mapping function per output VLAN.

Input formats - Specifying VLAN

set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P6 (class-a) P7 P8 P9 P10 P11P12 P13


set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P6 (class-a) P7 P8 P9 P10 P11P12 P13

- Specifying separate mode (specifying VLAN)set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate mode) P6 (class-a) P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13


set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate mode) P6 (class-a) P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13


set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial)


set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial)


set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)


set qos out-class-map maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)


fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port

gmx: GbE-MUX port




remain: Remaining-VLAN specification When vid is specified in P3.







* P5 (setting mode) can be specified only when separate mode is specified in the “setqos in-rate maximum” command.

6-24



QoS

When P5 is omitted.





P7: Priority specification { priority | none }priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.)

none: Unset




none: Unset




none: Unset

P12: Class D priority { class-d }P13: Priority specification { priority | none }


none: Unset

When P5 is specified.






priority: 0 to 7 (Multiple values can be specified.)broadcast: Broadcast



none: Unset







none: UnsetP10: Class C priority { class-c }






none: Unset




broadcast: Broadcastmulticast: Multicast

6-25



QoS


none: Unset

* For priority specification of classes A to D (P7, P9, P11, and P13), you canspecify broadcast/multicast/bc+mc respectively only once in one of classes A toD. Also, you cannot specify other priorities in the class wherebroadcast/multicast/bc+mc is specified.

* You cannot specify none for priority specification of classes A to D (P7, P9, P11, andP13). Specify priority for any of classes A to D.

* The priority to be specified in any of classes A to D cannot be duplicated with thepriority specified in any other class. For example, you can set broadcast andmulticast in different classes but cannot set broadcast&multicast in a different classbecause it is duplicated.

* The priority not specified in any of classes A to D does not belong to any class (NoEntry). Because a (No Entry) frame, frame that a priority does not belong to anyclass, is not assigned to any classes, it becomes out of control and is discarded.


P9: 4, 5P11: 0, 3

P13: 1, 2

Usage conditions You can set the priority mapping function per output VLAN after setting the maximumbandwidth limit function per output VLAN in the set qos out-rate maximum.

You cannot specify mode different from the mode set in the set qos out-rate maximum.


Selecting the default specification (initial) sets the value set in the “set qos

initial-class-map out-maximum” command.

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos out-class-map maximum fe 1/5 vid 100 separate-red class-a1,2,3 class-b 0,5-7 class-c broadcast class-d multicast

*Switch@1# set qos out-class-map maximum gbe 6/1 vid 100 separate class-abc+mc class-b none class-c 0-4 class-d 5-7

*Switch@1# set qos out-class-map maximum gbe 5/1 vid 100 class-a 0-1 class-b2-3 class-c 4-5 class-d 6-7

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands






clear qos out-rate maximum Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per

output VLAN

6-26



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set qos out-priority maximum

Setting of priority discard function per output VLAN

Sets the maximum band priority discard function per output VLAN.

Input formats - Specifying separate mode (specifying VLAN)

set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 [P5 (separate)]



set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) [P5 (separate)]


- Specifying separate mode (RED use) (specifying VLAN)

set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate-red)


- Specifying separate mode (RED use) (specifying Remaining-VLAN)

set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate-red)



set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial)


set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) [P5 (separate)] P6 (initial)


set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)


set qos out-priority maximum P1 P2 P3 (remain) P5 (separate-red) P6 (initial)

6-27



QoS


fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port

gmx: GbE-MUX port


P3: VLAN specification { vid | remain }vid: VLAN identifier specification









When separate is specified in P5 or P5 is omitted.

P6: Burst tolerance specification for class A { class-a 1 to 127 } or default setting{ initial }



When burst tolerance for class A is specified in P6.

P7: Burst tolerance specification for class B class-b (1 to 127) (Kbyte)

P8: Burst tolerance specification for class C class-c (1 to 127) (Kbyte)


* When burst tolerance specification for class A to class D (P6 to P9) is omitted,the values that are already set are retained.

When separate-red is specified in P5.P6: Burst tolerance specification for class A or default setting { initial }

Burst tolerance A for class A (upper threshold)




When burst tolerance (upper threshold) for class A is specified in P6.

P7: Burst tolerance A (lower threshold) for class A or burst lowerthreshold/probability disable { disable }

Burst tolerance A (lower threshold) for class A


GbE port: 1 to 29999 (Kbyte)disable: Burst lower threshold/probability disable

6-28



QoS

When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class A is specified in P7.


P9: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class B

FE port: class-b 1 to 3000 (Kbyte)

GbE port: class-b 1 to 30000 (Kbyte)

P10: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B or burst lowerthreshold/probability disable { disable }

Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B




When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class B is specified in P10.


P12: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class C

FE port: class-c 1 to 3000 (Kbyte)

GbE port: class-c 1 to 30000 (Kbyte)

P13: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C or burst lowerthreshold/probability disable { disable }

Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C




When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class C is specified in P13.


P15: Burst tolerance (upper threshold) specification for class D



P16: Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D or burst lowerthreshold/probability disable { disable }

Burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D




When burst tolerance (lower threshold) for class D is specified in P16.

P17: Probability D (1 to 32)

* When burst tolerance (upper/lower threshold) of classes A to D and probabilityvalues (P6 to P17) are omitted, the values that are already set are retained.

6-29



QoS

Default values When separate is specified in P5 or P5 is omitted:

P6: 127 (Kbyte)

P7: 64 (Kbyte)

P8: 32 (Kbyte)

P9: 16 (Kbyte)

When separate-red is specified in P5:P6: 127 (Kbyte)

P7, P8: disable

P9: 64 (Kbyte)

P10, P11: disable

P12: 32 (Kbyte)

P13: 16 (Kbyte)

P14: 32 (Kbyte)

P15: 16 (Kbyte)

P16: 8 (Kbyte)

P17: 32 (Kbyte)

Usage conditions You can set the priority discard function per output VLAN after setting the maximumbandwidth limit function per output VLAN in the set qos out-rate maximum.

You cannot specify mode different from the mode set in the set qos out-rate maximum.

Notes If P5 is omitted, arbitrarily specify P6 to P9 per class (omissible).

If separate is specified in P5, you can arbitrarily specify P6 to P9 per class as separatemode (separate) (omissible).

If separate-red is specified in P5, you can arbitrarily specify P6 to P17 per class asseparate mode (RED use) (omissible).

If P5 is specified, you cannot specify mode different from the mode specified in the “setqos in-rate maximum” command.

If separate-red is specified in P5, you cannot set a value greater than the value set inP6 in P7.

You cannot also set a value greater than the value set in P6 in P9, P10, P12, P13, P15,and P16.

If P6 is specified, the value set in the “set qos initial-priority (in-maximum /in-maximum-red)” command is used.

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos out-priority maximum fe 1/1 vid 100 separate-red class-a3000 20 4 class-b 1500 disable

*Switch@1# set qos out-priority maximum gbe 3/1 vid 70 separate-red class-c48 disable class-d 8 1 32

*Switch@1# set qos out-priority maximum fe 1/8 vid 1000 separate-red class-a

127 disable class-b 64 disable class-c 3000 16 10 class-d 2000 8 5

*Switch@1# set qos out-priority maximum gbe 5/1 vid 100 class-a 1 class-b1 class-c 127 class-d 127

*Switch@1#

Output item

6-30



QoS

Relatedcommands







6-31



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show qos out-rate maximum

Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per output VLAN

Shows the maximum bandwidth limit function per output VLAN.

Input formats - Displaying specified port/specified VLAN

show qos out-rate maximum [P1 [P2 (vid) P3]]


show qos out-rate maximum [P1 [P2 (remain)]]

- Displaying specified VLAN

show qos out-rate maximum [P2 (vid) P3]

- Displaying specified Remaining-VLAN

show qos out-rate maximum [P2 (remain)]









* Multiple VLAN IDs can be specified only if P1 is omitted.* About displayed data if P1 is omitted.

Information for all the VLANs and Remaining-VLANs set in all the ports is shown.If P2 and P3 are specified, information is displayed in ascending order of VLAN IDs.Within the same VLAN, information is displayed in ascending order of ports.

* When P2 is omitted, information for all the VLANs and Remaining-VLANs set in theport specified in P1 is shown.

Default value None


Note None

6-32



QoS

Input example *Switch@1# show qos out-rate maximum

QoS Output Port Maximum Table

=============================

Port Registered-VID Available-VID

-----------------------------------

6/1 2 1022

QoS Output VLAN Maximum Table

=============================

Port : 6/1

VID : 100

Mode : separate

===================



-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Class-All : --- --- --- --- ---

Class-A : bc+mc 100 127 --- ---

Class-B : none 100 64 --- ---Class-C : 0,1,2,3,4 100 32 --- ---

Class-D : 5,6,7 100 16 --- ---

No Entry : none --- --- --- ---

Port : 6/1

VID : remain

Mode : normal

===================



-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Class-Al l : --- 1000000 --- --- ---Class-A : 6,7 --- 127 --- ---

Class-B : 4,5 --- 64 --- ---

Class-C : 0,3 --- 32 --- ---

Class-D : 1,2 --- 16 --- ---

No Entry : none --- --- --- ---

*Switch@1#

6-33



QoS

Output Items (QoS Output Port Maximum Table)


Registered-VID: Number of VLANs registered in maximum bandwidth limit mode

Available-VID: Number of VLANs that can be registered

(QoS Input VLAN Maximum Table)


VID: VLAN ID

Mode: Setting mode

normal: Normal mode


separate-RED: Separator mode (RED use)


---: Unset

broadcast: Broadcast settingmulticast: Multicast setting

bc+mc: Broadcast and multicast setting



Rate: Maximum bandwidth limit value per class

If Mode is Normal, the maximum bandwidth limit value is shown in Class-All.

Maximum-Burst: Maximum burst tolerance

Minimum-Burst: Minimum burst tolerance


Relatedcommands







6-34



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear qos out-rate maximum

Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per output VLAN

Clears the maximum bandwidth limit function per output VLAN.

Input format - Clearing maximum bandwidth limit setting of specified port/specified VLAN

clear qos out-rate maximum P1 P2 [P3 (vid) P4]

- Clearing maximum bandwidth limit setting of specified port/specifiedRemaining-VLAN

clear qos out-rate maximum P1 P2 [P3 (remain)]



gmx: GbE-MUX port





* If a VLAN is already registered in the specified port when Remaining-VLAN isspecified in P3, you cannot clear the maximum bandwidth limit function per outputVLAN.

* When P3 is omitted, the setting of the maximum bandwidth limit function of all the

VLANs and the Remaining-VLAN in the port specified in P2 are cleared. When vid is specified in P3.




Default value None



The priority mapping function setting of the specified VLAN and the priority discardfunction setting are also cleared.

Input examples *Switch@1# clear qos out-rate maximum fe 6/1 vid 100

*Switch@1# clear qos out-rate maximum gbe 5/1 vid 100

*Switch@1# clear qos out-rate maximum gbe 4/1


*Switch@1#

Output item

6-35



QoS

Relatedcommands


show qos maximum-mode Display of maximum bandwidth limit Operationmode





6-36



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set qos class-map

Setting of priority mapping

Sets priority mapping.

Input format - Specifying port (line) number

set qos class-map P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3

- Specifying line module

set qos class-map P1 (line module number) P3

Parameters P1: Port (line) type { fe | gbe } or line module number

Port (line) type specification

fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port


When port (line) type is specified in P1.


P3: Profile number (1 to 4)

* If the port type is ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155, line modulenumbers are used for specification.

Default value P3: 1


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos class-map fe 1/1-3 2

*Switch@1# set qos class-map gbe 6/1 4

*Switch@1# set qos class-map 3 2

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

show qos class-map Display of priority mapping

set qos class-map profile Creating of priority mapping profile

show qos class-map profile Display of priority mapping profile

6-37



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show qos class-map

Display of priority mapping

Shows priority mapping.

Input format - Displaying specified port

show qos class-map [P1 (port (line) number)]

- Displaying specified line module

show qos class-map [P1 (line module number)]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.) or line module number (1 to12) (Multiple values can be specified.)

* When a port (line) number is specified in P1, the priority profile number set in thespecified port is shown.

* When a line module number is specified in P1, the priority profile number set in thespecified module is shown.

(You can specify a line module number only when the port type is ATM155, ATMP,TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155.)

* When P1 is omitted, the priority profile numbers set in all the ports and those set inall the line module numbers are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show qos class-map

QoS Priority Mapping Table

==========================

Port Slot Profile No.

-----------------------

1/1 --- 1

1/2 --- 2

1/3 --- 2

1/4 --- 11/5 --- 1

1/6 --- 1

1/7 --- 1

1/8 --- 1

--- 10 3

*Switch@1#


Slot: Module number

Profile No.: Profile number

6-38



QoS

Relatedcommands

set qos class-map Setting of priority mapping



6-39



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set qos class-map profile

Creating of priority mapping profile

Creates a priority mapping profile.

Input formats - Specifying device initial value

set qos class-map profile P1 P2 (default)

- Setting priority mapping profile

set qos class-map profile P1 P2 (class-a) P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9

Parameters P1: Profile number (1 to 4)

P2: Class A priority specification { class-a } or device initial value specification { default }


default: Device initial value specification


P3: Priority specification or unset { priority | none }


none: Unset




none: Unset




none: Unset




none: Unset

* You cannot specify none for all classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8).

Specify priority for any of classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8).

* The priority to be specified in any of classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8) cannotbe duplicated with the priority specified in any other class.

* The priority not specified in any of classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8) does notbelong to any class.


P5: 4, 5

P7: 0, 3

P9: 1, 2


6-40



QoS


If the output-side fairness control mode function is disabled, class mapping does notfunction.

Input examples*Switch@1# set qos class-map profile 4 class-a none class-b 1,3,5 class-c2,4,6 class-d 0,7

*Switch@1# set qos class-map profile 3 default

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands




6-41



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show qos class-map profile

Display of priority mapping profile

Shows a priority mapping profile.

Input format show qos class-map profile [P1]

Parameter P1: Profile number (1 to 4)

* When P1 is omitted, information for all the profiles is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show qos class-map profile 1

QoS Class Mapping Profile Table

===============================

Profile No. : 1

===============

Priority

--------------------------

Class-A : 6,7Class-B : 4,5

Class-C : 0,3

Class-D : 1,2

No Entry : none

*Switch@1#

Output items Profile No.: Profile number




Relatedcommands




6-42



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set qos cos-map profile

Creating of CoS profile

Creates a CoS profile.

Input formats - Specifying CoS

set qos cos-map profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 (cos) P4 P5 P6

- Specifying IPv4ToS / IPv6TC

set qos cos-map profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 (v4tos/v6tc) P4 P5

- Specifying ether-type

set qos cos-map profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 (ether-type) P4 P5

- Specifying other

set qos cos-map profile P1 P2 (other) P3

6-43



QoS


P2: Index number or others { other }

Index number: 1 to 31

other: Others

* Only index numbers can be omitted.

If an index number is omitted, a free and smaller number index number is used.(However, if there is an index number that is already registered, that number isused.)

* If the command where P2 is omitted is entered when all P2 index numbers hasalready been set, it is treated as an error because there are no free index numbers,and the setting is not configured.

When P2 is omitted or an index number is specified.

P3: Service type { cos | v4tos | v6tc | ether-type }

cos: CoS specification

v4tos: IPv4 ToS specification

v6tc: IPv6 TC specification

ether-type: Ethernet type specification

When cos is specified in P3.

P4: Tag type { inner | outer }

inner: Inner tag specification

outer: Outer tag specification

P5: Pre-change priority or untag { untag }

Priority: 0 to 7

untag: Untag specification

P6: Post-change priority (0 to 7)

When v4tos or v6tc is specified in P3.

P4: ToS type { IP-Precedence specification | DSCP specification | Full bit

specification }IP-Precedence specification: ip-precedence 0 to 7

DSCP specification: dscp 0 to 63

Full bit specification: fullbit 0 to 255

P5: Post-conversion CoS value (0 to 7)

When ether-type is specified in P3.

P4: EtherType value (0x0600 to 0xffff)


When other is specified in P2.


Default value None


Notes You can overwrite a registered index but cannot reregister it.

At initial setup, post-conversion CoS value “0” is automatically set to the setting of other.

6-44



QoS

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos cos-map profile 10 2 cos inner 3 5

*Switch@1# set qos cos-map profile 10 cos inner untag 7

*Switch@1# set qos cos-map profile 10 v4tos fullbit 110 0

*Switch@1# set qos cos-map profile 10 5 v6tc dscp 63 2

*Switch@1# set qos cos-map profile 10 other 3

*Switch@1# set qos cos-map profile 10 ether-type 0x8100 7

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

show qos cos-map profile Display of CoS profile

clear qos cos-map profile Clearing of CoS profile

set qos in-port cos-map Setting of input CoS priority mapping

show qos in-port cos-map Display of input CoS priority mapping

clear qos in-port cos-map Clearing of input CoS priority mapping

set qos out-port cos-map Setting of output CoS priority mapping

show qos out-port cos-map Display of output CoS priority mapping

clear qos out-port cos-map Clearing of output CoS priority mapping

6-45



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show qos cos-map profile

Display of CoS profile

Shows a CoS profile.

Input format show qos cos-map profile [P1]


* When P1 is omitted, information for all the profiles registered in the device is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show qos cos-map profile

CoS Profile Table

=================

Profile No. : 1

=================

Before Convert

Index Field Type Kind Data Data

-----------------------------------------------------------------------1 cos inner 3 5

10 v4tos ip-precedence 5 3

15 v6tc fullbit 200 4

20 ether-type --- 0x600 6

Other --- --- --- 2

*Switch@1#

Output items Profile No: Profile number

Index: Profile index

Field Type: Service type

cos: CoS specified

v4tos: IP v4 ToS specified

v6tc: IP v6 TC specified

ether-type: ether-type specified

Kind: Tag type/ToS type

Inner: Inner tag specified (when CoS is specified)

Outer: Outer tag specified (when CoS is specified)

IP Precedence specified (when v4tos/v6tc is specified)

DSCP specified (when v4tos/v6tc is specified)

Full bit specified (when v4tos/v6tc is specified)

Before Data: Pre-change priority or Untag specified (CoS)/pre-conversion data(v4tos/v6tc)

Convert Data: Post-change priority (CoS)/post-conversion CoS value (v4tos/v6tc)

6-46



QoS

Relatedcommands

set qos cos-map profile Creating of CoS profile




clear qos in-port cos-map Clearing of input CoS priority mappingset qos out-port cos-map Setting of output CoS priority mapping



6-47



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear qos cos-map profile

Clearing of CoS profile

Clears a CoS profile.

Input format clear qos cos-map profile [P1 [P2]]


P2: Index number (1 to 31)

* When all the parameters are omitted, all the registered CoS profiles are cleared.

Default value None

Usage condition If command mode is safety mode, you cannot clear the profiles that are already mapped.

Notes If P1 and P2 are omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.

If no profile is registered in the index number specified in P2, an error occurs.

No error occurs even if the profile number specified in P1 does not exist.

Input examples *Switch@1# clear qos cos-map profile 3 34

*Switch@1# clear qos cos-map profile 3


*Switch@1# clear qos cos-map profileWould you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands





clear qos in-port cos-map Clearing of input CoS priority mappingset qos out-port cos-map Setting of output CoS priority mapping



6-48



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set qos in-port cos-map

Setting of input CoS priority mapping

Sets input CoS priority mapping.

Input format set qos in-port cos-map P1 P2 P3 P4

Parameters P1: Port (line) type { atm | fe | gbe | gmx }

atm: ATM155 port

fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port

gmx: GbE-MUX portP2: Port (line) number (single specification)





Default value None

Usage condition If command mode is safety mode, you cannot specify an unregistered profile.

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos in-port cos-map fe 4/1 VLAN100 128

*Switch@1# set qos in-port cos-map gbe 6/1 100 1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



clear qos in-port cos-map Clearing of input CoS priority mappingshow qos cos-map profile Display of CoS profile


6-49



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show qos in-port cos-map

Display of input CoS priority mapping

Shows input CoS priority mapping.

Input format show qos in-port cos-map [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number or VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }


VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.)VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters

* When P1 is omitted, the CoS profile lists set in all the VLANs of all the ports areshown.

* When P1 is omitted or a port (line) number is specified, input CoS priority mapping isshown per port.

* When a VLAN identifier is specified in P1, input CoS priority mapping is shown perVLAN.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show qos in-port cos-map

Input CoS Priority Mapping Table

================================

Port VID Profile

--------------------------------

4/1 100 128

6/1 100 1

*Switch@1#


VID: VLAN ID

Profile: Profile number

Relatedcommands





clear qos in-port cos-map Clearing of input CoS priority mapping

6-50



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear qos in-port cos-map

Clearing of CoS priority mapping

Clears CoS priority mapping.

Input format clear qos in-port cos-map P1 P2 [P3]

Parameters P1: Port (line) type { atm | fe | gbe | gmx }

atm: ATM155 port

fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port

gmx: GbE-MUX portP2: Port (line) number (single specification)




* When P3 is omitted, the CoS priority mapping settings of all the VLANs of the portspecified in P2 are cleared.

Default value None



Input examples *Switch@1# clear qos in-port cos-map fe 4/1 VLAN100

*Switch@1# clear qos in-port cos-map gbe 6/1 100

*Switch@1# clear qos in-port cos-map gbe 3/1


*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands






6-51



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set qos out-port cos-map

Setting of output CoS priority mapping

Sets output CoS priority mapping.

Input format set qos out-port cos-map P1 P2 P3 P4


fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port


P3: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.)



Default value None


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos out-port cos-map fe 1/7 100 10*Switch@1# set qos out-port cos-map gbe 6/1 VLAN100 1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands






6-52



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show qos out-port cos-map

Display of output CoS priority mapping

Shows output CoS priority mapping.

Input format show qos out-port cos-map [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number or VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }




* When P1 is omitted, the CoS profile lists set in all the VLANs of all the ports areshown.

* When P1 is omitted or a port (line) number is specified, output CoS priority mappingis shown per port.

* When a VLAN identifier is specified in P1, output CoS priority mapping is shown perVLAN.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show qos out-port cos-map

Output CoS Priority Mapping Table

=================================

Port VID Profile

----------------------------------

4/1 100 128

6/1 100 1

*Switch@1#

Output items Port: Port (line) numberVID: VLAN ID


Relatedcommands






6-53



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear qos out-port cos-map

Clearing of output CoS priority mapping

Clears output CoS priority mapping.

Input format clear qos out-port cos-map P1 P2 [P3]


fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port


P3: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification)


* When P3 is omitted, the CoS priority mapping settings of all the VLANs of the portspecified in P2 are cleared.

Default value None



Input examples *Switch@1# clear qos out-port cos-map fe 1/5 30

*Switch@1# clear qos out-port cos-map gbe 1/5 30

*Switch@1# clear qos out-port cos-map gbe 1/5


*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands


show qos cos-map profile Display of CoS profileclear qos cos-map profile Clearing of CoS profile



6-54



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set qos out-fairness-mode

Setting of output-side fairness control mode function

Sets the output-side fairness control mode function.

Input format set qos out-fairness-mode P1

Parameter P1: Output fairness control mode { enable | disable }

enable: Enables output fairness control mode

disable: Disables output fairness control mode



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set qos out-fairness-mode enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

show qos out-fairness-mode Display of output-side fairness control modefunction

set qos out-priority fairness Setting of priority discard function ofoutput-side fairness control function ofoutput port

set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port Setting of upper threshold of output-sidefairness control function of output port

set qos out-weight fairness Setting of output-side fairness controlfunction weight of output port

show qos out-weight fairness Display of output-side fairness controlfunction of output port

clear qos out-weight fairness Clearing of output-side fairness controlfunction of output port

6-55



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show qos out-fairness-mode

Display of output-side fairness control mode function

Shows the output-side fairness control mode function.

Input format show qos out-fairness-mode

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show qos out-fairness-mode

QoS Out Fairness Mode Table

===========================

Port Status

----------------------

all enabled

*Switch@1#

Output items Port: all (all ports)

Status: Output-side fairness control mode

enabled: Enabled

disabled: Disabled

Relatedcommands

set qos out-fairness-mode Setting of output-side fairness control modefunction

set qos out-priority fairness Setting of priority discard function ofoutput-side fairness control function of

output portset qos out-weight fairness Setting of output-side fairness control

function weight of output port




6-56



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set qos out-priority fairness

Setting of priority discard function of output-side fairness control function ofoutput port

Sets the priority discard function of the output-side fairness control function of an output port.


set qos out-priority fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (vid) P4

[P5 (burst tolerance for class-a))] [P6] [P7] [P8]


set qos out-priority fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (remain)


- Specifying VLAN (ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155)

set qos out-priority fairness P1 (line module number) P3 (vid) P4


- Specifying Remaining-VLAN (ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155)

set qos out-priority fairness P1 (line module number) P3 (remain)



set qos out-priority fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5 (initial)


set qos out-priority fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (remain) P5 (initial) - Specifying default (specifying VLAN)(ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155)

set qos out-priority fairness P1 (line module number) P3 (vid) P4 P5 (initial)

- Specifying default (specifying Remaining-VLAN)(ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155)

set qos out-priority fairness P1 (line module number) P3 (remain) P5 (initial)

6-57



QoS

Parameters P1: Port (line) type specification { fe | gbe } or line module number specification

fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port


* A line module number can be specified only when the port type is ATM155, ATMP,

TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155. When a port (line) type is specified in P1.


FE port: 1/1 to 4/8

GbE port: 3/1 to 10/1








P5: Burst tolerance specification for class A { class-a 1 to 127 } or default setting { initial }


Initial: Default specification

When P5 is omitted or burst tolerance for class A is specified.




* The granularity for burst tolerance is 1 (Kbyte).

* When burst tolerance specification for class A to class D (P5 to P8) are omitted, the

current values are kept.

Default value P5: 127 (Kbyte), P6: 64 (Kbyte), P7: 32 (Kbyte), P8: 16 (Kbyte)

Usage condition If the output-side fairness control mode function is disable, you cannot set this function.

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos out-priority fairness fe 1/3 vid 100 class-a 10 class-b20

*Switch@1# set qos out-priority fairness gbe 9/1 vid 200 class-a 20 class-b30

*Switch@1# set qos out-priority fairness 3 vid 100 class-a 10 class-b 20*Switch@1# set qos out-priority fairness 10 remain initial

*Switch@1#

Output item

6-58



QoS

Relatedcommands

set qos out-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function peroutput VLAN

set qos out-fairness-mode Setting of output-side fairness control modefunction

show qos out-fairness-mode Display of output-side fairness controlfunction of output port





6-59



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set qos out-weight rate

Setting of output-side fairness control function rate of output port

Sets the output-side fairness control function rate of an output port.


set qos out-weight rate P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5


set qos out-weight rate P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (remain) P5


set qos out-weight rate P1 (line module number) P3 (vid) P4 P5


set qos out-weight rate P1 (line module number) P3 (remain) P5


fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port


* A line module number can be specified only when the port type is ATM155, ATMP,TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP15.

When a port (line) type is specified in P1.


FE port: 1/1 to 4/8GbE port: 3/1 to 10/1








P6: Rate value

FE: 0 to 100000 (Kbps)

GbE, ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, TDMP155: 0 to 1000000 (Kbps)* The granularity is 25 (Kbps).


Default value None


Note If the GbE line mode function is se to FE in GbE-PV2, the maximum number of VLANsthat can be set for one port is the same as the maximum number of FE ports.

6-60



QoS

Input example *Switch@1# set qos out-weight rate fe 1/1 vid 1 1000

*Switch@1# set qos out-weight rate gbe 6/1 vid VLAN100 1000000

*Switch@1# set qos out-weight rate 3 vid 100 1

*Switch@1# set qos out-weight rate 3 remain 0

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands




show qos out-weight fairness Display of output-side fairness control

function of output portclear qos out-weight fairness Clearing of output-side fairness control

function of output port

6-61



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set qos out-weight fairness

Setting of output-side fairness control function weight of output port

Sets the output-side fairness control function weight of and output port.


set qos out-weight fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (vid) P4 P5


set qos out-weight fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3 (remain) P5


set qos out-weight fairness P1 (line module number) P3 (vid) P4 P5


set qos out-weight fairness P1 (line module number) P3 (remain) P5


fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port





FE port: 1/1 to 4/8GbE port: 3/1 to 10/1








P5: Weight value (0 to 40000)

* The setting granularity is 1 (Weight).

* The default are fe, gbe, atm155, atmp, tdmp, atmp155, and tdmp155: 1 (Weight).* Maximum number of registrations: gbe, atm155, atmp, tdmp, atmp155, and tdmp155

= 2047 (+1)/fe=255 (+1)(+1) is for Remaining-VLAN.

* Remaining-VLAN is registered when the output-side fairness control mode function isenabled.

* You cannot clear Remaining-VLAN.

Default value P5: fe, gbe, atm155, atmp, tdmp, atmp155, tdmp155: 1 (Weight)


6-62



QoS

Note If the GbE line mode function is se to FE in GbE-PV2, the maximum number of VLANsthat can be set for one port is the same as the maximum number of FE ports.

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos out-weight fairness fe 4/1 vid 100 40000

*Switch@1# set qos out-weight fairness gbe 6/1 vid VLAN100 0

*Switch@1# set qos out-weight fairness 3 vid 100 1

*Switch@1# set qos out-weight fairness 3 remain 0

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands





6-63



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port

Setting of upper threshold of output-side fairness control function of output port

Sets the upper threshold of the output-side fairness control function of an output port.

Input formats - Setting specified port/the upper threshold of the output-side fairness controlfunction

set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port P1 (port (line) type) P2 P3

- Setting specified line module/ the upper threshold of the output-side fairnesscontrol function (ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155)

set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port P1 (line module number) P3

Parameters P1: Port (line) type specification { fe | gbe } or line module number specificationfe: FE port

gbe: GbE port





FE port: 1/1 to 4/8


P3: Rate value

FE: 1000 to 100000 (Kbps)GbE, ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, TDMP155: 1000 to 1000000 (Kbps)



Default values P3:

fe: 100 (Mbps)

gbe, atm155, atmp, tdmp, atmp155, tdmp155: 1 (Gbps)


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port fe 1/1 30000

*Switch@1# set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port gbe 6/1 1000000

*Switch@1# set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port 3 50000

*Switch@1#

Output item

6-64



QoS

Relatedcommands

set qos out-priority fairness Setting of priority discard function of output-sidefairness control function of output port

set qos out-weight fairness Setting of output-side fairness control function weightof output port

show qos out-weight fairness Display of output-side fairness control function ofoutput port

clear qos out-weight fairness Clearing of output-side fairness control function ofoutput port

6-65



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show qos out-weight fairness

Display of output-side fairness control function of output port

Shows the output-side fairness control function of an output port.

Input formats - Displaying specified port/all VLANs

show qos out-weight fairness [P1 (port (line)number)]

- Displaying specified line module/all VLANs

show qos out-weight fairness [P1 (line module number)]

- Displaying specified port/specified VLAN

show qos out-weight fairness [P1 (port (line)number) [P2 (vid) P3]]


show qos out-weight fairness [P1 (port (line)number) [P2 (remain)]]

- Displaying specified line module/specified VLAN(ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155)

show qos out-weight fairness [P1 (line module number) [P2 (vid) P3]]

- Displaying specified line module/specified Remaining-VLAN(ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155)

show qos out-weight fairness [P1 (line module number) [P2 (remain)]]

- Displaying all ports/specified VLAN

show qos out-weight fairness [P2 (vid) P3]

- Displaying all VLANs/specified Remaining-VLANshow qos out-weight fairness [P2 (remain)]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number or line module number specification

Port (line) number: 1/1 to 10/8 (single specification)







P3: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple values can be specified.)


* Multiple VLAN IDs can be specified only if P1 is omitted.

* When all the parameters are omitted, information for all the VLANs set in all the portsand Remaining-VLANs, and information for all the VLANs set in all the line modulenumbers are shown.

* About displayed data if P2 is omitted.

If a port (line) number is specified in P1, information for all the VLANs set in thespecified port and Remaining-VLANs are shown per port.

If a line module number is specified in P1, information for all the VLANs set in the

specified line module number is shown per line module.* When P1 is omitted, information is shown per VLAN.

6-66



QoS

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show qos out-weight fairness 6/1

QoS Output Port Fairness Table==============================

Maximum- Real-Maximum- Total-25Kbps- Registered Available

Port Slot Rate(Kbps) Rate(Kbps) basedRate(Kbps) -VID -VID

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

6/1 --- 1000000 1000000 25 2 2046

QoS Output VLAN Fairness Table

==============================

Port : 6/1

VID : 100

Priority Profile : 1

=========================

25Kbps-based- Real-

Priority Weight Rate(Kbps) Rate(Kbps) Burst(KByte)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Class-All : -- 0 0 0.00 ---

Class-A : 6,7 --- --- --- 127

Class-B : 4,5 --- --- --- 64

Class-C : 0,3 --- --- --- 32

Class-D : 1,2 --- --- --- 16

No Entry : none --- --- --- ---

Port : 6/1

VID : remain

Priority Profile : 1

=========================

25Kbps-based- Real-

Priority Weight Rate(Kbps) Rate(Kbps) Burst(KByte)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Class-All : --- 1 25 1000000.00 ---

Class-A : 6,7 --- --- --- 127

Class-B : 4,5 --- --- --- 64

Class-C : 0,3 --- --- --- 32

Class-D : 1,2 --- --- --- 16No Entry : none --- --- --- ---

*Switch@1#

6-67



QoS

Output items (QoS Output Port Fairness Table)


Slot: Line (slot) module number

Maximum-Rate: Upper threshold of line

Real-Maximum-Rate: Real upper threshold of lineTotal-25Kbps- based-Rate: Total rate value (1weight=25Kbps)

Registered-VID: Number of VLANs that are already set

Available-VID: Number of remaining available VLANs

(QoS Output VLAN Fairness Table)


VID: VLAN ID

Priority Profile: Profile number


Weight: Weight value25Kbps-based-Rate: Rate value (1weight=25Kbps)

Real-Rate: Real rate value

Burst: Burst tolerance

Relatedcommands





6-68



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear qos out-weight fairness

Clearing of output-side fairness control function of output port

Clears the output-side fairness control function of an output port.

Input formats - Clearing specified port/VLAN-output-side fairness control setting

clear qos out-weight fairness P1 (port (line) type) P2 [P3]

- Clearing specified line module/VLAN-output-side fairness control setting(ATM155/ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155)

clear qos out-weight fairness P1 (line module number) [P3]







FE port: 1/1 to 4/8





* When P3 is omitted, the fairness control settings of all the VLANs registered in thespecified port are cleared.

Default value None



Input examples *Switch@1# clear qos out-weight fairness fe 1/1 70

*Switch@1# clear qos out-weight fairness gbe 6/1 VLAN100*Switch@1# clear qos out-weight fairness 3 500

*Switch@1# clear qos out-weight fairness 3


*Switch@1#

Output item

6-69



QoS

Relatedcommands



set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port Setting of upper threshold of output-side

fairness control function of output port


6-70



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set qos initial-class-map

Setting of default priority mapping

Sets default priority mapping.

Input formats - Setting default

set qos initial-class-map P1 P2 (default)

- Setting default priority mapping

set qos initial-class-map P1 P2 (class-a) P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9

Parameters P1: Band specification { in-maximum | in-fairness | out-maximum }

in-maximum: Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of input port

in-fairness: Specification of input-side fairness control function of multiport

out-maximum: Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of output port

* Specification of input-side fairness control function of multiport is unsupported in P1.

P2: Class A priority specification { class-a } or device initial value specification { default }



When class A priority is specified in P2.



none: Unset


class-b: Class B priority



none: Unset


class-c: Class C priority



none: Unset


class-d: Class D priority



none: Unset

* You cannot specify none for all classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8).

Specify priority for any of classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8).

* The priority to be specified in any of classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8)cannot be duplicated with the priority specified in any other class.

* The priority not specified in any of classes A to D (P2, P4, P6, and P8) doesnot belong to any class.

* When P2 (default) is specified, the device initial value is assumed.

Default value P2: 6,7 P4: 4,5 P6: 0,3 P8:1,2

6-71



QoS


Notes To inhibit a priority from belonging to a class, specify “none” explicitly.

If command mode is safety mode, execution is confirmed after this command has beenentered.

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos initial-class-map in-maximum class-a 4,5,7 class-b 0class-c 1,2,3,6 class-d none

*Switch@1# set qos initial -class-map out-maximum class-a 4-6 class-b 1,2class-c 0,3 class-d 7

*Switch@1# set qos initial -class-map fairness default

*Switch@1#

Output item

Related

commands



show qos initial-class-map Display of default priority mapping

6-72



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show qos initial-class-map

Display of default priority mapping

Shows default priority mapping.

Input format show qos initial-class-map

Parameter None

Default value None


Notes The default priority mapping of the maximum bandwidth limit function of an input port isshown.

The default priority mapping of the maximum bandwidth limit function of an output port isshown.

The default priority mapping of the multiport fairness control function is shown.

* Because the default priority mapping of the multiport fairness control function isunsupported function, the default value is shown.

Input example *Switch@1# show qos initial-class-map

QoS Default Class Mapping Table

===============================

In-Maximum In-Fairness Out-Maximum

(Priority) (Priority) (Priority)

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Class-A : 6,7 6,7 6,7

Class-B : 4,5 4,5 4,5

Class-C : 0,3 0,3 0,3

Class-D : 1,2 1,2 1,2

No Entry : none --- none

*Switch@1#

Output items In-Maximum: Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of input port

In-Fairness: Specification of multiport fairness control function

Out-Maximum: Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of output port

Class-A to Class-D: Class mapping

6-73



QoS

Relatedcommands







set qos initial-class-map Setting of default priority mapping

6-74



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set qos initial-priority

Setting of default burst tolerance

Sets default burst tolerance.

Input formats - Setting default burst tolerance

set qos initial-priority P1 (band specification) P2 (burst tolerance for class-a) P3 P4P5

- Setting default

set qos initial-priority P1 (band specification) P2 (default)

- Setting default burst tolerance (RED use)

set qos initial-priority P1 (band specification (RED use)) P2P3 (burst tolerance (upper threshold) for class-a) P4 [P5] P6 P7 [P8] P9 P10 [P11]P12 P13 [P14]

- Setting default (RED use)

set qos initial-priority P1 (band specification (RED use)) P2 P3 (default)

Parameters P1: Band specification { in-maximum out-maximum in-fairness out-fairness } orband specification (RED use) { in-maximum-red | out-maximum-red }

in-maximum: Specification of maximum band limitation of input port

out-maximum: Specification of maximum band limitation of output port

in-fairness: Specification of input-side fairness control of multiport

out-fairness: Specification of output-side fairness control of output port

in-maximum-red: Specification of maximum band limitation of input port (RED use)

out-maximum-red: Specification of maximum band limitation of output port (RED use)

* Specification of input-side fairness control function of multiport is unsupported in P1.

When band specification is specified in P1.

P2: Burst tolerance A specification or device initial value specification { default }

Burst tolerance A: class-a 1 to 127 (Kbyte)


When burst tolerance A is specified in P2.




When band specification (RED use) is specified in P1.

P2: Port (line) type { fe | gbe }

fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port

P3: Burst tolerance A (upper threshold) specification or device initial valuespecification { default }

Burst tolerance A (upper threshold)




6-75



QoS

When burst tolerance A (upper threshold) is specified in P3.

P4: Burst tolerance A (lower threshold) or probability disable { disable }

Burst tolerance A (lower threshold)


GbE port: class-a 1 to 29999 (Kbyte)disable: Probability disable

When burst tolerance A (lower threshold) is specified in P4.


P6: Burst tolerance B (upper threshold)

FE port: class-b 1 to 3000 (Kbyte)

GbE port: class-b 1 to 30000 (Kbyte)

P7: Burst tolerance B (lower threshold) or probability disable { disable }

Burst tolerance B (lower threshold)



disable: Probability disable When burst tolerance B (lower threshold) is specified in P7.


P9: Burst tolerance C (upper threshold)

FE port: class-c 1 to 3000 (Kbyte)

GbE port: class-c 1 to 30000 (Kbyte)

P10: Burst tolerance C (lower threshold) or probability disable { disable }

Burst tolerance C (lower threshold)



disable: Probability disable

When burst tolerance C (lower threshold) is specified in P10.


P12: Burst tolerance D (upper threshold)



P13: Burst tolerance D (lower threshold) or probability disable { disable }

Burst tolerance D (lower threshold)



disable: Probability disable

When burst tolerance D (lower threshold) is specified in P13.P14: Probability D (1 to 32)

Default value None

Usagecondition

None

Notes You cannot set a value greater than the value set in P3 in P4. You cannot also set avalue greater than the values set in P3 in P6, P7, P9, P10, P12, and P13.

If command mode is safety mode, execution is confirmed after this command has beenentered.

6-76



QoS

Input example *Switch@1# set qos initial-priority in-maximum class-a 96 class-b 64 class-c2 class-d 1

*Switch@1# set qos initial-priority out-maximum default

*Switch@1# set qos initial-priority in-maximum-red gbe class-a 30000 2999932 class-b 5000 4000 16 class-c 3000 2000 2 class-d 1000 500 1

*Switch@1# set qos initial-priority out-maximum-red fe class-a 96 disable

class-b 64 32 10 class-c 3000 20 32 class-d 2000 10 1*Switch@1# set qos initial-priority out-maximum-red gbe default

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set qos in-priority maximum Setting oft priority discard function per input VLAN


set qos out-priority fairness Setting of priority discard function of output-sidefairness control function of output port

show qos initial-priority Display of default burst tolerance

6-77



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show qos initial-priority

Display of default burst tolerance

Shows default burst tolerance.

Input format show qos initial-priority

Parameter None

Default value None


Note * Because the default burst tolerance of input-side fairness control function of multiport(in-fairness) is unsupported function, the default value is shown.

Input example *Switch@1# show qos initial-priority

QoS Initial Burst Table

=======================

In-Maximum In-Fairness Out-Fairness Out-Maximum

(KByte) (KByte) (KByte) (KByte)

------------------------------------------------------------

Class-A : 127 14 127 127Class-B : 64 14 64 64

Class-C : 32 14 32 32

Class-D : 16 14 16 16

QoS Initial Burst(RED) Table

============================

In-Maximum(FE)

==============

Maximum-Burst(KByte) Minimum-Burst(KByte) Probability

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Class-A : 127 disabled disabled

Class-B : 64 disabled disabledClass-C : 32 16 32(100%)

Class-D : 16 8 32(100%)

In-Maximum(GbE)

===============


-----------------------------------------------------------------------


Class-B : 64 disabled disabled

Class-C : 32 16 32(100%)

Class-D : 16 8 32(100%)

Out-Maximum(FE)

6-78



QoS

===============


-----------------------------------------------------------------------



Class-C : 32 16 32(100%)

Class-D : 16 8 32(100%)

Out-Maximum(GbE)

================


-----------------------------------------------------------------------



Class-C : 32 16 32(100%)

Class-D : 16 8 32(100%)

*Switch@1#

Output items (QoS Initial Burst Table)

In-maximum: Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of input port

In-fairness: Specification of input-side fairness control function of multiport

Output-fairness: Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of output port

Out-maximum: Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of output port

Class-A to Class-D: Burst tolerance

(QoS Initial Burst (RED) Table)

In-Maximum(FE): Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of input (FE port)Maximum-Burst: Upper threshold burst tolerance

Minimum-Burst: Lower threshold burst tolerance


In-Maximum(GBE): Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of input (GbEport)

Maximum-Burst: Upper threshold burst tolerance



Out-Maximum(FE): Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of output port (FEport)

Maximum-Burst: Upper threshold burst toleranceMinimum-Burst: Lower threshold burst tolerance


Out-Maximum(GBE): Specification of maximum bandwidth limit function of output port(GBE port)

Maximum-Burst: Upper threshold burst tolerance



Relatedcommand

set qos initial-priority Setting of default burst tolerance

6-79



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set qos measure-cycle

Setting of subtraction cycle

Sets a subtraction cycle.

Input format set qos measure-cycle P1

Parameter P1: Subtraction cycle { short | long }

short: Short cycle specification

long: Long cycle specification

Default value P1:long


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos measure-cycle short

*Switch@1# set qos measure-cycle long

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show qos measure-cycle Display of subtraction cycle

6-80



QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show qos measure-cycle

Display of subtraction cycle

Shows a subtraction cycle.

Input format show qos measure-cycle

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set qos measure-cycle short

*Switch@1# show qos measure-cycleQoS Measure Cycle Table

=======================

Cycle : short

*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# set qos measure-cycle long*Switch@1# show qos measure-cycle

QoS Measure Cycle Table

=======================

Cycle : long

*Switch@1#

Output items Cycle: Subtraction cycle

short: Short cycle specification

long: Long cycle specification

Relatedcommand

set qos measure-cycle Setting of subtraction cycle

6-81



QoS

(Blank page)

6-82



Switch Control

7 Switch Control

7-1



Switch Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set frame-size

Setting of frame size

Sets a frame size.

Input format set frame-size P1 P2

Parameters P1: Target port type { fe | gbe | atm }

fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port

atm: ATM transmission path

P2: Frame size maximum valuefe 64 to 1536 (byte)

gbe 64 to 9000 (byte)

atm 64 to 1536 (byte)

Default value P2: 1536


Notes Tagbase VLAN port: Allowable frame size = Command specification value + 4 (Byte)

In a GbE line module for which the line module operation is set to FE, even if the value

set for the frame size exceeds 1536 bytes, it is dealt as 1536 bytes.

Input example *Switch@1# set frame-size fe 1536

*Switch@1# set frame-size gbe 9000

*Switch@1# set frame-size atm 1536

*Switch@1#

Output item

Related

command

show frame-size Display of frame size

7-2



Switch Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show frame-size

Display of frame size

Shows a frame size.

Input format show frame-size

Parameter None

Default value None


Notes Tagbase VLAN port: Allowable frame size = Command specification value + 4 (Byte)

Input example *Switch@1# show frame-size

Frame Size Value (Byte)

=======================FE-Port : 1536

GbE-Port : 9000

ATM-Port : 1536

*Switch@1#

Output items FE-Port: Frame value of FE port

GbE-Port: Frame value of GbE port

ATM-Port: Frame value of ATM transmission path

Relatedcommand

set frame-size Setting of frame size

7-3



Switch Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set fdb table mode

Setting of maximum MAC learning count mode

Sets the maximum MAC learning count mode.

Input format set fdb table mode P1

Parameter P1: Maximum learning count { 16k | 512k }

16k: 16K entry mode

512k: 512K entry mode

Default value P1: 512k

Usage condition This setting is reflected after the "write memory" command is executed and the device isrestarted.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set fdb table mode 16k

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

show fdb table mode Display of maximum MAC learning count mode

set ether-ring Setting of EtherRing enable/disable

7-4



Switch Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show fdb table mode

Display of maximum MAC learning count mode

Shows the maximum MAC learning count mode currently set.

Input format show fdb table mode

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show fdb table mode

FDB Table Mode Information

==========================

Present : 512k

Reserve : 16k

*Switch@1#

Output items Present: Maximum MAC learning count mode (Current)

Reserve: Maximum MAC learning count mode (After restart)

Relatedcommand

set fdb table mode Setting of maximum MAC learning count mode

7-5



Switch Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set fdb agingtime

Setting of aging time

Sets FDB aging time.

Input format set fdb agingtime P1

Parameter P1: Aging time (10 to 1000000 seconds)

Default value P1: 300 seconds


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set fdb agingtime 1000000

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show fdb agingtime Display of aging time

7-6



Switch Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show fdb agingtime

Display of aging time

Shows the currently set FDB aging time.

Input format show fdb agingtime

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show fdb agingtime

FDB AgingTime Configuration

===========================

AgingTime (sec) : 1000000

(hh:mm:ss) : 277:46:40

*Switch@1#

Output items Agingtime(sec): Aging time value (second)

Agingtime(hh:mm:ss): Aging time value (hour:minute:second)

Relatedcommand

set fdb agingtime Setting of aging time

7-7



Switch Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show fdb count port

Display of MAC learning count per port

Shows the MAC learning count per port.

Input format show fdb count port [P1]


* When P1 is omitted, the MAC learning counts for all ports are shown.

Default value None


Notes When MAC learning information learned is shown in ATMP and TDMP line modules, ofthe port (line) numbers in the same line module, the lowest port (line) number serves asthe pilot port (line) number, and the display is as follows.

- When specifying a port (line) number

All the MACs learned in the same line module are shown on the assumption that theyare learned using a pilot port (line) number. For this reason, even if a pilot port (line)number and a specified port (line) number are different, the pilot port (line) number isshown.

- When omitting a port (line) number

All the MACs learned in the same line module are shown on the assumption that theyare learned using a pilot port (line) number.

* A pilot port (line) number is the lowest port (line) number in the same line module.

Input example *Switch@1# show fdb count port 1/1-8

FDB Learned Entry

=================

Port Learned-Entry

-----------------------------

1/1 1

1/2 0

1/3 01/4 0

1/5 0

1/6 0

1/7 0

1/8 0

*Switch@1#


Learned-Entry: FDB learning count

7-8



Switch Control

Relatedcommands

show fdb count vid Display of MAC learning count per VLAN

show fdb count all Display of MAC learning count per device

show fdb table port Display of MAC learning information per port

show fdb table vid Display of MAC learning information per VLAN

7-9



Switch Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show fdb count vid

Display of MAC learning count per VLAN

Shows the MAC learning count per VLAN.

Input format show fdb count vid [P1]




* When P1 is omitted, the MAC learning counts for all the VLANs are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show fdb count vid 1-5

FDB Learned Entry

=================

VID Name Learned-Entry

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

---------

1 VLAN0001 1

2 0

3 0

4 0

5 0

*Switch@1#

Output items VID: VLAN ID

Name: VLAN name

Learned-Entry: FDB learning count

Relatedcommands

show fdb count port Display of MAC learning count per port




7-10



Switch Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show fdb count all

Display of MAC learning count per device

Shows the MAC learning count per device.

Input format show fdb count all

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show fdb count all

FDB Learned Entry

=================

Total Learned Entry : 15000

*Switch@1#

Output item Total Learned Entry: FDB learning count

Relatedcommands





7-11



Switch Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show fdb table

Display of MAC learning information

Shows the MAC learning information.

Input format show fdb table

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage condition For ATMP and TDMP line modules, specify a pilot port (line) number only.


Notes None

Input example *Switch@1# show fdb table

Data Transferring......

FDB Learning Table

==================

Port MAC Address VID Name

---------------------------------------------------------------

1/1 00:00:00:00:00:01 1 VLAN0001

4/1 00:00:00:00:40:94 4094 VLAN4094

12/1 00:00:00:00:00:03 1 VLAN0001

*Switch@1#



VID: VLAN ID

Name VLAN name

Relatedcommands


clear fdb table port Display of MAC learning information per port

clear fdb table vid Display of MAC learning information per VLAN

7-12



Switch Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show fdb table port

Display of MAC learning information per port

Shows MAC learning information per port.

Input format show fdb table port [P1]


* When P1 is omitted, MAC learning information for all the ports is shown.

Default value None


Notes When MAC learning information learned is shown in ATMP and TDMP line modules, ofthe port (line) numbers in the same line module, the lowest port (line) number serves asthe pilot port (line) number, and the display is as follows.

- When specifying a port (line) number

All the MACs learned in the same line module are shown on the assumption that theyare learned using a pilot port (line) number. For this reason, even if a pilot port (line)number and a specified port (line) number are different, the pilot port (line) number isshown.

- When omitting a port (line) number

All the MACs learned in the same line module are shown on the assumption that theyare learned using a pilot port (line) number.


Input example *Switch@1# show fdb table port

Data Transferring.

Data Searching..

FDB Learning Table

==================

Port MAC Address VID Name

---------------------------------------------------------------

1/1 00:00:00:00:00:01 1 VLAN00014/1 00:00:00:00:40:94 4094 VLAN4094

12/1 00:00:00:00:00:03 1 VLAN0001

*Switch@1#



VID: VLAN ID

Name: VLAN name

7-13



Switch Control

Relatedcommands



clear fdb table port Clearing of MAC learning information per port

7-14



Switch Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear fdb table port

Clearing of MAC learning information per port

Clears MAC learning information for the specified port.

Input format clear fdb table port [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (single specification)

* When P1 is omitted, MAC learning information for all the ports is cleared.

Default value None



For ATMP and TDMP line modules, the operation is as follows.

If the VLAN ID that is the same as that set in the specified port (line) number is set inanother port in the same line module when MAC learning information is cleared per port,the MAC learning information relating to the VLAN ID is also cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# clear fdb table port

Would you like to clear the information? :(Y/N): y

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand


7-15



Switch Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show fdb table vid

Display of MAC learning information per VLAN

Shows MAC learning information per VLAN.

Input format show fdb table vid [P1]




* When P1 is omitted, MAC learning information for all the VLANs is shown.

Default value None


Notes When MAC learning information learned is shown in ATMP and TDMP line modules, ofthe port (line) numbers in the same line module, the lowest port (line) number serves asthe pilot port (line) number. All the MACs learned in the same line module are shownon the assumption that they are learned using a pilot port (line) number.

Input example *Switch@1# show fdb table vid

Data Transferring.

Data Searching..

FDB Learning Table

==================

VID Name MAC Address Port

---------------------------------------------------------------

1 VLAN0001 00:00:00:00:00:01 1/1

1 VLAN0001 00:00:00:00:40:94 12/1

4094 VLAN4094 00:00:00:00:00:03 4/1

*Switch@1#

Output items VID: VLAN IDName: VLAN name



Relatedcommands



clear fdb table vid Clearing of MAC learning information per VLAN

7-16



Switch Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear fdb table vid

Clearing of MAC learning information per VLAN

Clears MAC learning information for the specified VLAN.

Input format clear fdb table vid P1




Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear fdb table vid 1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand


7-17



Switch Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set ifg over-rate

Setting of IFG overrate mode

Sets IFG overrate mode.

Input format set ifg over-rate P1

Parameter P1: IFG overrate mode { enable | disable }

enable: Enables IFG overrate mode

disable: Disables IFG overrate mode



Note This function is valid only when the frame that flowed in from the port set in the portbaseVLAN goes out of the port (line) set in the tagbase VLAN of the GbE line module.

Input example *Switch@1# set ifg over-rate enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show ifg over-rate Display of IFG overrate mode

7-18



Switch Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show ifg over-rate

Display of IFG overrate mode

Shows IFG overrate mode.

Input format show ifg over-rate

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ifg over-rate

IFG Over-Rate Configuration

===========================

Over-Rate : enabled

*Switch@1#

Output items Over-Rate: enabled: IFG overrate mode enabledDisabled: IFG overrate mode disabled

Relatedcommand

set ifg over-rate Setting of IFG overrate mode

7-19



Switch Control

(Blank page)

7-20



Route Control

8 Route Control

8-1



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set spantree

Setting of spanning tree protocol enable/disable support

Sets whether to enable or disable spanning tree protocol support.

Input format set spantree P1

Parameter P1: Spanning tree protocol support setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables spanning tree protocol support

disable: Disables spanning tree protocol support



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set spantree enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show spantree mode Display of spanning tree mode

8-2



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set spantree mode

Setting of spanning tree mode

Sets spanning tree mode.

Input format set spantree mode P1

Parameter P1: Spanning tree mode { rstp | stp }

rstp: RSTP mode

stp: STP mode

Default value P1: rstp

Usage condition You can enter this command only when spanning tree protocol support is disabled.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set spantree mode stp

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

show spantree mode Display of spanning tree mode

show spantree info Display of spanning tree switch information

8-3



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show spantree mode

Display of spanning tree mode

Shows spanning tree mode.

Input format show spantree mode

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show spantree mode

Spantree Mode Information

=========================

Mode : RSTP

Status : disabled

*Switch@1#

Output items Mode: Mode type

RSTP: RSTP mode

STP: STP mode

Status: Spanning tree enable/disable status

enabled: Spanning tree enabled

disabled: Spanning tree disabled

Relatedcommand

set spantree mode Setting of spanning tree mode

8-4



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set spantree priority

Setting of switch priority

Sets a switch priority.

Input format set spantree priority P1

Parameter P1: Priority

RSTP mode: 0 to 61440 * Setting granularity: 4096

STP mode: 0 to 65535

* If the priority is not a multiple of the setting granularity, this parameter results in an

error.



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set spantree priority 61440

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show spantree info Display of spanning tree switch information.

8-5



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set spantree time

Setting of spanning tree timer

Sets a spanning tree timer.

- Default specification

set spantree time P1 (default)

Input formats

- Type setting (hello time/maximum aging time/forward delay time)

set spantree time P1 (hello | maxage | forward) P2

Parameters P1: Setting type specification { default | hello | maxage | forward }

default: Default setting

hello: Hello time

maxage: Maximum aging time

forward: Forward delay time

* Multiple setting of hello, maxage, and forward is possible.

* When entering all the hello, maxage, and forward parameters, you must enter themin any of the following orders:hello->maxage->forward, maxage->hello->forward, and forward->hello->maxage

When hello, maxage, or forward is specified in P1.

P2: Time setting (seconds)

When hello is specified: 1 to 10

When maxage is specified: 6 to 40

When forward is specified: 4 to 30

Default values P1: default

Hello time: 2 seconds

Maximum aging time: 20 seconds

Forward delay time: 15 seconds

Usageconditions

The spanning tree timer to be set must meet the following:

2 × (forward delay time - 1) ≥ maximum aging time

Maximum aging time ≥ 2 × (hello time + 1)

Note An unspecified type is not set.

Input example *Switch@1# set spantree time hello 4 maxage 10 forward 12

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand


8-6



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set spantree txholdcount

Setting of hold count

Sets a hold count.

Input format set spantree txholdcount P1

Parameter P1: Maximum BPDU transmission count (1 to 10 times)

Default value P1: 3


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set spantree txholdcount 10

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand


8-7



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show spantree info

Display of spanning tree switch information

Shows spanning tree switch information.

Input format show spantree info

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show spantree info

STP Global Information

======================

Spanning Tree Version : IEEE802.1W(RSTP)

STP Priority : 61440

Time Since Topology Change (sec) : ---

STP Topology Changes : ---

STP Designated Root : ---STP Root Cost : ---

STP Root Port Number : ---

STP MAX Age (sec): ---

STP Hello Time (sec): ---

STP Hold Time (sec): ---

STP Forward Delay (sec): ---

Local Switch Information

========================

STP Bridge MAX Age (sec): 20

STP Bridge Hello Time (sec): 2

STP Bridge Forward Delay (sec): 15STP TX Hold Count : 10

*Switch@1#

8-8



Route Control

Output items Spanning Tree Version: Spanning tree version

STP Priority: Spanning tree switch priority

Time Since Topology Change (sec): Topology post-change time

STP Topology Changes: Topology change count

STP Designated Root: Spanning tree root switch

STP Root Cost: Spanning tree root costSTP Root Port Number: Spanning tree root port number

STP MAX Age (sec): Maximum aging time of spanning tree

STP Hello Time (sec): Hello time of spanning tree

STP Hold Time (sec): Hold time of spanning tree

STP Forward Delay (sec): Forward delay time of spanning tree

STP Bridge MAX Age (sec): Maximum aging time

STP Bridge Hello Time (sec): Hello time

STP Bridge Forward Delay (sec): Forward delay time

STP TX Hold Count: Transmission hold count value

Relatedcommands

set spantree mode Setting of spanning tree mode

set spantree priority Setting of switch priority

set spantree time Setting of spanning tree timer

set spantree txholdcount Setting of hold count

8-9



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set spantree port

Setting of spanning tree enable/disable per port

Sets whether to enable or disable the spanning tree per port.

Input format set spantree port P1 P2


P2: Spanning tree per port setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables spanning tree per port

disable: Disables spanning tree per port



Note Disabled ports are excluded from the spanning tree.

Input example *Switch@1# set spantree port 9/1 enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show spantree port Display of spanning tree port information

8-10



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set spantree port priority

Setting of priority per port

Sets a priority per port.

Input format set spantree port priority P1 P2


P2: Priority

RSTP mode: 0 to 240 * Setting granularity: 16

STP mode: 0 to 255

* If the priority is not a multiple of the setting granularity, this parameter results in anerror.



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set spantree port priority 8/1 240

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand


8-11



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set spantree port cost

Setting of path cost per port

Sets path cost per port.

Input format set spantree port cost P1 P2


P2: Port cost value or automatic setting { auto }

RSTP mode: 1 to 200000000

STP mode: 1 to 65535

Automatic setting: auto



Note When setting auto, the port cost value depends on the port speed.

- Actual default values when auto is set:

RSTP mode STP mode

10Mbps: 2000000 10Mbps: 100

100Mbps: 200000 100Mbps: 19

1Gbps: 20000 1Gbps: 4

Input example *Switch@1# set spantree port cost 9/1 auto

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand


8-12



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show spantree port

Display of spanning tree port information

Shows spanning tree port information.

Input format show spantree port [P1]


* When P1 is omitted, spanning tree port information for all the ports is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show spantree port

RSTP Port Configuration Table

=============================

Port Priority Status Edge Cost

-----------------------------------------------------------

1/1 128 disabled disabled auto


1/3 128 disabled disabled auto1/4 128 disabled disabled auto

<Omission>






RSTP Port Status Table

======================DES DES DES

Port Status Role Cost Bridge Cost Port TC

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

1/1 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb47c7f 0 8001 0




<Omission>


9/1 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb47c7f 0 8041 010/1 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb47c7f 0 8049 0

8-13



Route Control



*Switch@1#


STP(RSTP) Port Configuration Table:

Priority: Priority per port

Status: Spanning tree status per port

enabled: Spanning tree enabled

disabled: Spanning tree disabled

Edge: Edge port status

enabled: Edge port enabled

disabled: Edge port disabled

Cost: Port path cost value or auto

STP(RSTP) Port Status Table:

Status: Spanning tree status per port

disabled: Disabled spanning tree

discarding: Discarding spanning tree

learning: Learning spanning tree

forwarding: Forwarding spanning tree

Role: Port role status

disabled: Disabled port

alternate: Alternate port

designated: Designated port

root: Root port

backup: Backup port

Cost: Path cost value per port

DES Bridge: Specified bridge information

DES Cost: Specified port cost

DES Port: Specified port number

TC: Topology change count

Relatedcommands

set spantree port Setting of spanning tree enable/disable per port

set spantree port priority Setting of priority per port

set spantree port cost Setting of path cost per port

8-14



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set spantree port edge

Setting of edge port

Sets an edge port.

Input format set spantree port edge P1 P2


P2: Edge port setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables edge port

disable: Disables edge port



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set spantree port edge 12/1 enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands


show spantree port edge Display of edge port

8-15



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show spantree port edge

Display of edge port

Shows an edge port.

Input format show spantree port edge [P1]


* When P1 is omitted, all edge ports are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show spantree port edge

RSTP Operational Status of Edge Port Table

==========================================

Port Oper Admin

-------------------------------------



1/3 disabled disabled1/4 disabled disabled









*Switch@1#


Oper: Edge port status

enabled: Edge port enabled

disabled: Edge port disabled

Admin: Edge port settings information

enabled: Edge port settings enabled

disabled: Edge port settings disabled

Relatedcommand

set spantree port edge Setting of edge port

8-16



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set spantree port point-to-point

Setting of point-to-point

Sets point-to-point.

Input format set spantree port point-to-point P1 P2


P2: Point-to-point setting { enable | disable | auto }

enable: Enables point-to-point setting

disable: Disables point-to-point setting

auto: Automatic point-to-point setting


Usage conditions If the port is full duplex when auto is set in P2, point-to-point setting is enabled.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set spantree port point-to-point 1/1 enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show spantree port point-to-point Display of point-to-point

8-17



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show spantree port point-to-point

Display of point-to-point

Shows point-to-point information.

Input format show spantree port point-to-point [P1]


* When P1 is omitted, point-to-point setting information for all the ports is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show spantree port point-to-point

RSTP Operational Status of Point-To-Point Table

===============================================

Port Oper Admin

---------------------------------------------------

1/1 enabled auto

1/2 enabled auto

1/3 enabled auto

1/4 enabled auto

1/5 enabled auto

1/6 enabled auto

1/7 enabled auto

1/8 enabled auto


3/2 enabled auto

3/3 enabled auto

3/4 enabled auto

3/5 enabled auto

3/6 enabled auto

3/7 enabled auto

3/8 enabled auto

8/1 enabled auto

9/1 enabled auto

12/1 enabled auto

*Switch@1#

8-18



Route Control


Oper: Point-to-point status

enabled: Point-to-point enabled

disabled: Point-to-point disabled

Admin: Point-to-point setting information

enabled: Point-to-point setting enableddisabled: Point-to-point setting disabled

auto: Automatic point-to-point setting

Relatedcommand

set spantree port point-to-point Setting of point-to-point

8-19



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu

Setting of BPDU transparency enable/disable per VLAN

Sets whether to enable or disable BPDU transparency per VLAN.

- Specifying all VLANs

set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu P1 (all) P3

Input formats

- Specifying individual VLAN

set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu P1 (vid) P2 P3

Parameters P1: Individual specification { vid } or all specification { all }

vid: Individual VLAN specification

all: All VLAN specification

When vid is specified in P1




P3: Flooding setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables flooding

disable: Disables flooding


Usage conditions To enable the BPDU transparency function, enable the spanning tree function. If theBPDU transparency function is enabled when the spanning tree function is enabled, theBPDUs to be made transparent are excluded from the spanning tree function.

Notes The frames to which this function is to be applied are frames that comply withIEEE802.1D and have the destination MAC address 01:80:C2:00:00:00.

Tagged BPDU reception does not comply with IEEE802.1D but the appropriate switchis supported.

Input example *Switch@1# set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu vid 100-105 enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show l2p-transparent stp-bpdu Display of BPDU transparency function setting inspecified VLAN

8-20



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show l2p-transparent stp-bpdu

Display of BPDU transparency function setting in specified VLAN

Shows all the VLAN IDs for which the BPDU transparency function was set.

Input format show l2p-transparent stp-bpdu

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show l2p-transparent stp-bpdu

L2P BPDU Transparent Configuration

==================================

BPDU Transparent VID : 100-105

*Switch@1#

Output item BPDU Transparent VID: All VLAN IDs set as the BPDU transparency function

Relatedcommand

set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu Setting of BPDU transparency enable/disable perVLAN

8-21



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set l2p-transparent reserved-mac

Setting of MAC address transparency function

Sets the MAC address transparency function.

- Disabling MAC address transparency

set l2p-transparent reserved-mac P1 P2 P3 (disable)

Input formats

- Enabling MAC address transparency

set l2p-transparent reserved-mac P1 P2 P3 (enable) [P4 P5] [P6 P7]

Parameters P1: Port (line) type { atm | fe | gbe }


fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port


P3: MAC transparent mode { enable | disable }

enable: Enables MAC transparent mode

disable: Disables MAC transparent mode

When enable is selected in P3

P4: BPDU discard mode specification { bpdu }

P5: BPDU discard mode { admit | block }

admit: Transparency specification

block: Discard specification

P6: LACP discard mode specification { lacp }

P7: LACP discard mode { admit | block }





Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set l2p-transparent reserved-mac fe 2/1 enable bpdu block lacpblock

*Switch@1# set l2p-transparent reserved-mac gbe 8/1 enable lacp block

*Switch@1# set l2p-transparent reserved-mac atm 3/1 enable bpdu block

Output item

Relatedcommand

show l2p-transparent reserved-mac Display of MAC address transparency function

8-22



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show l2p-transparent reserved-mac

Display of MAC address transparency function

Shows the MAC address transparency function.

Input format show l2p-transparent reserved-mac [P1]


* When P1 is omitted, the MAC address transparency functions set in all the ports areshown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show l2p-transparent reserved-mac 2/1-8

L2P Reserved-MAC Transparent Configuration Table

================================================

Port Transparent BPDU LACP

-----------------------------------------------

2/1 enabled block block

2/2 enabled admit block2/3 enabled admit admit

2/4 disabled --- ---





*Switch@1#


Transparent: MAC transparent mode

enabled: MAC transparent mode enabled

disabled: MAC transparent mode disabled

BPDU: BPDU discard mode

admit: Transparency specified

block: Discard specified

LACP: LACP discard mode



Relatedcommand

set l2p-transparent reserved-mac Setting of MAC address transparency function

8-23



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set aggregation group

Setting of link aggregation group

Sets a link aggregation group.

Input format set aggregation group P1 P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] P6 [P7]

Parameters P1: Group index (1 to 32)


P3: Number of valid ports (1 to 8)

* Specify the number of ports to be made valid in the group.

* When P3 is omitted, all the grouped ports are made valid.P4: Standby filtering { standby-block | standby-admit }

standby-block: Discard receiving frames in the standby port

standby-admit: Admit receiving frames in the standby port

* Set either discarding (standby-block) or admitting (standby-admit) receiving framesexcept LACP in the standby port.

* You can specify standby-admit only when local is selected in P5.

* When P4 is omitted, standby-block is assumed.

P5: Aggregation mode { local | dot3ad | passive }

local: Simple aggregation mode

dot3ad: LACP link aggregation mode

passive: Passive mode* When P5 is omitted, local is assumed.

P6: Distribution setting { both-mac | src-mac | dst-mac }

both-mac: XOR values of source MAC address and destination MAC address

src-mac: Source MAC address

dst-mac: Destination MAC address

P7: Group name (1 to 32 characters)

* When P7 is omitted, no group name is assumed.

Default values P3: 8,

P4: standby-block,

P5: local


Note When configuring link aggregation, specify two or more ports (lines).

If no parameter is specified when the setting is overwritten, the default values are set.

Input example *Switch@1# set aggregation group 32 1/1,1/2,1/3 2 standby-admit localboth-mac Index32

*Switch@1#

Output item

8-24



Route Control

Relatedcommand

show aggregation group Display of link aggregation setting status

8-25



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show aggregation group

Display of link aggregation setting status

Shows the link aggregation setting status.

Input format show aggregation group [P1]

Parameter P1: Group identifier { group-index group-name }

group-index: 1 to 32

group-name: 1 to 32 characters

* When P1 is omitted, all the set groups are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show aggregation group 32

Switch Aggregate Table

======================

Aggregated Ports/ Active/ Mode Distribute/

Index Name Filter Time(msec)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

32 1/1-3 2 local both-mac

index32 standby-admit 10000

Switch Aggregate Port Information

=================================

Partner Port

Port Status Status Priority

--------------------------------

1/1 active NO-LACP 128

1/2 active NO-LACP 128

1/3 standby NO-LACP 128

*Switch@1#

8-26



Route Control

Output items Index: Group index

Aggregated Ports: Port (line) number set as link aggregation

Name: Group name

Active-numbers: Number of active ports

Standby-filter: Standby filtering

standby-block: Discards receiving frames except LACPstandby-admit: Admits receiving frames except LACP

Mode: Aggregation mode

local: Simple aggregation

dot3ad: LACP link aggregation mode

passive: Passive mode

Time(msec): Link aggregation protection time setting

Distribute Type: Distribution type setting

both-mac: XOR values of source MAC address and destination MAC address

src-mac: Source MAC address

dst-mac: Destination MAC address

Port: Port (line) numberStatus: block/down/active/standby status per port

block: Port blocked

down: Port unblocked and port physical link down

active: Active port

standby: Standby port

Partner Status: Partner status

LACP: LACP received

NO-LACP: LACP not received

Port Priority: Port priority

Relatedcommand

set aggregation group Setting of link aggregation group

8-27



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear aggregation group

Clearing of link aggregation group

Clears a link aggregation group.

Input format clear aggregation group P1

Parameter P1: Group identifier { group-index group-name }



Default value None


Note Clearing a group by specifying its group name requires that the group name beregistered in the set link aggregation in advance.

Input example *Switch@1# clear aggregation group 1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand


8-28



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set aggregation system priority

Setting of system priority

Sets a link aggregation system priority.

Input format set aggregation system priority P1

Parameter P1: System priority (0 to 65535)


Usage condition If a link aggregation group is already set in the device, you are not allowed to set thesystem priority.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set aggregation system priority 65535

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show aggregation system priority Display of system priority

8-29



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show aggregation system priority

Display of system priority

Shows the link aggregation system priority.

Input format show aggregation system priority

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show aggregation system priority

LAG System Priority

===================

System Priority: 65535

*Switch@1#

Output item LAG System Priority: Link aggregation system priority value

Relatedcommand

set aggregation system priority Setting of system priority

8-30



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set aggregation port priority

Setting of port priority

Sets a link aggregation port priority.

Input format set aggregation port priority P1 P2


P2: Priority (0 to 255)


Usage condition Setting for a port to which the link is down in the link aggregation group cannot beallowed.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set aggregation port priority 1/1 255

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show aggregation port priority Display of port priority

8-31



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show aggregation port priority

Display of port priority

Shows a link aggregation port priority.

Input format show aggregation port priority [P1]


* When P1 is omitted, the priorities of all the installed ports are shown.

Default value None


Notes If P1 is omitted, the priorities of all the installed ports (lines) are shown.

No link aggregation port priority is shown for GbE-MUX and ATM line module ports.

Input example *Switch@1# show aggregation port priority 1/1

LAG Port Information

====================

Port Index Priority

-------------------

1/1 255

*Switch@1#


Index: Group index

Priority: Port priority value

Relatedcommand

set aggregation port priority Setting of port priority

8-32



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set aggregation protection-time

Setting of link aggregation protection time

Sets link aggregation protection time.

Input format set aggregation protection-time P1 P2

Parameters P1: Group identifier { group-index | group-name }



P2: Link aggregation protection time (0 to 10000 ms)

* The setting granularity is 100 ms.* If you do not specify a multiple of the setting granularity, this parameter results in an

error.

Default value P2: 0


Note The link aggregation protection time function is effective for the link aggregation groupthat operates in simple aggregation and for which standby-admit is set.

Input example *Switch@1# set aggregation protection-time 32 10000*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show aggregation protection-time Display of link aggregation protection time

8-33



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show aggregation protection-time

Display of link aggregation protection time

Shows link aggregation protection time.

Input format show aggregation protection-time [P1]

Parameter P1: Group identifier { group-index | group-name }



* When P1 is omitted, link aggregation protection times for group indexes 1 to 32 are

shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example Switch@1# show aggregation protection-time 32

LAG Protection Time Information

===============================

Index Name Time(msec)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

32 index32 10000

Switch@1#

Output items Index: Group index

Name: Group name

Time(msec): Link aggregation protection time (msec)

Relatedcommand

set aggregation protection-time Setting of link aggregation protection time

8-34



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set igmp

Setting of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable

Sets whether to enable or disable the IGMP Snooping function.

- Disabling IGMP Snooping function

set igmp P1 (enable) [P2]

Input formats

- Enabling IGMP Snooping function

set igmp P1 (disable)

Parameters P1: IGMP Snooping function setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables IGMP Snooping function

disable: Disables IGMP Snooping function

When enable is selected in P1

P2: IPv4/IPv6 specification { ipv4 | ipv6 }

ipv4: IPv4

ipv6: IPv6

* When P2 is omitted, ipv4 is assumed.



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set igmp enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show igmp status Display of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable information

8-35



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show igmp status

Display of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable information

Shows IGMP Snooping function enable/disable information.

Input format show igmp status

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show igmp status

IGMP Snooping Status

====================

igmp: ipv4 enabled

*Switch@1#

Output items Igmp: IGMP Snooping function mode settingipv4 enabled: IGMP Snooping function enabled (IPv4)

ipv6 enabled: IGMP Snooping function enabled (IPv6)

disabled: IGMP Snooping function disabled

Relatedcommand

set igmp Setting of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable

8-36



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show igmp mac

Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified MAC

Shows the IGMP Snooping entry for the specified MAC.

Input format show igmp mac [P1]

Parameter P1: MAC address

* When P1 is omitted, IGMP Snooping entry for all the MAC addresses is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show igmp mac

IGMP Snooping Multicast MAC Table

=================================

IGMP Group Address : 01:00:5e:0a:0b:0c

IGMP Group Ports : 1/6

VLAN ID : 1

Total Number of Ports: 1

*Switch@1#

Output items IGMP Group Address: IGMP Snooping MAC address

IGMP Group Ports: Port (line) number registered as the multicast entry

VLAN ID: VLAN ID

Total Number of Ports: Number of ports (lines) allocated to the same group

Relatedcommand

None

8-37



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear igmp mac

Clearing of IGMP Snooping entry for specified group address

Clears the IGMP Snooping entry for the specified group address.

Input format clear igmp mac P1 [P2]

Parameters P1: Group address




* P2 is omitted, IGMP Snooping entries of all the VLANs are cleared.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear igmp mac 01:00:5e:01:01:01 10

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



clear igmp vid Clearing of IGMP Snooping entry for specified VLAN

8-38



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show igmp vid

Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified VLAN

Shows the IGMP Snooping entry for the specified VLAN.

Input format show igmp vid [P1]




* When P1 is omitted, IGMP Snooping entries of all the VLANs are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show igmp vid


=================================

VLAN ID : 1



Total Number of Ports: 1

*Switch@1#

Output items VLAN ID: VLAN ID

IGMP Group Ports: Port (line) number registered as the multicast entry

IGMP Group Address: IGMP Snooping MAC address


Related

command

None

8-39



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show igmp port

Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified port number

Shows the IGMP Snooping entry for the specified port number.

Input format show igmp port [P1]


* When P1 is o omitted, all the IGMP Snooping entries are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show igmp port


=================================



VLAN ID : 1

Total Number of Ports : 1

*Switch@1#

Output items IGMP Group Ports: Port (line) number registered as the multicast entry

IGMP Group Address: IGMP Snooping MAC address

VLAN ID: VLAN ID


Relatedcommand

None

8-40



Route Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear igmp vid

Clearing of IGMP Snooping entry for specified VLAN

Clears the IGMP Snooping entry for the specified VLAN.

Input format clear igmp vid [P1]




* When P1 is omitted, IGMP Snooping entries of all the VLANs are cleared.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear igmp vid 10

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



clear igmp mac Clearing of IGMP Snooping entry for specified group address

8-41



Route Control

Blank page

8-42



Filters

9 Filters

9-1



Filters

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set isolate port

Setting/clearing of port isolate

Sets and clears port isolate.

Input format set isolate port P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Receiving port (line) number or receiving line module number

Receiving port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)

Receiving line module number: 1 to 12 (Multiple values can be specified.)

P2: Destination port (line) number or destination line module number

Destination port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)Destination line module number: 1 to 12 (Multiple values can be specified.)

P3: Port isolate setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables port isolate

disable: Disables port isolate

Default values All the destination port (line) numbers are disabled that correspond to all the receivingport (line) numbers.

Usage conditions You cannot simultaneously set a receiving port (line) number and a receiving linemodule number in P1.

You cannot simultaneously set a destination port (line) number and a destination linemodule number in P2.

If the line module type is ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, TDMP155, or GbE-MUX, only theline module number can be specified.

If the line module type is other than the above, only the port (line) number can bespecified.

Notes Specifying enable in P3 disables transfer of the inflow frame from the specified receivingport (line) to the specified destination port (line).

If enable is specified, the configuration that is already set is not affected because thedestination port (line) number or destination line module number specified in P2 isadded to the receiving port (line) number or receiving line module number specified in

P1.If disable is specified, the other configurations that are already set are not affectedbecause only the destination port (line) number or destination line module number in P2corresponding to the receiving port (line) number or receiving line module numberspecified in P1 is disabled.

Input example *Switch@1# set isolate port 1/1-8/1 1/1-8/1 enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show isolate port Display of port isolate setting status

9-2



Filters

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show isolate port

Display of port isolate setting state

Shows the port isolate setting state.

Input format show isolate port [P1]


* When P1 is omitted, the port isolate setting states of all the ports are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show isolate port

Port-Isolate Configuration

==========================

State of Port-Isolate of Port: 1/1

Transfer-Blocking Port : 1/2-8/1

-----------------------------------------------------------------------


Transfer-Blocking Port : 1/1-1/8,2/2-8/1-----------------------------------------------------------------------


Transfer-Blocking Port :

-----------------------------------------------------------------------


Transfer-Blocking Port :

*Switch@1#

Output items State of Port-Isolate of Port: Receiving port

Transfer-Blocking Port: Destination port whose port isolate setting in the receiving port is

enabled

Relatedcommand

set isolate port Setting/clearing of port isolate

9-3



Filters

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set filter profile

Creating of filtering profile

Creates a filtering profile.

- Setting other

set filter profile P1 P2 (other) P3

- Selecting dest-mac/src-mac in the filter setting

set filter profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 P4 (dest-mac | src-mac) P5 P6

- Selecting ether-type in the filter setting

set filter profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 P4 (ether-type) P5

- Selecting proto-type in the filter setting

set filter profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 P4 (proto-type) P5

Input formats

- Selecting dest-ip/src-ip in the filter setting

set filter profile P1 [P2 (index number)] P3 P4 (dest-ip | src-ip) P5 P6


P2: Index number or others { other }

Index number: 1 to 31

other: Others

* When P2 is omitted, a free and smaller number index is used.(However, if there is an index number that is already registered, that number isused.)

P3: Filtering mode { admit | block }



P4: Filter setting { dest-mac | src-mac | ether-type | proto-type | dest-ip | src-ip }

dest-mac: Destination MAC Address

src-mac: Source MAC Address

ether-type: Ether-Type

proto-type: IPv4 Protocol Type

dest-ip: IPv4 Destination IP Address

src-ip: IPv4 Source IP Address

When dest-mac or src-mac is selected in P4

P5: MAC address

P6: MAC address mask

When ether-type is selected in P4

P5: Ethernet type (0x600 to 0xffff)

When proto-type is selected in P4

P6: Protocol type { tcp | udp | ospf | icmp } or user specification

tcp: TCP

udp: UDP

ospf: OSPF

icmp: ICMP

User specification: 0 to 255

9-4



Filters

When dest-ip or src-ip is selected in P4

P5: IP address

P6: Net mask

Default value None


Note You can set overwrite for a registered index but cannot reregister the index.

Input examples *Switch@1# set filter profile 1 1 admit dest-mac 10:20:30:40:50:60ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:00

*Switch@1# set filter profile 1 10 admit ether-type 0x9100

*Switch@1# set filter profile 2 5 block proto-type tcp

*Switch@1# set filter profile 5 admit proto-type 128

*Switch@1# set filter profile 10 1 block dest-ip 10.20.30.40 255.255.255.0

*Switch@1# set filter profile 20 other block*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

show filter profile Display of filtering profile

clear filter profile Clearing of filtering profile

set filter in-port Setting of input filtering

show filter in-port Display of input filtering

clear filter in-port Clearing of input filtering

set filter out-port Setting of output filteringshow filter out-port Display of output filtering

clear filter out-port Clearing of output filtering

9-5



Filters

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show filter profile

Display of filtering profile

Shows a filtering profile.

Input format show filter profile [P1]


* When P1 is omitted, information for all the profiles registered in the device is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show filter profile

Filter Profile Table

====================

Profile No. : 1

=================

Index Mode Field Type Field Type Information Mask Information

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

1 admit dest-mac 01:02:03:04:05:06 ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:0010 block ether-type 0x9000 ---

15 block proto-type tcp ---

20 block dest-ip 110.120.130.140 255.255.255.0

Other admit --- --- ---

Profile No. : 5

=================

Index Mode Field Type Field Type Information Mask Information

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

1 admit dest-mac 10:20:30:40:50:60 ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:00

5 block proto-type udp ---

6 block proto-type 250 ---10 block dest-ip 10.20.30.40 255.255.255.0

Other admit --- --- ---

*Switch@1#

9-6



Filters

Output items Profile No: Profile number

Index: Profile index

Mode: Mode specification



Field Type: Filter typedest-mac: Destination MAC Address specified

ether-type: Ether-Type specified

proto-type: IPv4 Protocol Type specified

dest-ip: IPv4 Destination IP Address specified

Field Type Information: Filter contents

MAC address: The MAC address is shown when Field Type is dest-mac.

Ethernet type: The Ethernet type is shown when Field Type is ether-type.

Protocol type: The protocol type is shown when Field Type is proto-type.

IP address: The IP address is shown when Field Type is dest-ip.

Mask Information: Mask information

MAC address mask: The MAC mask is shown when Field Type is dest-mac.Subnet mask: The subnet mask is shown when Field Type is dest-ip.

Relatedcommands

set filter profile Creating of filtering profile





set filter out-port Setting of output filtering

show filter out-port Display of output filtering


9-7



Filters

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear filter profile

Clearing of filtering profile

Clears a filtering profile.

Input format clear filter profile [P1 [P2]]


P2: Index number (1 to 31)

* When only P2 is omitted, all the settings of the specified profile are cleared.

* When all the parameters are omitted, all the registered filtering profiles are cleared.

Default value None

Usage condition If command mode is safety mode, you cannot clear the profiles that are already mapped.

Notes If P1 and P2 are omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.

If the index number specified in P2 is not registered, an error occurs.

No error occurs even if the profile number specified in P1 does not exist.

Input example *Switch@1# clear filter profile 1 10

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands









9-8



Filters

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set filter in-port

Setting of input filtering

Sets input filtering.

Input format set filter in-port P1 P2 P3 P4



fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port

P2: Port (line) number (single specification)P3: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }




* If no profile is registered, all data is made transparent.

Default value None


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set filter in-port fe 1/1 100 10

*Switch@1# set filter in-port gbe 6/1 VLAN100 128

*Switch@1# set filter in-port atm 3/1 200 20

*Switch@1#

Output item

Related

commands


show filter profile Display of filtering profileclear filter profile Clearing of filtering profile






9-9



Filters

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show filter in-port

Display of input filtering

Shows input filtering.

Input format show filter in-port [P1]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number or VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }




* When a port (line) number is specified, input filtering is shown per port.* When a VLAN ID is specified, input filtering is shown per VLAN.

* When all the parameters are omitted, the input filtering profile lists of all the VLANs setin all the ports are shown.

* When all the parameters are omitted, input filtering is shown per port.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show filter in-port 1/1-3,1/5

Input Filter Table

==================

Port VID Profile

----------------------------------

1/1 1 1

1/1 10 10

1/1 100 1

1/3 100 5

1/3 200 20

1/3 1000 100

1/5 100 20

*Switch@1#


VID: VLAN ID


9-10



Filters

Relatedcommands






set filter out-port Setting of output filteringshow filter out-port Display of output filtering


9-11



Filters

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear filter in-port

Clearing of input filtering

Clears input filtering.

Input format clear filter in-port P1 P2 [P3]



fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port


VLAN ID: 1 to 4094


* When P3 is omitted, the input filtering settings of all the VLANs of the port specifiedin P2 are cleared.

Default value None



Input examples *Switch@1# clear filter in-port fe 1/1 10

*Switch@1# clear filter in-port gbe 6/1 VLAN100

*Switch@1# clear filter in-port gbe 6/1


*Switch@1# clear filter in-port atm 3/1 2

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands









9-12



Filters

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set filter out-port

Setting of output filtering

Set output filtering.

Input format set filter out-port P1 P2 P3 P4



fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port





* If no profile is registered, all data is made transparent.

Default value None

Usage condition If command mode is safety mode, you cannot specify unregistered profiles.

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set filter out-port fe 1/1 100 10

*Switch@1# set filter out-port gbe 6/1 VLAN100 128

*Switch@1# set filter out-port atm 3/1 200 2

*Switch@1#

Output item

Related

commands


show filter profile Display of filtering profileclear filter profile Clearing of filtering profile



clear filter in-port Clearing of input filtering.



9-13



Filters

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show filter out-port

Display of output filtering

Shows output filtering.

Input format show filter out-port [P1]





* When a port (line) number is specified, output filtering is shown per port.* When a VLAN ID is specified, output filtering is shown per VLAN.

* When all the parameters are omitted, the output filtering profile lists of all the VLANsset in all the ports are shown.

* When all the parameters are omitted, output filtering is shown per port.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show filter out-port 1/1-7

Output Filter Table

===================

Port VID Profile

-----------------------------------

1/1 1 1

1/1 10 10

1/1 100 1

1/2 15 30

1/2 30 30

1/3 100 5

1/3 200 20

1/3 1000 100

1/7 200 1

*Switch@1#


VID: VLAN ID


9-14



Filters

Relatedcommands






clear filter in-port Clearing of input filteringset filter out-port Setting of output filtering


9-15



Filters

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear filter out-port

Clearing of output filtering

Clears output filtering.

Input format clear filter out-port P1 P2 [P3]



fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port


VLAN ID: 1 to 4094


* When P3 is omitted, the output filtering settings of all the VLANs of the port specifiedin P2 are cleared.

Default value None



Input examples *Switch@1# clear filter out-port fe 1/1 20

*Switch@1# clear filter out-port gbe 6/1 VLAN100

*Switch@1# clear filter out-port gbe 6/1


*Switch@1# clear filter out-port atm 3/1 200

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands









9-16



Filters

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set fdb limiter

Setting of MAC address learning limiting count function

Sets the MAC address learning limiting count function.

Input format set fdb limiter P1 P2 P3 P4



fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port




P4: MAC address learning limiting count (1 to 8192)

* If the MAC address learning limiting count is 1 to 16, the setting granularity is 1. Ifthe MAC address learning limiting count is 16 to 8192, the setting granularity is 16.


* You can set up to 8192 counts per card.

Default value None


Notes You can register up to 8192 counts for MAC address learning limit per line module.

If a Static MAC address is already registered, you cannot change the MAC addresslearning limiting count.

Input examples *Switch@1# set fdb limiter fe 1/1 100 11

*Switch@1# set fdb limiter gbe 3/1 VLAN 200 7

*Switch@1# set fdb limiter gbe 5/1 VLAN 200 32

*Switch@1# set fdb limiter atm 7/1 VLAN 300 64

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

show fdb limiter Display of MAC address learning count limiting function

clear fdb limiter Clearing of MAC address learning count limiting function

set fdb limiter static Setting of static MAC address of MAC address learninglimiting count function

clear fdb limiter static Clearing of static MAC address of MAC address learninglimiting count function

9-17



Filters

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show fdb limiter

Display of MAC address learning count limiting function

Shows a MAC address learning count limiting function.

Input format show fdb limiter [P1]





* When a port (line) number is specified or P1 is omitted, the MAC address learningcount limiting functions are shown per port.

* When a VLAN ID is specified, the MAC address learning count limiting functions areshown per VLAN.

* When all the parameters are omitted, the MAC address learning count limitingfunctions set in all the VLANs of all the ports are shown.

Default value None


Note None

*Switch@1# show fdb limiter

MAC Limiter Line TableInput example

======================

Module Registered-Block Available-Block

--------------------------------------------------------------------

Line#1 : --- ---

Line#2 : --- ---

Line#3 : --- ---

Line#4 : 32 480

Line#5 : none none

Line#6 : 16 496Line#7 : --- ---

Line#8 : --- ---

Line#9 : --- ---

Line#10 : --- ---

Line#11 : --- ---

Line#12 : --- ---

MAC Limiter Port Table

======================

Port VID Registered-MAC Static-MAC

--------------------------------------------------------------

4/1 1 512 1

6/1 100 256 1

9-18



Filters

MAC Limiter Port Static Address Table

=====================================

Port VID Static-MAC Address

------------------------------------------------------------------

4/1 1 00:00:00:00:00:01

6/1 100 00:00:00:00:00:02

*Switch@1#

Output items (MAC Limiter Line Table)

Module: Line module (1 to 10)

Registered-Block: Number of MAC limiting blocks.

Available-Block: Number of available MAC limiting blocks

(MAC Limiter Port Table)

Port: Port (line) numberVID: VLAN ID

Registered-MAC: Number of MAC limiting blocks set per port number and VLAN ID

Static-MAC: Number of registered static MAC addresses of MAC address learning countlimiting functions

(MAC Limiter Port Static Address Table)


VID: VLAN ID

Static-MAC Address: Setting of static MAC address of MAC address learning count

limiting function

Relatedcommands

set fdb limiter Setting of MAC address learning count limiting function


set fdb limiter static Setting of static MAC address of MAC address learningcount limiting function

clear fdb limiter static Clearing of static MAC address of MAC address learningcount limiting function

9-19



Filters

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear fdb limiter

Clearing of MAC address learning count limiting function

Clears a MAC address learning count limiting function.

Input format clear fdb limiter P1 P2 [P3]



fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port




* When P3 is omitted, the MAC address learning count limiting functions of all theVLANs of the port specified in P2 are cleared.

Default value None


Notes If P3 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.The static MAC addresses of MAC address learning count limiting functions are alsocleared.

*Switch@1# clear fdb limiter fe 1/1 100Input examples*Switch@1# clear fdb limiter gbe 3/1 200

*Switch@1# clear fdb limiter atm 5/1 300

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands





9-20



Filters

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set fdb limiter static

Setting of static MAC address of MAC address learning count limiting function

Sets the static MAC address of a MAC address learning count limiting function.

Input format set fdb limiter static P1 P2 P3 P4



fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port




P4: Source MAC address

00:00:00:00:00:00 to ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff

Default value None

Usage condition If no MAC address learning count limiting function is set, you cannot set this function.

Note You can register up to 16 static MAC addresses of MAC address learning count limitingfunctions per VLAN.

Input examples *Switch@1# set fdb limiter static fe 1/1 100 00:00:00:00:00:01

*Switch@1# set fdb limiter static gbe 6/1 100 00:00:00:00:00:02

*Switch@1# set fdb limiter static atm 5/1 200 00:00:00:00:00:03

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set fdb limiter Setting of MAC address learning count limiting functionshow fdb limiter Display of MAC address learning count limiting function



9-21



Filters

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear fdb limiter static

Clearing of static MAC address of MAC address learning count limiting function

Clears the static MAC address of a MAC address learning count limiting function.

Input format clear fdb limiter static P1 P2 [P3 [P4] ]



fe: FE port

gbe: GbE port




* When P3 is omitted, the static MAC addresses registered in all the VLANs of the portspecified in P2 are cleared.

P4: Source MAC address

00:00:00:00:00:00 to ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff

* When P4 is omitted, all static MAC addresses registered in the specified VLAN ofthe port specified in P2 or P3 are cleared.

Default value None


Note If P3 or P4 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has been entered.

Input examples *Switch@1# clear fdb limiter static fe 1/1 100 00:00:00:00:00:01

*Switch@1# clear fdb limiter static gbe 1/1 200


*Switch@1# clear fdb limiter static gbe 10/1


*Switch@1# clear fdb limiter static atm 5/1 100 00:00:00:00:00:03

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands





9-22



EtherOAM

10 EtherOAM

10-1



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set ether-oam meg

Setting of MEG

Creates MEG.

Input format set ether-oam meg P1 P2 P3 [P4]

Parameters P1: MEG index (1 to 1536)

P2: MEG ID (1 to 13 characters or 32 to 32 digits (hexadecimal))

* Range that can be set for 32-digit specification

0x00000000000000000000000000000000 to 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff

P3: MEG level (0 to 7)P4: CC transmission period period { 3.33ms | 10ms | 100ms | 1s | 10s | 60s }

period 3.33ms: 3.33 milliseconds

period 10ms: 10 milliseconds

period 100ms: 100 milliseconds

period 1s: 1 second

period 10s: 10 seconds

period 60s: 60 seconds

* When P4 is omitted, 1s is assumed.

Default value P4: 1s

Usageconditions

You cannot register the same MEG ID to two or more MEG indexes. If the specifiedMEG ID has already been registered, an error occurs.

If the MEP data of the specified MEG index exists, you cannot execute update.

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set ether-oam meg 10 NEC0000000001 1 period 10s

*Switch@1# set ether-oam meg 10 0x0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef 1 period10s

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

show ether-oam meg Display of MEG setting information

clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG

set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP

show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information

10-2



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show ether-oam meg

Display of MEG setting information

Shows the setting information of MEG.

Input format show ether-oam meg [P1]

Parameter P1: MEG index (1 to 1536)

* When P1 is omitted, all MEG setting information is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# show ether-oam meg 10

Ether OAM MEG Information

=========================

MEG Index MEG ID MEG Level ETH-CC Period

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

10 NEC0000000002 3 10sec

MEP Index-----------------------------------------------------------------------

5,10,25,30

*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# show ether-oam meg


=========================

Total number of entries:3

MEG Index MEG ID MEG Level ETH-CC Period

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

1 NEC0000000001 2 1sec10 NEC0000000002 3 10sec

100 0x0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef 4 3.33msec

*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# show ether-oam meg


=========================

No entry in the table.

*Switch@1#

10-3



EtherOAM

Output items Total number of entries: Number of registered MEG

MEGIndex: MEG index

MEG ID: MEG ID

MEG Level: MEG level

ETH-CC Period: Transmission period

MEP Index: Value of the MEP index of the MEP which includes the MEG index specifiedwith the command (Only when P1 is specified)

Relatedcommands

set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG


10-4



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear ether-oam meg

Clearing of MEG

Clears MEG.

Input format clear ether-oam meg P1

Parameter P1: MEG index (1 to 1536)

Default value None

Usageconditions

If the MEP data of the specified MEG index exists, you cannot clear it.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear ether-oam meg 10

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands


show ether-oam meg Display of MEG setting information



10-5



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set ether-oam mep

Setting of MEP

Creates MEP.

Input format set ether-oam mep P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6

Parameters P1: MEP index (1 to 1536)


P3: VLAN ID or Untag specification { untag }


untag: Untag specificationP4: MEG index (1 to 1536)

P5: Transmission direction { inside | outside }

inside: Transmission directed to the inside of the switch

outside: Transmission directed to the outside of the switch

P6: MEP ID (1 to 8191)

Default value None

10-6



EtherOAM

Usageconditions

If the line module type of the specified port (line) number is ATMP155 or TDMP155, youmust disable APS.

If the MEG data of the specified MEG index does not exist, or if the MEP data of thespecified MEP index has already been registered, you cannot execute registration.

If the maximum number of the MEP data has already been registered for the specifiedport (line) number, you cannot execute registration.

If the MEG data transmission period of the specified MEG index is 3.33ms, 10ms, or100ms, your can register MEP only when the line module type is GbE-PV2.

If you specify untag for the tagbase VLAN port, you must specify outside for thetransmission direction.

If the line module type of the specified port (line) number is ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, orTDMP155, you must specify inside for the transmission direction.

If redundant configuration by EtherPS or EtherRing is set for the specified port (line)number, the following cannot be set.

- inside MEP setting

- Multiple MEP settings

- Untag MEP setting (* In redundant configuration by EtherRing, you can register MEP

by specifying Untag for VLAN ID.)- MEP setting on a VLAN other than the one when EtherPS or EtherRing controlVLAN is set

- MEP setting with MEG LEVEL other than the one when EtherPS control VLAN is set

If the line module type of the specified port (line) number is TDMP or TDMP155, the linemode must have been set.

You can register the maximum number of MEPs per line module (the maximum numberof MEPs: GbE-PV2 [EtherPS/EtherRing disabled] [64], GbE-PV2 [EtherPS/EtherRingenabled] [1], ATMP [64], TDMP [64], ATMP155 [128], TDMP155 [128]). If the linemodule type is ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155, however, you can register onlyone MEP per VLAN.

Notes The specified VLAN ID must have been set for the specified port (line).If the VLAN tag swapping is set for the specified port (line) number, execute this settingspecifying the swapping destination VLAN ID.

If the VLAN tag swapping is set for the specified port (line) number and the swappingdestination VLAN ID is 0, MEP cannot be set for the VLAN ID 0.

When you register MEP to the specified port (line) number using the same VLAN ID asthat for the control VLAN of EtherRing, set the MEG level of the MEP smaller than thatfor the control VLAN of EtherRing.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-oam mep 20 1/1 333 10 inside 2000

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands




clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP

set ether-oam peer-mep Setting of associated MEP ID

set ether-oam lm Setting of test target MEP

10-7



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show ether-oam mep

Display of MEP setting information

Shows the setting information of MEP.

- Specifying port (line)

show ether-oam mep P1 (port) [P2]

Input formats

- Specifying index

show ether-oam mep P1 (index) [P2]

Parameters P1: Port (line) specification { port } or index specification { index }

port: Port (line) specification

index: Index specification

When port is specified in P1

P2: Port (line) number

* When P2 is omitted, setting information of all ports is shown.

When index is specified in P1

P2: MEP index (1 to 1536)

* When P2 is omitted, setting information of all indexes is shown.

Default value None


Note To refer to MEP fault information (ETH-CC Fault Table) and associated MEP/RDI faultinformation (Ether OAM Peer MEP Information), specify index in P1 and MEP index inP2.

Input examples *Switch@1# show ether-oam mep port

Ether OAM MEP Information

=========================

Port : 1/1 MEP Index : 10

=============================

VID : 10

MEG Level : 4MEG Index : 1

MEG ID : 0x01020304050607080910111213141516

Position : outside

MEP ID : 300

CC Priority : 7

Transmit : enabled

Receive : enabled

Kind : multicast

DES MAC Address : 01:00:00:00:00:04

RDI : enabled

Port : 2/1 MEP Index : 1=============================

10-8



EtherOAM

VID : 20

MEG Level : 3

MEG Index : 2

MEG ID : NEC0000000002

Position : outside

MEP ID : 180

CC Priority : 7Transmit : disabled

Receive : enabled

Kind : ---

DES MAC Address : ---

RDI : enabled

*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# show ether-oam mep port 1/1


=========================Port : 1/1 MEP Index : 10

=============================

VID : 10

MEG Level : 4

MEG Index : 1

MEG ID : 0x01020304050607080910111213141516

Position : outside

MEP ID : 300

CC Priority : 7

Transmit : enabled

Receive : enabled

Kind : multicastDES MAC Address : 01:00:00:00:00:04

RDI : enabled

*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# show ether-oam mep index


=========================

MEP Index : 1 Port : 2/1

=============================

VID : 20

MEG Level : 3

MEG Index : 2

MEG ID : NEC0000000002

Position : outside

MEP ID : 180

CC Priority : 7

Transmit : disabled

Receive : enabled

Kind : ---

DES MAC Address : ---

RDI : enabled

MEP Index : 10 Port : 1/1

=============================

10-9



EtherOAM

VID : 10

MEG Level : 4

MEG Index : 1

MEG ID : 0x01020304050607080910111213141516

Position : outside

MEP ID : 300

CC Priority : 7Transmit : enabled

Receive : enabled

Kind : multicast

DES MAC Address : 01:00:00:00:00:04

RDI : enabled

*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# show ether-oam mep index 10


=========================MEP Index : 10 Port : 1/1

=============================

VID : 10

MEG Level : 4

MEG Index : 1

MEG ID : 0x01020304050607080910111213141516

Position : outside

MEP ID : 300

CC Priority : 7

Transmit : enabled

Receive : enabled

Kind : multicastDES MAC Address : 01:00:00:00:00:04

RDI : enabled

ETH-CC Fault Table

==================

Status : mismerge,unexpected-mep,loc

Ether OAM Peer MEP Information

==============================

Peer MEP ID Condition RDI-Received

------------------------------------

10 normal rdi

28 loc no-rdi

123 normal rdi

3333 disabled disabled

7001 other no-rdi

*Switch@1#

10-10



EtherOAM


MEP Index: MEP index

VID: VLAN ID: In the case of untagMEP, “untag” is shown.


MEG Index: MEG index

MEG ID: MEG IDMEP ID: MEP ID

Position: Frame transmission direction

CC Priority: CC frame priority

Transmit: Enabling/disabling setting of CC frame sending

Receive: Enabling/disabling setting of CC frame receiving

Kind: CC frame transmission type

DES MAC Address: CC frame destination address of

RDI: RDI transmission setting

Status: MEP fault information

Peer MEP ID: Associated MEP ID

Condition: Associated MEP fault informationnormal: No LOC fault, when no VLAN is set

loc: LOC fault

disabled: Receiving check is stopped

RDI-Received: RDI fault information

no-rdi: No RDI fault

rdi: RDI fault

disabled: RDI operation disabled

Relatedcommands






clear ether-oam peer-mep Clearing of associated MEP ID

set ether-oam cc Setting of EtherOAM Continuity Check transmission

set ether-oam rdi Setting of RDI operation

10-11



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear ether-oam mep

Clearing of MEP

Clears MEP.

Input format clear ether-oam mep P1

Parameter P1: MEP index (1 to 1536)

Default value None


Notes If the associated MEP ID has been registered for the specified MEP index, the setting ofthe associated MEP ID is also cleared when the MEP index is cleared.

If the specified MEP index has been registered as a test target MEP, the setting of thetest target MEP is also cleared when the MEP index is cleared.

During ETH-CCM operation (either of sending or receiving is currently enabled), theMEP of the specified MEP index cannot be cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# clear ether-oam mep 20

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands







clear ether-oam lm Clearing of test target MEP

10-12



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set ether-oam lm

Setting of test target MEP

Sets a test target MEP.

Input format set ether-oam lm P1 [P2]


P2: Test target frame priority specification or all priorities specification { all }

Specifying test target frame priority (0 to 7)

all: Specifying all priorities

* When P2 is omitted, all is assumed.

Default value P2: all

Usageconditions

If the MEP data of the specified MEP index has not been registered, you cannot executeregistration.

If the test target MEP has already been registered, you cannot execute registration.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-oam lm 15 all

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands





show ether-oam lm Display of test target MEP


10-13



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show ether-oam lm

Display of test target MEP setting information

Shows the test target MEP setting information.

Input format show ether-oam lm

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ether-oam lm

Ether OAM Loss Measurement Information

======================================

MEP Index : 15

Target Priority : all

Port : 5/1

MAC Address : 00:30:13:a1:0f:3c

VID : 100MEG ID : A

MEP ID : 15

MEG Level : 1

*Switch@1#

Output items MEP Index: MEP index

Target Priority: Priority of measurement target frame


MAC Address: MAC address of test target port

VID: VLAN ID

For untagMEP, “untag” is displayed.

MEG ID: MEG ID

MEP ID: MEP ID


Relatedcommands



set ether-oam mep Setting of MEPclear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP



10-14



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear ether-oam lm

Clearing of test target MEP

Clears a test target MEP.

Input format clear ether-oam lm

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear ether-oam lm

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set ether-oam meg Setting of MEGclear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG




show ether-oam lm Display of test target MEP setting information

10-15



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set ether-oam peer-mep

Setting of associated MEP ID

Sets the associated MEP ID.

Input format set ether-oam peer-mep P1 P2 [P3]


P2: Associated MEP ID (1 to 8191) (Multiple values can be specified.)

P3: CCM receiving setting { receive-enable | receive-disable }

receive-enable: Enables CCM receiving

receive-disable: Disables CCM receiving* When P3 is omitted, receive-enable is assumed.

Default value P3: receive-enable

Usageconditions

If the MEP data of the specified MEP index has not been registered, you cannot executeregistration.

You can register the maximum number of associated MEPs per line module (themaximum number of associated MEPs: GbE-PV2 [EtherPS/EtherRing disabled] [1024],GbE-PV2 [EtherPS/EtherRing enabled] [1], ATMP [64], TDMP [64], ATMP155 [128],TDMP155 [128]). If the line module type is ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155,however, you can register only one associated MEP per MEP.

Note To enable CCM receiving monitoring, you must set receive-enable for ETH-CCtransmission setting to allow receiving. If receive-enable is set for ETH-CCtransmission setting to allow receiving, you can clear the associated MEP faults bychanging the CCM reception setting from enable to disable. When a fault is beingoccurred, a fault recovery trap reports it per MEP.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-oam peer-mep 10 3000,4000

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands







10-16



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear ether-oam peer-mep

Clearing of associated MEP ID

Clears the associated MEP ID.

Input format clear ether-oam peer-mep P1 [P2]


P2: Associated MEP ID (1 to 8191) (single specification)

* When P2 is omitted, all the associated MEP IDs are cleared.

Default value None

Usage condition You can clear the associated MEP ID of the specified MEP index only in the followingconditions. Otherwise, you cannot clear it.

Conditions:

[1] If the receiving setting of the MEP is disabled, all the associated MEP IDs of theMEP can be cleared.

[2] If the receiving setting of the MEP is enabled and that of an associated MEP isdisabled, only the associated MEP ID of the MEP can be cleared.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear ether-oam peer-mep 10 3000

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands





clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEPset ether-oam peer-mep Setting of associated MEP ID

10-17



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set ether-oam mip

Setting of MIP

Creates MIP.

Input format set ether-oam mip P1 P2 P3 P4

Parameters

P1: MIP index (1 to 96)

P2: Port (line) number (1/1 to 12/1) (single specification)

P3: VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (Multiple values can be specified.)

P4: MEG level (0 to 7)

Default value None

Usageconditions

If the MIP data of the specified MIP index has already been registered, you cannotexecute registration.

If the maximum number of the MIP data shown below has already been registered forthe specified port (line) number, you cannot execute registration.

Up to 8 MIPs can be registered per port. Up to 4094 VLANs can be specified for oneMIP.

Only the GbE-PV2 card can operate.

If the same VLAN ID as that for EtherRing control VLAN is specified in P3, you cannotexecute registration.

Notes The specified VLAN ID must have been set for the specified port (line).

If the VLAN tag swapping is set for the specified port (line) number, execute this settingspecifying the swapping destination VLAN ID.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-oam mip 96 2/1 444 2

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



show ether-oam mip Display of MIP setting information

clear ether-oam mip Clearing of MIP

10-18



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show ether-oam mip

Display of MIP setting information

Shows the setting information of MIP.

- Specifying port (line)

show ether-oam mip P1 (port) [P2]

Input formats

- Specifying index

show ether-oam mip P1 (index) [P2]

Parameters P1: Port (line) specification { port } or index specification { index }

port: Port (line) specification

index: Index specification


P2: Port (line) number (1/1 to 12/1) (single specification)

* When P2 is omitted, setting information of all ports is shown.

When index is specified in P1

P2: MIP index (1 to 96)

* When P2 is omitted, setting information of all indexes is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ether-oam mip port

Ether OAM MIP Information

=========================

Port MIP Index MEG Level VID

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

1/1 10 5 10-20

2/1 2 1 1

*Switch@1#*Switch@1# show ether-oam mip index

Ether OAM MIP Information

=========================

MIP Index Port MEG Level VID

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

2 2/1 1 1

10 1/1 5 10-20

*Switch@1#

10-19



EtherOAM


Index: MEP index


VID: VLAN ID

Relatedcommands



set ether-oam mip Setting of MIP

clear ether-oam mip Clearing of MIP

10-20



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear ether-oam mip

Clearing of MIP

Clears MIP.

Input format clear ether-oam mip P1 [P2]

Parameters P1: MIP index (1 to 96)

P2: VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification)

* When P2 is omitted, all the VLANs which correspond with the MIP index are cleared.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear ether-oam mip 96

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands




show ether-oam mip Display of MIP setting information

10-21



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set ether-oam frame

Setting of EtherOAM frame common information

Sets the common information of EtherOAM frame.

- Specifying DA Multicast MAC address

set ether-oam frame P1

- Specifying protocol type

set ether-oam frame P2

Input formats

- Specifying both conditions

set ether-oam frame P1 P2

Parameters P1: DA Multicast MAC address (01:00:00:00:00:00 to 01:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff)

* When P1 is omitted, nothing is specified.

P2: Protocol type (0x0600 to 0xffff)

* When P2 is omitted, nothing is specified.

Default values P1: 01:80:c2:00:00:30

P2: 0x8902


Notes Execute this setting before performing ETH-CC, ETH-LB, ETH-LT, ETH-DM, andETH-LM tests.

The following MAC addresses cannot be set in P1.

01:00:5E:00:00:00 - 01:00:5E:7F:FF:FF

01:80:C2:00:00:00 - 01:80:C2:00:00:2F

01:19:A7:00:00:00 - 01:19:A7:00:00:FF

Since the MEG Level is automatically set for the last 4 bits of the MAC address specifiedin P1, the last 4 bits specified with this command is not reflected.

For the automatic setting of the MEG Level, refer to “Setting EtherOAM frame commoninformation” of “EtherOAM function” in the Instruction Manual.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-oam frame 01 :02 :03 :04 :05 :06 0x0600

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show ether-oam frame Display of EtherOAM frame common information

10-22



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show ether-oam frame

Display of EtherOAM frame common information

Shows the common information of EtherOAM frame.

Input format show ether-oam frame

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ether-oam frame

Ether OAM Frame Multicast MAC Address

=====================================

Class1 : 01:80:c3:00:00:70

Class2 : 01:80:c3:00:00:78

Ether OAM Frame Protocol Type

=============================Protocol Type : 0xfffe

*Switch@1#

Output items Multicast MAC address(class1): Destination Multicast MAC address for Ether CC/LBframe

Multicast MAC address(class2): Destination Multicast MAC address for Ether LT frame

Protocol type: Protocol type

Related

command

set ether-oam frame Setting of Ether-OAM frame common information

10-23



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set ether-oam reply-period

Setting of Reply frame returning period

Sets the returning period of Reply frame.

Input format set ether-oam reply-period P1 P2

Parameters P1: Reply frame type { loopback | linktrace }

loopback: ETH-LBR

linktrace: ETH-LTR

P2: Reply frame returning period { random | immediately }

random: Randomimmediately: Immediate

Default values P2: random (for loopback)

immediately (for linktrace)


Note ETH-LBR can be applied only when the multicast ETH-LBM is received.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-oam reply-period loopback random

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show ether-oam reply-period Display of Reply frame returning period

10-24



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show ether-oam reply-period

Display of Reply frame returning period

Shows the returning period of Reply frame.

Input format show ether-oam reply-period

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ether-oam reply-period

Ether OAM Reply Period Information

==================================

Reply Frame Reply Period

-------------------------

ETH-LBR immediately

ETH-LTR random

*Switch@1#

Output items Reply Frame: Reply frame type

Reply Period: Reply frame returning period

Relatedcommand

set ether-oam reply-period Setting of Reply frame returning period

10-25



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set ether-oam cc

Setting of EtherOAM Continuity Check transmission

Sets the transmission of EtherOAM Continuity Check.

- Starting transmission

set ether-oam cc P1 P2 (transmit-enable) [P3] P4 [P5]

Input formats

- Stopping transmission

set ether-oam cc P1 P2 (transmit-disable) P3


P2: Transmission type { transmit-enable | transmit-disable }

transmit-enable: Starts ETH-CCM transmission

transmit-disable: Stops ETH-CCM transmission

When transmit-enable is specified in P2

P3: Destination MAC address

* When P3 is omitted, the multicast transmission is assumed.

P4: Receiving allowance { receive-enable | receive-disable }

receive-enable: Starts ETH-CCM receiving check

receive-disable: Stops ETH-CCM receiving check

P5: Priority: priority (0 to 7)


When transmit-disable is specified in P2P3: Receiving allowance { receive-enable | receive-disable }

receive-enable: Starts ETH-CCM receiving check

receive-disable: Stops ETH-CCM receiving check

Default values P2: transmit-disable

P4: receive-disable

P5: 7

Usage condition If the MEP data of the specified MEP index has not been registered, you cannot executethis setting.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-oam cc 20 transmit-enable 00 :03 :06 :09 :12 :15receive-enable priority 4

*Switch@1#

Output item

10-26



EtherOAM

Relatedcommands






10-27



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set ether-oam rdi

Setting of RDI operation

Sets RDI transmission.

Input format set ether-oam rdi P1 P2


P2: RDI operation { enable | disable }

enable: Enables RDI operation

disable: Disables RDI operation


Usage condition If the MEP data of the specified MEP index has not been registered, you cannot executeregistration.

Note To enable RDI transmission, you must enable ETH-CCM transmission starting.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-oam rdi 1 enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands






set ether-oam cc Setting of Ether-OAM Continuity Check transmission

10-28



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show ether-oam fault last-change

Display of final fault information

Shows the LOC/LOC recovery/RDI/RDI recovery information detected last.

Input format show ether-oam fault last-change

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ether-oam fault last-change

Ether OAM CCM DB Final Fault Information

========================================

Date : 01/01/2000 00:00:00

Fault : LOC DETECT MEP INDEX:1

*Switch@1#

Output items Date: Date

Fault: Fault information

LOC DETECT: LOC detection

LOC RECOVER: LOC recovery

RDI DETECT: RDI detection

RDI RECOVER: RDI recovery

MEP INDEX: MEP index

Relatedcommand

None

10-29



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show ether-oam fault reason

Display of CCM error cause

Shows the detailed information about CCM error cause of the port.

Input format show ether-oam fault reason [P1]


* When P1 is omitted, detailed information of error causes for all the ports is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ether-oam fault reason

Ether OAM CCM Fault Table Information

=====================================


=============================

Fault : unexpected-level

MAC Address : 01:02:03:04:05:06

Value : 4

Port : 2/1 MEP Index : ---

=============================

Fault : ---

MAC Address : ---

Value : ---

.

. (omission)

.


=============================

Fault : unexpected-periodMAC Address : 03:03:03:03:03:03

Value : 10sec

*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# show ether-oam fault reason 3/1

Ether OAM CCM Fault Table Information

=====================================


=============================

Fault : mismerge

MAC Address : 01:01:01:01:01:01

Value : [01 20 0d] ABCDEFGHIJKLM

10-30



EtherOAM

*Switch@1#


MEP Index: MEP index

Fault: Fault cause

unexpected-level: Receive ETH-CCM frames with different MEG Levelmismerge: Receive ETH-CCM frames with different MEG ID

unexpected-mep: Receive ETH-CCM frames with associated MEP ID different fromthe one specified with the “set ether-oam peer-mep” command

unexpected-period: Receive ETH-CCM frames with different Period

MAC Address: Source MAC address

Value: Fault detailed information

unexpected-level: MEG level

mismerge: MEG ID

[01 20 0d] is added at the beginning when MEG ID has 1 to 13 characters.

unexpected-mep: MEP ID

unexpected-period: Period value

3.33 msec, 10 msec, 100 msec, 1 sec, 10 sec, 60 sec, 10 min

Relatedcommand

clear ether-oam fault reason Clearing of CCM error cause

10-31



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear ether-oam fault reason

Clearing of CCM error cause

Clears the detailed information about CCM error cause of the port.

Input format clear ether-oam fault reason [P1]

ParameterP1: Port (line) number (single specification)

* When P1 is omitted, detailed information of error cause for all the ports is cleared.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear ether-oam fault reason 1/1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show ether-oam fault reason Display of CCM error cause

10-32



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

loopback ether-oam

Executing of EtherOAM Loop Back test

Executes ETH-LB and displays the execution result.

Input format loopback ether-oam P1 [P2 [P3] [P4]] [P5] [P6]



* When P2 is omitted, the multicast transmission is assumed.

P3: LBM transmission count count (1 to 127)

* When P3 is omitted, 4 is assumed.P4: Transmission period (sec) period (1 to 10) (sec)


P5: PDU size size (46 to 8982)


P6: Priority priority (0 to 7)


Default values P3: 4

P4: 1

P5: 46

P6: 7

Usageconditions

If the MEP data of the specified MEP index does not exist, you cannot execute thiscommand.

You cannot activate two or more of this command simultaneously. Also, you cannotactivate this command and any/all of the ETH-LT execution command, the ETH-DMexecution command, or/and the ETH-LM execution command simultaneously.

For a ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155 line module, a value exceeding 2026 cannotbe specified in P5.

Note None

10-33



EtherOAM

Input example *Switch@1# loopback ether-oam 1 00:30:13:41:77:70

Ether OAM Loopback Port Information

===================================

Port : 1/1

MAC Address : 00:30:13:41:77:d0

VID : 1

MEG ID : NEC000001

MEP ID : 1

MEG Level : 1

result 00:30:13:41:77:70 seq=1 bytes=46 time<5ms




*Switch@1# loopback ether-oam 1 00:30:13:41:77:70

Ether OAM Loopback Port Information

===========================================================request = 4, test ok = 4, fail = 0 (0% failure)

delay minimum = 5msec, maximum = 5msec, average = 5msec

delay variation = 0msec

*Switch@1#

Output items port: Port (line) number

MAC Address: Destination MAC address

VID: VLAN ID

MEG ID: MEG ID

MEP ID: MEP ID


Relatedcommands





10-34



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

linktrace ether-oam

Executing of EtherOAM Link Trace test

Executes ETH-LT and displays the execution result.

Input format linktrace ether-oam P1 P2 [P3] [P4] [P5]



P3: ETH-LTR monitoring time wait-time { 5s | 10s }

wait-time 5s: 5 seconds

wait-time 10s: 10 seconds* When P3 is omitted, 5s is assumed.

P4: TTL ttl (1 to 255)




Default values P3: 5s

P4: 255

P5: 7

Usageconditions


You cannot activate two or more of this command simultaneously. Also, you cannotactivate this command and any/all of the ETH-LB execution command, the ETH-DMexecution command, or/and the ETH-LM execution command simultaneously.

Note None

10-35



EtherOAM

Input example *Switch@1# linktrace ether-oam 1 00:30:13:b0:01:03

Ether OAM Link Trace Port Information

=====================================

Port : 1/1

MAC Address : 00:30:13:b0:01:01

VID : 3

MEG ID : NEC000001

MEP ID : 1

MEG Level : 1

Ether OAM Link Trace Result Information for 00:30:13:b0:01:03

=============================================================

TTL MAC Address Relay Action

------------------------------------

254 00:30:13:b0:01:03 RlyHit

Trace Complete

*Switch@1#

Output items port: Port (line) number

MAC Address: Destination MAC address

VID: VLAN ID

MEG ID: MEG ID

MEP ID: MEP ID


TTL: Time To Live

MAC Address: Source MAC address of ETH-LT returning

Relay Action: Relay Action

Relatedcommands





10-36



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

dm ether-oam

Executing of EtherOAM Frame Delay Measurement test

Executes ETH-DM and displays the execution result.

Input format dm ether-oam P1 P2 [P3] [P4] [P5]



P3: Frame delay measurement count count (1 to 500)


P4: Transmission period of ETH-DMM (sec or msec)Transmission period (sec): second-period (1 to 10) (sec)

Transmission period (msec): milli-period (100 to 1000) (msec)

* Setting granularity: 100 (msec)


* When P4 is omitted, 1 (sec) is assumed.




P4: 1P5: 7

Usageconditions


You cannot activate two or more of this command simultaneously. Also, you cannotactivate this command and any/all of the ETH-LB execution command, the ETH-LTexecution command, or/and the ETH-LM execution command simultaneously.

Note None

10-37



EtherOAM

Input example *Switch@1# dm ether-oam 1 00:30:13:41:37:a3 count 10 second-period 1

Ether OAM Delay Measurement Port Information

============================================

Port : 1/1

MAC Address : 00:30:13:41:37:fd

VID : 1

MEG ID : NEC000001

MEP ID : 1

MEG Level : 1

During an ETH-DM examination........

Ether OAM Delay Measurement Result Information for 00:30:13:41:37:a3

====================================================================

Request DMM : 10

Receive DMR : 10

Delay Minimum(msec) : 0.11

Delay Maximum(msec) : 0.11

Delay Average(msec) : 0.11Delay Variation(msec) : 0.00

Error Count : 0

Result : complete

*Switch@1#



VID: VLAN ID

MEG ID: MEG ID

MEP ID: MEP ID


Request DMM: Sending DMM count

Receive DMR: Receiving DMR count

Delay Minimum(msec): Delay time (Minimum)

Delay Maximum(msec): Delay time (Maximum)

Delay Average(msec): Delay time (Average)

Delay Variation(msec): Delay time (Deviation)

Error Count: Error count

Result: Result

complete: ETH-DMM transmission of the set count has been completed.

over flow: Stop due to overflow

forced stop: Stop by Ctrl-C

link down: Stop due to link down

close line: Stop due to line module blocking

change switch: Stop due to system switchover of switch

illegal line state: Line module is in the state in which ETH-DM cannot be executed.

failed: Stop because ETH-DMR is not received three consecutive times

Relatedcommands





10-38



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

lm ether-oam

Executing of EtherOAM Frame Loss Measurement test

Executes ETH-LM and displays the execution result.

Input format lm ether-oam P1 P2 [P3] [P4] [P5]



P3: Frame loss measurement count count (1 to 500)


P4: Transmission period of ETH-LMM (sec or msec)Transmission period (sec): second-period (1 to 10) (sec)

Transmission period (msec): milli-period (100 to 1000) (msec)



* When P4 is omitted, 1 (sec) is assumed.




P4: 1P5: 7

Usageconditions

If the test target MEP data of the specified MEP index does not exist, you cannotexecute this command.

You cannot activate two or more of this command simultaneously. Also, you cannotactivate this command and any/all of the ETH-LB execution command, the ETH-LTexecution command, or/and the ETH-DM execution command simultaneously.

Note When a Loss Measurement test is performed, the counter value used as a base forcalculating frame loss is obtained using ETH-LMM/LMR. Therefore, Request

LMM/Receive LMR in the execution result is frame loss measurement count + 1.

10-39



EtherOAM

*Switch@1# lm ether-oam 15 00:30:13:a1:0f:0aInput exampleEther OAM Loss Measurement Port Information

===========================================

Port : 5/1

MAC Address : 00:30:13:a1:0f:7c

VID : 100

MEG ID : A

MEP ID : 15

MEG Level : 1

During an ETH-LM examination.....

Ether OAM Loss Measurement Result Information for 00:30:13:a1:0f:0a

===================================================================

Examination MEP Index : 15

Examination MEP ID : 15

Target Priority : all

Request LMM : 5

Receive LMR : 5Transmit Frame Near : 10

Receive Frame Far : 9

Transmit Frame Far : 10

Receive Frame Near : 8

Sum of Frame Loss Far : 0

Rate of Frame Loss Far : 10.00%

Sum of Frame Loss Near : 0

Rate of Frame Loss Near: 20.00%

Error Count : 0

Result : complete

*Switch@1#

10-40



EtherOAM



VID: VLAN ID

MEG ID: MEG ID

MEP ID: MEP ID

MEG Level: MEG levelExamination MEP Index: Test target MEP Index

Examination MEP ID: Test target MEP ID

Target Priority: Measurement target frame priority

Request LMM: Transmitting ETH-LMM count

Receive LMR: Receiving ETH-LMR count

Transmit Frame Near: Number of transmitted frames at testing device side

Receive Frame Far: Number of received frames at tested device side

Transmit Frame Far: Number of transmitted frames at tested device side

Receive Frame Near: Number of received frames at testing device side

Sum of Frame Loss Far: Transmitting frame loss count

Rate of Frame Loss Far: Transmitting frame loss rateSum of Frame Loss Near: Receiving frame loss count

Rate of Frame Loss Near: Receiving frame loss rate

Error Count: Error count

Result: Result

complete: ETH-LMM transmission of the set count has been completed.

over flow: Stop due to overflow

forced stop: Stop by Ctrl-C

link down: Stop due to link down

close line: Stop due to line module blocking

change switch: Stop due to system switchover of switch

illegal line state: Line module is in the state in which ETH-LM cannot be executed.failed: Stop because ETH-LMR is not received three consecutive times

Relatedcommands







10-41



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set ether-ps

Setting of EtherPS enable/disable

Sets whether to enable or disable the EtherPS function.

Input formats - Enabling EtherPS

set ether-ps P1 P2 (enable) P3 P4 P5

- Disabling EtherPS

set ether-ps P1 P2 (disable)

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (single specification) { 1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1 }

P2: EtherPS function setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables EtherPS function

disable: Disables EtherPS function

When enable is specified in P2

P3: Switchover method { 1:1 }

1:1: 1:1 method

P4: Direction { bi }

bi: bi-directional

P5: Switchback mode { revertive | non-revertive }

revertive: Automatic switchback

non-revertive: Manual switchback


Usageconditions

If two or more MEPs have been registered, the MEP transmission direction is other thanoutside, or the VLAN of the MEP is registered with Untag specification to the specifiedport (line) number, you cannot execute this setting. If two or more associated MEPsare set for the registered MEP, you cannot execute this setting.

If a link aggregation group is set, the spanning tree port is enabled, or EtherRing isenabled for the specified port (line) number, this command cannot be set. If the greaterslot number of the specified line module has already been configured, you cannot setEtherPS.

Notes To modify the setting, disable EtherPS once. If EtherPS is disabled, the configurationfor the greater number slot is cleared.

If the line type of the specified port (line) is GbE, the line mode must have been set tothe GbE mode.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-ps 1/1 enable 1:1 bi revertive

*Switch@1#

Output item

10-42



EtherOAM

Relatedcommands

set ether-ps control-vlan Setting of EtherPS control VLAN

set ether-ps time Setting of EtherPS timer

set ether-ps lockout Setting of EtherPS lockout

change ether-ps Changeover of EtherPS state

change ether-ps reset Resetting of EtherPS state changeover

show ether-ps config Display of EtherPS configuration informationshow ether-ps status Display of EtherPS status

10-43



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set ether-ps control-vlan

Setting of EtherPS control VLAN

Sets EtherPS control VLAN.

Input formats - Enabling EtherPS control VLAN

set ether-ps control-vlan P1 P2 (enable) P3 P4 [P5]

- Disabling EtherPS control VLAN

set ether-ps control-vlan P1 P2 (disable)


P2: EtherPS control VLAN setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables EtherPS control VLAN

disable: Disables EtherPS control VLAN


P3: Control VLAN (1 to 4094)




Default values P2: disable

P5: 7

Usageconditions

If EtherPS of the specified port (line) number is not enabled, you cannot execute thissetting.

If MEP has been registered for the specified port (line) number, set the same value forControl VLAN and MEG level.

Note To modify the setting, disable EtherPS control VLAN once.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-ps control-vlan 1/1 enable 1000 7 7

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set ether-ps Setting of EtherPS enable/disable

show ether-ps config Display of EtherPS configuration information

10-44



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set ether-ps lockout

Setting of EtherPS lockout

Sets EtherPS lockout.

Input format set ether-ps lockout P1 P2


P2: EtherPS lockout setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables EtherPS lockout

disable: Disables EtherPS lockout


Usage condition If EtherPS of the specified port (line) number is not enabled, you cannot execute thissetting.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-ps lockout 1/1 enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands


show ether-ps status Display of EtherPS status

10-45



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set ether-ps time

Setting of EtherPS timer

Sets the EtherPS timer.

Input format set ether-ps time P1 P2 P3


P2: Change timer type { wtr }

wtr: Recovery standby protection time

P3: Time (0 to 12) (min)

* 0, and 5 to12 can be specified.

Default value P3: 5

Usageconditions


If EtherPS of the specified port (line) number is set to the non-revertive mode, youcannot execute this setting.

Note If you set the recovery standby protection time to 0, it will be infinite.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-ps time 1/1 wtr 12*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands


show ether-ps config Display of EtherPS configuration information

10-46



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

change ether-ps

Changeover of EtherPS state

Changes the EtherPS state.

Input format change ether-ps P1 P2


P2: Change mode { lockout | forced | manual | exercise }

lockout: Lockout

forced: Forced change

manual: Manual changeexercise: Test request

Default value None

Usageconditions


If EtherPS lockout for the specified port (line) number is enabled, you cannot executethis setting.

Note You may be unable to execute this command depending on the EtherPS state. Refer

to “EtherPS Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.

Input example *Switch@1# change ether-ps 1/1 forced

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



10-47



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

change ether-ps reset

Resetting of EtherPS state changeover

Resets the EtherPS state changeover.

Input format change ether-ps reset P1

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (single specification) { 1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1 }

Default value None

Usageconditions


If EtherPS lockout for the specified port (line) number is enabled, you cannot executethis setting.

Note You may be unable to execute this command depending on the EtherPS state. Referto “EtherPS Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.

Input example *Switch@1# change ether-ps reset 1/1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



10-48



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show ether-ps config

Display of EtherPS configuration information

Shows the EtherPS configuration information.

Input format show ether-ps config [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number { 1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1 } (single specification)

* When P1 is omitted, the EtherPS configuration information on all EtherPS ports(lines) is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ether-ps config

Ether PS Config

===============

Change Revertive Protection

Port ETH-PS Mode Direction Mode WTR(min) Time(msec)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

1/1 enabled 1:1 bi-direction revertive 12 ---2/1 enabled 1:1 bi-direction non-revertive --- ---

Ether PS Frame Config

=====================

Multicast MAC Address : 01:80:c2:00:00:30

Protocol Type : 0x8902

=========================================

Port Control VID MEG Level Priority

--------------------------------------

1/1 1000 7 7

2/1 10 7 7

*Switch@1#

10-49



EtherOAM

Output items Items to be displayed for Ether PS Config


ETH-PS: EtherPS enable/disable setting

enabled: EtherPS enabled

disabled: EtherPS disabledChange Mode: Change mode

1:1: 1:1 method

Direction: Direction

bi-direction: Bi-directional

Revertive Mode: Switchback mode


non-revertive: Manual switchback

WTR: Recovery standby protection time

0, 5-12: 0, 5-12 (min)

Protection Time: Protection time for associated device switch

---: No setting

Items to be displayed for Ether PS Frame Config

Multicast MAC Address: Destination Multicast MAC address

Protocol Type: Protocol type

Control VID: VLAN ID


Priority: Priority

Related

commands


set ether-ps control-vlan Setting of EtherPS control VLAN


10-50



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show ether-ps status

Display of EtherPS status

Shows the EtherPS status information.

Input format show ether-ps status [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number { 1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1 } (single specification)

* When P1 is omitted, the EtherPS status information on all EtherPS ports (lines) isshown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ether-ps status

Ether PS Status

===============

Port Status Name ETH-PS Status Request Lockout

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

1/1 active working no-request local-nr disabled

3/1 standby protection no-request local-nr disabled2/1 standby working signal-fail-for-working local-sf disabled

4/1 active protection signal-fail-for-working local-sf disabled

Ether PS Alarm

==============

Port FOP-PMb FOP-NR FOP-CM FOP-PMa FOP-PMd FOP-PMr

--------------------------------------------------------

1/1 --- --- --- --- --- ---

2/1 --- --- --- --- --- ---

*Switch@1#

10-51



EtherOAM

Output items Items to be displayed for Ether PS Status


Status: Line status

active: ACT status

standby: SBY statusName: Port operation status

working: Active system

protection: Standby system

ETH-PS Status: EtherPS status

Refer to “EtherPS Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.

Request: Status change cause

Refer to “EtherPS Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.

Items to be displayed for Ether PS Alarm

Refer to “EtherPS Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.---: Not detected

detect: Detected

Relatedcommands


set ether-ps lockout Setting of EtherPS lockout



10-52



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set ether-ring

Setting of EtherRing enable/disable

Sets whether to enable or disable the EtherRing function.

Input formats - Enabling EtherRing

set ether-ring P1 P2 (enable) P3 P4 P5

- Disabling EtherRing

set ether-ring P1 P2 (disable)

Parameters P1: Ring index (1 to 6) (single specification)

P2: EtherRing setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables EtherRing

disable: Disables EtherRing


P3: Ring configuration port (line) number 1 (1/1 to 12/1) (single specification)

P4: Ring configuration port (line) number 2 (1/1 to 12/1) (single specification)

P5: Switchback mode { revertive }



Usageconditions If the same port (line) number is specified for ring configuration port numbers 1 and 2,you cannot execute this setting.

If a link aggregation group is set, the spanning tree port is enabled, or EtherPS isenabled for the specified ring configuration port (line) number, you cannot execute thissetting.

If a ring index has already been registered for the specified ring configuration port (line)number, you cannot execute this setting.

If two or more MEPs have been set for the specified ring configuration port (line)number, the transmission direction of MEP is other than outside, or two or moreassociated MEPs are set for the registered MEP, you cannot execute this setting.

Note To modify the setting, disable EtherRing once.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-ring 1 enable 5/1 6/1 revertive

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set ether-ring control-vlan Setting of EtherRing control VLAN

set ether-ring rpl-owner Setting of EtherRing RPL port

set ether-ring time Setting of EtherRing timer

show ether-ring config Display of EtherRing configuration information

show ether-ring status Display of EtherRing status information

10-53



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set ether-ring control-vlan

Setting of EtherRing control VLAN

Sets control VLAN for the EtherRing function.

Input formats - Enabling EtherRing control VLAN

set ether-ring control-vlan P1 P2 (enable) P3 P4 P5 [P6]

- Disabling EtherRing control VLAN

set ether-ring control-vlan P1 P2 (disable)


P2: EtherRing control VLAN setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables EtherRing control VLAN

disable: Disables EtherRing control VLAN


P3: Ring ID (0 to 255)

P4: Control VLAN ID (1 to 4094) (single specification)




Default values P2:disable

P6: 7

Usageconditions

If the EtherRing function of the specified ring index is not enabled, you cannot executethis setting

If MEP has already been registered for the ring configuration port (line) number of thespecified ring index, you cannot execute this setting when different values are set for theVLAN ID specified for the MEP and the control VLAN ID or when the MEP is not untagMEP.

You cannot set the same value for the control VLAN ID as the VLAN ID set for MIP.

Notes To modify the setting, disable EtherRing control VLAN once.

Set "1" for Ring ID since only the single ring is supported.

When you register MEP to the specified port (line) number using the same VLAN ID asthat for the control VLAN of EtherRing, set the MEG level of the MEP smaller than thatfor the control VLAN of EtherRing.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-ring control-vlan 1 enable 1 4094 7 7

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



10-54



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set ether-ring rpl-owner

Setting of EtherRing RPL port

Sets the RPL port for the EtherRing function.

Input formats - Enabling EtherRing RPL port

set ether-ring rpl-owner P1 P2 (enable) P3

- Disabling EtherRing RPL port

set ether-ring rpl-owner P1 P2 (disable)


P2: EtherRing RPL port setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables EtherRing RPL port

disable: Disables EtherRing RPL port


P3: Port (line) number (1/1 to12/1) (single specification)


Usageconditions

If the EtherRing function of the specified ring index is not enabled, you cannot executethis setting.

If you specify a port (line) number which is not set for the specified ring index, youcannot execute this setting.

Note To modify the setting, disable EtherRing RPL port once.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-ring rpl-owner 1 enable 5/1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Related

commands



10-55



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set ether-ring time

Setting of EtherRing timer

Sets the timer for the EtherRing function.

Input formats - Setting EtherRing recovery standby protection time

set ether-ring time P1 P2 (wtr) P3

- Setting EtherRing status change protection time

set ether-ring time P1 P2 (guard) P3


P2: Change timer type { wtr | guard }

wtr: Recovery standby protection time

guard: Status change protection time

When wtr is specified in P2

P3: Time (5 to 12) (min)

When guard is specified in P2

P3: Time (10 to 2000) (msec)


* If you do not specify a multiple of the setting granularity, this parameterresults in an error.

Default values P3: 5 (min) when P2=wtrP3: 500 (msec) when P2=guard

Usageconditions

If the EtherRing function of the specified ring index is not enabled, you cannot executethis setting.

If you specify the recovery standby protection time, you cannot execute this settingwhen RPL port is not enabled.

Note To set the status change protection time, specify a multiple of the setting granularity.

Input example *Switch@1# set ether-ring time 1 wtr 12

*Switch@1# set ether-ring time 1 guard 2000*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands




10-56



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear ether-ring loop-detection

Clearing of EtherRing loop detection status

Clears the loop detection status of the EtherRing function.

Input format clear ether-ring loop-detection [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number (1/1 to 12/1) (single specification)

* When P1 is omitted, the loop detection statuses for all ports (lines) are cleared.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear ether-ring loop-detection 5/1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

show ether-ring status Display of EtherRing status information

10-57



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show ether-ring config

Display of EtherRing configuration information

Shows the configuration information of the EtherRing function.

Input format show ether-ring config [P1]

Parameter P1: Ring index (1 to 6) (Multiple values can be specified.)

* When P1 is omitted, the configuration information on all ring indexes is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ether-ring config

Ether Ring Config

=================

Revertive RPL Guard

Index Port Mode Owner WTR(min) Time(msec)

------------------------------------------------------------

1 5/1,6/1 revertive 5/1 12 2000

Ether Ring Frame Config

=======================

Multicast MAC Address : 01:19:A7:00:00:(RingID)

Protocol Type : 0x0600

===============================================

Index RingID Control VID MEG Level Priority

-----------------------------------------------

1 1 4094 7 7

*Switch@1#

10-58



EtherOAM

Output items Items to be displayed for Ether Ring Config

Index: Ring index

Port: Ring configuration port (line) number

Revertive Mode: Recovery mode

revertive: Automatic recoveryRPL Owner: RPL port number

Port (line) number

---: No RPL port setting

WTR: Recovery standby protection time

5-12: 5-12 (min)

---: No RPL port setting

Guard Time: Status change protection time

10-2000: 10-2000 (msec)

Items to be displayed for Ether Ring Frame Config

Multicast MAC Address: Destination multicast MAC address

Protocol Type: Protocol type

Index: Ring index

RingID: Ring ID

Control VID: VLAN ID


Priority: Priority

Relatedcommands


set ether-ring control-vlan Setting of EtherRing control VLAN


set ether-ring time Setting of EtherRing timer

10-59



EtherOAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show ether-ring status

Display of EtherRing status information

Shows the status information of the EtherRing function.

Input format show ether-ring status [P1]

Parameter P1: Ring index (1 to 6) (Multiple values can be specified.)

* When P1 is omitted, the status information on all ring indexes is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ether-ring status

Ether Ring Status

=================

Port Node

Index Port Status Status Request

---------------------------------------------------

1 5/1 rpl-block idle local-nr

6/1 forward idle local-nr

Ether Ring Port Information

===========================

Loop

Port Detection

---------------

5/1 ---

6/1 ---

*Switch@1#

10-60



EtherOAM

Output items Items to be displayed for Ether Ring Status

Index: Ring index


Port Status: Port status

Node Status: Node statusRequest: Status change cause

* For the port status, the node status, and the status change cause, refer to "EtherRingFunction" in the "Instruction Manual".

Items to be displayed for Ether Ring Port Information


Loop Detection: Loop detection status

---: Not detected

detect: Detected

Relatedcommands


clear ether-ring loop-detection Clearing of EtherRing loop detection status

10-61



EtherOAM

(Blank page)

10-62



APS

11 APS

11-1



APS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set aps

Setting of APS enable/disable

Sets whether to enable or disable APS and operation mode.

Input formats - Annex-A (Bi-directional and Uni-directional specification)

set aps P1 P2 (enable) [P3 (annex-a) [P4]]

- Annex-B specification

set aps P1 P2 (enable) [P3 (annex-b)] [P4]]

- Disable setting specification

set aps P1 P2 (disable)

Parameters P1: Port (line) number { 1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1 }

P2: APS setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables APS

disable: Disables APS


P3: Operation mode { annex-a | annex-b }

annex-a: Annex-A (SDH) of ITU-T G.783/G.841, Annex-A (SONET) ofGR-253

annex-b: Annex-B of ITU-T G.783/G.841

* When P3 is omitted, annex-b is assumed.

When annex-a is specified in P3

P4: Changeover mode { bi | uni }

bi: Bi-directional

uni: Uni-directional

* When P4 is omitted, bi is assumed.

When annex-b is specified in P3

P4: Changeover mode { bi }

bi: Bi-directional

* When P4 is omitted, bi is assumed.


P3: annex-b

P4: bi

Usage conditions If the ATM line module is not installed in the smaller number slot of the slots whose linemodule type is NONE and which take redundant configuration, you cannot set APS.

If the line module type is not ATM155, ATMP155, or TDMP155, you cannot set APS.

You cannot specify Annex-B for ports whose frame mode is set to SONET.

If the greater slot number of the specified line module has already been configured, youcannot set APS.

If MEP has already been set for the specified line module, you cannot set APS.

If the TDMP155 line mode (SDH/SONET) is not set for the TDMP155 line module, you

cannot set APS.

11-2



APS

Notes To modify APS settings, disable APS once.

If APS is enabled when the ATM line module installed in the greater slot, the greater slotis initialized. If the greater slot cannot be initialized because it is in contention withanother event, however, the line module is installed with OUS status.

Reinitialize the line module installed with OUS status by using the “reset line” commandafter this command has ended.

Input example *Switch@1# set aps 9/1 enable annex-a

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands




set aps lockout Setting of APS lockoutset aps time Setting of APS timer values

change aps Changeover of APS

change aps reset Resetting of APS changeover

show aps information Display of APS settings and status

reset line Resetting of line module

11-3



APS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set aps lockout

Setting of APS lockout

Sets APS target line module lockout.

Input format set aps lockout P1 P2


P2: APS lockout setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables APS lockout

disable: Disables APS lockout

Default value P2:disable

Usage conditions If APS is disabled, this setting is cleared.

You can set APS lockout when APS is enabled.

Set the same APS lockout for the local office and associated office. If the associatedoffice does not have the APS lockout function, do not set APS lockout because it maynot support lockout setting.

Note If APS lockout is set for only the local office or associated office, the APS status of thelocal office may not match the APS status of the associated office or vice versa.

However, you can solve this mismatch by clearing the APS lockout settings.

Input example *Switch@1# set aps lockout 9/1 enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set aps Setting of APS enable/disable




11-4



APS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set aps time

Setting of APS timer values

Sets APS changeover response wait time and recovery standby protection time.

Input formats - Changeover response wait time specification

set aps time P1 P2 (response) P3

- Recovery standby protection time specification

set aps time P1 P2 (recover) P3


P2: Timer { response | recover }

response: Changeover response wait time

recover: Recovery standby protection time (you cannot specify recover when APSmode is set to Annex-A)

When response is specified in P2

P3: Time (500 to 1000 msec)



When recover is specified in P2

P3: Time (30 to 600 msec)



Default values When response is specified in P2: 1000 (msec)

When recover is specified in P2: 300 (sec)

Usage conditions You can set changeover response wait time and recovery standby protection time when APS is enabled.

Note If APS is disabled, this setting is cleared.

Input examples *Switch@1# set aps time 9/1 response 1000

*Switch@1# set aps time 9/1 recover 330

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



11-5



APS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

change aps

Changeover of APS

Changes APS.

Input formats - APS changeover mode (forced change/manual change)

change aps P1 [P2 (forced / manual) P3]

- APS changeover mode (lockout/test request)

change aps P1 [P2 (lkop / exercise)]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number { 1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1 } (single specification)

P2: Change mode { forced | manual | lkop | exercise }

forced: Forced change

manual: Manual change

lkop: Lockout (LKOP)

exercise: Test request

When forced or manual is specified in P2

P3: Change port { master | reserve }

master: Smaller-number line module specification

reserve: Greater-number line module specification

Default value None

Usage conditions You can enter this command when APS is enabled.

If APS lockout is enabled, you cannot enter this command.

If APS mode is Annex.B, you cannot specify P2 and P3.

If APS mode is Annex.A Uni-directional, you cannot specify exercise in P2.

If APS mode is Annex.A and exercise or lkop is specified in P2, you cannot specify P3.

Notes If forced is specified in P2 or APS mode is Annex.B, APS is changed forcedly.

If manual is specified in P2, APS is changed manually.

If exercise is specified in P2, standby port validity test is performed. Changeoveroperation and APS status change are not performed.

If lkop is specified in P2, LKOP changeover is performed.Depending on the following, APS may be unable to be changed:

- Switch destination line module status

- Port (line) status

- APS status

- ACT system specification in P3

If the APS status is changed despite the fact that APS is not changed by this command,you must reset APS changeover with the “change aps reset” command, because APSchangeover due to a port (line) failure is disabled. If APS mode is Annex.B, the APSname is also changed when APS changeover is reset.

11-6



APS

Input examples *Switch@1# change aps 9/1 lkop

*Switch@1# change aps 9/1 forced master

*Switch@1# change aps 9/1 manual reserve

*Switch@1# change aps 9/1 exercise

APS exercise result

===================

Port : 9/1

Result : succeeded

Cause : ---

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands


set aps lockout Setting of APS lockout

set aps time Setting of APS timer values



11-7



APS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

change aps reset

Resetting of APS changeover

Resets APS changeover to enable the system to accept APS changeover resulting from a port (line) failure.

If APS mode is Annex.B, this reset also involves name change.

Input format change aps reset P1

Parameter P1: Port (line) number { 1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1 | 6/1 | 9/1 | 10/1 }

Default value None

Usage conditions You can enter this command when APS is enabled.

You cannot enter this command when APS lockout is enabled.

Note Use this command when resetting APS changeover is required after APS changeoverby the “change aps” command is performed.

Input example *Switch@1# change aps reset 9/1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands





11-8



APS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show aps information

Display of APS settings and status

Shows the APS settings and status.

Input format show aps information [P1]

Parameter P1: Port (line) number { 1/1 | 2/1 | 5/1, 6/1, 9/1, 10/1 }

* When P1 is omitted, information of 1/1, 2/1, 5/1, 6/1, 9/1, and 10/1 is shown.

Default value None


Note If APS is disabled, APS Alarm information and APS Status information of thecorresponding port are not shown.

Input example Switch@#1 show aps information

APS Config

==========

Response Recover

Port APS Time (msec) Time (sec) Mode

--------------------------------------------------------

9/1 enabled 1000 300 annex-a(sdh/uni)

APS Alarm

==========

Port CMF FPF PSBF TAF TDF

---------------------------------------

9/1 --- ---- detect ---- ----

APS Status

==========

Port Status Name APS Status Lockout

----------------------------------------------------------------------

9/1 standby working forced-switch disabled

11/1 active protection forced-switch disabled

Switch@#1

11-9



APS

Output items Items displayed in APS Config


APS: APS setting

enabled: APS enabled

disabled: APS disabledResponse Time: Response confirmation time

500: 500 (msec)

1000: 1000 (msec)

Recover Time: Recovery standby protection time

30-600: 30-600 (sec) *in increments of 30 sec

Mode: Operation mode

annex-a(sdh/bi): Annex.A SDH Bi-directional

annex-a(sdh/uni): Annex.A SDH Uni-directional

annex-a(sonet/bi): Annex.A SONET Bi-directional

annex-a(sonet/uni): Annex.A SONET Uni-directional

annex-b(sdh/bi): Annex.B SDH Bi-directional

Items shown in APS Alarm


CMF: Channel Mismatch Failure

FPF: Far end Protection Line Failure

PSBF: Protection Switch Byte Failure

TAF: Type of Architecture Failure

TDF: Type of Direction Failure

---: Not detected

detect: Detected

Items displayed in APS Status


Status: Line status

active: ACT status

standby: SBY status

Name: Port operation status

Working: Active system

Protection: Standby system

APS Status: APS statusRefer to Appendix in the Instruction Manual.

Lockout: Lockout status

enabled: Enabled

disabled: Disabled

Relatedcommands






11-10



ATM Control

12 ATM Control

12-1



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set pvc static

Registration of PVC

Registers a PVC.

Input format set pvc static P1 P2


P2: VPI value/VCI value or VPI value

VPI value/VCI value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.)

VPI value (single specification)

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set pvc static 3/1 0/32

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

clear pvc static Clearing of PVC

show pvc information Display of PVC setting information

12-2



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear pvc static

Clearing of PVC

Clears a PVC.

Input format clear pvc static P1

Parameter P1: PVC identifier { port (line) number VPI value/VCI value | port (line) number [VPIvalue] | PVC name }

- Port (line) number (single specification)

- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)

- VPI value (single specification)- PVC name: 1 to 32 characters

* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all the PVCs for the specified port (line)number are cleared.

* When VPI value is specified or omitted, execution confirmation is shown afterinputting the command.

Default value None


Notes If a PVC is cleared, other settings using the PVC are also cleared.

If the “clear pvc static” command with single specification of PVC identifier is executedwhen no PVC is registered, an error occurs. If P1 is omitted, this command terminatesnormally.

Input example *Switch@1# clear pvc static 3/1 0/32

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands set pvc static Registration of PVCshow pvc information Display of PVC setting information

12-3



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set pvc name

Registration of PVC name

Registers a PVC name.

Input format set pvc name P1 P2 P3


P2: VPI value/VCI value or VPI value

VPI value/VCI value (single specification)


P3: PVC name (1 to 32 characters)

Default value None

Usage condition If no PVC is registered, you cannot use this function.

Note When a PVC is cleared, the PVC name is automatically cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# set pvc name 3/1 0/32 pvc32

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set pvc static Registration of PVC


clear pvc name Clearing of PVC name


12-4



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear pvc name

Clearing of PVC name

Clears a PVC name.

Input format clear pvc name P1





* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all the PVC names for the specified port (line)number are cleared.


Default value None


Notes If the “clear pvc name” command with single specification of PVC identifier is executedwhen no PVC is registered, an error occurs. If P1 is omitted, this command terminatesnormally.

Input example *Switch@1# clear pvc name 3/1 0/32

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands


clear pvc static Clearing of PVCset pvc name Registration of PVC name


12-5



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set pvc admin

Setting of PVC blocking/unblocking

Sets whether to block or unblock a PVC.

Input format set pvc admin P1 P2

Parameters P1: PVC identifier { port (line) number VPI value/VCI value | port (line) number VPI value| PVC name }


- VPI value/VCI value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.)


P2: Blocking/unblocking setting { enable | disable }

enable: Unblocks PVC

disable: Blocks PVC



Note When the PVC is cleared, this function is automatically cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# set pvc admin 3/1 0/32 disable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



set pvc port admin Setting PVC blocking/unblocking en bloc


12-6



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set pvc port admin

Setting PVC blocking/unblocking en bloc

Sets PVC blocking/unblocking en bloc.

Input format set pvc port admin P1 P2


P2: Setting blocking/unblocking en bloc { enable | disable }


disable: Blocks PVC



Notes When the PVC is cleared, this function is automatically cleared.

Entering this command applies PVC blocking/unblocking en bloc to all the PVCsregistered in the specified port.

Input example *Switch@1# set pvc port admin 3/1 disable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



set pvc admin Setting of PVC blocking/unblocking


12-7



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show pvc information

Display of PVC setting information

Shows PVC setting information.

Input format show pvc information [P1]

Parameter P1: Line module number or PVC identifier


PVC identifier { port (line) number VPI value/VCI value | port (line) number [VPI value]| PVC name }

- Port (line) number (single specification)- VPI value/VCI value (Multiple VCI values can be specified.)

- VPI value (Multiple values can be specified.)

- PVC name: 1 to 32 characters

* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all PVC setting information for the specifiedport (line) number is shown.

* When port (line) number is omitted, all PVC setting information for the ATMtransmission paths of the entire device is shown.

Default value None


Notes None

12-8



ATM Control

Input example *Switch@1# show pvc information

PVC System Connection Count

===========================

Configured Configurable-------------------------------------

3 381

PVC Connection Count

====================

Slot Enabled Disabled Configured Configurable

-------------------------------------------------

3 1 0 1 255

10 1 1 2 126

PVC Table

=========

Port VPI/VCI Name Admin

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

3/1 0/32 ab123456789012345678901234567890 enabled10/1 1/255 cd098765432109876543210987654321 enabled

10/1 255/255 disabled

*Switch@1#

Output items PVC System Connection Count

Configured: Number of registered PVCs in the entire device

Configurable: Number of remaining registerable PVCs in the entire device

PVC Connection Count

Slot: Line module number

Enabled: Number of unblocked PVCs

Disabled: Number of blocked PVCs

Configured: Number of registered port (line) PVCs

Configurable: Number of remaining registerable port (line) PVCs

PVC Table


VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value

Name: PVC name

Admin:


disable: Blocks PVC

Relatedcommands



set pvc name Registration of PVC name

clear pvc name Clearing of PVC name



12-9



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set pvc-vlan mode

Setting of PVC-VLAN mode

Sets an ATM transmission path portbase or tagbase.

Input format set pvc-vlan mode P1 P2


P2: PVC-VLAN mode setting { portbase | tagbase }

portbase: Portbase setting

tagbase: Tagbase setting

Default value P2: portbase


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set pvc-vlan mode 3/1 tagbase

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

show pvc-vlan table pvc Display of VLAN VC setting status per PVC

show pvc-vlan table vid Display of VLAN VC setting status per VLAN

12-10



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set pvc-vlan table

Setting of VLAN VC

Sets a VLAN VC.

Input format set pvc-vlan table P1 P2

Parameters P1: PVC identifier { port (line) number VPI value/VCI value | PVC name }




P2: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }VLAN ID: 1 to 4094


Default value None


Note When the PVC is cleared, this function is automatically cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# set pvc-vlan table 3/1 0/32 100

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



clear pvc-vlan table Clearing of VLAN VC settings

show pvc-vlan table pvc Display of VLAN VC setting status per PVC

show pvc-vlan table vid Display of VLAN VC setting status per VLAN

12-11



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear pvc-vlan table

Clearing of VLAN VC settings

Clears VLAN VC settings.

Input format clear pvc-vlan table P1





* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all the VLAN VC settings for the specified port(line) number are cleared.


Default value None


Note If the “clear pvc-vlan table” command with single specification of PVC identifier isexecuted when no PVC is registered, an error occurs. If P1 is omitted, this commandterminates normally.

Input example *Switch@1# clear pvc-vlan table 3/1 0/32

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set pvc-vlan table Setting of VLAN VC

show pvc-vlan table pvc Display of VLAN VC setting status per PVCshow pvc-vlan table vid Display of VLAN VC setting status per VLAN

12-12



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show pvc-vlan table pvc

Display of VLAN VC setting status per PVC

Shows the VLAN VC setting status per PVC.

Input format show pvc-vlan table pvc [P1]




- VPI value (Multiple values can be specified.)- PVC name: 1 to 32 characters

* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all the VLAN VC setting statuses for thespecified port (line) number are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show pvc-vlan table pvc

PVC-VLAN Mode Table

===================

Port Base

-------------------------

3/1 port

4/1 tag

PVC-VLAN Table

==============

Port VPI/VCI VID VLAN-Name

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

3/1 255/255 1 ab123456789012345678901234567890

4/1 25/1638 4094 cd123456789012345678901234567890

*Switch@1#

Output items PVC-VLAN Mode Table


Base: PVC-VLAN mode

port: Portbase

tag: Tagbase

PVC-VLAN Table



VID: VLAN ID

VLAN-Name: VLAN name

12-13



ATM Control

Relatedcommands




set pvc-vlan mode Setting of PVC-VLAN mode



12-14



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show pvc-vlan table vid

Display of VLAN VC setting status per VLAN

Shows the VLAN VC setting status per VLAN.

Input format show pvc-vlan table vid [P1]




* When P1 is omitted, the VLAN VC setting statuses of all the VLANs are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show pvc-vlan table vid 1

PVC-VLAN Mode Table

===================

Port Base

------------------

3/1 port

4/1 tag

PVC-VLAN Table

==============

VID Port VPI/VCI PVC-Name

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

1 3/1 1/255 ab123456789012345678901234567890

1 3/1 255/255 cd123456789012345678901234567890

1 4/1 0/32

*Switch@1#

Output items PVC-VLAN Mode Table


Base: PVC-VLAN mode

port: Portbase

tag: Tagbase

PVC-VLAN Table

VID: VLAN ID



PVC-Name: PVC name

12-15



ATM Control

Relatedcommands



set pvc name Registration of PVC name




12-16



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set isolate pvc

Setting/clearing of PVC isolate

Sets or clears PVC isolate.

Input format set isolate pvc P1 P2


P2: PVC isolate setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables PVC isolate

disable: Disables PVC isolate



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set isolate pvc 3/1 enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show isolate pvc Display of PVC isolate setting status

12-17



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show isolate pvc

Display of PVC isolate setting status

Shows the PVC isolate setting status.

Input format show isolate pvc [P1]


* When P1 is omitted, the PVC isolate setting statuses of all the ports (lines) areshown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show isolate pvc

PVC-Isolate Configuration

=========================

Port Status

-------------------

3/1 enabled

4/1 disabled

*Switch@1#

Output items PVC-Isolate Configuration


Status:

enabled: PVC isolate enabled

disabled: PVC isolate disabled

Related

command

set isolate pvc Setting of PVC isolate

12-18



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show atm-fdb table pvc

Display of MAC learning information per PVC

Shows MAC learning information per PVC.

Input format show atm-fdb table pvc [P1]





* When P1 is omitted, MAC learning information of all the PVCs is shown.

* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, MAC learning information of all the PVCs forthe specified port (line) number is shown.

* When port (line) number is omitted, MAC learning information of all the PVCs for the ATM transmission path in the entire device is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show atm-fdb table pvc 10/1

FDB Learning Table

==================

Port VPI/VCI MAC Address VID VLAN-Name

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

10/1 1/32 00:00:00:00:00:01 4093 ab123456789012345678901234567890

10/1 255/255 00:00:00:00:00:02 4094 cd123456789012345678901234567890

*Switch@1#




VID: VLAN ID


Relatedcommands

show atm-fdb table vid Display of MAC learning information per VLAN

show atm-fdb count pvc Display of MAC learning count per PVC

show atm-fdb count vid Display of MAC learning count per VLAN

clear atm-fdb table pvc Clearing of MAC learning information per PVC

12-19



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show atm-fdb table vid

Display of MAC learning information per VLAN

Shows MAC learning information per VLAN.

Input format show atm-fdb table vid [P1] [P2]


* When P1 is omitted, MAC learning information of all the ports (lines) is shown.



VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters* When P2 is omitted, MAC learning information of all the VLANs is shown.

Default value None


Notes If P2 (VLAN identifier) is omitted, MAC learning information of all the VLANs for thespecified port (line) number is shown. If P1 (port (line) number) is omitted, MAClearning information of the specified VLAN for the ATM transmission path in the entiredevice is shown. If P1 (port (line) number) and P2 (VLAN identifier) are omitted, MAClearning information of all the VLANs for the ATM transmission path in the entire device

is shown.

*Switch@1# show atm-fdb table vidInput examplesFDB Learning Table

==================

Port VID MAC Address VPI/VCI PVC-Name

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

3/1 1 00:00:00:00:00:0a 0/32 ab123456789012345678901234567890

3/1 2 00:00:00:00:00:0b 0/33

10/1 4093 00:00:00:00:00:01 0/32 ab123456789012345678901234567890

10/1 4094 00:00:00:00:00:02 255/255 cd123456789012345678901234567890

*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# show atm-fdb table vid 10/1 4093

FDB Learning Table

==================

Port VID MAC Address VPI/VCI PVC-Name

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

10/1 4093 00:00:00:00:00:01 0/32 ab123456789012345678901234567890

*Switch@1#


VID: VLAN IDMAC Address: MAC address


PVC-Name: PVC name

12-20



ATM Control

Relatedcommands

show atm-fdb table pvc Display of MAC learning information per PVC




12-21



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show atm-fdb count pvc

Display of MAC learning count per PVC

Shows the MAC learning count per PVC.

Input format show atm-fdb count pvc [P1]





* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, the MAC learning counts of all the PVCs forthe specified port (line) number are shown.

* When port (line) number is omitted, the MAC learning counts of all the PVCs for the ATM transmission path in the entire device is shown.

Default value None


Notes None

Input examples *Switch@1# show atm-fdb count pvc

Total Learned Entry

===================

Port Learned-Entry

--------------------------------

3/1 2000

10/1 1000

FDB Learned Entry

=================

Port VPI/VCI PVC-Name Learned-Entry

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

3/1 0/32 ab012345678901234567890123456789 1500

3/1 1/32 500

10/1 255/255 1000

*Switch@1# show atm-fdb count pvc 10/1 255/255

FDB Learned Entry

=================

Port VPI/VCI PVC-Name Learned-Entry

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

10/1 255/255 1000

*Switch@1#

12-22



ATM Control

Output items Total Learned Entry


Learned-Entry: MAC learning count

FDB Learned Entry

Port: Port (line) numberVPI/VCI: VPI/VCI value

PVC-Name: PVC name


Relatedcommands





12-23



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show atm-fdb count vid

Display of MAC learning count per VLAN

Shows the MAC learning count per VLAN.

Input format show atm-fdb count vid [P1] [P2]


* When P1 is omitted, the MAC learning counts of all the ports (lines) are shown.



VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters* When P2 is omitted, the MAC learning counts of all the VLANs are shown.

Default value None


Notes If P2 (VLAN identifier) is omitted, the MAC learning counts of all the VLANs for thespecified port (line) number are shown. If P1 (port (line) number) is omitted, the MAClearning count of the specified VLAN for the ATM transmission path in the entire deviceis shown. If P1 and P2 are omitted, the MAC learning counts of all the VLANs for the ATM transmission path in the entire device are shown.

12-24



ATM Control

Input examples *Switch@1# show atm-fdb count vid

Total Learned Entry

===================

Port Learned-Entry

-------------------------------------

5/1 600

9/1 1000

10/1 1500

FDB Learned Entry

=================

Port VID VLAN-Name Learned-Entry

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

5/1 1 ab012345678901234567890123456789 100

5/1 4094 500

9/1 4093 1000

10/1 1 ab012345678901234567890123456789 1500

*Switch@1#*Switch@1# show atm-fdb count vid 5/1 4094

FDB Learned Entry

=================

Port VID VLAN-Name Learned-Entry

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

5/1 4094 500

*Switch@1#

Output items Total Learned Entry



FDB Learned Entry


VID: VLAN ID



Relatedcommands



show atm-fdb count pvc Display of MAC learning count per PVCclear atm-fdb table pvc Clearing of MAC learning information per PVC

12-25



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear atm-fdb table pvc

Clearing of MAC learning information per PVC

Clears MAC learning information of the specified PVC.

Input format clear atm-fdb table pvc P1





* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, the MACs learned in all the PVCs for thespecified port (line) number are cleared.


Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear atm-fdb table pvc 3/1 0/32

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands





12-26



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set atm-loop

Setting/clearing of ATM loop guard

Sets and clears an ATM loop guard.

Input format set atm-loop P1 P2 P3





P3: ATM loop guard { enable | disable }enable: Enables ATM loop guard

disable: Disables ATM loop guard


Usage condition You can register only the ATM loop guards mapped to the VLAN-VC.

Note When a PVC is cleared, or when the setting of a VLAN-VC is cleared, the ATM loopguard is automatically cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# set atm-loop 3/1 100,200,300 enable*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show atm-loop config Display of ATM loop guard setting status

12-27



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show atm-loop config

Display of ATM loop guard setting status

Shows the ATM loop guard setting status.

Input format show atm-loop config [P1] [P2]


* When P1 is omitted, the ATM loop guard setting statuses of all the ports (lines) areshown.



* When P2 is omitted, the ATM loop guard setting statuses of all the VLANs areshown.

Default value None


Note Only the ATM loop guard setting statuses are shown that are mapped to the VLAN-VC.

Input example *Switch@1# show atm-loop config

ATM-Loop Configuration Table

============================

Port VID ATM-Loop

--------------------------------

3/1 4094 enabled

10/1 4094 disabled

*Switch@1#


VID: VLAN ID

ATM-Loop: ATM loop guard setting status

Relatedcommand

set atm-loop Setting/clearing of ATM loop guard

12-28



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show atm-loop information

Display of ATM loop trap transmission state

Shows the ATM loop trap detection result.

Input format show atm-loop information [P1]





* When VPI value or VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all ATM loop trap transmissionstates for the specified port (line) number are shown.

* When PVC identifier is omitted, all ATM loop trap transmission states for the entiredevice are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show atm-loop information

ATM-Loop Information Table

==========================

Port VPI/VCI VID Detect

---------------------------------------------

3/1 1/32 4094 detect

10/1 255/32 4000 ---

10/1 255/100 4001 detect

r2/1 255/32 4000 ---

r2/1 255/100 4001 ---

*Switch@1#



VID: VLAN ID

Detect: ATM loop trap transmission state

Relatedcommand

clear atm-loop Clearing of ATM loop detection

12-29



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear atm-loop

Clearing of ATM loop detection

Clears the ATM loop detection result.

Input format clear atm-loop P1





* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all ATM loop detection results for the specifiedport (line) number are cleared.

Default value None

Usage condition If the specified PVC has not been registered, you cannot execute this command.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear atm-loop 3/1 0/32

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show atm-loop information Display of ATM loop trap transmission state

12-30



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set atmop mode

Setting of ATMoP mode

Sets ATMoP mode.

Input formats - Specifying c-tag

set atmop mode P1 P2 (c-tag) [P6 (control-word) P7]

- Specifying udp-ip

set atmop mode P1 P2 (udp-ip) P3 [P4 (port-mode) P5] [P6 (control-word) P7]

Parameters P1: Line module number (1 to 12) (single specification)

P2: Packet format { c-tag | udp-ip }

c-tag: Supports ATM over Ether with double tag VLAN

udp-ip: Supports ATM over UDP/IP with single tag VLAN

When udp-ip is specified in P2

P3: Source IP address

P4: Port mode specification { port-mode }

port-mode: Port mode specification

P5: Port mode { source | destination }

source: Source port mode

destination: Destination port mode

P6: Control word specification { control-word }

control-word: Control word specification

P7: Control word setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enable

disable: Disable

Default values P2: c-tag

P5: source

P7: disable

Usageconditions

If ATMoP format has already been set, an error occurs.

If a path between ATMs has already been set, an error occurs.

The following IP addresses cannot be used.IP address which applies to 0.xxx.xxx.xxx, 127.xxx.xxx.xxx, 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to255.xxx.xxx.xxx, 192.168.128.0/24, or 192.168.129.0/24.

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set atmop mode 1 c-tag control-word enable

*Switch@1# set atmop mode 2 udp-ip 1.2.3.4 port-mode destination

*Switch@1#

Output item

12-31



ATM Control

Relatedcommands

set atmop format Setting of ATMoP format

clear atmop format Clearing of ATMoP format setting

show atmop format Display of ATMoP format information

set pvc connection Setting of path between ATMs

clear pvc connection Clearing path setting between ATMs

show pvc connection Display of path information between ATMs

12-32



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

set atmop format

Setting of ATMoP format

Sets ATMoP format.

Input formats - Specifying c-tag for ATMoP mode

set atmop format P1 [P2] P3 P4 (outer) P5 P6 (inner) P7

- Specifying udp-ip for ATMoP mode

set atmop format P1 [P2] P3 P4 (outer) P5 P8 P9 [P10]


- Port (line) number (single specification)- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)

- VPI value (single specification)


P2: Conversion VPI value/VCI value (single specification) or conversion VPI value(single specification)


P4: VLAN identifier 1

outer: VLAN identifier 1



VLAN name: 1 to 32 characters When c-tag is specified in P2 for ATMoP mode

P6: VLAN identifier 2 { inner }

inner: VLAN identifier 2




When udp-ip is specified in P2 for ATMoP mode

P8: Destination IP address

P9: Destination port number (1024 to 65535)

P10: TTL value (1 to 255)


Usageconditions

If the specified PVC has not been set, you cannot execute this command.

A PVC identifier used for path connection between ATMs cannot be set.

If the settings do not match the ATM mode which has already been set, an error occurs.

* Specify inner VLAN (P6 and P7) when the ATMoP mode is c-tag.

* Specify the destination IP address and destination UDP port number (P8 and P9)when the ATMoP mode is udp-ip.

If the connection types (VP connection/VC connection) of the registered PVC and thespecified PVC do not match, an error occurs.

You cannot specify the broadcast address, multicast address, local address and theaddress entirely composed of “0”s.

12-33



ATM Control

The following IP addresses cannot be used.

IP address which applies to 0.xxx.xxx.xxx, 127.xxx.xxx.xxx, 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to255.xxx.xxx.xxx, 192.168.128.0/24, or 192.168.129.0/24.

A VLAN ID which has already been registered for TDMoP, PVC-VLAN or the like cannotbe set. This is for VLAN identifier 1.

If this function has already been set, the same combination cannot be set in a card.

The following combination patterns are available for this setting.

- When the ATMoP mode is c-tag, combination of specified PVC and Inner-VLAN

- When the ATMoP mode is udp-ip and source UDP port number check is specified,combination of specified PVC, destination IP address, and source UDP port number

- When the ATMoP mode is udp-ip and destination UDP port number check is specified,combination of specified PVC, destination IP address, and destination UDP portnumber

* The specified PVC means the conversion PVC (P2).

When the conversion PVC is omitted, it means the PVC (P1).

If path connection is set between ATMs, the same combination of values cannot beset. The following combination patterns are available for path connection between ATMs.

- When the ATMoP mode is c-tag, you cannot set the same values for the followingcombinations of the PVC and the VLAN ID.

"PVC identifier 1 (P1) and Inner-VLAN identifier 1 (P5)",


"PVC identifier 2 (P6) and Inner-VLAN identifier 1 (P5)", and

"PVC identifier 2 (P6) and Inner-VLAN identifier 2 (P10)"

- When the ATMoP mode is udp-ip, you cannot set the same values for the followingcombinations of the PVC and the UPD port number.

"PVC identifier 1 (P1) and UDP port number 1 (P5)",


"PVC identifier 2 (P6) and UDP port number 1 (P5)", and

"PVC identifier 2 (P6) and UDP port number 2 (P10)"

* The combination condition is checked by the VPI value for VP connection.

Note When the PVC is cleared, this setting is also cleared.

If the ATMoP mode is UDP/IP and the port mode is source, the destination port numberis 2142 and the source port number is the value specified with this command.

If the ATMoP mode is UDP/IP and the port mode is destination, the destination portnumber is the value specified with this command and the source port number is 2142.

Input example *Switch@1# set atmop format 3/1 0/32 5/100 00:00:00:00:00:01 outer 200 inner3000

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP mode





12-34



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show atmop format

Display of ATMoP format information

Shows the ATMoP format information.

Input format show atmop format [P1]


Line module: 1 to 12 (single specification)

PVC identifier { port (line) number VPI value/VCI value | port (line) number [VPI value] |PVC name }

- Port (line) number (single specification)- VPI value/VCI value (multiple specification)

- VPI value (multiple specification)


* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all ATMoP format setting information for thespecified port (line) number is shown.

* When PVC identifier is omitted, all ATMoP format setting information for the ATMPports of the entire device is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show atmop format 10/1 0/32

ATMoP Table

===========

Source Packet Source Control

Slot MAC Address Format IP Address Port Mode Word

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

10 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa c-tag --- --- disabled

*00:30:13:a1:2a:ab

ATMoP L2-Header Table

=====================

VPI/VCI VPI/VCI Destination Outer Inner

Port (ATM) (ATMoP) MAC Address VID VID

-------------------------------------------------------

10/1 0/32 5/10 00:00:00:00:00:01 1000 2000


=====================

VPI/VCI Source Destination Destination

Port (ATM) UDP Port IP address UDP Port TTL

-------------------------------------------------------

10/1 0/32 --- --- --- ---

12-35



ATM Control

*Switch@1#

Output items ATMoP Table

Slot: Slot number

Source MAC Address: Source MAC address

* When the APS mode is enabled, two MAC addresses are displayed. Onedisplayed with * is used as the source MAC address.

Packet Format: Allowed packet format

Source IP Address: Source IP address

Port Mode:

source: UDP port mode source

destination: UDP port mode destination

Control Word:

enabled: Adds Control Word

disabled: Do not add Control Word



VPI/VCI(ATM): VPI/VCI value

VPI/VCI(ATMoP): Conversion VPI/VCI value

Destination MAC Address: Destination MAC address

Outer VID: VLAN identifier 1

Inner VID: VLAN identifier 2



VPI/VCI(ATM): VPI/VCI value

Source UDP Port: Source port number

Destination IP Address: Destination IP address

Destination UDP Port: Destination port number

TTL: TTL value

Relatedcommands




12-36



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear atmop format

Clearing of ATMoP format setting

Clears the ATMoP format setting.

Input format clear atmop format P1




- VPI value (single specification )- PVC name: 1 to 32 characters

* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all the ATMoP format settings for the specifiedport (line) number are cleared.

Default value None


Note If this command is executed with single specification when no ATMoP format setting isregistered, an error occurs. If P1 is omitted, this command terminates normally.

Input example *Switch@1# clear atmop format 3/1 0/32

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands




12-37



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set pvc connection

Setting of path between ATMs

Sets a path between ATMs.

Input formats - Specifying c-tag for ATMoP mode

set pvc connection P1 P2 (outer) P3 P4 (inner) P5 P6 [P7 P8 (outer) P9 (inner) P10]

- Specifying udp-ip for ATMoP mode

set pvc connection P1 P2 (outer) P3 P4 (udp-port) P5 P6

P7 P8 (outer) P9 (udp-port) P10]

Parameters P1: PVC identifier { port (line) number VPI value/VCI value | port (line) number VPI value

| PVC name }- Port (line) number (single specification)




P2: VLAN identifier 1 { outer }





P4: VLAN identifier 2 { inner } or UDP port number 1 { udp-port }

inner: VLAN identifier 2udp-port: UDP port number 1

When inner is specified in P4




When udp-port is specified in P4

P5: UDP port number 1 (1024 to 65535)

P6: PVC identifier 2 { port (line) number VPI value/VCI value | port (line) number VPIvalue | PVC name }





P7: VLAN identifier 3 { outer }





P9: VLAN identifier 4 { inner } or UDP port number 2 { udp-port }

inner: VLAN identifier 4

udp-port: UDP port number 2

12-38



ATM Control

When inner is specified in P9




When udp-port is specified in P9

P10: UDP port number 2 (1024 to 65535)

Default value None

Usageconditions

If the specified PVC has not been set, you cannot execute this command.

A PVC identifier used for ATMoP format or for this function cannot be set.

If the settings do not match the ATMoP mode which has already been set, an erroroccurs.

* Specify VLAN identifiers in P5 and P10 when the ATMoP mode is c-tag.

* Specify UDP port numbers in P5 and P10 when the ATMoP mode is udp-ip.

If the connection types (VP connection/VC connection) of the registered PVC and the

specified PVC do not match, an error occurs.If the PVC connection types of the source and the destination do not match, an erroroccurs.

A VLAN ID which has already been registered for TDMoP, PVC-VLAN or the like cannotbe set. This is for VLAN identifiers 1 and 3.

For combinations of physical ports and PVCs to be specified in P1 and P6, the followingcan be set, depending on conditions. (Note 1)

(1) Same physical port, same PVC

(2) Same physical port, different PVC

(3) Different physical port, same PVC

(4) Different physical port, different PVC

Note 1) The settings are not allowed under the following conditions.

- When the ATMoP mode is c-tag, you cannot set the same values for the followingcombinations of the PVC and the VLAN ID.



"PVC identifier 2 (P6) and Inner-VLAN identifier 1 (P5)", and

"PVC identifier 2 (P6) and Inner-VLAN identifier 2 (P10)"

Also, if the above combination is the same as that for the ATMoP format, the settingis not allowed.

- When the ATMoP mode is udp-ip, you cannot set the same values for the followingcombinations of the PVC and the UPD port number.



"PVC identifier 2 (P6) and UDP port number 1 (P5)", and

"PVC identifier 2 (P6) and UDP port number 2 (P10)"

Also, if the above combination plus the source IP address specified in the ATMoPmode is the same as that for the ATMoP format, the setting is not allowed.

* The PVC identifier in the above combination conditions does not include port (line)number.

* When the PVC identifier 1 and PVC identifier 2 are the same in the abovecombination conditions, the same combination can be set.

* The combination condition is checked by the VPI value for VP connection.

* The above combination condition is checked by the VPI value for VP connection.

12-39



ATM Control

Notes When the PVC is cleared, this setting is also cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# set pvc connection 3/1 0/32 outer 200 inner 3000 5/1 1/40 outer400 inner 4000

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands






12-40



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show pvc connection

Display of path information between ATMs

Shows the information of the path between ATMs.

Input format show pvc connection [P1]

Parameter P1: PVC identifier { port (line) number VPI value/VCI value | port (line) number VPI value| PVC name }




* When PVC identifier is omitted, all path setting information between all ATMs for the ATMP ports of the entire device is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show pvc connection 10/1 0/32

ATM Connection Table

====================

Outer Inner UDP Outer Inner UDP

Port VPI/VCI VID VID Port Port VPI/VCI VID VID Port

------------------------------------------------------------------

1/1 0/32 100 20 --- 3/1 1/32 200 21 ---

*Switch@1#

Output items ATMoP Connection Table


VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI valueOuter VID: VLAN identifier 1

Inner VID: VLAN identifier 2

Source UDP Port: Source port number

UDP Port: UDP port number

Relatedcommands




12-41



ATM Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear pvc connection

Clearing path setting between ATMs

Clears the path setting between ATMs.

Input format clear pvc connection P1





Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear pvc connection 3/1 0/32

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands




12-42



ATM-QoS

13 ATM-QoS

13-1



ATM-QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set atm-shaper mode

Setting of rate mode

Sets rate mode.

Input format set atm-shaper mode P1 P2


P2: Rate mode { low | high }

low: Low speed

high: High speed

Default value P2: low


Note If the set VPPCR or VCPCR value of the ATM shaper is less than 384 kbps, you cannotset rate mode to high speed.

Input example *Switch@1# set atm-shaper mode 3/1 high

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show atm-shaper rate Display of ATM shaper

set atm-shaper rate Setting of ATM shaper

13-2



ATM-QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set atm-shaper rate

Setting of ATM shaper

Sets the ATM shaper.

Input formats - VP mode, Constant Bit Rate or Unspecified Bit Rate specification

set atm-shaper rate P1 P2 (vp) P3 (cbr | ubr) P4

- VP mode, Guaranteed Frame Rate specification

set atm-shaper rate P1 P2 (vp) P3 (gfr) P4 P6

- VC mode, Constant Bit Rate, or Unspecified Bit Rate specification

set atm-shaper rate P1 P2 (vc) P3 (cbr | ubr) P5

- VC mode, Guaranteed Frame Rate specification

set atm-shaper rate P1 P2 (vc) P3 (gfr) P5 P6

- Hierarchical VP mode, Constant Bit Rate, or Unspecified Bit Rate specification

set atm-shaper rate P1 P2 (vpvc) P3 (cbr | ubr) P4 P5

- Hierarchical VP mode, Guaranteed Frame Rate specification

set atm-shaper rate P1 P2 (vpvc) P3 (gfr) P4 P5 P6

13-3



ATM-QoS




- VPI value (only VP connection)

- PVC name: 1 to 32 charactersP2: Shaper mode { vp | vc | vpvc }

vp: VP mode

vc: VC mode

vpvc: Hierarchical VP mode

P3: Traffic class { cbr | ubr | gfr }

cbr: Constant Bit Rate

ubr: Unspecified Bit Rate

gfr: Guaranteed Frame Rate

When vp is specified in P2

P4: VPPCR value { vppcr }

vppcr 48, 64, 96, 128, 192, 256, 384, 500(increments of 500 hereafter) to 150000 (Kbps)

When gfr is specified in P3

P6: MCR value { mcr }

mcr 24, 32, 48, 64, 96, 100, 128, 150, 200

(increments of 100 hereafter) to 150000 (Kbps)

When vc is specified in P2

P5: VCPCR value { vcpcr }

vcpcr 48, 64, 96, 128, 192, 256, 384, 500


When gfr is specified in P3

P6: MCR value { mcr }

mcr 24, 32, 48, 64, 96, 100, 128, 150, 200


When vpvc is specified in P2

P4: VPPCR value { vppcr }

vppcr 48, 64, 96, 128, 192, 256, 384, 500


P5: VCPCR value { vcpcr }

vcpcr 48, 64, 96, 128, 192, 256, 384, 500


When gfr is specified in P3P6: MCR value { mcr }

mcr 24, 32, 48, 64, 96, 100, 128, 150, 200


Default value None


13-4



ATM-QoS

Notes If rate mode is set to high speed, you cannot set a value less than 384 kbps as theVPPCR or VCPCR value of the ATM shaper.

You can set up to 128 ATM shapers in one port.

If shaper mode is VP mode, you can set up to 256 PVCs in the same ATM shaper.

If shaper mode is VC mode, you can set only one PVC in the ATM shaper.

If shaper mode is hierarchical VP mode, you can set up to 256 PVCs in the same ATMshaper.

You cannot set different shaper mode as the same VPI value.

You cannot change the shaper mode set in the ATM shaper.

If shaper mode is set to VP mode, you can omit VPPCR value setting when changingthe traffic class or adding a PVC after setting the ATM shaper.

If shaper mode is set to VC mode, you can omit VCPCR value setting when changingthe traffic class after setting the ATM shaper.

If shaper mode is set to hierarchical VP mode, you can omit VPPCR value setting andVCPCR value setting when changing the traffic class after setting the ATM shaper.You can also omit VPPCR value setting when adding a PVC.

If shaper mode is VP mode, the total MCR value of the ATM shaper cannot exceed the

VPPCR value.If shaper mode is VC mode, the MCR value of the ATM shaper cannot exceed theVCPCR value.

If shaper mode is hierarchical VP mode, the sum of the VCPCR and MCR values of the ATM shaper whose traffic class is CBR cannot exceed the VPPCR value.

The total effective band of the ATM shaper per port cannot exceed 150000 kbps (exceptwhen all the traffic classes of the ATM shaper in one port are UBR).

The ATM shaper setting is automatically cleared when the PVC is cleared.

If there is a traffic of 200000Kbps or higher in the direction from the Switch module to the ATM line module, up to PCR settings other than CBR may be unable to be output.

Input examples *Switch@1# set atm-shaper rate 3/1 0/32 vp cbr vppcr 1000

*Switch@1# set atm-shaper rate 3/1 1/33 vc ubr vcpcr 2000

*Switch@1# set atm-shaper rate 3/1 2/34 vpvc gfr vppcr 100000 vcpcr 50000mcr 25000

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands


set atm-shaper mode Setting of rate mode


clear atm-shaper rate Clearing of ATM shapershow atm-shaper information Display of effective band

13-5



ATM-QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show atm-shaper rate

Display of ATM shaper

Shows an ATM shaper.

Input format show atm-shaper rate [P1]





* When P1 is omitted, the ATM shaper settings of all the VPIs and VCIs set in all theports (lines) are shown.

* When VPI value is omitted, the ATM shaper settings of all the VPIs and VCIs set inthe specified port (line) are shown.

* When VPI value is specified, the ATM shaper settings of all the VCIs set in thespecified port (line) and VPI are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show atm-shaper rate

Rate Mode Table

===============

Port Mode

-----------------

3/1 high

4/1 low

10/1 high

ATM Shaper Table(Kbps)

======================

Port VPI/VCI Class Shaper VP-PCR VC-PCR MCR

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

3/1 0/32 ubr vp 100000 --- ---

4/1 1/10000 cbr vc --- 100000 ---

10/1 3/16383 gfr vpvc 100000 100000 100000

*Switch@1#

13-6



ATM-QoS

Output items (Rate Mode Table)


Mode: Rate mode

low: Low speed

high: High speed

(ATM Shaper Table(Kbps))


VPI/VCI: VPI value/VCI value

Class: Traffic class

cbr: constant bit rate

ubr: unspecified bit rate

gfr: guaranteed frame rate

Shaper: Shaper mode

vp: VP modevc: VC mode


VP-PCR: VPPCR value

VC-PCR: VCPCR value

MCR: MCR value

Relatedcommands



clear atm-shaper rate Clearing of ATM shaper

13-7



ATM-QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show atm-shaper information

Display of effective band

Shows an ATM shaper effective band.

Input format show atm-shaper information [P1]

Parameter P1: PVC identifier { port (line) number [VPI value] | PVC name }




* When P1 is omitted, the ATM shaper effective bands of all the VPIs and VCIs set inall the ports (lines) are shown.

* When VPI value is omitted, the ATM shaper effective bands of all the VPIs and VCIsset in the specified port (line) are shown.

* When VPI value is specified, the ATM shaper effective bands of all the VCIs set inthe specified port (line) and VPI are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show atm-shaper information

ATM Shaper Table

================

Port Registered-Shaper Available-Shaper

-----------------------------------------

3/1 17 111

ATM Shaper Port Rate Table(Kbps)

================================

Maximum- Available- Total-

Port Rate Rate Rate CBR(PCR) UBR(PCR) GFR(PCR) GFR(MCR)-----------------------------------------------------------------------

3/1 150000 29000 121000 46000 46000 46000 21000

ATM Shaper Rate Table(Kbps)

===========================

Total-

Port VPI VCI Shaper Rate CBR(PCR) UBR(PCR) GFR(PCR) GFR(MCR)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

3/1 1 --- vp 4000 4000 --- --- ---

3/1 2 --- vp 4000 --- 4000 --- ---

3/1 3 --- vp 4000 --- --- 4000 2000

3/1 4 --- vp 4000 4000 4000 --- ---

3/1 5 --- vp 4000 4000 --- 4000 2000

3/1 6 --- vp 4000 --- 4000 4000 2000

13-8



ATM-QoS

3/1 7 --- vp 4000 4000 4000 4000 2000

3/1 8 32 vc 10000 10000 --- --- ---

3/1 9 33 vc 10000 --- 10000 --- ---

3/1 10 34 vc 10000 --- --- 10000 5000

3/1 11 --- vpvc 9000 5000 --- --- ---

3/1 12 --- vpvc 9000 --- 5000 --- ---

3/1 13 --- vpvc 9000 --- --- 5000 3000 3/1 14 --- vpvc 9000 5000 5000 --- ---

3/1 15 --- vpvc 9000 5000 --- 5000 3000

3/1 16 --- vpvc 9000 --- 5000 5000 3000

3/1 17 --- vpvc 9000 5000 5000 5000 3000

*Switch@1#

Output items (ATM Shaper Table)


Registered-Shaper: Number of set shapers

Available-Shaper: Number of available shapers

(ATM Shaper Port Rate Table(Kbps))


Maximum-Rate] Maximum band

Available-Rate: Available band

Total-Rate: Total effective bands (per port)

CBR(PCR): Total of PCR values when traffic class is CBR (per port)

UBR(PCR): Total of PCR values when traffic class is UBR (per port)

GFR(PCR): Total of PCR values when traffic class is GFR (per port)

GFR(MCR): Total of MCR values when traffic class is GFR (per port)

(ATM Shaper Rate Table(Kbps))


VPI: VPI

VCI: VCI

Shape: Shaper mode

vp: VP mode

vc: VC mode


Total-Rate: Effective band (per shaper)

CBR(PCR): Total of PCR values when traffic class is CBR (per shaper)

UBR(PCR): Total of PCR values when traffic class is UBR (per shaper)

GFR(PCR): Total of PCR values when traffic class is GFR (per shaper)

GFR(MCR): Total of MCR values when traffic class is GFR (per shaper)

Relatedcommands


clear atm-shaper rate Clearing of ATM shaper

13-9



ATM-QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear atm-shaper rate

Clearing of ATM shaper

Clears an ATM shaper.

Input format clear atm-shaper rate P1





* When VPI value is omitted, the ATM shaper settings of all the VPIs and VCIsregistered in the specified port (line) are cleared.

* When VPI value is specified, the ATM shaper settings of all the VCIs registered inthe specified port (line) and VPI are cleared.

Default value None


Note If VPI value is specified or omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has beenentered.

Input example *Switch@1# clear atm-shaper rate 3/1 1/250

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



show atm-shaper information Display of effective band

13-10



ATM-QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set atm-qos aal5

Setting of AAL5 mode

Sets AAL5 mode.

Input format set atm-qos aal5 P1 P2


P2: AAL5 mode { epd | ppd }

epd: Early Packet Discard

ppd: Partial Packet Discard

Default value P2: epd


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set atm-qos aal5 3/1 ppd

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show atm-qos aal5 Display of AAL5 mode

13-11



ATM-QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show atm-qos aal5

Display of AAL5 mode

Shows AAL5 mode.

Input format show atm-qos aal5

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show atm-qos aal5

AAL5 Mode Table

===============

Port Mode

---------------------

3/1 epd

*Switch@1#


Mode: AAL5 mode

epd: early packet discard

ppd: partial packet discard

Relatedcommand

set atm-qos aal5 Setting of AAL5 mode

13-12



ATM-QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set atm-qos out-port clp

Setting of CLP

Sets a CLP for Ether over ATM.

Input format set atm-qos out-port clp P1 P2

Parameters P1: PVC identifier { port (line) number VPI value/VCI value | PVC name }




P2: Priority (0 to 7) (Multiple values can be specified.)

Default value None


Note The CLP is automatically cleared when the PVC is cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# set atm-qos out-port clp 3/1 0/32 0-3

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

show atm-qos out-port clp Display of CLP setting

clear atm-qos out-port clp Clearing of CLP setting

13-13



ATM-QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show atm-qos out-port clp

Display of CLP setting

Shows a CLP setting for Ether over ATM.

Input format show atm-qos out-port clp [P1]





* When P1 is omitted, the CLP settings of all the VPIs and VCIs set in all the ports(lines) are shown.

* When VPI value is omitted, the CLP settings of all the VPIs and VCIs set in thespecified port (line) are shown.

* When VPI value is specified, the CLP settings of all the VCIs set in the specified port(line) and VPI are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show atm-qos out-port clp

Output CLP Priority Mapping Table

=================================

Port VPI/VCI Priority(CLP=1)

------------------------------

10/1 0/16383 0,6

*Switch@1#

Output items (Output CLP Priority Mapping Table)



Priority(CLP=1): CoS value whose CLP value is to be set to 1

Relatedcommands

set atm-qos out-port clp Setting of CLP

clear atm-qos out-port clp Clearing of CLP setting

13-14



ATM-QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear atm-qos out-port clp

Clearing of CLP setting

Clears a CLP setting for Ether over ATM.

Input format clear atm-qos out-port clp P1





* When VPI value is omitted, the CLP settings of all the VPIs and VCIs registered inthe specified port (line) are cleared.

* When VPI value is specified, the CLP settings of all the VCIs registered in thespecified port (line) and VPI are cleared.

Default value None


Note If VPI value is specified or omitted, execution is confirmed after this command has beenentered.

Input example *Switch@1# clear atm-qos out-port clp 3/1 1/250

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set atm-qos out-port clp Setting of CLP

show atm-qos out-port clp Display of CLP setting

13-15



ATM-QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set atmop in-port priority

Setting of CLP-priority mapping

Sets the CoS value to the VLAN tag and the DSCP value to the IP header, based on the CLP value of an ATM cell when the ATM cell is encapsulated into an Ethernet frame. The values are set on a per-PVCbasis. When the hop count of the VLAN tag is 2, the values can be set for each tag and for each CLP.

Input formats - CLP0, CLP1 specification

set atmop in-port priority P1 P2 (clp0) [P3] [P4] [P5] [ P6 [P7] [P8] [P9] ]

* At least one of P3 to P5 must be specified.

* When P6 is specified, at least one of P7 to P9 must be specified.

- CLP1 specificationset atmop in-port priority P1 P2 (clp1) [P3] [P4] [P5]

* At least one of P3 to P5 must be specified.

- Default value specification

set atmop in-port priority P1 P2 (initial)






P2: CLP { clp0 | clp1 } or default value specification { initial }clp0: CLP0

clp1: CLP1

initial: Default value specification

When clp0 is specified in P2

P3: Outer tag mapping CoS value outer (0 to 7)

P4: Inner tag mapping CoS value inner (0 to 7)

P5: IP header DSCP value dscp (0 to 63)

P6: CLP1 specification { clp1 }

clp1: CLP1


P8: Inner tag mapping CoS value inner (0 to 7)P9: IP header DSCP value dscp (0 to 63)

When clp1 is specified in P2


P4: Inner tag mapping CoS value inner (0 to 7)

P5: IP header DSCP value dscp (0 to 63)

Default value P3, P4, P7, P8: 5

P5, P9: 46

Usage condition If no PVC is registered, you cannot execute this command.

13-16



ATM-QoS

Notes The setting is cleared when the PVC is cleared.

If any value is omitted (excluding initial specification) when this command is executed,the previous value will be obtained for the omitted value.

When initial is specified, the default value is assumed.

Input examples *Switch@1# set atmop in-port priority 3/1 0/32 clp0 outer 7 inner 5 dscp12 clp1 outer 2 inner 0 dscp 24

*Switch@1# set atmop in-port priority 3/1 0/32 clp0 outer 7 dscp 24 clp1outer 2 dscp 12

*Switch@1# set atmop in-port priority 3/1 0/32 clp0 inner 5 clp1 outer 2

*Switch@1# set atmop in-port priority 3/1 0/32 dscp 30 clp1 outer 2

*Switch@1# set atmop in-port priority 3/1 0/32 clp0 outer 7 inner 5

*Switch@1# set atmop in-port priority 3/1 0/32 clp0 outer 7 dscp 40

*Switch@1# set atmop in-port priority 3/1 0/32 clp1 inner 0

*Switch@1# set atmop in-port priority 3/1 0/32 clp1 dscp 0

*Switch@1# set atmop in-port priority initial

Output item

Relatedcommands





set atmop format Setting of ATM-Ether conversion format

show atmop in-port priority Display of CLP-priority mapping setting status

13-17



ATM-QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show atmop in-port priority

Display of CLP-priority mapping setting status

Shows the setting status of the CLP-priority mapping per PVC.

Input format show atmop in-port priority [P1]







* When a line module is specified in P1, all the priority values set for the specified linemodule number are displayed.

* When the VPI value or the VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all the priority values setfor the specified port (line) number are displayed.

* When the port (line) number is omitted, all the priority values set for the device aredisplayed.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show atmop in-port priority 5/6

ATMoP Input CLP Priority Mapping Table(c-tag/udp-ip)

====================================================

CLP=0 CLP=1

Port VPI/VCI Outer-tag Inner-tag DSCP Outer-tag Inner-tag DSCP

---------------------------------------------------------------------

5/6 2/62 1 7 24 7 7 63

5/6 2/63 1 7 24 7 7 63

5/6 2/64 1 7 24 7 7 63

5/6 2/65 1 7 24 7 7 63

5/6 2/66 1 7 24 7 7 63

*Switch@1#



Outer-tag: CoS value of the Outer tag

Inner-tag: CoS value of the Inner tag

DSCP: DSCP value of the IP header

13-18



ATM-QoS

Relatedcommands

set atmop in-port priority Setting of CLP-priority mapping

13-19



ATM-QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set atmop out-port clp mode

Setting of CLP conversion mode

Sets the CLP conversion mode for ATM over Ether.

- Transparent setting/per-priority setting

set atmop out-port clp mode P1 P2 (transparent | priority)

Input formats

- Fixed value setting

set atmop out-port clp mode P1 P2 (fix) P3





P2: Mode setting { transparent | fix | priority }

transparent: Transparent settingfix: Fixed value settingpriority: per-priority setting

When fix is specified in P2

P3: CLP value (0 or 1)

Default value P2: transparent


When a PVC is cleared, the CLP conversion mode for ATM over Ether is automaticallycleared.

Note

If priority is specified in this command, the CLP value is determined with reference to thevalue set in the set atmop out-port priority command.

Input example *Switch@1# set atmop out-port clp mode 3/1 0/32 fix 1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands


set atmop out-port clp priority Setting of CLP conversion priority


show atmop out-port clp Display of CLP conversion setting status

13-20



ATM-QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set atmop out-port clp priority

Setting of CLP conversion priority

Sets the CLP conversion priority for ATM over Ether.

Input format set atmop out-port clp priority P1 P2 P3 P4


P2: Packet format { c-tag | udp-ip }

c-tag: Specifying CoS value in c-tag

udp-ip: Specifying DSCP value in UDP/IP header

P3: Priority value (0 to 63) (Multiple values can be specified.)When c-tag is specified: 0 to 7

When udp-ip is specified: 0 to 63

P4: CLP value (0 or 1)

Default value P4: 0


Note This command setting is valid only for the packet format specified with the “set atmopmode” command.

Input example *Switch@1# set atmop out-port clp priority 3 c-tag 0-2,7 1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands


set atmop out-port clp mode Setting of CLP conversion mode

show atmop out-port clp Display of CLP conversion setting status

13-21



ATM-QoS

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show atmop out-port clp

Display of CLP conversion setting status

Shows the CLP conversion setting status for ATM over Ether.

Input format show atmop out-port clp [P1]


Line module number (1 to 12) (single specification)





* When a line module is specified in P1, all the priority values set for the specified linemodule number are displayed.

* When VPI value or VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all CLP conversion settinginformation of the Egress side for the specified port (line) number is shown.

* When P1 is omitted, all CLP conversion setting information of the Egress side for the ATMP ports of the entire device is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show atmop out-port clp

Output CLP Mapping Table on Priority Mode (c-tag)

=================================================

Slot CLP CoS

----------------------

1 0 0-7

1 none

5 0 0-1,3-4,6-71 2,5

8 0 0-3

1 4-7

12 0 1,6

1 0,2-5,7

Output CLP Mapping Table on Priority Mode (udp-ip)

==================================================

Slot CLP DSCP

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

1 0 0-63

1 none

5 0 2,5,8,11,14,17,20,23,26,29,32,35,38,41,44,47,50,53,56,59,62

1 0-1,3-4,6-7,9-10,12-13,15-16,18-19,21-22,24-25,27-28,30-31,33-34,

36-37,39-40,42-43,45-46,48-49,51-52,54-55,57-58,60-61,63

13-22



ATM-QoS

8 0 0-20

1 21-63

12 0 0-9,20-29,40-49,60-63

1 10-19,30-39,50-59

Output CLP Conversion Table

===========================

Port VPI/VCI Mode CLP

------------------------------

1/1 1/33 transparent ---

5/4 0/255 fix 1

5/4 1/16383 priority ---

8/6 100/--- priority ---

12/8 100/255 priority ---

*Switch@1#

Output items Output CLP Mapping Table on Priority Mode (c-tag)


CLP: CLP valueCoS: CoS value

Output CLP Mapping Table on Priority Mode (udp-ip)


CLP: CLP value

DSCP: DSCP value

Output CLP Conversion Table

Port: Port number


Mode: CLP conversion modeCLP: CLP value in fixed value mode

Relatedcommands


set atmop out-port clp priority Setting of CLP conversion priority

13-23



ATM-QoS

(Blank page)

13-24



ATM-OAM

14 ATM-OAM

14-1



ATM-OAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set atm-oam

Setting of ATM-OAM operation

Sets the OAM operation of an ATM transmission path.

Input formats - F4 level specification

set atm-oam P1 (f4) P2 P3 (disable)

- F4 to F5 transfer specification

set atm-oam P1 (f4) P2 P3 (enable) [P4]

- F5 level specification

set atm-oam P1 (f5) P2 P3

Parameters P1: ATM-OAM alarm level setting { f4 | f5 }

f4: F4 level specification


When f4 is specified in P1

P2: PVC identifier { port (line) number VPI value | PVC name }




P3: ATM-OAM alarm level operation setting { enable | disable }

enable: VP-RDI transfer when VP-AIS is received

Trap notification available

Trap notification available when VP-AIS and VP-RDI is received

disable: VP-AIS and VP-RDI discarded


P4: F4 to F5 transfer setting { f5-generate }

f5-generate: Transfers VC-AIS and VC-RDI to the subordinate VCwhen VP-AIS is received

* When P4 is omitted, VC-AIS and VC-RDI are not transferred to thesubordinate VC.


P2: PVC identifier { port (line) number VPI value/VCI value | PVC name }



P3: ATM-OAM alarm level operation setting { enable | disable }

enable: VC-AIS and VC-RDI transfer when VC-AIS is received

Trap notification available

Trap notification available when VP-AIS and VCRDI is received

disable: VC-AIS and VC-RDI discarded


P4: disable

14-2



ATM-OAM

Usage conditions If no PVC is registered, you cannot set this function.

If a VP connection has already been registered for the VPI value/PVC name specified inP2 and f5-generate is specified in P4 when f4 is specified in P1, an error occurs.

If a VP connection has already been registered for the VPI value/PVC name specified inP2 when f5 is specified in P1, an error occurs.

Note ATM-OAM is automatically cleared when the PVC is cleared.

Input examples *Switch@1# set atm-oam f4 3/1 0 enable

*Switch@1# set atm-oam f4 3/1 1 enable f5-generate

*Switch@1# set atm-oam f4 3/1 20 disable

*Switch@1# set atm-oam f5 3/1 0/32 enable

*Switch@1# set atm-oam f5 3/1 20/10000 disable

Output item

Relatedcommands

show atm-oam flow Setting of ATM-OAM flow point

show atm-oam config Display of ATM-OAM setting information

show atm-oam status Display of ATM-OAM status information

14-3



ATM-OAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set atm-oam flow

Setting of ATM-OAM flow point

Sets the OAM flow point of an ATM transmission path.

Input formats - F4 level specification

set atm-oam flow P1 (f4) P2 P3 P4

- F5 level specification

set atm-oam flow P1 (f5) P2 P3 P4

Parameters P1: ATM-OAM alarm level setting { f4 | f5 }












- PVC name: 1 to 32 charactersP3: Flow type setting { end-end | segment }

end-end: End to End flow

segment: Segment flow

P4: Flow point setting { end-point | connecting-point | none }

end-point: End point

connecting-point: Connecting point

none: No setting

Default value None

Usage conditions If a VP connection or PVC has not been registered for the VPI value/PVC namespecified in P2 when f4 is specified in P1, this function cannot be set.

If a PVC has not been registered for the VPI value/PVC name specified in P2 when f5 isspecified in P1, this function cannot be set.

Note ATM-OAM is automatically cleared when the PVC is cleared.

Input examples *Switch@1# set atm-oam flow f4 3/8 0 end-end end-point

*Switch@1# set atm-oam flow f4 3/8 1 segment none

*Switch@1# set atm-oam flow f5 3/8 0/32 end-end connecting-point

*Switch@1# set atm-oam flow f5 3/8 1/100 segment end-point

*Switch@1# set atm-oam flow f5 3/8 20/10000 segment none

14-4



ATM-OAM

Output item

Relatedcommands

show atm-oam Setting of ATM-OAM operation



14-5



ATM-OAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show atm-oam config

Display of ATM-OAM setting information

Shows setting information of the specified VPI or VPI/VCI of the specified port.

Input format show atm-oam config [P1]





* When port (line) number is omitted, the setting information of all VPIs/VCIs in thedevice is shown.

* When VPI value is omitted, the setting information of all VPIs/VCIs registered for thespecified port (line) number is shown.

* When VCI value is omitted, the setting information of all VCIs registered for thespecified port (line) number and VPI is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show atm-oam config 3/1

ATM OAM Config Table

====================

OAM Config(F4)

==============

Port VPI Config Option Segment End-End

----------------------------------------------------------------------

3/1 0 enabled none none end-point

3/1 1 enabled f5-generation end-point end-point

3/1 20 disabled --- --- ---

3/1 30 disabled --- --- ---

3/1 100 enabled f5-generation end-point end-point

3/1 255 enabled none none end-point

OAM Config(F5)

==============

Port VPI/VCI Config Segment End-End

-----------------------------------------------------------

3/1 0/32 enabled none connecting-point

3/1 0/100 enabled end-point connecting-point

3/1 0/1000 enabled connecting-point connecting-point

3/1 0/10000 disabled --- ---

3/1 20/32 disabled --- ---

14-6



ATM-OAM

3/1 20/100 disabled --- ---

3/1 20/1000 disabled --- ---

3/1 255/32 enabled end-point connecting-point

3/1 255/100 enabled connecting-point connecting-point

*Switch@1#

Output items OAM Config(F4)


VPI: Virtual path number

Config: Configuration

enabled:

VP-AIS and VP-RDI detection enabled

Trap notified when VP-AIS or VP-RDI is detected

VP-RDI transferred when VP-AIS is detected

disabled:

VP-AIS and VP-RDI detection disabled

Option: Expansion setting

f5-generation: VP-RDI and VC-RDI transferred when VP-AIS is detected

none: Not specified

--- : Not set

Segment: Flow point of Segment flow



End-End: Flow point of End to End flow



OAM Config(F5)Port: Port (line) number

VPI/VCI: Virtual path number/virtual channel number

Config:

enabled:

VC-AIS and VC-RDI detection enabled

Trap notified when VC-AIS or VC-RDI is detected

VC-RDI transferred when VC-AIS is detected

disabled:

VC-AIS and VC-RDI detection disabled

Segment: Flow point of Segment flow

end-point: End pointconnecting-point: Connecting point

End-End: Flow point of End to End flow



Relatedcommands

set atm-oam Setting of ATM-OAM operation



14-7



ATM-OAM

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show atm-oam status

Display of ATM-OAM status information

Shows ATM-OAM status information.

Input format show atm-oam status [P1]





* When port (line) number is omitted, the status information of all VPIs/VCIs in thedevice is shown.

* When VPI value is omitted, the status information of all VPIs/VCIs registered for thespecified port (line) number is shown.

* When VCI value is omitted, the status information of all VCIs registered for thespecified port (line) number and VPI is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example Switch@1# show atm-oam status 3/8

ATM OAM Status Table

====================

OAM Status(F4 Detect/Generate)

==============================

Detect Generate(gen)

------------------------------ ------------------------------

Segment End-End Segment End-End

-------------- -------------- -------------- --------------

Port VPI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

3/8 0 detect --- detect --- --- --- --- ---

3/8 1 detect --- detect --- --- gen --- gen

3/8 20 --- detect --- detect --- --- --- ---

3/8 255 detect --- detect --- --- gen --- gen


==============================

Detect Generate(gen)

------------------------------ ------------------------------

Segment End-End Segment End-End

-------------- ------------- -------------- --------------

Port VPI/VCI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------3/8 0/32 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

14-8



ATM-OAM

3/8 0/100 detect --- detect --- --- gen --- gen

3/8 0/1000 --- detect --- detect --- --- --- ---


3/8 1/32 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---


3/8 1/1000 --- detect --- detect --- --- --- ---


3/8 20/32 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---


3/8 20/1000 --- detect --- detect --- --- --- ---

3/8 30/32 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---


3/8 30/1000 --- detect --- detect --- --- --- ---

3/8 100/32 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---


3/8 255/32 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---


Switch@1#

Output items OAM Status(F4 Detect/Generate)


VPI: Virtual path number

Detect VP-AIS:

detect: VP-AIS detected

--- :

Detect VP-RDI:

detect: VP-RDI detected

--- :

Generate VP-AIS:

generate: VP-AIS generated

--- :

Generate VP-RDI:

generate: VP-RDI generated

--- :



VPI/VCI: Virtual path number/virtual channel number

Detect VC-AIS:

detect: VC-AIS detected

--- :

Detect VC-RDI:

detect: VC-RDI detected

--- :

Generate VC-RDI:

generate: VC-RDI generated

--- :

Generate VC-AIS:

generate: VC-AIS generated

--- :

14-9



ATM-OAM

Relatedcommands







14-10



ATM-IMA

15 ATM-IMA

15-1



ATM-IMA

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set ima group

Setting of IMA group

Sets an IMA group.

Input format set ima group P1 P2 P3 [P4] [P5] [P6] [P7]

Parameters P1: IMA group index (1 to 48) (single specification)


P3: IMA ID id (0 to 3)

* Specify unique value within the range of 0 to 3 in one line module.

P4: Number of minimum required links links (1 to 8)* This value cannot exceed the total number of the ports (lines) specified in P2.

P5: IMA frame length len { 32 | 64 | 128 | 256 }

len 32: 32 Cell

len 64: 64 Cell

len 128: 128 Cell

len 258: 256 Cell

P6: Link differential delay

T1 port (line): delay 25 to 282 (msec)

E1 port (line): delay 25 to 226 (msec)

P7: Root port number root port (line) number (single specification)

* A number which is not included in the P2-specified port (line) cannot be specified.* When P4 to P7 are omitted, the default values are assumed.


P5: 128

P6: 25 (msec)

P7: The port (line) with the smallest number in the port (line) numbers specified in P2


Notes A port (line) over multiple IMA groups cannot be registered doubly.Up to four IMA groups can be registered within one line module.

When P1 is already registered, the value is modified (overwritten).

Specification over line modules is not allowed for P2.

When a PVC is not set for root port, communication is unavailable.

Input examples *Switch@1# set ima group 1 1/1-3 id 1

*Switch@1# set ima group 2 1/4-8 id 1 links 1 len 25 root 1/4

*Switch@1# set ima group 2 1/4-8 id 1 links 5 root 1/5

*Switch@1# set ima group 48 10/1,10/3,10/5,10/7-8 id 3 links 8 len 256 delay282 root 10/8

Output item

15-2



ATM-IMA

Relatedcommands

show ima group config Display of IMA group setting information

show ima group status Display of IMA group status information

clear ima group Clearing of IMA group

set ima clock Setting of IMA clock mode

show ima clock Display of IMA clock mode setting information

15-3



ATM-IMA

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show ima group config

Display of IMA group setting information

Shows IMA group setting information.

Input format show ima group config [P1]

Parameter P1: IMA group index (1 to 48) (Multiple values can be specified.)

* When P1 is omitted, IMA group setting information on all IMA groups is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example Switch@1# show ima group config

IMA Group Configuration Table

=============================

Min-Req- Frame- Link-Diff- Root-

Index Ports ID Links Length Delay(ms) Port

---------------------------------------------------------------------

1 1/1-8 1 8 128 123 1/1

2 10/2,10/4,10/ 6 1 1 32 25 10/448 10/1,10/3,10/5,10/7-8 3 2 256 282 10/8

Switch@1#

Output items Index: IMA index group index

Ports: Port (line) number

ID: IMA ID

Min-Req-Links: Number of minimum required links

Frame-Length: IMA frame length

Link-Diff-Delay(ms): Link differential delay

Root-Port: Root port number

Relatedcommands

set ima group Setting of IMA group



15-4



ATM-IMA

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show ima group status

Display of IMA group status information

Shows IMA group status information.

Input format show ima group status [P1]

Parameter P1: IMA group index (1 to 48) (Multiple values can be specified.)

* When P1 is omitted, IMA group status information on all IMA groups is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input examples When IMA group index is omitted or multiple IMAA group indexes are specifiedSwitch@1# show ima group status

IMA Group Status Table

======================

Index ID GSM-State(NE) GSM-State(FE) Failure-State

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 1 operational operational no-failure3 2 --- --- ---

7 1 startup --- no-failure

9 2 startup --- no-failure

48 0 insufficient-links insufficient-links insufficient-links-ne

Switch@1#

When single IMA group index is specified.

Switch@1# show ima group status 2

IMA Group Status Table

======================

Index ID GSM-State(NE) GSM-State(FE) Failure-State------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2 1 operational operational no-failure

IMA Link Status Table

=====================

Port LID TxState(NE) RxState(NE) TxState(FE) RxState(FE) Failure-State

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

10/2 1 misconnect misconnect misconnect misconnect misconnect

10/4 3 active active active active no-failure

10/6 5 active active active active no-failure

Switch@1#

15-5



ATM-IMA

Output items Index: IMA group index

ID: IMA ID

GSM-State(NE): IMA group status

---: Line module uninstalled

not-configured: IMA group unregistered

startup: Waiting for associated IMA activationstartup-ack: Waiting for transition to next status

unsupported-length: Associated IMA mismatch (unsupported frame length)

incompatible-symmetry: Associated IMA mismatch (incompatible symmetry)

unsupported-version: Associated IMA mismatch (unsupported IMA version)

other: Associated IMA mismatch (others)

insufficient-links: Insufficient number of links

blocked: IMA group blocked status

operational: Operation status

GSM-State(FE): Associated IMA group status

* Same as GSM-State(NE) above

Failure-State: IMA group failure status---: Line module uninstalled

no-failure: No failure information

startup-ne: Waiting for transition to next status

startup-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA)

invalid-length-ne: Unsupported frame length

invalid-length-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA)

failed-asymmetric-ne: Incompatible symmetry

failed-asymmetric-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA)

invalid-version-ne: Unsupported IMA version

invalid-version-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA)

other-failure: Other failureinsufficient-links-ne: Insufficient links

insufficient-links-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA)

blocked-ne: Group blocked

blocked-fe: * Same as above (Associated IMA)


LID: Link ID

TxState(NE): IMA Tx link status


not-group: IMA group unregistered

fault: Failure (user individual)

misconnect: Failure (misconnect)inhibited: Failure (blocked status)

failed: Failure (LCD, LIF, LODS, etc.)

no-given: Failure (others)

usable: Waiting for transition to next status

active: Link up

RxState(NE): IMA Rx link status

* Same as TxState(NE) above

TxState(FE):


RxState(FE):


15-6



ATM-IMA

Failure-State:


no-failure: No failure information

failure: Failure (others)

LIF-failure: Failure (LIF)

LODS-failure: Failure (LODS)misconnect: Failure (misconnect)

blocked: Failure (blocked status)

fault: Failure (user individual)

tx-unusable: Waiting for transition to next Tx status

rx-unusable: Waiting for transition to next Rx status

Relatedcommands



show ima group config Display of IMA group setting information

15-7



ATM-IMA

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear ima group

Clearing of IMA group

Clears an IMA group.

Input format clear ima group P1

Parameter P1: IMA group index (1 to 48) (single specification)

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear ima group 48

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set ima group Setting of IMA groupshow ima group config Display of IMA group setting information


15-8



ATM-IMA

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set ima clock

Setting of IMA clock mode

Sets the IMA clock mode.

Input format set ima clock P1 P2


P2: Transmit clock mode { ctc | itc }

ctc: Common Transmit Clock mode

itc: Independent Transmit Clock mode

Default value P2: ctc


Note If a line module to which an IMA group has already been set is specified, the IMA groupautomatically performs the setting again. Communication is suspended until the IMAgroup re-setting is completed (i.e., operational state).

Input example Switch@1# set ima clock 1-3,5 itc

Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands


show ima clock Display of IMA clock mode setting information

15-9



ATM-IMA

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show ima clock

Display of IMA clock mode setting information

Shows IMA clock mode setting information.

Input format show ima clock [P1]

Parameter P1: Line module number (1 to 12) (Multiple values can be specified.)

* When P1 is omitted, IMA clock mode information on all line modules whose linemodule type is ATMP or to which ATMP line module is installed is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example Switch@1# show ima clock 2-6

Transmit Clock Mode Information

===============================

Slot Mode

----------

2 itc

3 itc4 ctc

5 ctc

6 itc

Switch@1#

Output items Slot: Line module number

Mode: Transmit clock mode

ctc: Common Transmit Clock mode

itc: Independent Transmit Clock mode

Relatedcommand

set ima clock Setting of IMA clock mode

15-10



ATM-IMA

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

loopback ima

Starting and result display of IMA loopback test

Starts an IMA loopback test and shows the result.

Input format loopback ima P1 P2


P2: Test pattern (0 to 254) (single specification)

Default value None

Usage condition An IMA group must be set in advance for the port (line) to which the loopback test isperformed.

Note Enter Ctrl+C to suspend the test.

Input example *Switch@1# loopback ima 10/1 123

result 10/1 time=30ms test ok

result 10/8 time=40ms test ok

result 10/2 timeout

result 10/3 timeout

result 10/4 timeout

result 10/5 timeout

result 10/6 timeout

result 10/7 timeout

loopback information for 10/1

IMA-ID 1

test pattern 123

group ports = 8 : ok = 2 : fail = 6 (75% failure)

minimum = 30msec, maximum = 40msec, average = 35msec

*Switch@1#

15-11



ATM-IMA

Output items Result display per port

result a/b: Test slot/port number

time=XXXms: Time required for the test

(This item is displayed only when the test result is test ok.1)

{ result message }: Result (see below)

test ok: Normal endtime out: Test result timeout (5 seconds)

abort: Suspension by Ctrl+C entry

Statistics display

loopback information for a/b: Tested slot/port number

IMA ID = N: IMA ID to which the tested port (line) belongs

test pattern = X: Value of test pattern used for test

group ports = Y: Number of tested IMA group ports

(including the loopback start port specified in P1)

ok: Number of ports whose test result is OK

fail: Number of ports whose test result is NG (time out or abort)(Z% failure): Rate of unsuccessful loopback test

({ fail x 100 }) / ({ group ports })

minimum = XXXmsec: Minimum test time

maximum = YYYmsec: Maximum test time

average = ZZZmsec: Average test time

Relatedcommand


15-12



TDM-Path

16 TDM-Path

16-1



TDM-Path

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set tdm group

Setting of TDM group

Sets a TDM group.

Input formats - For TDMP line module

set tdm group P1 P2 (e1 | t1) P3 P4

- For TDMP155 line module

set tdm group P1 P2 (sdh | sonet) P3 P4 P5


P2: Frame type { e1 | t1 | sdh | sonet }

e1: Specification for E1 mode

t1: Specification for T1 mode

sdh: Specification for SDH mode

sonet: Specification for SONET mode

When e1 or t1 is specified in P2

P3: Group number or group name

Group number (single specification)

E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24

Group name: 1 to 32 characters

P4: Time slot number (Multiple values can be specified.)

E1 mode: 1 to 31

T1 mode: 1 to 24



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4



SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24

Group name: 1 to 32 charactersP5: Time slot number (Multiple values can be specified.)

SDH mode: 1 to 31

SONET mode: 1 to 24

Default value None

Usageconditions

tdm must be set in the TDMP line mode setting or the TDMP155 line mode setting inadvance.

Time slot numbers, group numbers, or group names already set to a group within thesame port (line) cannot be used.

16-2



TDM-Path

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set tdm group 1/1 e1 1 1

*Switch@1# set tdm group 2/1 e1 1 1-31

*Switch@1# set tdm group 12/8 t1 24 1-24

*Switch@1# set tdm group 3/1 sdh 1/1/1 1 1

*Switch@1# set tdm group 4/1 sonet 1/7/4 SONET_1 1-24

Output item

Relatedcommands





set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name

set tdm path Setting of TDM pathshow tdm group Display of TDM group setting information

clear tdm group Clearing of TDM group

16-3



TDM-Path

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show tdm group

Display of TDM group setting information

Shows TDM group setting information.


show tdm group [ P1 [ P3 ] ]


show tdm group [ P1 [P2 [P3] ] ]



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

* When P2 is omitted, TDM group setting information on all TDM groups set to theports (lines) specified in P1 is shown.


Group number (Multiple values can be specified.)

E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24

SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24


* When P3 is omitted in the E1 or T1 mode, TDM group setting information on all TDMgroups set to the port (line) specified in P1 is shown.

* When P3 is omitted in the SDH or SONET mode, TDM group setting information onall TDM groups set to the port (line) specified in P1 and the logical port numberspecified in P2 is shown.

* When all parameters are omitted, TDM group setting information on all ports (lines) setto the TDM mode is shown.

Default value None


Note Specify P2 when a TDMP155 line module is installed.

16-4



TDM-Path

Input examples *Switch@1# show tdm group

TDM Group Registration Table

============================

Logical

Port Port Group Name Time Slot Type

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

1/1 --- 1 1-32 e1

1/2 --- 1 CX2600_220_MBH_E1_GROUP_AAAAAAAA 1-32 e1

4/1 3/1/1 32 CX2600_220_MBH_SDH_GROUP_BBBBBBB 1 sdh

12/1 1/3/4 24 CX2600_220_MBH_SONET_GROUP_CCCCC 1-24 sonet

*Switch@1#



Group: Group number

Name: Group name

Time Slot: Time slot numberType: Frame type

e1/sdh or t1/sonet

Relatedcommands

set tdm group Setting of TDM group

clear tdm group Clearing of TDM group

16-5



TDM-Path

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear tdm group

Clearing of TDM group

Clears a TDM group.


clear tdm group P1 [P2 (e1 | t1) P3]


clear tdm group P1 P2 (sdh | sonet) P3 [P4]










E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24


* When P2 and P3 are omitted, all TDM groups set to the port (line) specified in

P1 and the frame type specified in P2 are cleared.



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4



SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24


* When P4 is omitted, all TDM groups set to the port (line) specified in P1, theframe type specified in P2, and the logical port number specified in P3 arecleared.

Default value None

Usageconditions


If a group to which a TDM path is set is specified, an error occurs.

Note If P2, P3 (when E1 or T1), or P4 (when SDH or SONET) is omitted, execution is verifiedafter the command entry.

16-6



TDM-Path

Input examples *Switch@1# clear tdm group 1/1 e1 1

*Switch@1# clear tdm group 1/1 sdh 2/5/1 32

*Switch@1# clear tdm group 8/5 e1 E1_GROUP_1

*Switch@1# clear tdm group 12/8


*Switch@1# clear tdm group 12/1 sonet 1/7/4


*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



set tdm path Setting of TDM path



show tdm group Display of TDM group setting information

16-7



TDM-Path

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set tdm group-name

Setting of TDM group name

Sets a group name for a TDM group.


set tdm group-name P1 P2 (e1 | t1) P3 P5


set tdm group-name P1 P2 (sdh | sonet) P3 P4 P5








P3: Group number

E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

P4: Group number

SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24

P5: Group name (1 to 32 characters)

Default value None

Usage condition The TDMP line mode or the TDMP155 line mode must be set in advance.

Note If a command that changes the frame type is entered in the TDMP line mode setting orthe TDMP155 line mode setting, the TDM group name of the line module is cleared.

Input examples *Switch@1# set tdm group-name 1/1 e1 1 E1GROUP_1

*Switch@1# set tdm group-name 3/1 sdh 1/1/1 3 SDHGROUP_1

Output item

16-8



TDM-Path

Relatedcommands






show tdm group Display of TDM group setting informationclear tdm group Clearing of TDM group

show tdm group-name Display of TDM group name setting

clear tdm group-name Clearing of TDM group name setting

16-9



TDM-Path

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show tdm group-name

Display of TDM group name setting

Shows the group name setting for a TDM group.


show tdm group-name [P1 [P3]]


show tdm group-name [P1 [P2 [P3]]]



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

* When P2 is omitted, the group name setting on all TDM groups set to the ports(lines) specified in P1 is shown.


Group number (multiple specification)

E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24

SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24


* When P3 is omitted in the E1 or T1 mode, the group name setting on all TDM groupsset to the ports (lines) specified in P1 is shown.

* When P3 is omitted in the SDH or SONET mode, the group name setting on all TDMgroups set to the ports (lines) specified in P1 and the logical port number specified inP2 is shown.

* When all parameters are omitted, the group name setting on all ports (lines) set to theTDM mode is shown.

Default value None


Note None

16-10



TDM-Path

Input example *Switch@1#

*Switch@1# show tdm group-name

TDM Group Name Table

====================

Logical

Port Port Group Name

------------------------------------------------------

1/8 --- 1 CX2600_220_MBH_GROUP_NAME_AAAAAA

7/1 3/7/3 32 CX2600_220_SDH_GROUP_NAME_BBBBBB

12/1 3/7/4 24 CX2600_220_SONET_GROUP_NAME_CCCC

*Switch@1#



Group: Group number

Name: Group name

Relatedcommands



clear tdm group-name Clearing of TDM group name setting

16-11



TDM-Path

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear tdm group-name

Clearing of TDM group name setting

Clears group name setting for a TDM group.


clear tdm group-name P1 [P2 (e1 | t1) P3]


clear tdm group-name P1 P2 (sdh | sonet) P3 [P4]










E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24


* When P2 and P3 are omitted, all TDM group names set for the port (line)

number specified in P1 and the frame type specified in P2 are cleared.



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4



SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24


* When P4 is omitted, all TDM group names set for the port (line) numberspecified in P1, the frame type specified in P2, and the logical port numberspecified in P3 are cleared.

Default value None

Usageconditions

The TDMP line mode or the TDMP155 line mode must be set in advance.

When a group name is specified, an error occurs when the group name does not exist.

Note None

16-12



TDM-Path

Input examples *Switch@1# clear tdm group-name 1/1 sdh 1/1/1 1

*Switch@1# clear tdm group-name 1/1 sonet 1/1/1


*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands




show tdm group Display of TDM group setting information


show tdm group-name Display of TDM group name setting

16-13



TDM-Path

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set tdm path

Setting of TDM path

Sets a TDM path.

Input formats - Path setting between TDMP line modules

set tdm path P1 [P3] P4 [P6]

- Path setting between TDMP155 line modules

set tdm path P1 P2 [P3] P4 P5 [P6]

- Path setting from TDMP line module to TDMP155 line module

set tdm path P1 [P3] P4 P5 [P6]

- Path setting from TDMP155 line module to TDMP line module

set tdm path P1 P2 [P3] P4 [P6]



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4



E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24

SDH mode: 1 to 32SONET mode: 1 to 24

* When group number is omitted, 1 is assumed.


P4: Port (line) number of path destination (single specification)

P5: Logical port (line) number of path destination

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

P6: Group number or group name of path destination


E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24

* When group number is omitted, 1 is assumed.


Default value None

16-14



TDM-Path

Usageconditions


If a group number or group name to which a TDM group is not set, an error occurs.

If a group to which a TDM path has already been set is specified, an error occurs.

If a TDM path is set within the same port (line) or the same logical port, an error occurs.

If groups with different frame type each other are specified, an error occurs. A path can be set only to groups with the same number of time slots.

Note Two TDM groups are created to set a TDM path.

Input example *Switch@1# set tdm path 1/1 1 2/1 1

*Switch@1# set tdm path 1/1 2/1 1/1/3

*Switch@1# set tdm path 1/1 GROUP_NUM_1 2/1 2

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands






show tdm path Display of TDM path setting information

clear tdm path Clearing of TDM path

16-15



TDM-Path

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show tdm path

Display of TDM path setting information

Shows TDM path setting information.


show tdm path [P1 [P3]]


show tdm path [P1 [P2 [P3]]]



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

* When P2 is omitted, TDM path setting information on all TDM paths set to the port(line) specified in P1 is shown.



E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24

SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24


* When P3 is omitted in the E1 or T1 mode, TDM path setting information on all TDMpaths set to the port (line) specified in P1 is shown.

* When P3 is omitted in the SDH or SONET mode, TDM path setting information on allTDM paths set to the port (line) specified in P1 or the logical port number specified inP2 is shown.

* When all parameters are omitted, TDM path setting information on all ports (lines) setto the TDM mode is shown.

Default value None


Notes Information is displayed based on the small port (line) number with TDM path setting.

side-A and side-B displayed in the side column indicate the pair of the TDM path setting.

16-16



TDM-Path

Input examples *Switch@1# show tdm path

TDM Path Connection Table

=========================

Logical

Port Port Group Name Time Slot Type Side

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1/1 --- 1 CX2600_220_MBH_E1_GROUP_NAME_AAA 1-16 e1 side-A

12/1 --- 32 CX2600_220_123456789012345678901 16-31 e1 side-B

2/1 1/1/1 24 CX2600_220_MBH_SONET_GROUP_BBBBB 1-24 sonet side-A

4/1 2/2/2 1 CX2600_220_MBH_SONET_GROUP_CCCCC 1-24 sonet side-B

*Switch@1#



Group: Group number

Name: TDM group name

Time Slot: Time slot number

Time slot number or unstructuredType: Frame type

e1/sdh or t1/sonet

Side: side-A or side-B

Relatedcommands



clear tdm path Clearing of TDM path

16-17



TDM-Path

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear tdm path

Clearing of TDM path

Clears a TDM path.


clear tdm path P1 [ P3 ]


clear tdm path P1 P2 [ P3 ]



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4



E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24

SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24


* When P3 is omitted in the E1 or T1 mode, all TDM paths set to the port (line)specified in P1 are cleared.

* When P3 is omitted in the SDH or SONET mode, all TDM paths set to the port (line)specified in P1 or the logical port number specified in P2 are cleared.

Default value None

Usage condition tdm must be set in the TDMP line mode setting or the TDMP155 line mode setting inadvance.

Note To clear a TDM path setting, specify one from the port (line) number, the group number,or the group number used for the TDM path setting. (Specifying the port (line) number,the group number, or the group name clears the TDM path setting.)

If P3 is omitted, execution is verified after the command entry.

Input examples *Switch@1# clear tdm path 1/1 1

*Switch@1# clear tdm path 1/1 GROUP_NUM_1

*Switch@1# clear tdm path 12/8


Output item

16-18



TDM-Path

Relatedcommands






show tdm path Display of TDM path setting information

16-19



TDM-Path

(Blank page)

16-20



TDM over Packet

17 TDM over Packet

17-1



TDM over Packet

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set tdmop mode

Setting of TDMoP mode

Sets the TDMoP mode.

Input formats - TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) setting

set tdmop mode P1 P2 P3 (mef) [P6] [P7] [P8]

- TDM over UDP/IP setting

set tdmop mode P1 P2 P3 (udp-ip) P4 [P5] [P6] [P7] [P8]


P2: TDMoP operation mode { satop | cesopsn }

satop: SAToP

cesopsn: CESoPSN

P3: Packet format { mef | udp-ip }

mef: TDM over Ethernet (MEF8)

udp-ip: TDM over UDP/IP

When udp-ip is specified in P3

P4: Source IP address

P5: Flow identification method { udp-src | udp-dst }

udp-src: Distribution method by UDP port (src) + IP (src)

udp-dst: Distribution method by UDP port (dst) + IP (src)

* When P5 is omitted, udp-src is assumed.

P6: Number of sent frames (1 to 8)


P7: RTP header setting { rtp_on | rtp_off }

rtp_on: With RTP header

rtp_off: Without RTP header

* When P6 is omitted, rtp_on is assumed.

P8: Jitter buffer control method { static | dynamic }

static: Static mode

dynamic: Dynamic mode

* When P8 is omitted, static is assumed.

Default values When mef is selected in P3: P6: 8, P7: rtp_on, P8: static

When udp-ip is selected in P3: P5: udp-src, P6: 8, P7: rtp_on, P8: static

Usageconditions

TDMP/TDMP 155 line mode must have been set to none.

You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxxas the manager IP address. (“xxx” is any number.)


For a line module for which APS is enabled, specify the smaller slot number. (Thegreater slot number cannot be specified.)

Note None

17-2



TDM over Packet

Input example *Switch@1# set tdmop mode 1 cesopsn mef 5 rtp_off

*Switch@1# set tdmop mode 12 satop mef rtp_off

*Switch@1# set tdmop mode 11 cesopsn udp-ip 192.168.1.1 4 udp-src rtp_on

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands





set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance

set tdmop adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock

set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP format

set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connection

set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking/unblockingclear tdmop mode Clearing of TDMoP mode setting

show tdmop format Display of TDMoP format setting

17-3



TDM over Packet

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear tdmop mode

Clearing of TDMoP mode setting

Clears the settings of a TDMoP mode.

Input format clear tdmop mode P1


Default value None

Usage condition TDMP/TDMP 155 line mode must have been set to none.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear tdmop mode 1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Related

commands


set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line modeset tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode

17-4



TDM over Packet

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set tdmop group

Setting of TDMoP group

Sets a TDMoP group.


set tdmop group P1 P2 (e1 | t1) P3 P4


set tdmop group P1 P2 (sdh | sonet) P3 P4 P5










E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24


P4: Time slot number

E1 mode

To specify time slot numbers: 1 to 31 (Multiple values can be specified.)

To specify all the time slots: all

T1 mode





SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

P4: Group number or group nameGroup number (single specification)

SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24


P5: Time slot number

SDH mode



SONET mode



17-5



TDM over Packet

Default value None

Usageconditions

TDMP/TDMP 155 line mode must have been set to tdmop.

If 121 or more TDMoP groups are specified for a TDMP line module, an error occurs.

If 85 or more TDMoP groups are specified for a TDMP155 line module, an error occurs.* Up to 28 groups can be specified for a TUG-3 or a STS-1.

To specify a timeslot number, TDMoP operation mode must be set to CESoPSN modeby using the “set tdmop mode” command.

A timeslot number or group number that has been set for another group in an identicalport (line) cannot be specified.


Notes Variation tolerance is set to the default value.

Input examples *Switch@1# set tdmop group 1/1 e1 1 1-32

*Switch@1# set tdmop group 12/1 t1 1 1-24

*Switch@1# set tdmop group 12/7 t1 1 all

*Switch@1# set tdmop group 2/1 sdh 1/2/1 1 all

*Switch@1# set tdmop group 6/1 sonet 1/1/1 SONET_1 all

Output item

Relatedcommands










set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking/unblocking


show tdmop information Display of TDMoP group setting information

clear tdmop group Clearing of TDMoP group

17-6



TDM over Packet

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show tdmop information

Display of TDMoP group setting information

Shows TDMoP group setting information.


show tdmop information [P1 [P3]]


show tdmop information [P1 [P2 [P3]]]



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

* When P2 is omitted, TDMoP group setting information on all TDMoP groups set forthe port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.



E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24

SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24


* When P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, TDMoP group setting information on allTDMoP groups set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.

* When P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, TDMoP group setting information onall TDMoP groups set for the port (line) number specified in P1 and for the logicalport number specified in P2 is shown.

* When all the parameters are omitted, TDMoP group setting information on all ports(lines) set to TDMoP mode is shown.

Default value None


Note None

17-7



TDM over Packet

*Switch@1# show tdmop information

TDMoP Group CountInput examples

=================

TUG-3/

Slot STS-1 Enabled Disabled Configured Configurable

---------------------------------------------------------

1 1 1 0 1 27

1 2 1 0 1 27

1 3 1 0 1 27

2 --- 1 0 1 119

3 --- 0 1 1 119

4 1 1 0 1 27

4 2 0 0 0 28

4 3 0 0 0 28

TDMoP Group Table

=================

Logical

Port Port Group Name Time Slot Type------------------------------------------------------------------------

1/1 1/1/1 1 CX2600_220_MBH_CES_MBH_GROUP_001 all sdh

1/1 2/5/3 32 all sdh

1/1 3/2/2 10 CX2600_220_MBH_SDH_3_1_1_GROUP10 all sdh

2/1 --- 2 all e1

3/1 --- 3 CX2600_220_MBH_CES_MBH_GROUP_007 all t1

4/1 1/7/4 4 CX2600_220_MBH_CES_MBH_GROUP_005 all sonet

*Switch@1#

Output items Slot: Line module numberTUG-3 / STS-1: TUG-3 or STS-1

Enabled: Number of groups unblocked

Disabled: Number of groups blocked

Configured: Number of groups that have been set

Configurable: Rest number of groups that allowed to be set



Group: Group number

Name: Group name

Time Slot: Time slot

Timeslot number(s) or allType: Frame type

e1/sdh or t1/sonet

Relatedcommands







17-8



TDM over Packet

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear tdmop group

Clearing of TDMoP group

Clears a TDMoP group.


clear tdmop group P1 [P2 (e1 | t1) P3]


clear tdmop group P1 P2 (sdh | sonet) P3 [P4]










E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 11 to 24


* When both P2 and P3 are omitted, TDMoP group setting information on allTDMoP groups set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is cleared.



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4



SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24


* When P4 is omitted, TDMoP group setting information on all TDMoP groupsset for the port (line) number specified in P1, with the frame type specified inP2 and for the logical port specified in P3 is cleared.

Default value None

Usageconditions


If a group to which any of the following is set is specified, an error occurs.

set tdmop format

set tdmop connection

17-9



TDM over Packet

Notes If a group to which variation tolerance has been set is cleared, the variation tolerancereturns to the default value.

If a group to which adaptive clock has been set is cleared, adaptive clock setting for thegroup is also cleared automatically.

If P3 and P4 are omitted, execution is verified after the command entry.

Input examples *Switch@1# clear tdmop group 1/1 e1 1

*Switch@1# clear tdmop group 5/8 t1 T1_01

*Switch@1# clear tdmop group 7/1 sdh 3/3/3


*Switch@1# clear tdmop group 12/8


Output item

Relatedcommands







set reference-clock priority Setting of reference clock priority



show tdmop information Display of TDMoP group setting information

17-10



TDM over Packet

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution


Setting of TDMoP connection

Sets a TDMoP connection.

Input formats - Connection between TDMP line modules

set tdmop connection P1 P3 P4 P5 P7 P8 P9 [P10]

- Connection between TDMP155 line modules

set tdmop connection P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 [P10]

- Connection from a TDMP line module to a TDMP155 line module

set tdmop connection P1 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 [P10]

- Connection from a TDMP155 line module to a TDMP line module

set tdmop connection P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P7 P8 P9 [P10]



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4



E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24

SDH mode: 1 to 32SONET mode: 1 to 24


P4: ECID or UDP port number

ECID: 1 to 1048575

UDP port number: 1024 to 65535

P5: Loopback destination port (line) number (single specification)

P6: Loopback destination logical port number

SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

P7: Group number or group name of Loopback destination

Group number (single specification)E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24

SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24


When ECID is specified in P4

P8: Loopback destination ECID (1 to 1048575)

When UDP port number is specified in P4

P8: Loopback destination UDP port number (1024 to 65535)

17-11



TDM over Packet


VLAN ID: 1 to 4094


P10: CoS value (0 to 7)



Usageconditions

If a group to which no TDMoP group is set is specified, an error occurs.

If connection setting is executed specifying an identical port (line) during a TDMP linemodule is installed, an error occurs.

If connection setting is executed specifying an identical port (line) and an identicallogical port during TDMP155 line mode is applied, an error occurs.

If a VLAN ID which is set for ATMoP or the like is specified, an error occurs.

The ECID and the UDP port number must be unique in an identical line module.


set tdmop formatset tdmop connection

An error occurs if the packet formats (set in the TDMoP mode setting) of the port (line)numbers specified in P1 and P5 are different.

A TDMoP connection with ECID specification cannot be set when TDM over UDP/IP isselected as the packet format.

A TDMoP connection with UDP port number specification cannot be set when TDM overEthernet is selected as the packet format.


Note None

*Switch@1# set tdmop connection 1/1 1 100 12/8 32 101 1000 7Input examples*Switch@1# set tdmop connection 1/2 10 1 1/8 18 2 4094

*Switch@1# set tdmop connection 4/1 1/1/1 1 100 5/1 1/2/3 1 10 4094 2

*Switch@1# set tdmop connection 6/1 1/1/1 GRP_1 100 10/5 GRP_5 10 3000 2

*Switch@1# set tdmop connection 7/2 4 udp 3100 11/1 3/3/3 3 udp 3200 340

Output item

Related

commands


set line mode tdmp155 Setting of TDMP155 line modeset port logical-interface Setting of TDMP155 port logical interface








show tdmop connection Display of TDMoP connection setting

clear tdmop connection Clearing of TDMoP connection

17-12



TDM over Packet

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show tdmop connection

Display of TDMoP connection setting

Shows the setting of a TDMoP connection.


show tdmop connection [P1 [P3]]


show tdmop connection [P1 [P2 [P3]]]



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

* When P2 is omitted, TDMoP connection setting information on all connections setfor the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.



E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24

SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24


* When P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, TDMoP connection setting information on allconnections set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.

* When P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, TDMoP connection setting informationon all connections set for the port (line) number specified in P1 and for the logicalport number specified in P2 is shown.

* When all the parameters are omitted, TDMoP connection setting information on allports (lines) to which TDMoP connections are set is shown.

Default value None


Note None

17-13



TDM over Packet

Input example *Switch@1# show tdmop connection

TDMoP Mode Config Table

=======================

TDMoP Packet Filter Frame RTP Jitter

Slot Mode Format Mode Count Header Mode

------------------------------------------------------

3 satop udp-ip udp-src 7 on dynamic

4 cesopsn mef --- 5 off static

TDMoP Connection L2 Config Table

================================

Logical Logical

Port Port Group ECID Port Port Group ECID VID CoS

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

3/1 --- 3 --- 3/4 --- 5 --- 3000 7

4/1 3/7/3 6 1048575 7/1 3/7/3 7 1000000 2000 7

TDMoP Connection L3 Config Table

================================Logical UDP Logical UDP

Port Port Group Port Port Port Group Port

--------------------------------------------------------

3/1 --- 3 65535 3/4 --- 5 3000

*Switch@1#

Output items - TDMoP Mode Config Table


TDMoP Mode: TDMoP operation mode

satop or cesopsn

Packet Format: Packet format

mef or udp-ip

Filter Mode: Flow identification method

udp-src or udp-dst

Frame Count: Number of transmitted frames

RTP Header: RTP header setting

on or off

Jitter Mode: Jitter buffer control method

static or dynamic

- TDMoP Connection L2 Config Table



Group: Group number

ECID: ECID value

Port: Loopback destination port (line) number

Logical Port: Loopback destination logical port number

Group: Loopback destination group number

ECID: Loopback destination ECID value

VID: VLAN ID

CoS: CoS value

17-14



TDM over Packet

- TDMoP Connection L3 Config Table



Group: Group number

UDP Port: UDP port numberPort: Loopback destination port (line) number

Logical Port: Loopback destination logical port number

Group: Loopback destination group number

UDP Port: Loopback destination DDP port (line) number

Relatedcommands


clear tdmop connection Clearing of TDMoP connection

17-15



TDM over Packet

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear tdmop connection

Clearing of TDMoP connection

Clears the setting of a TDMoP connection.


clear tdmop connection P1 [P3]


clear tdmop connection P1 P2 [P3]



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4



E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24

SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24


* When P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, all TDMoP connection settings set for the port(line) number specified in P1 are cleared.

* When P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, all TDMoP connection settings set forthe port (line) number specified in P1 and for the logical port number specified in P2are cleared.

Default value None

Usage condition TDMP/TDMP 155 line mode must have been set to tdmop.

Notes If P3 is omitted, execution is verified after the command entry.

If setting of a TDMoP connection is cleared, connection setting of the loopbackdestination of the cleared connection is also cleared automatically.

If the TDMoP is blocked, it is automatically unblocked.

Input examples *Switch@1# clear tdmop connection 1/1 1

*Switch@1# clear tdmop connection 12/8


Output item

Relatedcommands



set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connectionshow tdmop connection Display of TDMoP connection setting

17-16



TDM over Packet

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set tdmop jitter

Setting of variation tolerance

Sets variation tolerance.


set tdmop jitter P1 P3 P4


set tdmop jitter P1 P2 P3 P4



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4



E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24

SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24


P4: jitter value (variation) tolerance { 2ms | 4ms | 8ms | 16ms | 32ms | 64ms | 128ms }

2ms: 2 milliseconds

4ms: 4 milliseconds

8ms: 8 milliseconds

16ms: 16 milliseconds




Default value P4: 4ms

Usageconditions

Only a group number or a group name to which a TDMoP group is set can be specified.

If variation tolerance is set to a group to which the following commands have beenexecuted, an error occurs.

set tdmop format


* However, setting is available even under the above conditions whenblocking/unblocking setting of the TDMoP is blocked.

17-17



TDM over Packet

Notes If a TDMoP group is set, the variation tolerance is set back to the default value.

If a TDMoP group is cleared, the variation tolerance is set back to the default value.

To return to the default value, enter the command specifying 4ms in P4.

If the dynamic mode is selected for the jitter buffer control mode, other than 2ms, 4ms,or 8ms cannot be set in P4.


Input examples *Switch@1# set tdmop jitter 1/1 1 16ms

*Switch@1 set tdmop jitter 2/1 2/2/2 1 4ms

Output item

Relatedcommands



set port logical-interface Setting of TDMP155 port logical interfaceset tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode








show tdmop jitter Display of variation tolerance

17-18



TDM over Packet

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show tdmop jitter

Display of variation tolerance

Shows variation tolerance.


show tdmop jitter [P1 [P3]]


show tdmop jitter [P1 [P2 [P3]]]



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

* When P2 is omitted, all variation tolerance set for the port (line) number specified inP1 is shown.



E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24

SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24


* When P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, all variation tolerance set for the port (line)number specified in P1 is shown.

* When P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, all variation tolerance set for the port(line) number specified in P1 and for the logical port number specified in P2 isshown.

* When all the parameters are omitted, variation tolerance on all ports (lines) to whichTDMoP groups are set is shown.

Default value None


Note None

17-19



TDM over Packet

Input examples *Switch@1# show tdmop jitter

TDMoP Jitter Configuration

==========================

Logical

Port Port Group Jitter

-----------------------------

1/1 1/1/1 1 32ms

1/1 1/1/2 2 16ms

1/1 1/1/3 15 8ms

: :

12/8 --- 32 2ms

*Switch@1#



Group: Group number

Jitter: Variation tolerance

Relatedcommands


set tdmop group-name Setting of TDMoP group name


17-20



TDM over Packet

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show tdmop status

Display of TDMoP path setting status information

Shows TDMoP path setting status information.


show tdmop status [P1 [P3]]


show tdmop status [P1 [P2 [P3]]]



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

* When P2 is omitted, TDMoP path setting status information on all TDMoP groupsset for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.



E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24

SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24


* When P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, TDMoP path setting status information on allTDMoP groups set for the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.

* When P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, TDMoP path setting status informationon all TDMoP groups set for the port (line) number specified in P1 and for the logicalport number specified in P2 is shown.

* When all the parameters are omitted, TDMoP path setting status information on allports (lines) to which TDMoP groups are set is shown.

Default value None


Note None

17-21



TDM over Packet

Input examples *Switch@1# show tdmop status

TDMoP Status Table

==================

Logical

Port Port Group Underrun Admin

----------------------------------------

1/1 --- 1 normal enabled

5/1 1/1/1 1 normal enabled

5/1 2/2/2 2 fault disabled

12/8 --- 24 fault disabled

*Switch@1#



Group: Group number

Underrun: Buffer Underrun status

normal: Buffer Underrun not occurredfault: Buffer Underrun occurred

Admin: TDMoP blocking/unblocking setting

enabled: Unblocked

disabled: Blocked

Relatedcommands

set tdmop group-name Setting of TDMoP group name


set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking

17-22



TDM over Packet

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set tdmop format

Setting of TDMoP format

Sets a TDMoP format.


When TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) is set for the packet format

set tdmop format P1 P3 P4 P5 [P6] P7 (ECID value)

When TDM over UDP/IP is set for the packet format

set tdmop format P1 P3 P4 P5 [P6] P7 (Destination IP address) P8 [P9] [P10]


When TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) is set for the packet format

set tdmop format P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 [P6] P7 (ECID value)

When TDM over UDP/IP is set for the packet format

set tdmop format P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 [P6] P7 (Destination IP address) P8 [P9] [P10]



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4



E1 mode: 1 to 32T1 mode: 1 to 24

SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24



P5: VLAN identifier 1 { VLAN ID | VLAN name }

VLAN ID (1 to 4094)


P6: CoS value (0 to 7)


When TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) is set for the packet format in the TDMoP modesetting

P7: ECID

ecid 1 to 1048575

When TDM over UDP/IP is set for the packet format in the TDMoP mode setting

P7: Destination IP address

P8: UDP port number udp (1024 to 65535)

P9: TTL ttl (1 to 255)


P10: DSCP dscp (0 to 63)


17-23



TDM over Packet

Default values - When TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) is set for the packet format in the TDMoP modesetting

P6: 5

- When TDM over UDP/IP is set for the packet format in the TDMoP mode setting

P6: 5, P9: 128, P10: 46

Usageconditions

A TDMoP format can be set only to a group number or a group name to which a TDMoPgroup is set.

If a VLAN ID which is set for ATMoP is specified, an error occurs.

You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx or 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx asthe IP address. (“xxx” is any number.)

You cannot set network address of 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24.

If you specify the same destination IP address as the source IP address, an erroroccurs.

The ECID and UDP port number must be unique in an identical line module.


set tdmop format



When TDM over UDP/IP is selected for the packet format, you cannot set the TDMoPformat with ECID specification.

When TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) is selected for the packet format, you cannot set theTDMoP format with UDP port number specification.

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set tdmop format 1/1 1 00:00:00:00:00:01 1000 7 ecid 10

*Switch@1# set tdmop format 11/1 2/3/1 10 00:00:00:11:11:11 10 10.40.30.7udp 2 100

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands





set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP groupset tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name







clear tdmop format Clearing of TDMoP format

17-24



TDM over Packet

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show tdmop format

Display of TDMoP format setting

Shows the TDMoP format setting.


show tdmop format [P1 [P3]]


show tdmop format [P1 [P2 [P3]]]



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4

* When P2 is omitted, setting information of all TDMoP formats set for the port (line)number specified in P1 is shown.



E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24

SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24


* When P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, setting information of all TDMoP formats setfor the port (line) number specified in P1 is shown.

* When P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, setting information of all TDMoPformats set for the port (line) number specified in P1 and for the logical port numberspecified in P2 is shown.

* When all the parameters are omitted, TDMoP format setting information on all ports(lines) to which TDMoP formats are set is shown.

Default value None


Note When APS is enabled, the source MAC addresses are displayed in two lines. Thecharacter “*” is attached to the display of the enabled one.

17-25



TDM over Packet

Input example *Switch@1# show tdmop format

TDMoP Mode Config Table

=======================

TDMoP Packet Filter Frame RTP Jitter

Slot Mode Format Mode Count Header Mode

------------------------------------------------------

1 satop mef --- 8 on dynamic

2 cesopsn udp-ip udp-src 8 off static

TDMoP Format Address Table

==========================

Source Source

Slot MAC Address IP Address

----------------------------------------

1 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa ---

*00:30:13:a1:2a:af

2 00:30:13:a1:2a:ab 192.168.100.100

TDMoP Format L2 Config Table============================

Logical Destination

Port Port Group MAC Address VID CoS ECID

-----------------------------------------------------------

1/1 --- 1 00:00:00:00:00:01 1000 7 1048575

2/1 1/1/1 2 00:00:00:00:00:02 2000 6 ---

TDMoP Format L3 Config Table

============================

Logical Source Destination Destination

Port Port Group UDP Port IP Address UDP Port TTL DSCP

-----------------------------------------------------------------------2/1 1/1/1 2 65535 172.1.1.1 2142 255 63

*Switch@1#

17-26



TDM over Packet

Output items - TDMoP Mode Config Table


TDMoP Mode: TDMoP operation mode

satop or cesopsn

Packet Format: Packet formatmef or udp-ip

Filter Mode: Flow identification method

udp-src or udp-dst

Frame Count: Number of transmitted frames

RTP Header: RTP header flag

on or off

Jitter Mode: Jitter buffer control method

static or dynamic

- TDMoP Format Address Table


Source MAC Address: Source MAC address

Source IP Address: Source IP address

- TDMoP Format L2 Config Table



Group: Group number

Destination MAC Address: Destination MAC address

VID: VLAN IDCoS: CoS value

ECID: ECID value

- TDMoP Format L3 Config Table



Group: Group number

Source UDP Port: Source UDP port number

Destination IP Address: Destination IP address

Destination UDP Port: Destination UDP port numberTTL: TTL value

DSCP: DSCP value

Relatedcommands




clear tdmop format Clearing of TDMoP format

17-27



TDM over Packet

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear tdmop format

Clearing of TDMoP format

Clears a TDMoP format.


clear tdmop format P1 [P3]


clear tdmop format P1 P2 [P3]



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4



E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24

SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24


* When P3 is omitted in E1 or T1 mode, setting information of all TDMoP formats setfor the port (line) number specified in P1 is cleared.

* When P3 is omitted in SDH or SONET mode, setting information of all TDMoPformats set for the port (line) number specified in P1 and for the logical port numberspecified in P2 is cleared.

Default value None

Usage condition TDMP/TDMP 155 line mode must have been set to tdmop.

Notes If P3 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command is entered.

If the blocking/unblocking setting of TDMoP is blocked, it is changed to unblockedautomatically.

Input examples *Switch@1# clear tdmop format 1/1 8

*Switch@1# clear tdmop format 1/1


*Switch@1#

Output item

17-28



TDM over Packet

Relatedcommands







17-29



TDM over Packet

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set tdmop admin

Setting of TDMoP blocking/unblocking

Sets whether to block or unblock TDMoP.


set tdmop admin P1 P3 P4


set tdmop admin P1 P2 P3 P4



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4



E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24

SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24


P4: Blocking/unblocking setting { enable | disable }

enable: Unblocks TDMoP

disable: Blocks TDMoP


Usage condition If a group to which neither a TDMoP format nor a TDMoP connection is set is specified,an error occurs.

Note If a TDMoP format or TDMoP connection is cleared when TDMoP is blocked, theblocking state is automatically cleared.

Input examples*Switch@1# set tdmop admin 1/1 1/1/1 1 disable

*Switch@1# set tdmop admin 8/8 8 enable

Output item

17-30



TDM over Packet

Relatedcommands






set tdm group-name Setting of TDM group nameset tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance




show tdmop status Display of TDMoP path setting status information

17-31



TDM over Packet

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set tdmop adaptive-clock

Setting of adaptive clock

Sets the adaptive clock.


set tdmop adaptive-clock P1 P3 [P4]


set tdmop adaptive-clock P1 P2 P3 [P4]



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4



E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24

SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24


P4: Network type { narrow | middle | wide }

narrow: Small scale

middle: Medium scale

wide: Large scale

* When P4 is omitted, wide is assumed.

Default value P4: wide

Usageconditions


If a group to which neither a TDMoP group number nor a group name is set is specified,an error occurs.

You cannot set two or more systems of adaptive clock in an identical line module.

If the adaptive clock is set for a group to which any of the following is set, an erroroccurs.

set tdmop format


* However, if TDMoP is blocked, it can be set.

Notes Up to two systems of adaptive clock can be set in the entire system.

However, when APS setting is enabled, only one system of adaptive clock can be set inthe entire system.

If a group to which adaptive clock is set is cleared, its adaptive clock setting is alsocleared automatically.

17-32



TDM over Packet

Input examples *Switch@1# set tdmop adaptive-clock 1/1 1 middle

*Switch@1# set tdmop adaptive-clock 2/1 2/2/2 2 narrow

Output item

Relatedcommands











show tdmop adaptive-clock Display of adaptive clock settingclear tdmop adaptive-clock Clearing of adaptive clock


17-33



TDM over Packet

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show tdmop adaptive-clock

Display of adaptive clock setting

Shows the adaptive clock setting.

Input format show tdmop adaptive-clock

Parameter None

Default value None


Note When APS is enabled, this command also shows the operation status of the greater portnumber.

Input example *Switch@1# show tdmop adaptive-clock

TDMoP Adaptive-Clock Table

==========================

Logical

Port Port Group Network Type Status

---------------------------------------------

1/1 3/7/3 1 narrow acquiring3/1 3/7/3 1 narrow holdover

*Switch@1#


Logical Port:

Group: Group number

Network Type: Network type

narrow: Small

middle: Medium

wide: LargeStatus: Operation status of the adaptive clock

freerun: Lock Out state (operating with the freerun clock of the device)

holdover: Lock Out state (operating with the clock most recently synchronized)

acquiring: Lock Out state (collecting adaptive clock information)

acquired: Lock state

Relatedcommands


clear tdmop adaptive-clock Clearing of adaptive clock

17-34



TDM over Packet

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear tdmop adaptive-clock

Clearing of adaptive clock

Clears the adaptive clock.


clear tdmop adaptive-clock P1 P3


clear tdmop adaptive-clock P1 P2 P3



SDH: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-3

SONET: 1-3 / 1-7 / 1-4



E1 mode: 1 to 32

T1 mode: 1 to 24

SDH mode: 1 to 32

SONET mode: 1 to 24


Default value None

Usageconditions


If the reference clock priority is set, an error occurs.

If a group to which neither a TDMoP format nor a TDMoP connection is set is specified,an error occurs.

If the specified group name does not exist, an error occurs.

If any of the following is set for a group to which the adaptive clock is set, an erroroccurs.

set tdmop format


* However, if TDMoP is blocked, it can be cleared.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear tdmop adaptive-clock 1/1 1

*Switch@1#

Output item

17-35



TDM over Packet

Relatedcommands


show reference-clock information Display of reference clock information




set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP connectionset tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking/unblocking


show tdmop adaptive-clock Display of adaptive clock setting

17-36



Clock Control

18 Clock Control

18-1



Clock Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set external-clock mode

Setting of external clock mode

Sets the external clock mode.

Input format set external-clock mode P1

Parameter P1: External clock mode { none | dcs | t1-ami-sf | t1-ami-esf | t1-b8zs-sf | t1-b8zs-esf |e1-ami-crc-75 | e1-ami-crc-120 | e1-ami-fas-75 | e1-ami-fas-120 | e1-hdb3-crc-75 |e1-hdb3-crc-120 | e1-hdb3-fas-75 | e1-hdb3-fas-120 | e1-sync-75 | e1-sync-120 }

none: Clear indication

dcs: DCS mode

t1-ami-sf: T1/AMI/SF mode

t1-ami-esf: T1/AMI/ESF mode

t1-b8zs-sf: T1/B8ZS/SF mode

t1-b8zs-esf: T1/B8ZS/ESF mode

e1-ami-crc-75: E1/AMI/CRC mode/75Ω

e1-ami-crc-120: E1/AMI/CRC mode/120Ω

e1-ami-fas-75: E1/AMI/FAS mode/75Ω

e1-ami-fas-120: E1/AMI/FAS mode/120Ω

e1-hdb3-crc-75: E1/HDB3/CRC mode/75Ω

e1-hdb3-crc-120: E1/HDB3/CRC mode/120Ω

e1-hdb3-fas-75: E1/HDB3/FAS mode/75Ω e1-hdb3-fas-120: E1/HDB3/FAS mode/120Ω

e1-sync-75: E1/ Synchronization mode/75Ω

e1-sync-120: E1/ Synchronization mode/120Ω

Default value P1: none

Usageconditions

Execute change of external clock mode after a clear indication (specifying none).

External clock mode cannot be cleared while external clock is set in the priority. Setexternal clock mode again after clearing external clock from the priority settings.

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set external-clock mode dcs

*Switch@1# set reference-clock mode none

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

reset reference-clock Resetting of reference clock

set reference-clock mode Setting of reference clock operation

change external-clock Change of external clock


18-2



Clock Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set reference-clock priority

Setting of reference clock priority

Sets the reference clock priority.

Input formats - Clear specification for specified priority

set reference-clock priority P1 P2 (none)

- External clock specification

set reference-clock priority P1 P2 (external)

- Port (line) extraction clock specification

set reference-clock priority P1 P2 (port) P3

- Line module extraction clock specification

set reference-clock priority P1 P2 (adaptive) P3 P4

Parameters P1: Priority (1 to 5) (single specification)

P2: Clear indication for specified priority { none }, External clock { external }, port (line)extraction clock { port }, or RTP packet regeneration clock { adaptive }

none: Clear indication for specified priority

external: External clock

port: port (line) extraction clock

adaptive: RTP packet regeneration clock

When external is specified in P2.

P3: Switch module number (1 to 2) (single specification) When port is specified in P2.

P3: Port (line) type { atmp | tdmp | atmp155 | tdmp155 }

atmp: ATMP line module

tdmp: TDMP line module

atmp155: ATMP155 line module

tdmp155: TDMP155 line module


When adaptive is specified in P2.

P3: Port (line) number { tdmp | tdmp155 }

tdmp: TDMP port


P4: Line module number (1 to 12) (single specification)

Default value None

18-3



Clock Control

Usageconditions

Port (line) extraction clock can be set to ATMP/TDMP/ ATMP155/TDMP155 linemodules.

Line module extraction clock can be set to TDMP/TDMP155 line modules.

Modification of the priority that has already been set needs to be done after executingthe clear indication (none specification).

Priority of the line module whose priority has already been set cannot be changed.

When 1 or 2 is set to the priority, only external clock can be set.

When 3 to 5 is set to the priority, port (line) extraction clock or line module extractionclock can be set.

To specify external clock, setting of external clock mode is required in advance.

To specify Line module extraction clock, Adaptive-clock setting of TDMoP is required inadvance.

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set reference-clock priority 1 external 1

*Switch@1# set reference-clock priority 2 external 2

*Switch@1# set reference-clock priority 4 port tdmp 12/8

*Switch@1# set reference-clock priority 3 adaptive tdmp 3

*Switch@1# set reference-clock priority 1 none

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set external-clock mode Setting of external clock mode





18-4



Clock Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set reference-clock mode

Setting of reference clock operation

Sets the reference clock operation mode.

Input format set reference-clock mode P1

Parameter P1: Operation mode { revertive | non-revertive }

revertive: Autonomous switching enabled/autonomous reverting enabled

non-revertive: Autonomous switching enabled/autonomous reverting disabled

Default value P1: non-revertive


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set reference-clock mode revertive

*Switch@1# set reference-clock mode non-revertive

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands






18-5



Clock Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show reference-clock information

Display of reference clock information

Displays the reference clock settings and status.

Input format show reference-clock information

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show reference-clock information

Reference Clock Information

===========================

Reference Clock Mode

====================

mode : revertive

External Clock Configuration============================

External Clock : dcs

Clock Supply Status Table(Switch#1)

===================================

Priority Source Status

------------------------------------------

* 1 external 1 normal

2 external 2 normal

3 adaptive tdmp 5 normal

4 port tdmp155 7/1 normal

5 port atmp155 6/1 normal

Clock Supply Status Table(Switch#2)

===================================

Priority Source Status

------------------------------------------

* 1 external 1 normal

2 external 2 normal

3 adaptive tdmp 5 normal

4 port tdmp155 7/1 normal

5 port atmp155 6/1 normal

*Switch@1#

18-6



Clock Control

Output items Mode: Reference clock operation mode

revertive: Autonomous reverting setting enabled

non-revertive: Autonomous reverting setting disabled

* Clock source currently selected as reference clock (* is not put for freerun clock orholdover)

Priority: Clock switching priority (1 to)Source: Clock supply source

external switch number: External clock

port atmp port (line) number: Port (line) extraction ATMP port

port tdmp port (line) number: Port (line) extraction TDMP port

port atmp155 port (line) number: Port (line) extraction ATMP155 port

port tdmp155 port (line) number: Port (line) extraction TDMP155 port

adaptive tdmp line number: Line module extraction TDMP port

adaptive tdmp155 line number: Line module extraction TDMP155 port

Status: Clock supply source status

normal: Clock input

acquiring: Currently synchronizing with reference clockfail: No clock input

---: (only when switch module of other system is uninstalled/being initialized/OUS/CRfailure)

Relatedcommands






18-7



Clock Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

reset reference-clock

Resetting of reference clock

Selectively resets the reference clock.

Input format reset reference-clock

Parameter None

Default value None


Note When a clock is supplied to the source clock with higher priority over the reference clockthat is currently selected, the reference clock is switched over to the source clock withhigher priority.

Input example *Switch@1# reset reference-clock

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands






18-8



Clock Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

change external-clock

Change of external clock

Changes external clocks.

Input format change external-clock

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage condition This command is available in the following conditions only:

- During UGSW redundant operation and external clock is supplied to both UGSWsystems.

- The external clock used for both UGSW systems has been set in the clock priority.

- External clock is selected as the reference clock.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# change external-clock

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands





18-9



Clock Control

(Blank page)

18-10



Network Management

19 Network Management

19-11



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set snmp

Setting of SNMP enable/disable

Sets SNMP security access.

Input format set snmp P1

Parameter P1: SNMP setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables SNMP

disable: Disables SNMP



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set snmp enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



set snmp manager Setting of SNMP manager

set snmp trap-manager Setting of SNMP trap manager

set snmp authen-trap Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission

show snmp Display of SNMP setting information

19-12



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set snmp manager

Setting of SNMP manager

Sets an SNMP manager.

Input format set snmp manager P1 P2 P3 P4 [P5]

Parameters P1: Manager number (1 to 20)

P2: Community name (1 to 255 characters)

P3: IP address

P4: Access authority { read-only | read-write }

read-only: General userread-write: Privileged user

P5: Memo (1 to 31 characters)

Default value None

Usage conditions When using the same community, you cannot set a different access authority.

Notes You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxxas the manager IP address. (“xxx” is any number.)

If an SNMP manager exists at the network address 192.168.128.0/24 or

192.168.129.0/24, you can set the manager. This setting, however, does not providecorrect communication.

Input example *Switch@1# set snmp manager 1 a 1.2.3.4 read-only

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



set snmp Setting of SNMP enable/disableshow snmp Display of SNMP setting information

clear snmp manager Clearing of SNMP manager

19-13



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set snmp trap-manager

Setting of SNMP trap manager

Sets an SNMP trap manager.

Input format set snmp trap-manager P1 P2 P3 P4 [P5]

Parameters P1: Trap manager number (1 to 10)

P2: Community name (1 to 255 characters)

P3: IP address

P4: Trap format { v1 | v2c }

v1: V1 Trapv2c: V2C Trap

P5: Memo (1 to 31 characters)

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxxas the manager IP address. (“xxx” is any number.)

If an SNMP manager exists at the network address 192.168.128.0/24 or192.168.129.0/24, you can set the manager. This setting, however, does not providecorrect communication.

Notes Set a community name and memo with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [controlcharacter].


Input example *Switch@1# set snmp trap-manager 1 a 50.60.70.80 v1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP addressset ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address

set snmp Setting of SNMP enable/disable


clear snmp trap-manager Clearing of SNMP trap manager

19-14



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear snmp manager

Clearing of SNMP manager settings

Clears SNMP manager settings.

Input format clear snmp manager P1

Parameter P1: Manager number (1 to 20)

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear snmp manager 1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set snmp Setting of SNMP enable/disableset snmp manager Setting of SNMP manager


19-15



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear snmp trap-manager

Clearing of SNMP trap manager settings

Clears SNMP trap manager settings.

Input format clear snmp trap-manager P1

Parameter P1: Trap manager number (1 to 10)

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear snmp trap-manager 1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set snmp Setting of SNMP enable/disableset snmp trap-manager Setting of SNMP trap manager


19-16



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set snmp authen-trap

Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission

Sets SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission.

Input format set snmp authen-trap P1

Parameter P1: SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission

disable: Disables SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set snmp authen-trap enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands





19-17



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show snmp

Display of SNMP setting information

Shows SNMP setting information.

Input format show snmp

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show snmp

SNMP Access Configuration

=========================

SNMP Access : disabled

Manager Configuration

=====================

Manager Index 1Community Name: a

IP Address : 1.2.3.4

Authority : read-only

Note :

Manager Index 2

Community Name: cx2600-2

IP Address : 192.168.0.3

Authority : read-write

Note : right

Manager Index 20Community Name: b

IP Address : 10.20.30.40

Authority : read-write

Note :

Authentication Failure Trap Configuration

=========================================

Authen Trap : enabled

Trap Manager Configuration

==========================

Trap Manager Index 1

Community Name: a

IP Address : 50.60.70.80

19-18



Network Management

Trap Mode : v1

Note :

Trap Manager Index 2

Community Name: cx2600-2

IP Address : 192.168.0.3

Trap Mode : v2cNote : right

<Omission>

Output items SNMP Access: SNMP security access setting

Manager Index: Manager number

Community Name: Community name


Authority: Access authority

Note: Memo

Authen Trap: Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmissionTrap Manager Index: Trap manager number

Community Name: Community name


Trap Mode: Trap format

Note: Memo

Relatedcommands

set snmp Setting of SNMP enable/disable

set snmp manager Setting of SNMP manager


set snmp authen-trap Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission

show snmp Display of SNMP setting informationclear snmp trap-manager Clearing of SNMP trap manager

clear snmp manager Clearing of SNMP manager

19-19



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set session ip-permit

Setting of access list

Sets a telnet connection access list.

Input format set session ip-permit P1 P2 [P3]

Parameters P1: Access list number (1 to 4)

P2: IP address

P3: Subnet mask

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxxas the manager IP address. (“xxx” is any number.) You can set the networkaddresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 as the network address but thissetting does not provide correct communication.

* When P3 is omitted, the following subnet mask is applied.

When 1.0.0.0 to 126.255.255.254 is specified in P2

Subnet mask: 255.0.0.0

When 128.0.0.0 to 191.255.255.254 is specified in P2Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0

When 192.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.254 is specified in P2

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set session ip-permit 1 10.20.30.40 255.255.255.0

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

show session ip-permit Display of access list

clear session ip-permit Clearing of access list

19-20



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show session ip-permit

Display of access list

Shows a telnet connection access list.

Input format show session ip-permit [P1]

Parameter P1: Access list number (1 to 4)

* When P1 is omitted, all access list numbers are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show session ip-permit

Telnet Filter Table

===================

No IP Address Netmask

------------------------------------

1 192.168.2.211 255.255.255.0

*Switch@1#

Output items No: Access list number


Netmask: Subnet mask

Relatedcommands

set session ip-permit Setting of access list

clear session ip-permit Clearing of access list

19-21



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear session ip-permit

Clearing of access list

Clears a telnet connection access list.

Input format clear session ip-permit P1

Parameter P1: Access list number (1 to 4)

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear session ip-permit 1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set session ip-permit Setting of access listshow session ip-permit Display of access list

19-22



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show session

Display of session

Shows terminal port (line) information.

Input format show session

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show session

Terminal Session Table

======================

Session ID Terminal IP Address User Name Status

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

* 0 local --- --- established

1 remote 192.168.2.138 --- established

2 remote listen3 remote listen

4 remote listen

*Switch@1#

Output items *: Console showing terminal port (line) information

Session ID: Session ID

Terminal: Console type

local: Local console

remote: Remote console

IP Address: Connection source IP address

User Name: Account name

Status: Connection status

established: Session connected

listen: Session not connected

busy: Resource busy

authenticating: During login authentication

Relatedcommand

clear session Clearing of session

19-23



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Save Synchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear session

Clearing of session

Clears a telnet session.

Input format clear session P1

Parameter P1: Session number (1 to 4)

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear session 1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show session Display of session

19-24



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set syslog remote

Setting of remote log enable/disable

Sets whether to enable or disable a remote log.

Input format set syslog remote P1

Parameter P1: Remote log setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables remote log

disable: Disables remote log



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set syslog remote enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



set syslog server Setting of syslog server and message facility

clear syslog server Clearing of syslog server

show syslog server Display of syslog server configuration information

19-25



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set syslog server

Setting of syslog server and message facility

Sets a syslog server and message facility.

Input format set syslog server P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: syslog server number (1 to 5)

P2: IP address

P3: Facility { local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7 }

local0: Log type “local user 0”

local1: Log type “local user 1”local2: Log type “local user 2”



local5: Log typ3 “local user 5”



Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx

as the server IP address. (“xxx” is any number.)If a syslog server exists at the network address 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24,you can set the server. This setting, however, does not provide correctcommunication.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set syslog server 1 1.2.3.4 local0

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



set syslog remote Setting of remote log enable/disable



19-26



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show syslog server

Display of syslog server configuration information

Shows syslog server configuration information.

Input format show syslog server

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show syslog server

Syslog Remote Configuration

===========================

Syslog Remote: enabled

Syslog Server Table

===================

Index IP Address Facility

---------------------------------------------------------

1 10.20.30.40 LOG_LOCAL7

2 192.168.0.3 LOG_LOCAL1

5 5.6.7.8 LOG_LOCAL7

*Switch@1#

Output items Syslog Remote: Remote log enable/disable setting

enabled: Remote log enabled

disabled: Remote log disabled

Index: syslog server numberIP Address: IP address

Facility: syslog facility

Relatedcommands

set syslog remote Setting of remote log enable/disable

set syslog server Setting of syslog server and message facility


19-27



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear syslog server

Clearing of syslog server

Clears a syslog server.

Input format clear syslog server P1

Parameter P1: syslog server number (1 to 5)

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear syslog server 1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands set syslog remote Setting of remote log enable/disableset syslog server Setting of syslog server and message facility


19-28



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set syslog map

Setting of syslog message level remapping

Sets syslog message level remapping.

Input format set syslog map P1 P2

Parameters P1: Group

For the group parameter, refer to “Mapping” of “syslog Functions” of “Method ofOperating Maintenance and Management Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.

P2: syslog level

For the syslog level parameter, refer to “Mapping” of “syslog Functions" of “Method ofOperating Maintenance and Management Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.

Default value For the default values, refer to “Mapping” of “syslog Functions” of “Method of OperatingMaintenance and Management Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set syslog map TRAP_SYSINF information

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

clear syslog map Clearing of syslog message level remapping

show syslog map Display of syslog message level mapping status

show syslog local Display of local log

19-29



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show syslog map

Display of syslog message level mapping status

Shows the syslog message level mapping status.

Input format show syslog map

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show syslog map

Syslog Map Configuration

========================

TRAP_SYSFLT : LOG_CRIT

TRAP_SYSMJR : LOG_ERR

TRAP_SYSMNR : LOG_ERR

TRAP_SYSWAR : LOG_WARNING

TRAP_SYSCLR : LOG_INFOTRAP_SYSINF : LOG_INFO

TRAP_LINEFLT : LOG_CRIT

TRAP_LINEMJR : LOG_ERR

TRAP_LINEMNR : LOG_ERR

TRAP_LINEWAR : LOG_WARNING

TRAP_LINECLR : LOG_INFO

TRAP_LINEINF : LOG_INFO

TRAP_ROUTEMJR : LOG_ERR

TRAP_ROUTEMNR : LOG_ERR

TRAP_ROUTEWAR : LOG_WARNING

TRAP_ROUTECLR : LOG_INFO

TRAP_ROUTEINF : LOG_INFOTRAP_PORTMJR : LOG_ERR

TRAP_PORTCLR : LOG_INFO

TRAP_PORTINF : LOG_INFO

COMMAND_LOG : LOG_INFO

*Switch@1#

Output items For the output items, refer to “Mapping” of “syslog Functions” of “Method of OperatingMaintenance and Management Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.

Relatedcommands

set syslog map Setting of syslog message level remapping

clear syslog map Clearing of syslog message level remapping

19-30



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear syslog map

Clearing of syslog message level remapping

Sets syslog message level remapping.

Input format clear syslog map P1

Parameter P1: Group

For the group parameter, refer to “Mapping” of syslog Functions of “Method ofOperating Maintenance and Management Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.

Default value For the default value, refer to “Mapping” of syslog Functions of “Method of OperatingMaintenance and Management Functions” in the “Instruction Manual”.


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear syslog map TRAP_LINEMNR

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands


show syslog map Display of syslog message level mapping status

19-31



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show syslog local

Display of local log

Shows a local log.

Input format show syslog local [P1] [P2] [P3]

Parameters P1: Log group { all | system | line | command | route | port }

all: Shows all local logs

system: Shows local logs related to system status notification

line: Shows local logs related to line module status notification

command: Shows local logs related to commandsroute: Shows local logs related to route status notification

port: Shows local logs related to port status notification

* When P1 is omitted, all is assumed.

P2: Order in which to show local logs { oldest | newest }

oldest: Shows saved local logs, starting at the oldest local log

newest: Shows saved local logs, starting at the newest local log

* When P2 is omitted, oldest is assumed.

P3: Terminal type { terminal | free }

terminal: Forcibly begins a new line at column 80 and shows local logs

free: Shows local logs without forcibly beginning a new line

* When P3 is omitted, free is assumed.

Default value None

Usage condition You can save local logs up to about 1MB.

Note None

19-32



Network Management

Input example *Switch@1# show syslog local

Syslog Local Table

==================

Index Date Time Log Text

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

1 01/01/2000 00:06:25 #1 local_console:0 clear syslog local

2 01/01/2000 00:06:39 #1 local_console:0 write memory

3 01/01/2000 00:10:33 #1 local_console:0 set terminal prompt Switch

4 01/01/2000 00:11:05 #1 local_console:0 set terminal prompt a

5 01/01/2000 00:11:05 #1 local_console:0 set terminal prompt abcd

6 01/01/2000 00:11:06 #1 local_console:0 set terminal prompt Switch

7 01/01/2000 00:11:06 #1 local_console:0 set terminal scroll systemoff

8 01/01/2000 00:11:07 #1 local_console:0 set terminal scroll systemon

9 01/01/2000 00:11:07 #1 local_console:0 set terminal scroll systemon 1

10 01/01/2000 00:11:07 #1 local_console:0 set terminal scroll systemon 99

11 01/01/2000 00:11:11 #1 local_console:0 set terminal logout 0

12 01/01/2000 00:11:11 #1 local_console:0 set terminal logout 60

13 01/01/2000 00:11:12 #1 local_console:0 set system contact sit

14 01/01/2000 00:11:12 #1 local_console:0 set system name CX2600/220

15 01/01/2000 00:11:13 #1 local_console:0 set system location NEC

16 01/01/2000 00:00:00 #1 local_console:0 date 01/01/00 00:00:00

17 12/31/2099 23:59:59 #1 local_console:0 date 12/31/99 23:59:59

18 12/31/2099 23:59:59 #1 local

*Switch@1#

Output items Index: syslog number

Date: Date

Time: Time

Log Text: Log information

Relatedcommands


clear syslog local Clearing of local log

upload local-syslog Uploading of system log to ftp server

19-33



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear syslog local

Clearing of local log

Clears a local log.

Input format clear syslog local

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear syslog local

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands show syslog local Display of local logupload local-syslog Uploading of system log to ftp server

19-34



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set ntp access-time

Setting of NTP access time

Sets NTP server access cycle time.

Input format set ntp access-time P1

Parameter P1: Access time (0 to 168 hours)

0: Disables NTP server access

Default value P1: 0 (hour)


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set ntp access-time 168

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP addressset ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address

set ntp server Setting of IP address of NTP server

clear ntp server Clearing of IP address of NTP server

show ntp Display of NTP server setting information

19-35



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set ntp server

Setting of IP address of NTP server

Sets the IP address of an NTP server.

Input format set ntp server [P1] P2

Parameters P1: Server priority { primary | secondary }

primary: Priority server

secondary: Alternate server

* When P1 is omitted, primary is assumed.

P2: IP address

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxxas the server IP address. (“xxx” is any number.)

If an NTP server exists at the network address 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24,you can set the server. This setting, however, does not provide correctcommunication.

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set ntp server 10.20.30.40

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



set ntp access-time Setting of NTP access time



19-36



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show ntp

Display of NTP server setting information

Shows NTP server setting information.

Input format show ntp

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show ntp

NTP Server Configuration

========================

Primary IP Address : 10.20.30.40

Secondary IP Address : 10.20.30.41

Retrieval time (hour): 168

*Switch@1#

Output items Primary IP Address: IP address of primary priority server

Secondary IP Address: IP address of secondary priority server

Retrieval Time (hour): Access time

Relatedcommands




19-37



Network Management

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear ntp server

Clearing of IP address of NTP server

Clears the IP address of an NTP server.

Input format clear ntp server P1

Parameter P1: Server priority { primary | secondary }

primary: Priority server

secondary: Alternate server

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear ntp server

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands




19-38



Network Test

20 Network Test

20-1



Network Test

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set mc management

Setting of M/C management function basics

Sets terminal M/C management function basics. Enabling this setting allows you to perform a loopbacktest and collect terminal M/C information.

- Enabling UTP mode

set mc management P1 P2 (enable) [P3]

Input formats

- Disabling UTP mode

set mc management P1 P2 (disable)

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (1/1 to 4/8) (Multiple values can be specified.)

P2: UTP mode setting { enable | disable }enable: Enables setting M/C management function basics

disable: Disables setting M/C management function basics


P3: UTP mode setting { utp }

utp: UTP mode


Usage condition You can use only 100BASE-FX line modules.

Note When P3 is omitted, UTP mode setting will be disabled.

Note

Input example *Switch@1# set mc management 1/1 enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Related

command

show mc information Display of M/C status

20-2



Network Test

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

loopback mc

Starting of M/C loopback test

Starts the media converter (M/C) loopback test when the 100BASE-FX line module is used. To performthis loopback test, you must enable setting M/C management function basics in the “set mc management”command in advance.

Input format loopback mc P1 [P2] [P3] [P4]

Parameters P1: Port (line) number (1/1 to 4/8) (Multiple values can be specified.)

P2: Test count count (1 to 1000)


P3: Frame size frame { 64 | 1518 } (bytes)

frame 64: 64 bytes

frame 1518: 1518 bytes


P4: Response wait time wait (610 to 2000) (msec)




Default value None

Usage conditions Since frames cannot be transferred between this device and the user during theloopback test, do not conduct this test on a port (line) in use. Depending on the M/C tobe used, the UTP side may link down during the loopback test. In this case, the userside detects network disconnection.

Note You can set response wait time within the range from 610 to 2000 (msec) in incrementsof 10 (msec). For how to look at the test result, refer to the “Instruction Manual”.

20-3



Network Test

Input example *Switch@1# loopback mc 9/3 count 4 frame 1518 wait 610

result 9/3 <seq=1> time=465ms test ok




loopback statistics for 9/3

request = 4 : test ok = 4 : test fail = 0 (0% failure)

minimum = 460msec, maximum = 465msec, average = 460msec

test ok 4

test timeout 0

test terminate receive 0

test close request timeout 0

frame timeout 0

frame fail 0

test start request timeout 0

other error 0

*Switch@1#

Output items Result display per loopback test

result a/b: Test slot number/port number

<seq=N>: Test count

time=XXXms: Time required for test (*1)

This item is displayed only when the test result is test ok or frame fail.

{ result message }: Result (see below)

test ok: Normal end

test time out: Test time (T1) timeout occurrence

test terminate receive: Forced termination based on termination notification received

from terminal MCtest close request timeout: Response wait timeout from terminal MC in testtermination negotiation

frame timeout: Loopback frame reception wait timeout

frame fail: Loopback frame error detection (e.g., data mismatch)

test start request timeout: Response wait timeout from terminal MC in test startnegotiation

other error: Other errors (including a HW failure or terminal MC sequence error)

Statistics display

loopback statistics for a/b:

Slot number/port number to be displayed in loopback statistics displayrequest = N: Number of times loopback test was performed

test ok = X: Number of times loopback test succeeded

test fail = Y: Number of times loopback test failed (other than test ok)

(Z% failure): Rate of unsuccessful loopback test

{ test fail } / { request } x 100

minimum = XXXmsec: Minimum test time (*1) (*2)

maximum = YYYmsec: Maximum test time (*1) (*2)

average = ZZZmsec Average test time (*1) (*2)

(*1) This time includes the time required for terminal MC negotiation performed beforeand after the loopback test.

(*2) This item is collected only when the test result is test ok or frame fail.

20-4



Network Test

Relatedcommand

set mc management Setting of M/C management function basics

20-5



Network Test

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

update mc information

Prompting of M/C to send M/C status notification

Prompts the M/C to send an M/C status notification.

Input format update mc information P1


Default value None

Usage condition You can enter this command when the FX8/FX8-PV line module is inserted into thespecified slot or FX8 is specified as the line module type.

Notes This command prompts the M/C to send an M/C status notification when the M/C maynot autonomously send it.

Originally, the M/C status is automatically collected when link-up is established.Usually, you need not use this command because the M/C autonomously sends the M/Cstatus notification when the M/C status changes.

If a failure may have occurred, use the “loopback mc” command separately.

Input example Switch@1# update mc information 1/1

Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

loopback mc Starting of M/C loopback test

show mc information Display of M/C information

20-6



Network Test

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show mc information

Display of M/C information

Shows terminal M/C information.

Input format show mc information [P1]

Parameter P1: Line module number or port (line) number


Port (line) number: 1/1 to 4/8 (Multiple values can be specified.)

* When P1 is omitted, terminal M/C information for all line modules is shown.

Default value None


Note Some terminal M/C information is shown only when a port (line) number is specified.

Input examples *Switch@1# show mc information 1/5

Remote MC Information

=====================

Port : 1/5

MC management : enabledOption : utp

Power Status : normal

UTP Link Status : up

MC Fail : normal

Rx-OPT Status : normal

Notice Rx-OPT Down : frame

LoopTest Status : idle

Option B support : support

Vendor Code : 0x00004c

Model-ID : 0x000001

UTP I/F : single

UTP Auto-negotiation : enabled

UTP Link Speed (Mbps) : 100

UTP Duplex Mode : full

*Switch@1# show mc information 1

MC Man- Power UTP MC Rx-OPT Notice LoopTest

Port agement Option Status Link Fail Status Rx-OPT Status

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

1/1 disabled --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

1/2 enabled none

1/3 enabled utp

1/4 enabled none

1/5 enabled utp normal up normal normal frame idle

1/6 enabled none normal up normal normal frame idle

1/7 enabled utp

20-7



Network Test

1/8 enabled none

*Switch@1#


MC management: Setting terminal M/C management function basics

enabled: Setting terminal M/C management function basics is enabled

disabled: Setting terminal M/C management function basics is disabled

Option: UTP mode setting information

none: UTP mode is not set

utp: UTP mode is set

Power Status: Terminal M/C power information

normal: Normal

fail: Power interruption

UTP Link: Terminal M/C UTP information

up: Normal

down: UTP interruption

MC Fail: Terminal M/C failure information

normal: Normal

fail: Failure occurred

Rx-OPT Status: Information for receive optical error detected by terminal M/C

normal: Normal

fail: Failure occurred

Notice Rx-OPT: Method for notifying terminal M/C receive optical error

frame: Maintenance frame

fefi: FEFI signal

LoopTest Status: Loopback test status

Idle: Loopback test not yet performed

testing: Loopback test being performed

Option B support: Support of option B of terminal M/C complying with TS1000 standard

support: Option B supported

not support: Option B not supported

Vendor Code: Vendor code of terminal M/C

Model-ID: Module ID of terminal M/C

UTP I/F: Number of UTP interfaces of terminal M/C

Single: Single

Multi: Multiple

UTP Auto-negotiation: UTP port auto-negotiation status of terminal M/C

enabled: Auto-negotiation enabled

disabled: Auto-negotiation disabled

UTP Link Speed (Mbps): UTP physical line speed information of terminal M/C

10: 10 Mbps

100: 100Mbps

1000: 1000Mbps

other: Others

UTP Duplex Mode: UTP communication mode information for terminal M/C

Half: Half Duplex

Full: Full Duplex

Relatedcommand set mc management Set M/C management function basics

20-8



Network Test

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

loopback atm

Starting of ATM loopback test

Starts the ATM transmission path loopback test.

Input formats - Specifying F4 level

loopback atm P1 (f4) P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] [P6] [P7] [P8]

- Specifying F5 level

loopback atm P1 (f5) P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] [P6] [P7] [P8]

Parameters P1: Level { f4 | f5 }

f4: F4 (VP) level

f5: F5 (VC) level



Port (line) number (single specification)


PVC name: 1 to 32 characters





PVC name: 1 to 32 charactersP3: Test section { segment | end-end }

segment: Between nodes

end-end: End

* When P3 is omitted, end-end is assumed.

P4: Location ID (0x1 to 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff) (hexadecimal)

* When P4 is omitted, 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff is assumed.

P5: Indication check { enable | disable }

enable: Enables indication check

disable: Disables indication check

* When P5 is omitted, enable is assumed.

P6: Test count count (1 to 1000)* When P6 is omitted, 1 is assumed.

P7: Response wait time wait (5 to 10) (seconds)


P8: Test direction { outside | inside }

outside: Port (line) side (Output direction from UGSW to ATM line modules)

inside: SW side (Output direction from ATM line modules to UGSW)

* When P8 is omitted, outside is assumed.

20-9



Network Test

Default values P3: end-end

P4: 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff

P5: enable

P6: 1

P7: 5

P8: outside

Usage conditions When f4 is specified in P1, this function cannot be executed if the VP connection or thePVC that includes the targeted VPI has not been registered.

When f5 is specified in P1, this function cannot be executed if the targeted PVC has notbeen registered.

You cannot execute two or more of this function simultaneously.

This function cannot be executed if ATM-OAM flow point is set to none (no setting).

To execute a test specifying inside in P8, you need to set the ATMoP format.

When inside is specified in P8, this function cannot be executed if ATM-OAM flow pointof the targeted VPI or PVC is set to end-point.

To execute a test to the inside direction for an ATMP155 line module, you need to setthe ATM shaper.

You cannot execute a test to the inside direction for an ATM155 line module.

You cannot execute multiple loopback test (specifying 0x0 for the location ID).

* Refer to the “set atm-oam flow” command for ATM-OAM flow point setting.

* Refer to the “set atmop format” command for ATMoP format setting.

* Refer to the “set atm-shaper rate” command for ATM shaper setting.

Note To cancel this test halfway, press Ctrl+C.

20-10



Network Test

Input examples *Switch@1# loopback atm f4 3/1 0 segment 0x1234 count 3 wait 10

result 3/1 <seq=1> time=465ms ok


result 3/1 <seq=3> timeout

loopback statistics for 3/1 0

level f4

section segment

indication-check enabled

wait 10(s)

location-ID 0x00000000000000000000000000001234

direction outside

test count = 3 : ok = 2 : fail = 1 (33% failure)

minimum = 460, maximum = 465, average = 460

Switch@1# loopback atm f5 3/1 0/200 segment 0x1234 count 3 wait 10



result 3/1 <seq=3> timeout

loopback statistics for 3/1 0/200

level f5

section segment

indication-check enabled

wait 10(s)

location-ID 0x00000000000000000000000000001234

direction outside

test count = 3 : ok = 2 : fail = 1 (33% failure)

minimum = 460, maximum = 465, average = 460

*Switch@1#

Output items Result display per loopback test

result a/b x/z: Test slot number/port number and VPI/VCI

If the test level is f4, only VPI is displayed, not VPI/VCI.

<seq=N>: Test count

time=XXXms: Time required for test

This item is displayed only when the test result is test ok or frame fail.

Statistics display

loopback statistics for a/b x/z:

Slot number/port number and VPI/VCI in loopback statistics display

If the test level is f4, only VPI is displayed, not VPI/VCI.level: Test level

section: Test section

indication-check: Indication check setting

wait: Response wait time

location-ID: Location ID

direction: Test direction

test count: Number of times loopback test was performed

ok: Number of times loopback test succeeded (normal termination)

fail: Number of times loopback test failed (other than normal termination)

(X% failure): Rate of unsuccessful loopback test

{ fail } / { test count } x 100minimum: Minimum test time (*1)

20-11



Network Test

maximum: Maximum test time (*1)

average: Average test time (*1)

(*1) This item is collected only when the test result is ok or sell fail.

Relatedcommands

set loopback atm source-id Setting of ATM loopback source IDshow loopback atm source-id Display of ATM loopback source ID

set atm-oam flow Setting of ATM-OAM flow point






20-12



Network Test

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set loopback atm source-id

Setting of ATM loopback source ID

Sets an ATM loopback source ID.

Input format set loopback atm source-id P1

Parameter P1: Source ID (1 to 32 digits) (hexadecimal)

0x1 to 0xfffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffe

Default value P1: 0x00000000000000000000000000000001

Usage condition Bits set in P1 must not be entirely zero or 1 (0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff).

Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set loopback atm source-id 0x1234

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

Loopback atm Starting of ATM loopback testshow loopback atm source-id Display of ATM loopback source ID

20-13



Network Test

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show loopback atm source-id

Display of ATM loopback source ID

Shows an ATM loopback source ID.

Input format show loopback atm source-id

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show loopback atm source-id

ATM Loopback Source-ID Table

============================

Source-ID : 0x00000000000000000000000000FFAA33

*Switch@1#

Output item ATM Loopback Source-ID Tablesource-ID: Source ID

Relatedcommands

Loopback atm Starting of ATM loopback test

set loopback atm source-id Setting of ATM loopback source ID

20-14



Network Test

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set loopback atm keepalive-mode

Setting of ATM loopback monitoring mode

Sets whether to enable or disable ATM loopback monitoring for registered connections.

Input format set loopback atm keepalive-mode P1

Parameter P1: Loopback monitoring mode { enable | disable }

enable: Enables loopback monitoring

disable: Disables loopback monitoring



Notes Timeout for each PVC is 5 seconds and the monitoring period for all PVCs is 5 minutes.

When loopback monitoring is enabled, monitoring statistical information is cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# set loopback atm keepalive-mode enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set loopback atm keepalive Setting of ATM loopback monitoringfunction

show loopback atm keepalive config Display of ATM loopback monitoringconfiguration

show loopback atm keepalive information Display of ATM loopback monitoringinformation

clear loopback atm keepalive Clearing of ATM loopback monitoringfunction

20-15



Network Test

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show loopback atm keepalive config

Display of ATM loopback monitoring configuration

Shows an ATM loopback monitoring configuration.

Input format show loopback atm keepalive config [P1]





* When the VCI value is omitted, the loopback monitoring configurations set for thespecified VPI value are shown.

* When the VPI value is omitted, the loopback monitoring configurations set for thespecified port (line) number are shown.

* When P1 is omitted, the loopback monitoring configurations of all ports are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show loopback atm keepalive config

ATM Loopback Config Table

=========================

Keepalive-Mode : enabled

ATM Loopback Cell F4 Config Table

=================================

Port VPI Section Direction Success Threshold Fail Threshold

----------------------------------------------------------------

1/8 200 segment outside 1 1

ATM Loopback Cell F4 Location-ID

================================

Port VPI Location-ID

---------------------------------------------

1/8 200 0x00000000000000000000000000000001


=================================


20-16



Network Test

Input example

*Switch@1# show loopback atm keepalive config


=========================



=================================No entry in the table.


=================================

Port VPI/VCI Section Direction Success Threshold Fail Threshold

--------------------------------------------------------------------

1/1 100/100 segment outside 1 1


================================

Port VPI/VCI Location-ID

-------------------------------------------------1/1 100/100 0x00000000000000000000000000000001

*Switch@1#

Output items ATM Loopback Config Table:

keepalive-mode: Loopback monitoring mode

ATM Loopback Cell F4 Config Table:


VPI: VPI value

Section: Test section

Direction: Test directionSuccess Threshold: Threshold for monitoring result change

Fail Threshold: Threshold for monitoring result change



VPI: VPI value

Location-ID: Location ID

ATM Loopback Cell F5 Config Table:



Section: Test section

Direction: Test directionSuccess Threshold: Threshold for monitoring result change

Fail Threshold: Threshold for monitoring result change




Location-ID: Location ID

20-17



Network Test

Relatedcommands

set loopback atm keepalive-mode Setting of ATM loopback monitoringmode




20-18



Network Test

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set loopback atm keepalive

Setting of ATM loopback monitoring function

Sets a PVC for which ATM loopback monitoring is performed.

Also sets a level, location ID, test section, and thresholds for changing the loopback monitoring result.


set loopback atm keepalive P1 (f4) P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] [P6] [P7]


set loopback atm keepalive P1 (f5) P2 [P3] [P4] [P5] [P6] [P7]

Parameters P1: Level { f4 | f5 }

f4: F4 (VP) level

f5: F5 (VC) level









VPI value/VCI value (Multiple specification is allowed for VCI value only.)PVC name: 1 to 32 characters

P3: Test section { segment | end-end }

segment: Between nodes

end-end: End

* When P3 is omitted, end-end is assumed.

P4: Location ID (0x1 to 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff)

* When P4 is omitted, 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff is assumed.

P5: Threshold for changing loopback monitoring result (success) success (1 to 10)


P6: Threshold for changing loopback monitoring result (fail) fail (1 to 10)

* When P6 is omitted, 1 is assumed.P7: Monitoring direction { outside | inside }

outside: Port (line) side (Output direction from UGSW to ATM line modules)

inside: SW side (Output direction from ATM line modules to UGSW)

* When P7 is omitted, outside is assumed.

Default values P3: end-end

P4: 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff

P5: 1

P6: 1

20-19



Network Test

Usage conditions When f4 is specified in P1, this function cannot be executed if the VP connection or thePVC that includes the targeted VPI has not been registered.

When f5 is specified in P1, this function cannot be executed if the targeted PVC has notbeen registered.

You cannot simultaneously set F4 monitoring and F5 monitoring specifying an identicalVPI.

You cannot simultaneously set monitoring to both outside and inside directions for anidentical VPI and VCI.

If the loopback monitoring configuration is changed, monitoring statistical informationfor the PVC for which ATM loopback monitoring is performed is cleared.

This function cannot be executed if ATM-OAM flow point is set to none (no setting).

To execute a test specifying inside in P7, you need to set the ATMoP format.

When inside is specified in P7, this function cannot be executed if ATM-OAM flow pointof the targeted VPI or PVC is set to end-point.

To execute a test to the inside direction for an ATMP155 line module, you need to setthe ATM shaper.

You cannot execute a test to the inside direction for an ATM155 line module.

You cannot execute multiple loopback test (specifying 0x0 for the location ID).* Refer to the “set atm-oam flow” command for ATM-OAM flow point setting.

* Refer to the “set atmop format” command for ATMoP format setting.

* Refer to the “set atm-shaper rate” command for ATM shaper setting.

Notes If the PVC is cleared, the monitoring settings of this function for the PVC are alsocleared.

If all the PVCs that include a certain VPI are cleared, the monitoring settings of thisfunction for the VP are also cleared.

The monitoring settings changed during loopback monitoring are reflected in the nextperiod.

Input examples *Switch@1# set loopback atm keepalive f4 3/1 10 segment 0x1234 success 10fail 5

*Switch@1# set loopback atm keepalive f5 4/1 10/20

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set loopback atm keepalive-mode Setting of ATM loopback monitoring mode

show loopback atm keepalive config Display of ATM loopback monitoringconfiguration









20-20



Network Test

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show loopback atm keepalive information

Display of ATM loopback monitoring information

Shows ATM loopback monitoring information.

Input format show loopback atm keepalive information [P1]





* When the VCI value is omitted, the loopback monitoring information set for thespecified VPI value is shown.

* When the VPI value is omitted, the loopback monitoring information set for thespecified port (line) number is shown.

* When P1 is omitted, the loopback monitoring information of all ports is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example switch@1# show loopback atm keepalive information


=========================


ATM Loopback F4 Status Table

============================

Port VPI Section Direction Test Status Last Result Count(ok/test)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

5/1 0 segment outside fail timeout 0/1012/1 1 end inside --- --- 0/0

ATM Loopback F5 Status Table

============================

Port VPI/VCI Section Direction Test Status Last Result Count(ok/test)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

5/1 1/32 segment outside fail timeout 0/100

5/1 1/33 end inside success ok 10/10

Switch@1#

20-21



Network Test

Output items ATM Loopback Config Table:

keepalive-mode: Loopback monitoring mode

ATM Loopback F4 Status Table:


VPI: VPI valueSection: Test section

Direction: Test direction

Test Status: Monitoring status (success/fail)

Last Result: Last loopback test result (ok/timeout)

Count: Number of times loopback test succeeded/total number of loopbacktransmissions

ATM Loopback F5 Status Table:



Section: Test sectionDirection: Test direction

Test Status: Monitoring status (success/fail)

Last Result: Last loopback test result (ok/timeout)

Count: Number of times loopback test succeeded/total number of loopbacktransmissions

Relatedcommands


set loopback atm keepalive Setting of ATM loopback monitoring function

show loopback atm keepalive config Display of ATM loopback monitoring configuration

clear loopback atm keepalive Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring function

20-22



Network Test

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear loopback atm keepalive

Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring function

Clears a PVC for which ATM loopback monitoring is performed.


clear loopback atm keepalive P1 (f4) P2


clear loopback atm keepalive P1 (f5) P2

- Specifying port (line) number

clear loopback atm keepalive P1 (port (line) number)

Parameters P1: Level { f4 | f5 } or port (line) number

f4: F4 (VP) level

f5: F5 (VC) level


* All F4- and F5-level loopback monitoring configurations of the specified port (line)are cleared.


P2: PVC identifier { port (line) number [VPI value] | PVC name }




* When VPI value is omitted, all monitoring settings for the specified port at theP1-specified level are cleared.


P2: PVC identifier { port (line) number [VPI value/VCI value] | PVC name }




* When VPI value/VCI value is omitted, all monitoring settings for the specifiedport at the P1-specified level are cleared.

Default value None


Note The monitoring settings cleared during loopback monitoring are not reflected right afterexecution of the command. Reflection requires up to 5 minutes because loopbackmonitoring is executed in 5 minute periods.

Input examples *Switch@1# clear loopback atm keepalive f4 10/1 10

*Switch@1# clear loopback atm keepalive f5 10/1

*Switch@1# clear loopback atm keepalive 10/1

Output item

20-23



Network Test

Relatedcommands



show loopback atm keepalive config Display of ATM loopback monitoring

configurationshow loopback atm keepalive information Display of ATM loopback monitoring

information

20-24



Monitors

21 Monitors

21-1



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show counter port

Display of port counter

Shows various counter information for transmission and reception per port.

- Realtime showing

show counter port P1 (real) P2 (up to 24 port (line) numbers)

Input formats

- Detailed showing

show counter port P1 (detail) P2 (single port (line) number)

Parameters P1: Showing type { real | detail }

real: Realtime showing



* When detail is specified in P1, you can specify only one port.

* When real is specified in P1, you can specify multiple ports (up to 24).

Default value None

Usage condition This command cannot be used for ATMP/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155 line modules.

Notes If the specified port (line) is in line module duplex operation, counter information of the

greater number port is also shown.In realtime showing, you can simultaneously show up to 24 ports (lines). However,only 20 ports (lines) will be displayed in the case of specification that exceeds themaximum number of ports (lines).

Pressing [Ctrl]+[C] in realtime showing enables you to end port counter showing.

If the counter value exceeds either of 32 bits or 64 bits (*), the value will be returned tozero and then incremented from zero again.

* 32 bits = 4294967295, 64 bits = 18446744073709551615

The counter value may be unable to be collected during UGSW module systemswitching.

If discarding is caused by an FCS error or a frame size violation, even the output portmay increment the discard counter value.

If a frame is interrupted by a transfer block of the port isolate function, the input portmay increment the discard counter value.

When it receives a frame of large size (FE: frames of 8 kilobytes or more,GbE/GbE-MUX: frames of 16 kilobytes or more), the line module may shorten theframe size and increment the error counter value (e.g., RxJabbers).

Input examples *Switch@1# show counter port real 9/1,12/1

Port Counter Table

==================

Last All Time Clearing of Port Counter unknown hour

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Port Link Pkts(Rx) Pkts(Tx) | Port Link Pkts(Rx)

Pkts(Tx)===================================+=================================

21-2



Monitors

9/1 down 0 0 | 12/1 down 0 0

Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c]

*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# show counter port detail 1/1

Port Counter Table==================

Port : 1/1

Link Status : up

Last Clearing Time of Port Counter 0:00:01

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Item Counts | Item Counts

=================================+===================================

RxOctets : 0 | TxOctets : 0

RxPkts : 0 | TxPkts : 0

RxDropEvents : 0 |RxErrors : 0 | TxErrors : 0

RxUndersizePkts : 0 |

RxFragments : 0 |

Rx64octs : 0 |

Rx65to127octs : 0 |

Rx128to255octs : 0 |

Rx256to511octs : 0 |

Rx512to1023octs : 0 |

Rx1024to1518octs: 0 |

RxCRCErrors : 0 |

RxOversizePkts : 0 |

RxJabbers : 0 |

| TxCollisions : 0

RxUcastPkts : 0 | TxUcastPkts : 0

RxMcastPkts : 0 | TxMcastPkts : 0

RxBcastPkts : 0 | TxBcastPkts : 0

RxUnsupp : 0 | TxUnsupp : 0

RxDiscards : 0 | TxDiscards : 0

*Switch@1#

Output items TxOctets Last clearing time of port counter: Elapsed time of counter collection

(Realtime showing)

The elapsed time of counter collection for the entire device is shown in thehour:minute:second format.

When the elapsed time exceeds 24 hours, “over 24 hour” is shown.

If the port counter is cleared per port or the line module is reset or if the line module isinserted, “unknown hour” is shown.

Clearing all the port counters also clears the elapsed time of counter collection for thedevice at the same time.

21-3



Monitors

(Detailed showing)

The elapsed time of counter collection for the specified port is shown in thehour:minute:second format.

When the elapsed time exceeds 24 hours, “over 24 hour” is shown.

Clearing the port counter also clears the elapsed time of counter collection for the portat the same time.

RxOctets: Number of receiving octets

RxPkts: Number of receiving frames

RxDropEvents: Number of times discard event occurred

RxErrors: Number of frames where receiving error occurred

RxUndersizePkts: Number of received frames where the data length is less than 64octets

RxFragments: Number of received error frames where the data length is lessthan 64 octets

Rx64octs: Number of received frames where the data length is 64 octets

Rx65to127octs: Number of received frames where the data length is 65 to 127octets




Rx1024to1518octs: Number of received frames where the data length is 1024 to1518 octets

RxCRCErrors: Number of received alignment/FCS error frames

RxOversizePkts: Number of received frames where the data length is greater than

or equal to 1519 octets

RxJabbers: Number of received error frames where the data length is greaterthan or equal to 1519 octets

RxUcastPkts: Number of receiving unicast frames

RxMcastPkts: Number of receiving multicast frames

RxBcastPkts: Number of receiving broadcast frames

RxUnsupp: Number of received and discarded unsupported packages

RxDiscards: Number of frames discarded for reasons other than receivingerrors

TxOctets: Number of sent octets

TxPkts: Number of sent frames

TxErrors: Number of frames where sending error occurredTxCollisions: Number of collision frames at sending

TxUcastPkts: Number of sent unicast frames

TxMcastPkts: Number of sent multicast frames

TxBcastPkts: Number of sent broadcast frames

TxUnsupp: Number of sent and discarded unsupported frames

TxDiscards: Number of frames discarded for reasons other than sendingerrors

Relatedcommands

clear counter port Clearing of port counter

show counter discard Display of discard counter

21-4



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear counter port

Clearing of port counter

Clears various counter information for transmission and reception per port.

Input format clear counter port [P1]


* When P1 is omitted, counter information of all the ports is cleared.

Default value None

Usage condition This command cannot be used for ATM/TDMP/ATMP155/TDMP155 line modules.

Notes If P1 is omitted, execution is confirmed after this command is entered.

If APS is enabled for the specified port (line), counter information of the greater numberport is also cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# clear counter port 1/1

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

show counter port Display of port counter

show counter discard Display of discard counter

21-5



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show counter discard

Display of discard counter

Shows discard counter information per port.

Input format show counter discard P1


Default value None


If the specified port (line) is in line module duplex operation, counter information of thegreater number port is also shown.

If the active slot side increments “RxDisOutQoS Pkts” and L2SW Discard Counter itemsduring line module duplex operation, counter items for lines in the both systems will beincremented.

Notes

The counter value may be unable to be collected during UGSW module systemswitching.

If discarding is caused by an FCS error or a frame size violation, even the output portmay increment the discard counter value.

If a frame is interrupted by a transfer block of the port isolate function, the input port mayincrement the discard counter value.

GbE-MUX collects “RxDisOutQoS Pkts” and L2SW Discard Counter items per linemodule, so all the ports increment the same counter value without reference to link upand down.

*Switch@1# show counter discard 2/1Input exampleDiscard Counter Table

=====================

Port : 2/1

Link Status : down

Line Discard Counter Table

==========================

Item Pkts | Item Pkts

--------------------------+----------------------------

RxUnknownTPID : 0 | TxUnknownTPID 0

RxUnknownVID : 0 |

QoS Discard Counter Table

=========================


---------------------------+---------------------------

RxDisInQoSPkts : 0 |

RxDisOutQoSPkts : 0 | TxDisOutQoSPkts : 0

RxFilterPkts : 0 | TxFilterPkts : 0

21-6



Monitors

RxMACLimitPkts : 0 |

RxFairnessPkts : 0 |

L2SW Discard Counter Table

==========================


--------------------------+----------------------------RxDropPkts : 0 | TxDropPkts : 0

| TxQueue0DisPkts : 0






*Switch@1#


Link Status: Physical link status of port

up: Link up status

down: Link down status

RxUnknownTPID: Number of unsupported TPID receiving frames or number ofdiscarded receiving frames whose Ethernet types are 0x8100 onportbase Untag set port

RxUnknownVID: Number of received and discarded unsupported VID frames

TxUnknownTPID: Number of unsupported TPID sending frames or number ofdiscarded sending frames whose Ethernet types are 0x8100 onportbase Untag set port

RxDisInQoSPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the maximum bandwidthlimit function of the input port

RxDisOutQoSPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the output fairnesscontrol function

RxFilterPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the input filteringfunction

RxMACLimitPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the MAC addresslearning count limiting function

RxFairnessPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the input fairness controlfunction *Unsupported

TxDisOutQoSPkts: Number of sending frames discarded by the maximum bandwidthlimit function of the output port

TxFilterPkts: Number of sending frames discarded by the output filtering

functionRxDropPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded as invalid frames by L2SW

TxDropPkts: Number of frames discarded by L2SW before being enqueued forsending

TxQueue0DisPkts: Number of sending frames discarded by L2SW (without class)

TxQueue1DisPkts: Number of Class–D sending frames discarded by L2SW

TxQueue2DisPkts: Number of Class–C sending frames discarded by L2SW

TxQueue3DisPkts: Number of Class–B sending frames discarded by L2SW

TxQueue4DisPkts: Number of Class–A sending frames discarded by L2SW

TxQueue5DisPkts: Number of control frame sending frames from CPU discarded byL2SW

21-7



Monitors

Relatedcommands

show counter port Display of port counter

clear counter port Clearing of port counter

21-8



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set counter vlan entry

Registration of VLAN counter

Registers counter information collection conditions per VLAN.

Input format set counter vlan entry P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Counter collection cycle { short | long }

short: Short cycle

long: Long cycle


P3: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple VLAN IDs can be specified.)


Default value None


Notes If the specified port (line) is in line module duplex operation, VLAN counter collectionconditions for the greater number port are also registered.

Each of the maximum numbers of VLAN counter information collection conditions that

can be registered is as follows:- Maximum number of VLAN counter information collection conditions that can be

registered when the counter collection cycle is short: 16

- Maximum number of VLAN counter information collection conditions that can beregistered when the counter collection cycle is long: 256

- Maximum number of VLAN counter information collection conditions that can beregistered per slot: 64 *(For the GbE-MUX line module, the maximum number of VLAN counter informationcollection conditions that can be registered per slot is 128.)

- Maximum number of VLAN counter information collection conditions that can beregistered per port: 16 *

* This maximum number is the total of the maximum number of VLAN counter

information collection conditions that can be registered when the counter collectioncycle is short and that when the counter collection cycle is long. The settings of thesame port and VLAN when the counter collection cycle is short and those when thecounter collection cycle is long are counted as 1.

*Switch@1# set counter vlan entry short 1/8 4094Input example*Switch@1#

Output item

21-9



Monitors

Relatedcommands

show counter vlan value Display of VLAN counter

show counter vlan entry Display of VLAN counter registration information

clear counter vlan entry Clearing of registered VLAN counter

21-10



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show counter vlan entry

Display of VLAN counter registration information

Shows registered counter collection condition information per VLAN.

Input format show counter vlan entry P1 [P2 [P3] ]


short: Short cycle

long: Long cycle


* When P2 is omitted, registered counter collection condition information of all theports is shown.


VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (Multiple VLAN IDs can be specified.)


* When P3 is omitted, registered counter collection condition information of all theVLANs is shown.

Default value None


Notes The number of counter collection condition information registered per VLAN shown in“Entry Count” does not include information of the greater number port.

Input example *Switch@1# show counter vlan entry longVLAN Counter Entry (Long Cycle)

===============================

Entry Count : 3

Port VID Name

--------------------------------------------

2/1 100 VID-100

9/1 4094 VID-409412/1 4094 VID-4094

*Switch@1#

Output items Entry Count: Number of counter collection condition information registered in thespecified collection cycle


VID: VLAN ID

Name: VLAN name

21-11



Monitors

Relatedcommands


set counter vlan entry Registration of VLAN counter

clear counter vlan entry Clearing of VLAN counter registration

21-12



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear counter vlan entry

Clearing of VLAN counter registration

Clears registered counter information collection conditions per VLAN.

Input format clear counter vlan entry P1 P2 [P3]


short: Short cycle

long: Long cycle


P3: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }VLAN ID: 1 to 4094 (single specification)


* When P3 is omitted, the registered counter information collection conditions of allthe VLANs are cleared.

Default value None


Notes After this command is entered, execution is confirmed.

If the specified port (line) is in line module duplex operation, the VLAN counter collectionconditions of the greater number port are also cleared.

*Switch@1# clear counter vlan entry short 7/1 100

*Switch@1#Input example

Output item

Relatedcommands



21-13



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show counter vlan value

Display of VLAN counter

Shows various counter information for transmission and reception per VLAN.

- Short-cycle realtime showing

show counter vlan value P1 (short) P2 (real) P3 [P4]

- Short-cycle showing (detailed/realtime detailed)

show counter vlan value P1 (short) P2 (detail | real-detail) P3 P4 [P5]

Input formats

- Specifying long-cycle showing items

show counter vlan value P1 (long) P3 P4 [P5]


short: Short cycle

long: Long cycle

When short is specified in P1

P2: Showing type { real | detail | real-detail }



real-detail: Detailed realtime showing




* Only when real is specified in P2, multiple indexes can be specified (up to 14).

* Only when real is specified in P2, P4 can be omitted.If P4 is omitted, only the number of lines that can be displayed is shown inascending order of registered VLAN IDs.

P5: Display item specification { priority | class }

priority (0 to 7)

class { class-a | class-b | class-c | class-d }

* When P5 is omitted, the integrated value of all the priorities is shown.

Default value None


21-14



Monitors

Notes Using VLAN counter display requires that counter information collection conditions perVLAN be registered in advance.

If the specified port (line) number is in line module duplex operation when the countercollection cycle is short and the showing type is detail or when the counter collectioncycle is long, counter information of the greater number port is also shown.

If the specified port (line) is in line module duplex operation when the counter collection

cycle is short and the showing type is real time detail, information of the active port sidecounter is also shown.

For detailed showing, specifying priority in P5 enables VLAN counter information to beshown per priority.

For realtime showing or detailed realtime showing, pressing [Ctrl]+[C] enables you toend counter information showing.

If the counter value exceeds either of 32 bits or 64 bits (*), the value will be returned tozero and then incremented from zero again.

If the active slot side increments “RxDisOutQoS Octs” and “RxDisOutQoSPkts” counteritems during line module duplex operation, counter items for lines in the both systemswill be incremented.

VLAN counter values may be unable to be collected during UGSW module system

switching or VLAN settings change.

When VLAN tag swapping is set, the VLAN counter is incremented based on theswapping source VLAN ID.

The CoS priority mapping setup port shows post-mapping priority values.

The portbase VLAN setup port increments the VLAN counter when the priority value is0. (However, the CoS priority mapping setup port shows post-mapping priority values.)

If no priority is mapped to the specified class, class information and target counter itemsare shown by hyphens “---”.

There may be a case that some of counters cannot be displayed when the specificationexceeds the maximum display number of VIDs or when a slot in line module duplexoperation is specified. If there is any counter not displayed, a sentence will bedisplayed to indicate it.

Input examples *Switch@1# show counter vlan value short real 5/8 4094

VLAN Counter Table (Short Cycle)

================================

Port : 5/1

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

VID Pkts(Rx) Pkts(Tx)

================================================

4094 0 0


*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# show counter vlan value short real-detail 5/8 4094 0

VLAN Counter Table (Short Cycle)

================================

Port : 5/1

VID : 4094

Name : VID-4094

Kind : Priority.0

-----------------------------------------------------------------------


=================================+=====================================

RxOcts : 0 | TxOcts : 0

RxUcastOcts : 0 | TxUcastOcts : 0RxMcastOcts : 0 | TxMcastOcts : 0

21-15



Monitors

RxBcastOcts : 0 | TxBcastOcts : 0

RxDisInQoSOcts : 0 |

RxDisOutQoSOcts : 0 | TxDisOutQoSOcts : 0

RxFilterOcts : 0 | TxFilterOcts : 0

RxMACLimitOcts : 0 |

RxPkts : 0 | TxPkts : 0

RxUcastPkts : 0 | TxUcastPkts : 0RxMcastPkts : 0 | TxMcastPkts : 0

RxBcastPkts : 0 | TxBcastPkts : 0


RxDisOutQoSPkts : 0 | TxDisOutQoSPkts : 0

RxFilterPkts : 0 | TxFilterPkts : 0




*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# show counter vlan value long 2/1 100 class-a

VLAN Counter Table (Long Cycle)

===============================

Port : 2/1

VID : 100

Name : VID-100

Kind : Class-A

Class Information

=================

In-Maximum In-Fairness Out-Fairness Out-Maximum

Module (Priority) (Priority) (Priority) (Priority)-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Line : 6,7 6,7 ---

Switch : 6,7

-----------------------------------------------------------------------


=================================+=====================================

RxOcts : 0 | TxOcts : ---

RxUcastOcts : 0 | TxUcastOcts : ---

RxMcastOcts : 0 | TxMcastOcts : ---

RxBcastOcts : 0 | TxBcastOcts : ---

RxDisInQoSOcts : 0 |

RxDisOutQoSOcts : 0 | TxDisOutQoSOcts : ---

RxFilterOcts : 0 | TxFilterOcts : ---

RxMACLimitOcts : 0 |

RxPkts : 0 | TxPkts : ---

RxUcastPkts : 0 | TxUcastPkts : ---

RxMcastPkts : 0 | TxMcastPkts : ---

RxBcastPkts : 0 | TxBcastPkts : ---


RxDisOutQoSPkts : 0 | TxDisOutQoSPkts : ---

RxFilterPkts : 0 | TxFilterPkts : ---



*Switch@1#

21-16



Monitors


VID: VLAN ID

Name: VLAN name

[Realtime sowing]

Pkts(Rx): Number of receiving frames

Pkts(Tx): Number of sending frames

[Detailed showing]

Kind: Priority value or class to be shown

RxOcts: Number of receiving octets *1

RxUcastOcts: Number of receiving unicast octets *1

RxMcastOcts: Number of receiving multicast octets *1

RxBcastOcts: Number of receiving broadcast octets *1

RxDisInQoSOcts: Number of receiving octets discarded by the maximum

bandwidth limit function of the input port *1RxDisOutQoSOcts: Number of receiving octets discarded by the output fairness

control function *4

RxFilterOcts: Number of receiving octets discarded by the input filteringfunction *1

RxMACLimitOcts: Number of receiving octets discarded by the MAC addresslearning count limiting function *1

RxPkts: Number of receiving frames *1

RxUcastPkts: Number of receiving unicast frames *1

RxMcastPkts: Number of receiving multicast frames *1

RxBcastPkts: Number of receiving broadcast frames *1

RxDisInQoSPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth

limit function of the input port *1RxDisOutQoSPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the output fairness

control function *4

RxFilterPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the input filteringfunction *1

RxMACLimitPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the MAC addresslearning count limiting function *1

RxFairnessPkts: Number of receiving frames discarded by the input fairnesscontrol function *Unsupported *2

TxOcts: Number of sending octets *3

TxUcastOcts: Number of sending unicast octets *3

TxMcastOcts: Number of sending multicast octets *3

TxBcastOcts: Number of sending broadcast octets *3

TxDisOutQoSOcts: Number of sending octets discarded by the maximumbandwidth limit of the output port *3

TxFilterOcts: Number of sending octets discarded by the output filteringfunction *3

TxPkts: Number of sending frames *3

TxUcastPkts: Number of sending unicast frames *3

TxMcastPkts: Number of sending multicast frames *3

TxBcastPkts: Number of sending broadcast frames *3

TxDisOutQoSPkts: Number of sending frames discarded by the maximumbandwidth limit function of the output port *3

TxFilterPkts: Number of sending frames discarded by the output filteringfunction *3

21-17



Monitors

[Class showing]

Line(In-Maximum): Priority mapping in the maximum bandwidth limit function of theline module input port(This item is shown for the counter items indicated by *1above.)

Line(In-Fairness): Priority mapping in the input fairness control function of the line

module(This item is shown for the counter items indicated by *2above.) * Unsupported

Line(Out-Maximum): Priority mapping in the maximum bandwidth limit function of theline module output port(This item is shown for the counter items indicated by *3above.)

Switch(Out-Fairness): Priority mapping in the output fairness control function ofSwitch(This item is shown for the counter items indicated by *4above.)

Relatedcommands

clear counter vlan value Clearing of VLAN counter


show counter vlan entry Show VLAN counter registration information

21-18



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear counter vlan value

Clearing of VLAN counter

Clears various counter information for transmission and reception per VLAN.

Input format clear counter vlan value P1 [ P2 [P3] ]


short: Short cycle

long: Long cycle


* When P2 is omitted, counter information of all the ports is cleared.P3: VLAN identifier { VLAN ID | VLAN name }



* When P3 is omitted, counter information of all the VLANs is cleared.

Default value None


Notes After this command has been entered, execution is confirmed.

If APS is enabled for the specified port (line), counter information of the greater numberport is also cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# clear counter vlan value short 7/1

Would you like to clear the counter? :(Y/N): y

*Switch@1#

Output item

Related

commands



21-19



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set counter pvc entry

Registration of PVC counter

Registers a PVC counter.

Input format set counter pvc entry P1



- VPI value/VCI value (Only multiple VCI values can be specified.)


Default value None

Usage condition This command can be used only for ATM155/ATMP/ATMP155 line modules.

You can use this function only for registered PVCs.

To specify a port set for APS operation, use the smaller slot number.

(The greater slot number cannot be specified.)

Note Clearing a PVC also clears all the corresponding registered PVC counters.

Input example *Switch@1# set counter pvc entry 1/1 1/32

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

show counter pvc entry Display of PVC counter registration information

clear counter pvc entry Clearing of PVC counter registration

21-20



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show counter pvc entry

Display of PVC counter registration information

Shows PVC counter registration information.

Input format show counter pvc entry [P1]




- Port (line) number (single specification)- VPI value/VCI value (Only multiple VCI values can be specified.)

- VPI value (Multiple VPI values can be specified)


Default value None




Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show counter pvc entry

PVC Counter Entry

=================

Entry Count : 2

Port VPI/VCI Name

-------------------------------------------------

5/1 255/100 abc0123456789

10/1 255/123 abc9876543

*Switch@1#

Output items Entry Count: Number of registered PVC counters


VPI/VCI: VPI/VCI values

Name: PVC name

Relatedcommands

set counter pvc entry Registration of PVC counter

clear counter pvc entry Clearing of PVC counter registration

21-21



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear counter pvc entry

Clearing of PVC counter registration

Clears a registered PVC counter.

Input format clear counter pvc entry P1





Default value None


To specify VPI value/VCI value or PVC name, you can use registered PVC countersonly.



Notes If only port (line) number is specified or VPI value is specified, execution is confirmedafter this command is entered.

Also, all the PVC counters subordinated to the specified one will be cleared.

When the PVC is cleared, PVC counter registration is automatically cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# clear counter pvc entry 10/1 255/123

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

set counter pvc entry Registration of PVC countershow counter pvc entry Display of PVC counter registration information

21-22



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show counter pvc value

Display of byte/frame counter information per PVC

Shows byte/frame counter information per PVC.

- Showing type (- Realtime showing - Realtime showing on APS active side)

show counter pvc value P1 (real | act-real) P2

Input formats

- Showing type (-Detailed showing - Detailed showing on APS active side)

show counter pvc value P1 (detail |act-detail) P2

Parameters P1: Showing type { real | detail | act-real | act-detail }



act-real: Realtime showing on APS active side

act-detail: Detailed showing on APS active side

When real or act-real is specified in P1

P2: PVC identifier { port (line) number VPI value/VCI value | port (line) numberVPI value | PVC name }





* When act-real is specified in P1, you can only specify 1/1, 2/1, 5/1, 6/1, 9/1,

or 10/1 for the port (line) number.

When detail or act-detail is specified in P2





* When act-detail is specified in P1, you can only specify 1/1, 2/1, 5/1, 6/1, 9/1,or 10/1 for the port (line) number.

Default value None

Usage condition This command can be used only for ATM155 line modules.



21-23



Monitors

Notes Using display of byte/frame counter information per PVC requires that the PVC hasbeen registered in advance.

If the counter value exceeds the counter bit width, it is cleared to zero and thenincremented.

Counter values may be unable to be collected during system switching of SWITCH ortarget PVC settings change.

When real or act-real is specified, up to 14 indexes will be displayed.

Display counters for act-real and act-detail collects count values of APS active side bythe update timing. If APS function is disabled at any update timing, then they collectthe counter value of the smaller number slot.

Input examples *Switch@1# show counter pvc value real 10/1 30/100-101

PVC Counter Table

=================

Port : 10/1

VPI/VCI Pkts(Rx) Pkts(Tx) Entry

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

30/100 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 registered

30/101 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 unregistered


*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# show counter pvc value detail 10/1 30/100

PVC Counter Table

=================

Port : 10/1

VPI/VCI : 30/100

Name : abc0123456

Entry : registered


-----------------------------------------------------+-----------------

RxOcts : 18446744073709551615 | TxOcts : 18446744073709551615

RxPkts : 123456789012345678 | TxPkts : 123456789012345678

RxErrors : 0 |

*Switch@1#

21-24



Monitors

Output items [Realtime showing]



Pkts(Rx): Number of receiving frames

Pkts(Tx): Number of sending framesEntry:

registered: PVC counter registered

unregistered: PVC counter not registered

[Detailed showing]



Name: PVC name

Entry:

registered: PVC counter registeredunregistered: PVC counter not registered

RxOcts: Number of receiving octets

RxPkts: Number of receiving frames

RxErrors: Number discarded receiving frames

TxOcts: Number of sending octets

TxPkts: Number of sending frames

Relatedcommands



clear counter pvc value Clearing of byte/frame counter information per PVC

21-25



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear counter pvc value

Clearing of byte/frame counter information per PVC

Clears byte/frame counter information per PVC.

Input format clear counter pvc value P1





Default value None

Usageconditions

This command can be used only for ATM155/ATMP/ATMP155 line modules.

However, this command has no effect on ATMP/ATMP155 lines because there is noinformation to be displayed for these lines.





Also, values of all the byte/frame counter per PVC subordinated to the specified one willbe cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# clear counter pvc value 1/1 0/32

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show counter pvc value Display of byte/frame counter information per PVC

21-26



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show counter cell

Display of cell counter information

Shows various cell counter information per port or per IMA group.

Input format show counter cell P1 P2





* You can specify multiple port (line) numbers when real is specified in P1.

Default value None

Usageconditions




To specify a port set for an IMA group, use the root port line number.

(If a value other than the root port line number is specified, an error occurs.)

Notes If the counter value exceeds the counter bit width, it is cleared to zero and then

incremented.Counter values may be unable to be collected during system switching of SWITCH ortarget PVC settings change.

When real is specified, up to 14 indexes will be displayed.

In the case of OAM cell counters, only counters for registered PVCs are collected.

If a root port of an IMA group is specified, counter information will be displayed per IMAgroup. To display counter information for each port in an IMA group separately, usethe “show counter cell ima-port” command.

21-27



Monitors

Input examples *Switch@1# show counter cell real 10/1

Cell Counter Table

==================

Port Cells(Rx) Cells(Tx) Entry

-----------------------------------------------------------------

10/1 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 ---


*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# show counter cell detail 10/1

Cell Counter Table

==================

Port : 10/1


---------------------------------------+-------------------------------

RxCells : 1234567890 | TxCells : 1234567890RxErrors : 1 | TxErrors : 0

RxF4SegAIS : 0 | TxF4SegAIS : 0

RxF4SegRDI : 0 | TxF4SegRDI : 0

RxF4SegLoopback : 0 | TxF4SegLoopback : 0

RxF4SegOthers : 0 | TxF4SegOthers : 0

RxF4EndAIS : 0 | TxF4EndAIS : 0

RxF4EndRDI : 0 | TxF4EndRDI : 0

RxF4EndLoopback : 0 | TxF4EndLoopback : 0

RxF4EndOthers : 0 | TxF4EndOthers : 0



RxF5SegLoopback : 0 | TxF5SegLoopback : 0RxF5SegOthers : 0 | TxF5SegOthers : 0





*Switch@1#

21-28



Monitors



Cells(Rx): Number of receiving cells

Cells(Tx): Number of sending cells

Entry: Fixed to “---”

[Detailed showing]


RxCells: Number of receiving cells

RxErrors: Number of discarded receiving cells

RxF4SegAIS: VP-AIS cell of receiving segment

RxF4SegRDI: VP-RDI cell of receiving segment

RxF4SegLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F4-level segment

RxF4SegOthers: Other receiving cells of F4-level segment

RxF4EndAIS: VP-AIS cell of receiving endRxF4EndRDI: VP-RDI cell of receiving end

RxF4EndLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F4-level end

RxF4EndOthers: Other receiving cells of F4-level end

RxF5SegAIS: VC-AIS cell of receiving segment

RxF5SegRDI: VC-RDI cell of receiving segment



RxF5EndAIS: VC-AIS cell of receiving end

RxF5EndRDI: VC-RDI cell of receiving end


RxF5EndOthers: Other receiving cells of F5-level endTxCells: Number of sending cells

TxErrors: Number of discarded sending cells

TxF4SegAIS: VP-AIS cell of sending segment

TxF4SegRDI: VP-RDI cell of sending segment

TxF4SegLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F4-level segment

TxF4SegOthers: Other sending cell of F4-level segment

TxF4EndAIS: VP-AIS cell of sending end

TxF4EndRDI: VP-RDI cell of sending end

TxF4EndLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F4-level end

TxF4EndOthers: Other sending cell of F4-level end

TxF5SegAIS: VC-AIS cell of sending segmentTxF5SegRDI: VC-RDI cell of sending segment



TxF5EndAIS: VC-AIS cell of sending end

TxF5EndRDI: VC-RDI cell of sending end



21-29



Monitors

Relatedcommands



show counter cell f4 Display of cell counter information per F4


show counter cell ima-port Display of cell counter information per IMA port

clear counter cell Clearing of cell counter informationset ima group Setting of IMA group


21-30



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show counter cell f4

Display of cell counter information per F4

Shows various cell counter information per F4.

Input format show counter cell f4 P1 P2





- Port (line) number (single specification)- VPI value (single specification)

- PVC name: 1 to 32 characters (VP connection only)

* You can specify multiple VPI values when real is specified in P1.

Default value None

Usageconditions






Notes Using cell counter display requires that a PVC be registered in advance.




In the case of OAM cell counters, only counters for registered PVCs are collected.

Values of F5 OAM cell counters for VP connection are fixed to zeros.

Input examples *Switch@1# show counter cell f4 real 10/1 255F4-Cell Counter Table

=====================

Port : 10/1

VPI Cells(Rx) Cells(Tx) Entry

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

255 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 unregistered


*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# show counter cell f4 detail 10/1 255

21-31



Monitors

F4-Cell Counter Table

=====================

Port : 10/1

VPI : 255

Entry : unregistered

Item Counts | Item Counts----------------------------------------------------------+------------

RxCells : 1234567890 | TxCells : 1234567890

RxErrors : 0 | TxErrors : 0









RxF5SegAIS : 0 | TxF5SegAIS : 0RxF5SegRDI : 0 | TxF5SegRDI : 0







*Switch@1#



VPI: VPI value



Entry:



[Detailed showing]

Port: Port (line) numberVPI: VPI value

Entry:






RxF4SegRDI: VP-RDI cell of receiving segment



RxF4EndAIS: VP-AIS cell of receiving endRxF4EndRDI: VP-RDI cell of receiving end

21-32



Monitors



RxF5SegAIS: VC-AIS cell of receiving segment

RxF5SegRDI: VC-RDI cell of receiving segment


RxF5SegOthers: Other receiving cells of F5-level segmentRxF5EndAIS: VC-AIS cell of receiving end




TxCells: Number of sending cells



TxF4SegRDI: VP-RDI cell of sending segment



TxF4EndAIS: VP-AIS cell of sending endTxF4EndRDI: VP-RDI cell of sending end



TxF5SegAIS: VC-AIS cell of sending segment

TxF5SegRDI: VC-RDI cell of sending segment



TxF5EndAIS: VC-AIS cell of sending end

TxF5EndRDI: VC-RDI cell of sending end



Relatedcommands



show counter cell Display of cell counter information



clear counter cell Clearing of cell counter information



21-33



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show counter cell f5

Display of cell counter information per F5

Shows various cell counter information per F5.

Input format show counter cell f5 P1 P2





- Port (line) number (single specification)- VPI value/VCI value (single specification)

- PVC name: 1 to 32 characters (VC connection only)

* You can specify multiple values for VCI value of VPI value/VCI value when real isspecified in P1.

* You can specify VPI value in P2 only when real or act-real is specified in P1.

Default value None

Usageconditions



(The greater slot number cannot be specified.)To specify a port set for an IMA group, use the root port line number.


Notes Using display of byte/frame counter information per PVC requires that a PVC beregistered in advance.




In the case of OAM cell counters, only counters for registered PVCs are collected.Values of F4 OAM cell counters for VP connection are fixed to zeros.

Input examples *Switch@1# show counter cell f5 real 10/1 255/100


=====================

Port : 10/1

VPI/VCI Cells(Rx) Cells(Tx) Entry

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

255/100 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 registered


21-34



Monitors

*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# show counter cell f5 detail 10/1 255/100


=====================

Port : 10/1

VPI/VCI : 255/100Entry : registered


----------------------------------------------------------+------------

RxCells : 1234567890 | TxCells : 1234567890







RxF4EndRDI : 0 | TxF4EndRDI : 0RxF4EndLoopback : 0 | TxF4EndLoopback : 0










*Switch@1#






Entry:



[Detailed showing]



Entry:






RxF4SegRDI: VP-RDI cell of receiving segmentRxF4SegLoopback: Loopback cell of receiving F4-level segment

21-35



Monitors


RxF4EndAIS: VP-AIS cell of receiving end

RxF4EndRDI: VP-RDI cell of receiving end



RxF5SegAIS: VC-AIS cell of receiving segmentRxF5SegRDI: VC-RDI cell of receiving segment



RxF5EndAIS: VC-AIS cell of receiving end







TxF4SegRDI: VP-RDI cell of sending segmentTxF4SegLoopback: Loopback cell of sending F4-level segment


TxF4EndAIS: VP-AIS cell of sending end

TxF4EndRDI: VP-RDI cell of sending end



TxF5SegAIS: VC-AIS cell of sending segment

TxF5SegRDI: VC-RDI cell of sending segment



TxF5EndAIS: VC-AIS cell of sending endTxF5EndRDI: VC-RDI cell of sending end



Relatedcommands







set ima group Setting of IMA groupclear ima group Clearing of IMA group

21-36



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show counter cell ima-port

Display of cell counter information per IMA port

Shows various cell counter information per port in an IMA group.

Input format show counter cell ima-port P1 P2





* You can specify multiple port (line) numbers when real is specified in P1.

Default value None

Usageconditions

This command can be used only for ATMP line modules.

Only ports set for an IMA group can be displayed.

Notes If the counter value exceeds the counter bit width, it is cleared to zero and thenincremented.



21-37



Monitors

Input examples *Switch@1# show counter cell ima-port real 10/1-3

Cell Counter Table

==================

Port : 10/1-3

Port Cells(Rx) Cells(Tx) Entry

-----------------------------------------------------------------

10/1 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 ---

10/2 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 ---

10/3 18446744073709551615 18446744073709551615 ---


*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# show counter cell ima-port detail 10/2

Cell Counter Table

==================

Port : 10/2


---------------------------------------+-------------------------------

RxCells : 18446744073709551615 | TxCells : 18446744073709551615


*Switch@1#





Entry: Fixed to “---”

[Detailed showing]






Relatedcommands set counter pvc entry Registration of PVC countershow counter pvc entry Display of PVC counter registration information







21-38



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear counter cell

Clearing of cell counter information

Clears various cell counter information.

Input format clear counter cell P1





Default value None

Usageconditions








Also, all the cell counters included will be cleared.

Input example *Switch@1# clear counter cell 1/1 0/32

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands






21-39



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set counter ether-oam entry

Registration of EtherOAM counter

Registers collection conditions for an EtherOAM counter.

Input formats - Specifying specific EtherOAM frame

set counter ether-oam entry P1 P2 (VLAN ID | untag) P3 P4

- Specifying all EtherOAM frames

set counter ether-oam entry P1 P2 (all)


P2: Specifying VLAN ID, Untag { untag }, or all EtherOAM frames { all }


untag: Specifying Untag

all: Specifying all EtherOAM frames

When VLAN ID or untag is specified in P2


P4: EtherOAM type (0 to 255)

Default value None

Usage condition Only one counter can be registered for one port (line).

Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# set counter ether-oam entry 1/1 1 0 1

*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# set counter ether-oam entry 12/1 all

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands

show counter ether-oam entry Display of EtherOAM counter registration informationclear counter ether-oam entry Clearing of EtherOAM counter registration

show counter ether-oam value Display of EtherOAM counter

21-40



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show counter ether-oam entry

Display of EtherOAM counter registration information

Shows registered information of EtherOAM counter collection conditions.

Input format show counter ether-oam entry [P1]


* When P1 is omitted, the frame counter settings of all ports (lines) to which counter isset are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# show counter ether-oam entry

Ether OAM Counter Entry

=======================

Port VLAN-ID MEG Level OP-Code

---------------------------------

1/1 1 0 1

12/1 all all all*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# show counter ether-oam entry 1/1


=======================

Port VLAN-ID MEG Level OP-Code

---------------------------------

1/1 1 0 1

*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# show counter ether-oam entry 12/1


=======================

Port VLAN-ID MEG Level OP-Code---------------------------------

12/1 all all all

*Switch@1#


VLAN-ID: VLAN ID

”untag” is displayed for untagMEP

* "all" is displayed when the parameter is omitted.


* "all" is displayed when the parameter is omitted.

OP-Code: EtherOAM frame type value* "all" is displayed when the parameter is omitted.

21-41



Monitors

Relatedcommands

set counter ether-oam entry Registration of EtherOAM counter

clear counter ether-oam entry Clearing of EtherOAM counter registration


21-42



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear counter ether-oam entry

Clearing of EtherOAM counter registration

Clears registered information of EtherOAM counter collection conditions.

Input format clear counter ether-oam entry [P1]


* When P1 is omitted, the frame counter settings of all ports (lines) to which counter isset are cleared.

Default value None


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# clear counter ether-oam entry 1/1

*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# clear counter ether-oam entry

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands


show counter ether-oam entry Display of EtherOAM counter registration information


21-43



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show counter ether-oam value

Display of EtherOAM counter

Shows the collection information of EtherOAM counter.

Input format show counter ether-oam value [P1]


* When P1 is omitted, the frame counter values of all ports (lines) to which counter isset are shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input examples *Switch@1# show counter ether-oam value

Ether OAM Frame Count

=====================

Port RxPkts TxPkts

----------------------------

1/1 1121 1021

12/1 1021 1121

*Switch@1#

*Switch@1# show counter ether-oam value 1/1

Ether OAM Frame Count

=====================

Port RxPkts TxPkts

----------------------------

1/1 121 102

*Switch@1#


RxPkts: Number of received frames

TxPkts: Number of transmitted frames

Relatedcommands


show counter ether-oam entry Display of EtherOAM counter registration information

clear counter ether-oam entry Clearing of EtherOAM counter registration

21-44



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

mirror port

Setting of mirroring start or stop

Sets mirroring start or stop.

- Stopping mirroring

mirror port P1 (stop)

- Starting mirroring (with only input-side ports (lines) specified for mirroringtarget)

mirror port P1 (start) P2 P3

- Starting mirroring (with only output-side ports (lines) specified for mirroring

target)mirror port P1 (start) P2 P4

Input formats

- Starting mirroring (with input- and output-side ports (lines) specified formirroring target)

mirror port P1 (start) P2 P3 P4

mirror port P1 (start) P2 P4 P3

Parameters P1: Mirroring start or stop { start | stop }

start: Mirroring start

stop: Mirroring stop

P2: Mirroring output destination port (line) number (single specification)

P3: Mirroring target port (line) (input-side)

in-port port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)

P4: Mirroring target port (line) (output-side)

out-port port (line) number (Multiple values can be specified.)

Default value None


Notes In the following cases, you cannot set mirroring start:

- The mirroring output destination port is duplicated with the mirroring target port.

- VLAN is set in the port to be specified as the mirroring output destination.

- Link aggregation is set in the port to be specified as the mirroring output destination.

- In the mirroring setting for GbE-MUX line module, a line module other than the sameline module is specified.

- In the mirroring setting for GbE-MUX line module, multiple mirroring target port (line)input sides (in-port) are specified.

In the mirroring setting for GbE-MUX line module where mirroring target port (line)output-side (out-port) is specified, the protocol control frame can perform monitoringonly at the input-side port specified for mirroring target.

Input example *Switch@1# mirror port start 7/1 in-port 8/1

*Switch@1#

21-45



Monitors

Output item

Relatedcommand

show mirror port Display of mirroring settings

21-46



Monitors

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show mirror port

Display of mirroring settings

Shows mirroring settings.

Input format show mirror port

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show mirror port

Mirror Information

==================

Mirror To

----------

Port: 7/1

Mirror From--------------

In Port: 8/1

Out Port:

*Switch@1#

Output items Mirror To: Mirroring output destination port


Mirror From: Mirroring target port

In Port: Port (line) number specified on input side

Out Port: Port (line) number specified on output side

Relatedcommand

mirror port Setting of mirroring start or stop

21-47



Monitors

(Blank page)

21-48



Maintenance and Operation

22 Maintenance and

Operation

22-1




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Save Synchro-

nizeSBY execution

upload running-config

Uploading of running configuration to ftp server

Uploads running configuration to the ftp server.

Input format upload running-config P1 P2


P2: File name or path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxxas the IP address. (“xxx” is any number.) Also, you can set the network addresses192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 but this setting does not provide correctcommunication.

Notes Set an ftp user name and ftp password interactively.

Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphabets, numeric characters, andsymbols and signs “% & , / : = [ ] \ ^ _ { } ~ . –”.

You can use “/”, “:” and “\” only when specifying a path name.

You can use “.” only when specifying a file name.

Configuration information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed bythe “show running-config” command.

Input example *Switch@1# upload running-config 192.168.2.212 test.txt

FTP Login Name : cx2600

FTP Login Password :

Data Transferring.....................................

*Switch@1#

Output items FTP Login Name: User name used to log in to ftp server

FTP Login Password: User password used to log in to ftp server

FTP Information: ftp server error message (Only when a command error occurs)

Relatedcommands



download running-config Downloading of running configuration from ftp server

show running-config Display of running configuration

write memory Saving of setting information

22-2




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Save Synchro-

nizeSBY execution

upload startup-config

Uploading of startup configuration to ftp server

Uploads startup configuration to the ftp server.

Input format upload startup-config P1 P2



Default value None






Configuration information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed bythe “show startup-config” command.

Input example *Switch@1# upload startup-config 192.168.2.211 test2.txt




*Switch@1#




Relatedcommands



download startup-config Downloading of startup configuration from ftp server

show startup-config Display of startup configuration


clear startup-config Clearing of startup configuration

22-3




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Save Synchro-

nizeSBY execution

upload local-syslog

Uploading of system log to ftp server

Uploads the system log to the ftp server.

Input format upload local-syslog P1 P2



Default value None






Local syslog information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed bythe “show local syslog” command.

Input example *Switch@1# upload local-syslog 192.168.2.211 syslog.txt



Information is under collection.

Data Transferring........................

*Switch@1#




Relatedcommands



show syslog local Display of local syslog

clear syslog local Clearing of local log

22-4




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Save Synchro-

nizeSBY execution

upload all-information

Uploading of setting information to ftp server

Uploads setting information to the ftp server.

Input format upload all-information P1 P2



Default value None






Setting information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by the“show all” command.

Input example *Switch@1# upload all-information 192.168.2.211 allinfo.txt





*Switch@1#




Relatedcommands



show all Display of setting information

22-5




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Save Synchro-

nizeSBY execution

upload fault

Uploading of fault information to ftp server

Uploads fault information to the ftp server.

Input format upload fault P1 P2



Default value None



Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphabets, numeric characters, and

symbols and signs “% & , / : = [ ] \ ^ _ { } ~ . –”.



Fault information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by the“show fault present” and “show fault past” commands.

Input example *Switch@1# upload fault 192.168.2.211 fault.txt




Data Transferring...........................

*Switch@1#




Relatedcommands



show fault present Display of current fault and alarm information

show fault past Display of past fault information

22-6




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Save Synchro-

nizeSBY execution

download software

Downloading of software

Downloads software.

Input format download software P1 P2



Default value None



Set a file name or a path name + file name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and[control character]. (However, you can use only the characters that can be recognizedby the ftp server.)


Input example *Switch@1# download software 10.40.73.200cx2600_sw/release_lm/cx2600_220_so

Ft_c_010003.dlm



Data Transferring.................

Download Data Processing..........................

Writing Flash Memory............

*Switch@1#


FTP Login Password: User password used to log in to ftp serverFTP Information: ftp server error message (Only when a command error occurs)

Relatedcommands



22-7




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Save Synchro-

nizeSBY execution

download fpga switch

Downloading of FPGA of UGSW module

Downloads FPGA of a UGSW module.

Input format download fpga switch P1 P2



Default value None



To reflect the downloaded data, you must enter the “reset switch” command specifyingfpga-version-up parameter to reinitialize the switch module.

Input example *Switch@1# download fpga switch 192.168.1.30/data/cx2600_220_fpga_UGSWC_020102.dlm

Data Transferring..

Writing Flash Memory......................

Data Transferring..


Data Transferring..


Data Transferring..


Data Transferring..


Data Transferring..


Data Transferring..


Data Transferring..


*Switch@1#




Related

commands



reset switch Resetting of UGSW module

22-8




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

Save SBY execution

download fpga line

Downloading of FPGA of line module

Downloads FPGA of a line module.

Input format download fpga line P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Line module type { fe | gbe | fe-pv | gbe-pv | gmx | atm | atmp | tdmp | gbe-pv2 |atmp155 | tdmp155 }

fe: Line module FE8/FX8

gbe: Line module GbE

fe-pv: Line module FE8-PV/FX8-PVgbe-pv: Line module Gbe-PV

gmx: Line module GM8-T/GM8-X

atm: Line module ATM155

atmp: Line module ATMP

tdmp: Line module TDMP

gbe-pv2: Line module Gbe-PV2

atmp155: Line module ATMP155

tdmp155: Line module TDMP155

P2: IP address


Default value None


To reflect the downloaded data, you must enter the “reset line” command to reinitializethe line module.

Notes

Set an ftp user name and FTP password interactively.



22-9




Input example *Switch@1# download fpga line fe 192.168.1.30/data/cx2600_220_fpga_FE_FX_020102.dlm

Data Transferring..

Download Data Processing.................................................

Line# 1 : completed

Line# 2 : ---Line# 3 : completed

Line# 4 : ---

Line# 5 : ---

Line# 6 : ---

Line# 7 : completed

Line# 8 : ---

Line# 9 : ---

Line#10 : ---

Line#11 : ---

Line#12 : ---

*Switch@1#




Relatedcommands




22-10




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

download running-config

Downloading of running configuration from ftp server

Downloads running configuration from the ftp server.

Input format download running-config P1 P2



Default value None

You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxxas the IP address. (“xxx” is any number.) Also, you can set the network addresses192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 but this setting does not provide correctcommunication.

Usage conditions

Notes No line module can be initialized during execution of this command. For this reason,the line modules implemented during execution of this command are incorporated withOUS state.

Also if a download file contains a command that involves line module initialization (e.g.,set line type), the specified line module may be incorporated with OUS state.

After this command terminates, use the “reset line” command to reinitialize the line

module incorporated with OUS state.

ftp transfer may be performed several times according to the configuration size to bedownloaded.

Set an ftp user name and ftp password interactively.



Input example *Switch@1# download running-config 192.168.2.212 soft_LM/test.txt


FTP Login Password :Data Transferring....

Data setting........

*Switch@1#




22-11




Relatedcommands



upload running-config Uploading of running configuration to ftp server




22-12




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Save Synchro-

nizeSBY execution

download startup-config

Downloading of startup configuration from ftp server

Downloads startup configuration from the ftp server.

Input format download startup-config P1 P2



Default value None


Notes ftp transfer may be performed several times according to the configuration size to bedownloaded.

Set an ftp user name and ftp password interactively.



Input example *Switch@1# download startup-config 192.168.2.212 soft_LM/test.txt



Data Transferring....

Data setting........

Writing Flash Memory........

*Switch@1#


FTP Login Password: User password used to log in to ftp serverFTP Information: ftp server error message (Only when a command error occurs)

Relatedcommands



upload startup-config Uploading of startup configuration to ftp server




22-13




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show running-config

Display of running configuration

Shows the current running configuration.

Input format show running-config [P1]

Parameter P1: Scroll control { step | non-step }

step: Enables scroll control

non-step: Disables scroll control (display to the end)

* When P1 is omitted, scroll follows scroll control settings.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show running-config non-step

!System : NEC CX2600/220

!Current Soft Ver.07.05.01

!Present Time : 12/25/2007 21:46:34

set terminal scroll system off

set terminal logout 0

!

set fault auto-reboot disable

!

!

!

!

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands




22-14




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show startup-config

Display of startup configuration

Shows the saved startup configuration.

Input format show startup-config [P1]





Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show startup-config non-step

!System : NEC CX2600/220

!Written Soft Ver.07.05.01

!Written Time : 12/25/2007 21:10:41

set terminal scroll system off

set terminal logout 0

!

set fault auto-reboot disable

!

!

!

!

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands





22-15




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show config difference

Display of configuration difference

Shows whether there is a difference between startup configuration and running configuration.

Input format show config difference

Parameter None

Default value None


Note Since it takes times to show the result after command input, “…” (dots) are shown.

Input example Switch@1# show config difference

Configuration Difference Information

===================================

Module Configuration

-----------------------------------

Switch#1 : same

Switch#2 : different

Switch@1#


Config: Difference between startup configuration and running configuration

same: There is no difference between startup configuration and running configuration

difference: There is a difference between startup configuration and runningconfiguration

Relatedcommands



write memory Saving of setting informationclear startup-config Clearing of startup configuration

22-16




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set message transmit

Setting of trap transmission selection

Sets trap transmission selection.

- Specifying private trap

set message transmit [P1] [P2 (private-trap) [P3] ] P4

- Specifying trap-ID

set message transmit [P1] [P2 (trap-id) [P3] ] P4

- Specifying line message

set message transmit [P1] [P2 (line) [P3] ] P4

- Specifying port message or link change

set message transmit [P1] [P2 (port | link) [P3] ] P4

- Specifying fault message

set message transmit [P1] [P2 (fault) [P3] ] P4

- Specifying telnet message

set message transmit [P1] [P2 (telnet) [P3] ] P4

- Specifying maintenance network message

set message transmit [P1] [P2 (maintenance-network) [P3] ] P4

- Specifying external memory

set message transmit [P1] [P2 (external-memory) [P3] ] P4

- Specifying ATM OAM alarm

set message transmit [P1] [P2 (atm-oam) [P3] ] P4

- Specifying EtherOAM alarm

set message transmit [P1] [P2 (ether-oam) [P3] ] P4

Input formats

- Controlling STM-1 line

set message transmit [P1] [P2 (stm) [P3] ] P4

22-17




- Specifying group below

MC information

SFP change information

NTP access error

Scheduled configuration upload

Spanning treeMAC learning

Link aggregation

ATM loopback event

APS event

ATM loop occurrence fault

EtherPS event

T1E1OAM information

TDMoP information

IMA group

EtherRing event

Commandset message transmit [P1] [P2] P4

Parameters P1: Message type { monitor | trap | remote-log | local-log }

monitor: Autonomous message

trap: Trap message

remote-log: Remote log message

local-log: Local log message

* When P1 is omitted, all message types are set.

P2: Message group

private-trap: Private trap

trap-id: Trap-ID

line: Line messageport: Port message

link: Link change

fault: Fault message

mc: MC information

sfp: SFP change information

ntp: NTP access error

telnet: telnet message

maintenance-network: Maintenance network message

backup: Scheduled configuration upload

external-memory: External memory

spantree: Spanning treefdb: MAC learning

aggregation: Link aggregation

atm-oam: ATM OAM alarm

loopback-atm: ATM loopback event

aps: APS event

atm-loop: ATM loop occurrence fault

ether-oam: EtherOAM alarm

ether-ps: EtherPS event

t1e1: T1E1OAM information

tdmop: TDMoP information

ima: IMA groupstm: STM-1 line control

22-18




ether-ring: EtherRing event

command: Command

* When P2 is omitted, all the message groups are set.

When private-trap is specified in P2

P3: Private trap number (1 to 999)

When trap-id is specified in P2

P3: Trap-ID (1 to 999)

When line is specified in P2

P3: Line module number (1 to 12) (single specification)



When link is specified in P2


When fault is specified in P2

P3: Fault type { critical | major | minor | warning }critical: Critical error

major: Major error

minor: Minor error

warning: Warning error

When telnet is specified in P2

P3: telnet connection state { connect | fail }

connect: telnet login, logout

fail: telnet error

When maintenance-network is specified in P2

P3: Maintenance network load { out-band | in-band }

out-band: Maintenance network load (OUTBAND)

in-band: Maintenance network load (INBAND)

When external-memory is specified in P2

P3: External memory { status | fault }

status: External memory status change

fault: External memory fault

When atm-oam is specified in P2

P3: ATM OAM alarm { detect-f1f3 | detect-f4f5 | detect-minor }

detect-f1f3: F1/F2/F3 alarm detection

detect-f4f5: F4/F5 alarm detection

detect-minor: MN alarm detection When ether-oam is specified in P2

P3: EtherOAM alarm { unexpect-level | mismerge | unexpect-mep |unexpect-period | loc | rdi }

unexpect-level: Unexpect MEG Level

mismerge: Mismerge

unexpect-mep: Unexpect MEP

unexpect-period: Unexpect Period

loc: LOC

rdi: RDI

22-19




When stm is specified in P2

P3: STM-1 line control { detect-rs | detect-ms | detect-hp | detect-lp | detect-pdh }

detect-rs: RS alarm detection

detect-ms: MS alarm detection

detect-hp: High-order path alarm detection

detect-lp: Low-order path alarm detectiondetect-pdh: PDH alarm detection

* When P3 is omitted, all the members belonging to the group specified in P2 are set.

P4: Trap transmission selection setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables trap transmission selection

disable: Disables trap transmission selection



Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set message transmit trap telnet disable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show message transmit config Display of trap transmission selection setting status

22-20




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show message transmit config

Display of trap transmission selection setting status

Shows the trap transmission selection setting status.

Input format show message transmit config [P1]

Parameter P1: Message group { private-trap | trap-id | line | port | link | fault | mc | sfp | ntp | telnet |maintenance-network | backup | external-memory | spantree | fdb | aggregation |atm-oam | loopback-atm | aps | atm-loop | ether-oam | ether-ps | t1e1 | tdmop | ima | stm| ether-ring | command }

private-trap: Private trap

trap-id: Trap-ID

line: Line message

port: Port message

link: Link change

fault: Fault message

mc: MC information

sfp: SFP change information

ntp: NTP access error

telnet: telnet message

maintenance-network: Maintenance network message

backup: Scheduled configuration upload


spantree: Spanning tree

fdb: MAC learning

aggregation: Link aggregation

atm-oam: ATM OAM alarm

loopback-atm: ATM loopback event

aps: APS event

atm-loop: ATM loop occurrence fault

ether-oam: EtherOAM alarm

ether-ps: EtherPS event

t1e1: T1E1OAM information

tdmop: TDMoP information

ima: IMA group

stm: STM-1 line control

ether-ring: EtherRing event

command: Command

* When P1 is omitted, all the message groups are set.

Default value None


Note None

22-21




Input example *Switch@1# show message transmit config

Message Transmit Configuration(Member)

======================================

Group Member Monitor Trap Remote-log Local-log

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

fault : critical enabled enabled enabled enabled

major enabled enabled enabled enabled

minor enabled enabled enabled enabled

warning enabled enabled enabled enabled

mc : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

sfp : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

ntp : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

telnet : connect enabled enabled enabled enabled

fail enabled enabled enabled enabled

maintenance-network: out-band enabled enabled enabled enabled

in-band enabled enabled enabled enabled

backup : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

external-memory : status enabled enabled enabled enabled

fault enabled enabled enabled enabledspantree : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

fdb : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

aggregation : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

atm-oam : detect-f1f3 enabled enabled enabled enabled

detect-f4f5 enabled enabled enabled enabled

detect-minor enabled enabled enabled enabled

loopback-atm : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

aps : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

atm-loop : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

ether-oam : unexpect-level enabled enabled enabled enabled

mismerge enabled enabled enabled enabled

unexpect-mep enabled enabled enabled enabledunexpect-period enabled enabled enabled enabled

loc enabled enabled enabled enabled

rdi enabled enabled enabled enabled

ether-ps : --- disabled disabled disabled disabled

t1e1 : --- disabled disabled disabled disabled

tdmop : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

stm : detect-rs enabled enabled enabled enabled

detect-ms enabled enabled enabled enabled

detect-hp enabled enabled enabled enabled

detect-lp enabled enabled enabled enabled

detect-pdh enabled enabled enabled enabled

command : --- --- --- enabled enabled

Message Transmit Configuration(Element)

=======================================

Group Element Monitor Trap Remote-log Local-log

-----------------------------------------------------------------

private-trap : 10 disabled disabled disabled disabled

trap-id : 100 disabled disabled disabled disabled

line : 1 enabled disabled disabled disabled

11 disabled disabled enabled enabled

port : 1/1 enabled disabled disabled disabled

11/1 disabled disabled enabled enabled

link : 1/1 enabled disabled disabled disabled

*Switch@1#

22-22




Output items Message Transmit Configuration(Member)

Group: Group name

Member: Member name

Monitor: Autonomous message

enabled: Autonomous message enabled

disabled: Autonomous message disabledTrap: Trap message

enabled: Trap message enabled

disabled: Trap message disabled

Remote-log: Remote log message

enabled: Remote log message enabled

disabled: Remote log message disabled

Local-log: Local log message

enabled: Local log message enabled

disabled: Local log message disabled

Message Transmit Configuration(Element)Group: Group name

Element: Element number

Monitor: Autonomous message

enabled: Autonomous message enabled

disabled: Autonomous message disabled

Trap: Trap message

enabled: Trap message enabled

disabled: Trap message disabled

Remote-log: Remote log message

enabled: Remote log message enabled

disabled: Remote log message disabledLocal-log: Local log message

enabled: Local log message enabled

disabled: Local log message disabled

Relatedcommand

set message transmit Setting of trap transmission selection

22-23




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show all

Display of all setting information

Shows all setting information.

Input format show all [P1]





Default value None


Note For target commands, see “Appendix”.

Input example *Switch@1# show all non-step

License Information

===================


User Information

================


System Date

===========

Date : 10/21/2004

Time : 21:47:41

Time Zone: GMT +09:00

System Information

==================

SysDescr : NEC CX2600/220 Ver.02.01.01

System Location: NEC

System Name : CX2600/220

System Contact : abc

System Up Time : 0 days, 00:45:42.13

Out-Band IP Table

=================


-----------------------------------------------------------------------

System : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:94 192.168.1.211 255.255.255.0

Switch#1 : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:94 192.168.1.212 255.255.255.0

Switch#2 : 00:00:00:00:00:00 192.168.1.213 255.255.255.0

22-24




<Omission>

Output item

Relatedcommands

All show commandsupload all-information Uploading of all setting information

22-25




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

write memory

Saving of setting information

Saves the setting information.

Input format write memory [P1]

Parameter P1: Running slot { self | mate | system }

self: Self slot

mate: Mate slot

system: Both-system slot

* When P1 is omitted, self is assumed.

Default value None


Note None

Input example Switch@1# write memory

Writing Flash Memory....

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands








22-26




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear running-config line

Clearing of line module configuration

Clears line module configuration.

Input format clear running-config line P1


Default value None



Input example *Switch@1# clear running-config line 1


Clearing Line Config...

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



set port type Setting of GbE port media

set port flowcontrol Setting of flow control

set port protection-time Setting of port link protection time

set port link-trap Setting of SNMP link trap transmission


set port frame Setting of ATM transmission path framingmode

set port cable-length Setting of cable length




set vlan ethertype Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tagrecognition

set qos maximum-mode Setting of maximum bandwidth limitoperation mode

set qos in-rate maximum Setting of maximum bandwidth limit functionper input VLAN

set qos in-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function perinput VLAN

set qos in-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function per inputVLAN

22-27




set qos out-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping per output VLAN

set qos out-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function peroutput VLAN

set qos out-rate maximum Setting of maximum bandwidth limit functionper output VLAN




set qos out-priority fairness Setting of burst tolerance of output-sidefairness control function of output port


set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port Set upper threshold of output-side fairnesscontrol function of output port

set spantree port Set spanning tree enable/disable per port

set spantree port priority Setting of priority per port

set spantree port cost Setting of path cost per port

set spantree port edge Setting of edge portset spantree port point-to-point Setting of point-to-point


set aggregation port priority Setting of port priority

set isolate port Setting /clearing of port isolate



set fdb limiter Setting of MAC address learning countlimiting function

set fdb limiter static Setting of static MAC address of MACaddress learning count limiting function

set pvc static Registration of PVCset pvc name Registration of PVC name






set isolate pvc Setting/clearing of PVC isolate

set atm-loop Setting/clearing of ATM loop guard



set atm-qos aal5 Setting of AAL5 modeset atm-qos out-port clp Setting of CLP




set mc management Setting of M/C management function basics

set counter vlan entry Setting of VLAN counter collectionconditions


mirror port Setting of mirroring start or stop




22-28




set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP format


set atmop table Setting of ATM-Ether conversion

set atmop in-port cos Setting of CLP-CoS mapping


set atmop out-port clp priority Setting of CLP conversion priorityset ima clock Setting of IMA clock mode










set tdmop admin Setting of TDMoP blocking/unblockingset reference-clock priority Setting of reference clock priority


set ether-oam cc Setting of ETH-CC transmission



set ether-oam rdi Setting of RDI operation




set line mode gbe Setting of GbE line mode

set ether-ps Setting of EtherPS enable/disableset ether-ps control-vlan Setting of EtherPS control VLAN


22-29




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear startup-config

Clearing of startup configuration

Clears startup configuration.

Input format clear startup-config P1 [P2]

Parameters P1: Initialization mode { all | exip }

all: Clears all configurations

exip: Clears all configurations other than IP configuration

P2: Running slot { self | mate | system }

self: Self slotmate: Mate slot

system: Both-system slot

* When P2 is omitted, self is assumed.

Default value None



Input examples *Switch@1# clear startup-config allWould you like to delete config data? :(Y/N): y

Clearing Flash Memory...

*Switch@1# clear startup-config exip

Would you like to delete config data? :(Y/N): y

Clearing Flash Memory...

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands upload startup-config Uploading of startup configuration from ftp serverdownload startup-config Downloading of startup configuration from ftp server



22-30




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set backup server

Setting of backup server

Sets a backup server.

Input format set backup server P1 P2


P2: FTP login name (1 to 16 characters)

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxxas the server IP address. (“xxx” is any number.)

If a backup server exists at the network address 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24,you can set the server. This setting, however, does not provide correctcommunication.

Notes Enter an ftp password interactively.

Set an ftp login name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and [control character].(However, you can use only the characters that can be recognized by the ftp server.)


Set an ftp password (0 to 16 characters) with ASCII characters other than [space], [!],[?], and [control character].

Input example *Switch@1# set backup server 192.168.2.200 cx2600


*Switch@1#

Output item

Related

commands


set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP addressset backup schedule Setting of backup schedule

show backup information Display of backup information

clear backup server Clearing of backup server

22-31

mailto:*Switch@1%23

mailto:*Switch@1%23




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

clear backup server

Clearing of backup server

Clears a backup server.

Input format clear backup server

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# clear backup server

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

set backup server Setting of backup server

22-32

mailto:*Switch@1%23

mailto:*Switch@1%23

mailto:*Switch@1%23

mailto:*Switch@1%23




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set backup schedule

Setting of backup schedule

Sets backup schedule.

Input formats - Specifying 1-week cycle

set backup schedule P1 P2 P3 (week) P4 P5

- Specifying 1-day cycle

set backup schedule P1 P2 P3 (day) P4

- Specifying fixed cycle

set backup schedule P1 P2 P3 (cycle) P4

Parameters P1: Backup type { running-config }

P2: Storage directory

P3: Backup start type { week | day | cycle }

week: 1 week cycle

day: 1 day cycle

cycle: Fixed cycle

When week is specified in P3

P4: Day of week specification { sunday | monday | tuesday | wednesday |thursday | friday | saturday }

sunday: Sunday

monday: Monday

tuesday: Tuesday

wednesday: Wednesday

thursday: Thursday

friday: Friday

saturday: Saturday

P5: Time specification (0 to 23 hours)

When day is specified in P3

P4: Time specification (0 to 23 hours)

When cycle is specified in P3

P4: Time cycle specification (0 to 168)

0: Sets backup start disable

Default value None


Note Set a storage directory with alphabets and numeric characters.

Input example *Switch@1# set backup schedule running-config /config/backup week sunday12

*Switch@1#

22-33

mailto:*Switch@1%23

mailto:*Switch@1%23




Output item

Relatedcommands


show backup information Display of backup information

22-34




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show backup information

Display of backup information

Shows backup information.

Input format show backup information

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show backup information

Backup Server Configuration

===========================

Backup Data : running-config

IP Address : 192.168.2.200

FTP Login Name : CX2600

FTP Directory : /config/backup

Retrieval time : weekly(sunday) 12:00:00Backup status : waiting

*Switch@1#

Output items Backup Data: Backup type

IP Address: FTP server address

FTP Login Name: FTP login name

FTP Directory: FTP directory

Retrieval time: Backup cycle

Backup Status: Backup status

Relatedcommands


clear backup server Clearing of backup server

set backup schedule Setting of backup schedule

22-35

mailto:*Switch@1%23

mailto:*Switch@1%23

mailto:*Switch@1%23

mailto:*Switch@1%23




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show fault present

Display of current fault and alarm information

Shows the device fault and alarm information that has occurred so far.

Input format show fault present [P1]

Parameter P1: Detailed showing { detail }

detail: Detailed showing specification

* When P1 is omitted, the outline of the device fault and alarm information that hasoccurred so far is shown.

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show fault present

Device Fault Information

========================

Module Type Status

----------------------------------------------------------

Switch#1 : ugswc normal

: --- ---

Switch#2 : ugswc temperature fault(wr:4100,01000001)

: ext-m device fault(wr:4201,01000000)

Line#1 : gbe normal

Line#2 : gbe normal

Line#3 : --- ---

Line#4 : --- ---

Line#5 : tdmp device fault(cr:1290,05000000)

Line#6 : tdmp normal

Line#7 : --- ---

Line#8 : --- ---

Line#9 : --- ---Line#10 : --- ---

Line#11 : --- ---

Line#12 : --- ---

Power#1 : dc normal

Power#2 : dc device fault(mj:2202,01000000)

Fan : fan#1 normal

fan#2 normal

fan#3 device fault(mj:2201,01000000)

*Switch@1#

22-36




Output items [1] Fault occurrence status

normal: Normal status

device: Device fault

software: Software failure

temperature: Temperature failure

processor: CPU failureFor description of fault information, refer to “Fault List” of “Appendix” in the “InstructionManual”.

Type: Module type

ugswc: UGSW module UGSW A

ext-m: external memory

fe8: Line module FE8

fx8a: Line module Fx8a

fx8b: Line module Fx8b

fx8s: Line module Fx8s

gbe: Line module GbEatm155: Line module ATM155





ac: Power module AC

dc: Power module DC

fan: Fan module

Related

commands


show system status Display of device installation status and other various statuses

22-37




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear fault warning

Clearing of WR fault

Clears a WR fault.

Input format clear fault warning

Parameter None

Default value None


Notes This command clears the following faults:

- Software fault WR (Switch module)

WR SWITCH SOFTWARE FAULT

- Device fault WR (Switch module)

WR SWITCH DEVICE FAULT

- Device fault WR (Line module)

WR LINE DEVICE FAULT

Input example *Switch@1# clear fault warning*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand


22-38




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show fault past

Display of past fault information

Shows fault information collected when an exception and WDTOVF occurred.

Input format show fault past

Parameter None

Default value None


Note When a self exception or WDTOVF occurs, fault information can be saved every fiveMain CPU faces and Sub CPU faces (to 20 faces).

Input example *Switch@1# show fault past

Exception Information

=====================

Main CPU#1 [1]

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

S/W : 03.09.04

H/W : 03.09.04Date : 10/03/2003 17:01:15

<Exception Information>

task name = MMI_TASK

vector offset = 0x00000200

error number = 0x037f85a8

data exception address register = 0x003d0000

bus error address register = 0x08000000

bus error syndrome register = 0x0c000000

general purpose register

00000000 037f8658 00000000 08000000

00001200 00000000 00000000 20202020<Omission>

.

.

condition register = 0x44220040

fixed-point exception register = 0x00000000

Main CPU#1 [2]

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

S/W : 03.09.04

H/W : 03.09.04

Date : 10/03/2003 19:00:35

<Exception Information>

22-39




task name = MMI_TASK

vector offset = 0x00000200

error number = 0x037f85a8

data exception address register = 0x003d0000

bus error address register = 0x08000000

bus error syndrome register = 0x0c000000

general purpose register00000000 037f8658 00000000 08000000

00001200 00000000 00000000 20202020

.

.

.

condition register = 0x44220040

fixed-point exception register = 0x00000000

Error Information

=================

Main CPU#1 [1]

-----------------------------------------------------------------------S/W : 03.09.04

H/W : 03.09.04

Date : 10/03/2003 17:01:15

<Task Information>

Name Entry TID PRI Status PC SP ERRNODelay

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

tExcTask excTask 2f784a0 0 PEND 3066e4 2f783c0 0 0

.

.

<Task Trace Information>

Task Name : tExcTask

2df888 vxTaskEntry +5c : excTask ()

2aaf4c excTask +38 : msgQReceive ()

2d3040 msgQReceive +280: qJobGet ()

Task Name : tLogTask

.

.

.

*Switch@1#

Output items Exception Information: Fault information collected when the exception occurred

Error Information: Fault information collected when the WDTOVF occurred

Relatedcommands


clear fault past Clearing of past fault information

22-40




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Save Synchro-

nizeSBY execution

clear fault past

Clearing of past fault information

Clears all the fault information that was collected when a self exception or WDTOVF occurred and is shownby the show fault past command.

Input format clear fault past

Parameter None

Default value None



Input example *Switch@1# clear fault past

Would you like to clear past fault information? :(Y/N): y

Clearing Flash Memory.....

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand


22-41




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show system status

Display of device installation status and other various statuses

Shows the device installation status and other various statuses.

Input format show system status

Parameter None

Default value None


Note This command also shows the module redundant configuration status and typeinformation.

Input example *Switch@1# show system status

System Equipment Information

============================

Module Type Status Redundancy Mode Assign Install

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Switch#1 : ugswc active dual-fixed --- ugswc

Switch#2 : --- unmount --- --- ---Line#1 : fe8 active single-mode none fe8

Line#2 : --- unmount single-mode none ---









Line#11 : --- unmount single-mode --- ---

Line#12 : --- unmount single-mode --- ---Power#1 : dc mount --- --- dc

Power#2 : --- unmount --- --- ---

Fan : fan#1 mount --- --- ---

fan#2 mount --- --- ---

fan#3 mount --- --- ---

*Switch@1#

22-42





Type: Module type

ugswc: UGSW module UGSWC


fx8: Line module Fx8

gbe: Line module GbEatm155: Line module ATM155





ac: Power module AC

dc: Power module DC

Status: Module status

unmount: Unmounted status

initializing: Initialization status

active: ACT statusstandby: SBY status

out of service: Out-of-service status

mismatch: Incorrect insertion status

active-fault: ACT-FLT status

standby-fault: SBY-FLT status

Redundancy Mode: Redundancy mode

single-mode: Single mode

dual-fixed: Dual-fixed mode

Assign: Type setting status


fx8: Line module Fx8


atm155: Line module ATM155

atmp: Line module ATMPtdmp: Line module TDMP



Install: Installation status

ugswc: ugsw module

fe8: Line module fe8

fx8a: Line module fx8a

fx8b: Line module fx8b

fx8s: Line module fx8s

gbe: Line module gbe

fe8-pv: Line module fe8-pvfx8a-pv: Line module fx8a-pv

fx8b-pv: Line module fx8b-pv

fx8s-pv: Line module fx8s-pv

gbe-pv: Line module gbe-pv

gm8-t: Line module gm8-t

gm8-x: Line module gm8-x

atm155s: Line module atm155s

atm155m: Line module atm155m

atmp: Line module atmp

tdmp: Line module tdmp

tdmp155: Line module tdmp155atmp155: Line module atmp155

gbe-pv2: Line module GbE-PV2

ac: Power module AC

dc: Power module DC

Relatedcommand

show system revision Display of various version information

22-43




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show system bridge

Display of bridge information for device

Shows the MAC address for the device, total number of line module ports, and L2SW type.

Input format show system bridge

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show system bridge

System Bridge

=============

Base Bridge Address : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:6c

Base Number Ports : 16ports

Base Type : Transparent Only

*Switch@1#

Output items Base Bridge Address: MAC address for device

Base Number Ports: Total number of installed line module ports

Base Type: L2SW type

Relatedcommand

None

22-44




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show system module-id

Display of module ID information

Shows ID information of each UGSW module and line module.

Input format show system module-id

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show system module-id

System Module ID

================

Module Install Module ID Product Number MAC Address

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Switch#1 : ugswc P-4X6B(002)(430) NEC755M00086 ---

Switch#2 : --- --- --- ---

Line#1 : --- --- --- ---Line#2 : gbe-pv2 P-4X6G(002)(430) - NEC745M05639 00:30:13:a1:da:84

Line#3 : gbe-pv2 P-4X6G(002)(430) - NEC745M05336 00:30:13:a1:da:b4

Line#4 : --- --- --- ---

Line#5 : --- --- --- ---

Line#6 : gbe-pv P-4X2Y(002)(432) -B NEC545M00102 ---

Line#7 : --- --- --- ---

Line#8 : --- --- --- ---

Line#9 : gbe-pv P-4X2Y(002)(432) NEC999M88888 ---

Line#10 : --- --- --- ---

Line#11 : atmp P-4X6D(002)(430) NEC755M00059 00:30:13:a1:2a:92

Line#12 : atmp P-4X6D(002)(430) NEC755M00061 00:30:13:a1:2a:ca

*Switch@1#

22-45




Output items Module Number: UGSW module/line module number


ugswc: UGSW module



fx8b: Line module Fx8bfx8s: Line module Fx8s


fe8-pv: Line module FE8-PV

fx8a-pv: Line module Fx8a-PV

fx8b-pv: Line module Fx8b-PV

fx8s-pv: Line module Fx8s-PV

gbe-pv: Line module GbE-PV

gm8-t: Line module GM8-T

gm8-x: Line module GM8-X

atm155s: Line module ATM155S

atm155m: Line module ATM155Matmp: Line module ATMP





Module ID: Module ID

Product Number: Product number


Related

command

show system status Display of device installation status and various statuses

22-46




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show system revision

Display of various version information

Shows the version information of firmware and hardware installed on the various mounted modules.

Input format show system revision

Parameter None

Default value None


Notes Current versions are shown in the Current field.

Previously (finally) downloaded versions are shown in the Latest field.

Last-one-but downloaded versions are shown in the Backup field.

Input example *Switch@1# show system revision

System Revision

===============

Current Latest Backup Current Latest

Module Install Soft Ver Soft Ver Soft Ver Hard Ver Hard Ver

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Switch#1 : ugswc 00.01.07 00.01.07 00.01.06 01.01.01 01.01.01

Switch#2 : --- --- --- --- --- ---

Line#1 : fe8 --- --- --- 01.02.0a 01.02.0a

Line#2 : --- --- --- --- --- ---

Line#3 : --- --- --- --- --- ---

Line#4 : --- --- --- --- --- ---Line#5 : --- --- --- --- --- ---

Line#6 : --- --- --- --- --- ---

Line#7 : --- --- --- --- --- ---

Line#8 : --- --- --- --- --- ---

Line#9 : --- --- --- --- --- ---Line#10 : --- --- --- --- --- ---

Line#11 : --- --- --- --- --- ---

Line#12 : --- --- --- --- --- ---

*Switch@1#

22-47






ugswc: UGSW module


















Ver: Various version information

Relatedcommand


22-48




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show system temperature

Display of device temperature

Shows a temperature per UGSW module or line module.

Input format show system temperature

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show system temperature

System Temperature

==================

Module Install Temperature

--------------------------------------------------

Switch#1 : ugswc 46.5

Switch#2 : --- ---

Line#1 : fe8 36.0Line#2 : --- ---

Line#3 : --- ---

Line#4 : --- ---

Line#5 : --- ---

Line#6 : --- ---

Line#7 : --- ---

Line#8 : --- ---

Line#9 : --- ---

Line#10 : --- ---

Line#11 : --- ---

Line#12 : --- ---

*Switch@1#

22-49






ugswc: UGSW module


















Temperature: Module temperature

Relatedcommand


22-50




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set fault auto-reboot

Setting of autonomous rebooting enable/disable

Sets whether to enable or disable autonomous rebooting when a WDTOVF or EXCEPTION fault thatinvolves rebooting is detected.

Input format set fault auto-reboot P1

Parameter P1: Autonomous rebooting setting { enable | disable }

enable: Enables autonomous rebooting

disable: Disables autonomous rebooting

Default value Enable


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# set fault auto-reboot enable

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

show fault auto-reboot Display of autonomous rebooting settings

22-51




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show fault auto-reboot

Display of autonomous rebooting settings

Shows autonomous rebooting settings when a WDTOVF or EXCEPTION fault that involves rebooting isdetected.

Input format show fault auto-reboot

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1#

*Switch@1# show fault auto-reboot

Fault AutoReboot Configuration

==============================

AutoReboot: enabled

*Switch@1#

Output item Mode: Setting status

Relatedcommand

set fault auto-reboot Setting of autonomous rebooting enable/disable

22-52




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show resource cpu

Display of CPU usage

Shows the average CPU usages of 5 seconds, 1 minute, and 5 minutes and the peak values of the averageCPU usages.

Input format show resource cpu

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show resource cpu

CPU Activity Information

========================

Last Read Time :--/--/---- --:--:--

Current Time :01/01/2004 03:39:27

The Rate of CPU Use===================

Module Type Measure Time Current(%) Peak(%) (Last Read ->Current)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Switch#1 : main 5 (sec) 7 11 (01/01/2004 03:36:40)

1 (min) 6 7 (01/01/2004 03:39:15)

5 (min) 6 6 (01/01/2004 03:39:04)

Switch#1 : sub 5 (sec) 13 79 (01/01/2004 03:31:29)

1 (min) 12 22 (01/01/2004 03:32:20)

5 (min) 12 14 (01/01/2004 03:36:27)

Switch#2 : main 5 (sec) --- --- (--/--/---- --:--:--)

1 (min) --- --- (--/--/---- --:--:--)

5 (min) --- --- (--/--/---- --:--:--)Switch#2 : sub 5 (sec) --- --- (--/--/---- --:--:--)

1 (min) --- --- (--/--/---- --:--:--)

5 (min) --- --- (--/--/---- --:--:--)

*Switch@1#

22-53




Output items Last Read Time: Last read time

Current Time: Current time

Module: Module

Type: Module type

main: Main CPU

sub: Sub CPUMeasure Time: Time required to measure average CPU time

Current(%): Current CPU usage

Peak(%): Peak value of CPU usage

(Last Read ->Current): Peak time at which the peak value was recorded

Relatedcommand

None

22-54




Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show resource memory

Display of memory usage

Shows memory usage.

Input format show resource memory

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

*Switch@1# show resource memoryInput exampleThe Rate of Memory Use

======================

Module Type Rate(%) Used Size(byte) / Actual Size(byte)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Switch#1 : main 39 17042776 / 42925880

Switch#1 : sub 34 14333992 / 41138696

Switch#2 : main --- --- / ---Switch#2 : sub --- --- / ---

*Switch@1#


Type: Module type

main: Main CPU

sub: Sub CPU

Rate(%): Memory usage

Used Size(byte): Currently used memory size

Actual Size(byte): Memory size that can be actually used

Relatedcommand

None

22-55




(Blank page)

22-56



Device Control

23 Device Control

23-1



Device Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set line type

Setting of line module type

Sets a line module type.

Input format set line type P1 P2


P2: Line module type

{ none | fe8 | fx8 | gbe | atm155 | gm8-t | gm8-x | atmp | tdmp | tdmp155 | atmp155 }

none: No line module type specification

fe8: FE8fx8: FX8

gbe: GbE

atm155: ATM155

gm8-t: GM8-T

gm8-x: GM8-X

atmp: ATMP

tdmp: TDMP

tdmp155: TDMP155

atmp155: ATMP155


Usage conditions - You cannot change the line module type if a configuration other than the line moduletype is already entered.

- You cannot set FE8/FX8 for line modules #5 to #12.

- You cannot set GM8-T/GM8-X.

Notes Specifying the correct line module type for the slot that is in the MISMATCH statusinitializes the line module. However, if the line module cannot be initialized because itis in contention for another event, it is incorporated with OUS status.

After this command ends, reinitialize the line module incorporated with OUS status using

the “reset line” command.

Input example *Switch@1# set line type 9 gbe

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



23-2



Device Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set line mode tdmp

Setting of TDMP line mode

Sets the TDMP line mode.

Input formats - Specifying line mode (TDM)

set line mode tdmp P1 P2 (tdm) P3 [P4] [P5]

- Specifying line mode (TDMoP)

set line mode tdmp P1 P2 (tdmop) P3 [P4] [P5]

- Specifying no line mode

set line mode tdmp P1 P2 (none)


P2: Line mode { tdm | tdmop | none }

tdm: TDM mode

tdmop: TDMoP mode

none: No line mode setting

When tdm or tdmop is specified in P2

P3: Frame type { e1 | t1 }

e1: E1 mode

t1: T1 mode

When e1 is specified in P3

P4: Line code { hdb3 | ami }hdb3: HDB3

ami: AMI

* When P4 is omitted, hdb3 is assumed.

P5: Frame format { crc4 | crc4nocas | non-crc4 | unframed }




unframed: Unframed


When t1 is specified in P3

P4: Line code { b8zs | ami }b8zs: B8ZS

ami: AMI

* When P4 is omitted, b8zs is assumed.

P5: Frame format { esf | sf | sf-jpn | unframed }


sf: superframe


unframed: Unframed


23-3



Device Control

Default values P4: hdb3, P5: crc4 (P3=e1)

P4: b8zs, P5: esf (P3=t1)

Usageconditions

You can set the TDMP line mode only when the line type setting is tdmp, or none with aTDMP line module installed.

To specify tdmop for P2, an error occurs if no TDMoP mode has been registered.To specify tdmop for P2, e1 for P3 and unframed for P5, TDMoP operation mode musthave been set to SAToP mode.

To specify tdm for P2 and e1 for P3, unframed cannot be specified for P5.

To specify tdmop for P2, t1 for P3 and unframed for P5, TDMoP operation mode musthave been set to SAToP mode.

If you specify tdm for P2, you cannot specify unframed for P5.

You cannot change the TDMP line mode setting if any of the following commands isalready entered:

set tdm group

set tdmop group


set port impedance

set ether-oam mep

set reference-clock priority (Port (line) extraction clock specification)

To specify tdmop for P2, there is the following restriction on the number of TDMP linemodules and TDMP155 line modules:

(Number of TDMP line modules x 1) + (Number of TDMP155 line modules x 3) < 16

* The above numbers of line modules mean the ones set to TDMoP mode.

If any of the following changes has been made while the line state is ACT, line restart

will be executed:

Note

- Changing line mode from tdm to tdmop or none

- Changing line mode from tdmop to tdm or none

- Changing frame type

If a frame type is changed with this command, TDM group name setting of the linemodule will be deleted.

Input examples *Switch@1# set line mode tdmp 1 none

*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp 2 tdm e1 hdb3 crc4

*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp 3 tdm t1 b8zs

*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp 4 tdm t1 esf*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp 5 tdmop e1 hdb3 unframed

Output item

23-4



Device Control

Relatedcommands






set tdm group Setting of TDM groupset tdm group-name Setting of TDM group name



show line mode Display of line mode setting



23-5



Device Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set line mode atmp

Setting of ATMP line mode

Sets the ATMP line mode.

Input formats - Specifying line mode (ATMoP)

set line mode atmp P1 P2 (atmop) P3 [P4] [P5]


set line mode atmp P1 P2 (none)


P2: Line mode { atmop | none }

atmop: ATMoP mode


When atmop is specified in P2

P3: Frame type { e1 | t1 }

e1: E1 mode

t1: T1 mode

When e1 is specified in P3

P4: Line code { hdb3 | ami }

hdb3: HDB3

ami: AMI

* When P4 is omitted, hdb3 is assumed.P5: Frame format { crc4 | crc4nocas | non-crc4 | unframed }




unframed: Unframed


When t1 is specified in P3

P4: Line code { b8zs | ami }

b8zs: B8ZS

ami: AMI

* When P4 is omitted, b8zs is assumed.P5: Frame format { esf | sf | sf-jpn }


sf: superframe



Default values P4: hdb3, P5: crc4 (P3=e1)

P4: b8zs, P5: esf (P3=t1)

23-6



Device Control

Usageconditions

You can set the ATMP line mode only when the line type setting is atmp, or none with an ATMP line module installed.

You cannot change the ATMP line mode setting if any of the following commands isalready entered:


set port impedance

set ima group

set ima clock


Note If any of the following changes has been made while the line state is ACT, line restartwill be executed:

- Changing line mode from atmop to none


Input examples *Switch@1# set line mode atmp 1 none

*Switch@1# set line mode atmp 2 atmop e1

*Switch@1# set line mode atmp 3 atmop t1 b8zs

*Switch@1# set line mode atmp 4 atmop t1 esf

*Switch@1# set line mode atmp 5 atmop e1 hdb3 unframed

Output item

Relatedcommands




set port cable-length Setting of cable lengthset port impedance Setting of impedance




23-7



Device Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set line mode tdmp155

Setting of TDMP155 line mode

Sets the TDMP155 line mode.

Input formats - Specifying line mode (TDM/TDMoP)

set line mode tdmp155P1 P2 (tdm | tdmop) P3


set line mode tdmp155P1 P2 (none)


P2: Line mode { tdm | tdmop | none }

tdm: TDM mode

tdmop: TDMoP mode


When tdm or tdmop is specified in P2

P3: Frame type { sdh | sonet }

sdh: SDH mode

sonnet: SONET mode

Default value None

Usageconditions You can set the TDMP155 line mode only when the line type setting is tdmp155, or theline type setting is none and a TDMP155 line module has been installed.

To specify tdmop for P2, an error occurs if no TDMoP mode has been registered.

You cannot change the TDMP155 line mode setting if any of the following commands isalready entered:

set tdm group

set tdmop group

set port logical-interface

set ether-oam mep


When APS is set to enabled, settings of the line module cannot be changed.

Notes If any of the following changes has been made while the line state is ACT, line restart willbe executed:

- Changing line mode from tdm to tdmop or none

- Changing line mode from tdmop to tdm or none


If a frame type is changed with this command, TDM group name setting of the linemodule will be deleted.

Input example *Switch@1# set line mode tdmp155 3 tdmop sdh

*Switch@1#

23-8



Device Control

Output item

Relatedcommands













23-9



Device Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

set line mode gbe

Setting of GbE line mode

Sets the GbE line mode.

Input format - Specifying line mode (GbE)

set line mode gbe P1 P2


P2: Line mode { none | gbe | fe }


gbe: GbE mode

fe: FE mode


Usageconditions

- You cannot change the line module type if a configuration other than the line moduletype is already entered.

- You cannot set the GbE line mode for line modules #5 to #12.

- You can set the GbE line mode only when the line module type is gbe, or the linemodule type setting is none and a GbE-PV or GbE-PV2 line module has been installed.

- When a GbE-PV line module is installed, operation in FE mode is not allowed althoughsetting of each line mode is available. (A link down will occur in the GbE port.)

Note If any of the following changes has been made while the line state is ACT, line restart willbe executed:

- Changing line mode from none or gbe to fe

- Changing line mode from fe to none or gbe

Input example *Switch@1# set line mode gbe 1 fe

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands




set port type Setting of GbE port media




23-10



Device Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show line mode

Display of line mode setting

Shows the line mode setting

Input format show line mode

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1# show line mode

Line Mode Information

=====================

Line Line Frame

Slot Type Mode Type

---------------------------

1 fe8 --- ---

2 tdmp tdm e13 atmp atmop e1

4 gbe --- ---

5 tdmp tdmop t1

6 tdmp tdmop e1

7 atmp atmop t1

8 atm155 --- ---

9 --- --- ---

10 tdmp none ---

11 tdmp155 tdm sdh

12 tdmp155 tdmop sonet

*Switch@1#

Output items Slot: Line number

Line Type: Line type

Line Mode: Line mode

Frame Type: Frame type

e1: E1 mode

t1: T1 mode

sdh: SDH mode

sonet: SONET mode

23-11



Device Control

Relatedcommands




set line mode gbe Setting of GbE line mode

23-12



Device Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

change switch

Changeover of UGSW module system

Changes the UGSW module system.

Input format change switch [P1]

Parameter P1: Forced change { force }

force: Forced change

* When P1 is omitted, a normal system change is performed.

Default value None


Notes When the UGSW module system is changed forcibly, the old ACT side enters the OUSstatus. When the old ACT side is in the ACT-FLT status, the UGSW module systementers the SBY-FLT status.

Input example *Switch@1# change switch

*Switch@1##

Output item

Relatedcommand


23-13



Device Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Save Synchro-

nizeSBY execution

reset system

Resetting of entire device

Resets the entire device.

Input format reset system

Parameter None

Default value None



After it is rebooted, the system into which this command has been entered is started in ACT mode.

Input example *Switch@1# reset system

Would you like to reboot System? :(Y/N): y

System is under closing....

System Reset Process is running. Please wait....

System Boot

Copyright 2001-2002 NEC

CPU: PPC 405GP

Version: 5.4

BSP version: 1.2/5

Boot version: K01.00

Creation date: Mar 31 2004, 14:38:54

Press [Ctrl]+[c] key to enter recover mode...

... coming up latest image

auto-booting...

<Omission>

23-14



Device Control

Output item

Related

commands


reset line Resetting of line moduleshow reset Display of reset factor

23-15



Device Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Save Synchro-

nizeSBY execution

reset switch

Resetting of UGSW module

Reset the UGSW module.

Input format reset switch P1 [P2]

Parameters P1: Switch module number (1 to 2)

P2: FPGA version upgrade specification { fpga-version-up }, or reset load modulespecification { latest | backup }

fpga-version-up: FPGA version upgrade specification

latest: Latest (current) side specificationbackup: Backup side specification

* In the case of FPGA version upgrade specification, the latest side is specified.

* In the case of reset load module specification, normal reset is executed.

Default value None

Usage conditions You cannot specify the backup side when resetting the mate system.

You cannot reset the ACT system when the UGSW module is in the ACT or SBY status(including the FLT status).

Notes After this command is entered, execution is confirmed.If P2 (FPGA version up) is specified, the reset factor is power-on reset.

Input example *Switch@1# reset switch 1

Would you like to reboot Switch#1? :(Y/N): ySelf Switch is under closing...

Switch Reset Process is running. Please wait....

System Boot

Copyright 2001-2002 NEC

23-16



Device Control

CPU: PPC 405GP

Version: 5.4

BSP version: 1.2/5

Boot version: K01.00

Creation date: Mar 31 2004, 14:38:54

Press [Ctrl]+[c] key to enter recover mode...

... coming up latest image

auto-booting...

<Omission>

Output item

Relatedcommands

reset system Resetting of entire device

show reset Display of reset factor

23-17



Device Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

reset line

Resetting of line module

Resets a line module.

Input format reset line P1


Default value None

Usage conditions Whether you can enter this command depends on the following line statuses:

Status Can be entered/cannot be entered

unmount ×

initializing ×

active ×

standby ×

out of service

mismatch

active-fault

standby-fault


Input example *Switch@1# reset line 2

Would you like to reboot 2? :(Y/N): y

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



ous line OUS setting of line module

23-18



Device Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Synchro-nize

SBY execution

show reset

Display of reset factor

Shows a UGSW module reset factor.

Input format show reset [P1]

Parameter P1: Detailed showing { detail }


Default value None


Note Specifying the detail parameter shows reset factors per CPU, not per UGSW module.

Input example *Switch@1# show reset detail

Reset Information

=================

Module Type Reset Factor

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Switch#1 : main Command Reset(reset system)

Switch#1 : sub Command Reset(reset system)

Switch#2 : --- ---

*Switch@1#


Type: Module type

ugswc: UGSW module

main: main CPU

sub: sub CPU

Reset Factor: Reset factor

Power On Reset or Switch Module Insertion: Power-on reset or module insertion

Command Reset(reset system): Command reset by reset systemCommand Reset(reset switch):

The status of WDT is abnormal: Reset based on hardware judgment

The fatal error has occurred: Reset based on software judgment

Command Reset by mate(reset system):

Command reset by reset system from mate system

Command Reset by mate(reset switch):

Command reset by reset switch from mate system

Relatedcommands



23-19



Device Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

ous switch

OUS setting of UGSW module

Sets OUS of the UGSW module.

Input format ous switch P1

Parameter P1: Switch module number (1 to 2)

Default value None



Note that a trouble may occur if an ACT UGSW module is removed without placing itOUS status.

Input example *Switch@1# ous switch 2

Would you like to out of service switch#2? :(Y/N): y

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand


23-20



Device Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

SaveSynchro-

nize SBY execution

ous line

OUS setting of line module

Sets OUS of a line module.

Input format ous line P1 P2


Default value None

Usage condition You cannot set OUS if INS-LED is off.


Input example *Switch@1# ous line 1

Would you like to out of service 1? :(Y/N): y

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommands



23-21



Device Control

Privi-lege

Gene-ral

Save Synchro-

nizeSBY execution

ous external-memory

Removing of external memory

Removes external memory.

Input format ous external-memory

Parameter None

Default value None

Usage conditions You can execute this command only when external memory is inserted.

Operate external memory in maintenance mode.

Note Entering this command disables external memory access because external memory isdisconnected from the device. If you want to access external memory again, you mustreinsert it.

Input example *Switch@1# ous external-memory

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

None

23-22



Maintenance Mode

24 Maintenance Mode

24-1



Maintenance Mode

Maintenance Save Synchro

-nizeSBY

execution

download software

Downloading of software

Downloads software.

Input format download software P1 P2

Parameters P1: Download file location { external-memory }



Default value None

Usage condition You can execute this command only when external memory is inserted.

Notes To reflect downloaded data, you must enter the “reset switch” or “reset system”command to reinitialize the Switch module.

You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relativepath name of 127 characters or less (including the file name) is converted to an absolutepath name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directoryhierarchies are permissible. No file can be specified beyond 21 directory hierarchies.

If no path is specified, current directory specification is assumed.

Set a file name or a path name + file name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and

[control character].


Input example *Switch@1% download software external-memorycx2600_sw/release_lm/cx2600_220_so

ft_c__010003.dlm


Download Data Processing..........................

Writing Flash Memory............

*Switch@1%

Output item

Relatedcommands



ous external-memory Removing of external memory

24-2



Maintenance Mode


-nizeSBY

execution

download fpga switch

Downloading of FPGA of UGSW module

Downloads FPGA of the UGSW module.

Input format download fpga switch P1 P2

Parameters P1: Download file location { external-memory }



Default value None


Notes To reflect downloaded data, you must enter the “reset switch” command specifyingfpga-version-up parameter to reinitialize the Switch module.



Set a file name or a path name + file name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and

[control character].


Input example *Switch@1# download fpga switch external-memory/data/cx2600_220_fpga_UGSWC_020102.dlm

Data Transferring..


Data Transferring..


Data Transferring..


Data Transferring..


Data Transferring..


Data Transferring..


Data Transferring..


Data Transferring..


*Switch@1#

Output item

24-3



Maintenance Mode

Relatedcommands



24-4



Maintenance Mode


-nizeSBY

execution

download fpga line

Downloading of FPGA of line module

Downloads FPGA of a line module.

Input format download fpga line P1 P2 P3

Parameters P1: Line module type

{ fe | gbe | fe-pv | gbe-pv | gmx | atm | atmp | tdmp | gbe-pv2 | atmp155 | tdmp155 }

fe: Line module FE8/FX8


fe-pv: Line module FE8-PV/FX8-PVgbe-pv: Line module Gbe-PV

gmx: Line module GM8-T/GM8-X

atm: Line module ATM155



gbe-pv2: Line module Gbe-PV2



P2: Download file location { external-memory }



Default value None


Notes To reflect downloaded data, you must enter the “reset line” command to reinitialize theline module.



Set a file name or a path name + file name with ASCII characters other than ["], [?], and[control character].


24-5



Maintenance Mode

Input example *Switch@1% download fpga line fe external-memory/data/cx2600_220_fpga_FE_FX_020102.dlm

Data Transferring..

Download Data Processing.................................................

Line# 1 : completed

Line# 2 : ---Line# 3 : completed

Line# 4 : ---

Line# 5 : ---

Line# 6 : ---

Line# 7 : completed

Line# 8 : ---

Line# 9 : ---

Line#10 : ---

Line#11 : ---

Line#12 : ---

*Switch@1%

Output item

Relatedcommands



24-6



Maintenance Mode


-nizeSBY

execution

upload running-config external-memory

Uploading of running configuration to external memory

Uploads a running configuration to external memory.

Input format upload running-config external-memory P1

Parameter P1: File name or path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)

Default value None


Notes You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relativepath name of 127 characters or less (including the file name) is converted to an absolutepath name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directoryhierarchies are permissible. No file can be created beyond 21 directory hierarchies.


The maximum length of a file name is 99 characters.

Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphanumeric characters and “% & , / = [] ^ _ { } ~ . –”.

You can use “/” only when specifying a path name, and “.” only when specifying a file

name.Configuration information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed bythe “show running-config” command.

Input example *Switch@1% upload running-config external-memory test.txt


*Switch@1%

Output item

Relatedcommands

show running-config Display of running configurationdownload running-config external-memory

Downloading of running configuration from externalmemory

write memory external-memory Saving of setting information to external memory


24-7



Maintenance Mode


-nizeSBY

execution

upload startup-config external-memory

Uploading of startup configuration to external memory

Uploads a startup configuration to external memory.

Input format upload startup-config external-memory P1


Default value None







name.Configuration information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed bythe “show startup-config” command.

Input example *Switch@1% upload startup-config external-memory test2.txt


*Switch@1%

Output item

Relatedcommands

show startup-config Display of startup configurationclear startup-config Clearing of startup configuration

download startup-config external-memoryDownloading of startup configuration from externalmemory


24-8



Maintenance Mode


-nizeSBY

execution

upload local-syslog

Uploading of system log to external memory

Uploads a system log to external memory.

Input format upload local-syslog P1 P2

Parameters P1: Upload location { external-memory }



Default value None






You can use “/” only when specifying a path name, and “.” only when specifying a filename.

Local syslog information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed bythe “show local syslog” command.

Input example *Switch@1% upload local-syslog external-memory syslog.txt



*Switch@1%

Output item

Relatedcommands

show syslog local Display of local syslog

clear syslog local Clearing of local syslog


24-9



Maintenance Mode


-nizeSBY

execution

download running-config external-memory

Downloading of running configuration from external memory

Downloads a running configuration from external memory.

Input format download running-config external-memory P1


Default value None


Notes You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relativepath name of 127 characters or less (including the file name) is converted to an absolutepath name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directoryhierarchies are permissible. No file can be specified beyond 21 directory hierarchies.


External memory may be accessed several times according to the configuration size tobe downloaded.



Input example *Switch@1% download running-config external-memory soft_LM/test.txt

Data Transferring...

Data setting..........

*Switch@1%

Output item

Related

commands


upload running-config external-memoryUploading of running configuration to externalmemory



24-10



Maintenance Mode


-nizeSBY

execution

download startup-config external-memory

Downloading of startup configuration from external memory

Downloads a startup configuration from external memory.

Input format download startup-config external-memory P1


Default value None


Notes You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relativepath name of 127 characters or less (including the file name) is converted to an absolutepath name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directoryhierarchies are permissible. No file can be specified beyond 21 directory hierarchies.If no path is specified, current directory specification is assumed.

External memory may be accessed several times according to the configuration size tobe downloaded.



Input example *Switch@1% download startup-config external-memory test3.txt

Data Transferring..

Data setting.

Writing Flash Memory........

*Switch@1%

Output item

Relatedcommands

clear startup-config Clearing of startup configurationupload startup-config external-memory

Uploading of startup configuration to externalmemory



24-11



Maintenance Mode


-nizeSBY

execution

upload fault

Uploading of fault information to external memory

Uploads fault information to external memory.

Input format upload fault P1 P2

Parameters P1: Upload location { external-memory }



Default value None






You can use “/” only when specifying a path name, and “.” only when specifying a filename.

Fault information which is uploaded is the same as the information displayed by the“show fault present” and “show fault past” commands.

Input example *Switch@1# upload fault external-memory fault.txt


Data Transferring...........................

*Switch@1%

Output item

Relatedcommands




24-12



Maintenance Mode


-nizeSBY

execution

upload all-information external-memory

Uploading of setting information

Uploads setting information to external memory.

Input format upload all-information external-memory P1


Default value None







name.Setting information which is uploaded is the same as the information shown by the“show all” command.

Input example *Switch@1% upload all-information external-memory allinfo.txt



*Switch@1%

Output item

Relatedcommand

show all Display of setting information

24-13



Maintenance Mode


-nizeSBY

execution

write memory

Saving of setting status to external memory

Saves the setting status to external memory.

Input format write memory P1 [P2]

Parameters P1: Save location { external-memory }


P2: Save format { text-config | binary-config }

text-config: Text configuration

binary-config: Binary configuration* When P2 is omitted, text-config is assumed.

Default value None


Note The setting status is saved to the “/auto_reflect” directory in external memory under the“startup-config.scfg” file name. If the “/auto_reflect” directory does not exist, it isautomatically created.

Input example *Switch@1% write memory external-memoryInformation is under collection.


*Switch@1%

Output item

Relatedcommands




upload running-config external-memoryUploading of running configuration to external memory

upload startup-config external-memoryUploading of startup configuration to external memory

download running-config external-memoryDownloading of running configuration from external memory

download startup-config external-memory

Downloading of startup configuration from external memory


24-14



Maintenance Mode


-nizeSBY

execution

end

Switch from maintenance mode to privileged mode

Enables you to switch from maintenance mode to privileged mode.

Input format end

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

Input example *Switch@1% end

*Switch@1#

Output item

Relatedcommand

maintenance Enabling you to switch from privileged mode to maintenance mode

24-15



Maintenance Mode


-nizeSBY

execution

dir

Display of list of contents in directory

Shows the list of the contents in a directory.

Input format dir [P1]

Parameter P1: Path (1 to 127 characters)

* When P1 is omitted, the list of the contents in the current directory is shown.

Default value None


Notes You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relativepath name of 127 characters or less is converted to an absolute path name of more than246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies arepermissible. No directory can be referenced beyond 21 directory hierarchies.

Set a path name with alphabets, numeric characters, and symbols and signs “% & , = [ ]^ _ { } ~ /”.

Input example Switch@1% dir

11/26/2004 15:59:08 <DIR> 4096 cx2600

11/26/2004 15:59:42 <DIR> 4096 auto_reflect

11/26/2004 16:05:18 246 testConfig.scfg

11/26/2004 16:06:36 246 testConfig2.scfg

Switch@1% dir

Output items Update date and time

<DIR>: Directory

File directory size

File directory name

Relatedcommands

mkdir Creating of directory

rmdir Removing of directory

cd Change of current directory


24-16



Maintenance Mode


-nizeSBY

execution

mkdir

Creating of directory

Creates a directory.

Input format mkdir P1

Parameter P1: Directory name or path name + directory name (1 to 127 characters)

Default value None


Notes An error occurs if the directory name is used in a file name in the same directory.

You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relativepath name of 127 characters or less (including the created directory name) is convertedto an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No directory can be created beyond 21directory hierarchies.


The maximum length of a directory name is 99 characters.

Set a directory name or a path name + directory name with alphanumeric characters

and “% & , = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ /”.

Input example Switch@1% mkdir cx2600/newdir

Switch@1%

Output item

Relatedcommands

dir Display of list of contents in directory




24-17



Maintenance Mode


-nizeSBY

execution

rmdir

Removing of directory

Removes a directory.

Input format rmdir P1

Parameter P1: Directory name or path name + directory name (1 to 127 characters)

Default value None


Notes You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relativepath name of 127 characters or less (including the deleted directory name) is convertedto an absolute path name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. If no path isspecified, current directory specification is assumed. Paths of up to 20 directoryhierarchies are permissible. No directory can be specified beyond 21 directoryhierarchies.

Set a directory name or a path name + directory name with alphanumeric charactersand “% & , = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ /”.

Input example Switch@1% rmdir cx2600/deldirSwitch@1%

Output item

Relatedcommands





24-18



Maintenance Mode


-nizeSBY

execution

cd

Change of current directory

Changes the current directory.

Input format cd [P1]

Parameter P1: Path (1 to 127 characters)

* When P1 is omitted, paths are displayed.

Default value Root directory in external memory


Notes You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relativepath name of 127 characters or less is converted to an absolute path name of more than246 characters, an error occurs. If no path is specified, current directory specification isassumed. Paths of up to 20 directory hierarchies are permissible. No directory canbe specified beyond 21 directory hierarchies.

Set a path name with alphanumeric characters and “% & , = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ /”.

Input example Switch@1% cd /auto_reflect

Switch@1%

Switch@1% cd

/auto_reflect

Switch@1%

Output item Path to the current directory

Relatedcommands





24-19



Maintenance Mode


-nizeSBY

execution

copy

Copying file

Copies a file.

Input format copy P1 P2

Parameters P1: Copy source fie name or copy source path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)

P2: Copy destination file name or copy destination path name + file name (1 to 127characters)

Default value None


Notes An error occurs if the copy destination file name is used in a directory name in the samedirectory.

You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relativepath name of 127 characters or less (including the file name) is converted to an absolutepath name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directoryhierarchies are permissible. No file can be created beyond 21 directory hierarchies.


The maximum length of a copy destination file name is 99 characters.

Set a copy source file name, a copy source path name + file name, or a copy destinationpath name + file name with alphanumeric characters and “% & , = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ /.”.

You can use “/” only when specifying a path name and “.” only when specifying a filename.

Input example Switch@1% copy config/startup_config.scfgconfig/backup/backup_config.scfg

Switch@1%

Output item

Relatedcommands

rename Change of file name

del Deleting file


24-20



Maintenance Mode


-nizeSBY

execution

rename

Change of file name

Changes a file name.

Input format rename P1 P2

Parameters P1: Pre-change file name or pre-change path name + file name (1 to 127 characters)

P2: Post-change file name (1 to 99 characters)

Default value None


Notes An error occurs if the post-change file name is used in a directory name in the samedirectory.



Set a pre-change file name, a pre-change path name + file name, or a post-change filename with alphanumeric characters and “% & , = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ /.”.


Input example Switch@1% rename cx2600/old_name.scfg new_name.scfg

Switch@1%

Output item

Relatedcommands

copy Copying file

del Deleting file


24-21



Maintenance Mode


-nizeSBY

execution

del

Deleting file

Deletes a file.

Input format del P1


Default value None


Notes You can specify a path with an absolute or relative path name. However, if a relativepath name of 127 characters or less (including the file name) is converted to an absolutepath name of more than 246 characters, an error occurs. Paths of up to 20 directoryhierarchies are permissible. No file can be specified beyond 21 directory hierarchies.


Set a file name or a path name + file name with alphanumeric characters and “% & , = [ ]^ _ { } ~ /.”.


Input example Switch@1% del cx2600/del_file.scfg

Switch@1%

Output item

Relatedcommands

copy Copying file



24-22



Maintenance Mode

MaintenancePrivi-lege

SaveSynchro

-nizeSBY

execution

ous external-memory

Removing of external memory

Removes external memory.

Input format ous external-memory

Parameter None

Default value None


Entering this command disables external memory access because external memory isdisconnected from the device. If you want to access external memory again, you mustreinsert it.

Note

Input example Switch@1% ous external-memory

Switch@1%

Output item

Relatedcommands





copy Coping file


del Deleting file

24-23



Maintenance Mode

MaintenanceSynchro

-nizeSBY

executionSave

show switch status

Display of asynchronous switch status of UGSW module

Shows the asynchronous switch status of the UGSW module.

Input format show switch status

Parameter None

Default value None


Note None

!Switch@1% show switch status

Switch StatusInput example

=============

Mode : synchronous

Output item

Relatedcommand

None

24-24



Appendix

25 Appendix

25-1



Appendix

Appendix 1 Commands shown by configuration display and show all

The table below lists the commands shown by configuration display (show running-config and show

startup-config) and show all.

Command

Shown byshow running-config or

show startup-config(write memory)

Shown by show all

change aps × ⎯

change aps reset × ⎯

change ether-ps × ⎯

change ether-ps reset × ⎯

change external-clock × ⎯

change switch × ⎯

date × ⎯

dm ether-oam × ⎯

linktrace ether-oam × ⎯

lm ether-oam × ⎯

loopback atm × ⎯

loopback ether-oam × ⎯

loopback ima × ⎯

loopback mc × ⎯

mirror port × ⎯

ous line × ⎯

ous switch × ⎯

reset line × ⎯

reset reference-clock × ⎯

reset switch × ⎯

reset system × ⎯

set aggregation group ⎯

set aggregation port priority

⎯ set aggregation protection-time ⎯

set aggregation system priority ⎯

set aps ⎯

set aps lockout × ⎯

set aps time ⎯

set atm-loop ⎯

set atm-oam ⎯

set atm-oam flow ⎯

set atmop format ⎯ set atmop in-port priority ⎯

25-2



Appendix

Command



Shown by show all

set atmop mode ⎯

set atmop out-port clp mode ⎯

set atmop out-port clp priority ⎯

set atm-qos aal5 ⎯

set atm-qos out-port clp ⎯

set atm-shaper mode ⎯

set atm-shaper rate ⎯

set backup schedule ⎯

set backup server ⎯

set command-mode ⎯

set counter ether-oam entry ⎯

set counter pvc entry ⎯

set counter vlan entry ⎯

set enable password ⎯

set ether-oam cc ⎯

set ether-oam frame ⎯

set ether-oam lm ⎯

set ether-oam meg ⎯

set ether-oam mep ⎯

set ether-oam mip ⎯

set ether-oam peer-mep ⎯

set ether-oam rdi ⎯

set ether-oam reply-period ⎯

set ether-ps ⎯

set ether-ps control-vlan ⎯

set ether-ps lockout × ⎯

set ether-ps time ⎯

set ether-ring ⎯

set ether-ring control-vlan ⎯

set ether-ring rpl-owner ⎯

set ether-ring time ⎯

set external-clock mode ⎯

set fault auto-reboot ⎯

set fdb agingtime ⎯

set fdb limiter ⎯

set fdb limiter static ⎯

set fdb table mode ⎯

set filter in-port ⎯

25-3



Appendix

Command



Shown by show all

set filter out-port ⎯

set filter profile ⎯

set frame-size ⎯

set ifg over-rate ⎯

set igmp ⎯

set ima clock ⎯

set ima group ⎯

set in-band admin ⎯

set in-band vid ⎯

set ip address in-band ⎯

set ip address out-band ⎯

⎯ set ip in-band mode

⎯ set ip route

⎯ set ip route default

set ip virtual-address ⎯

set isolate port ⎯

set isolate pvc ⎯

set l2p-transparent reserved-mac ⎯

set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu ⎯

set line mode atmp ⎯

set line mode gbe ⎯

set line mode tdmp ⎯

set line mode tdmp155 ⎯

set line type ⎯

set login password ⎯

set loopback atm keepalive ⎯

set loopback atm keepalive-mode ⎯

set loopback atm source-id ⎯

set mc management ⎯

set message transmit ⎯

set ntp access-time ⎯

set ntp server ⎯

set out-band flowcontrol ⎯

set out-band speed ⎯

set port admin ⎯

set port cable-length ⎯

set port clock ⎯

set port flowcontrol ⎯

25-4



Appendix

Command



Shown by show all

set port frame ⎯

set port impedance ⎯

set port link-trap ⎯

set port logical-interface ⎯

set port path-trace ⎯

set port protection-time ⎯

set port speed ⎯

set port type ⎯

set pvc admin ⎯

set pvc connection ⎯

set pvc name ⎯

set pvc port admin × ⎯

set pvc static ⎯

set pvc-vlan mode ⎯

set pvc-vlan table ⎯

set qos class-map ⎯

set qos class-map profile ⎯

set qos cos-map profile ⎯

set qos in-class-map maximum ⎯

set qos initial-class-map ⎯

set qos initial-priority ⎯

set qos in-port cos-map ⎯

set qos in-priority maximum ⎯

set qos in-rate maximum ⎯

set qos maximum-mode ⎯

set qos measure-cycle ⎯

set qos out-class-map maximum ⎯

set qos out-fairness-mode ⎯

set qos out-port cos-map ⎯

set qos out-priority fairness ⎯

set qos out-priority maximum ⎯

set qos out-rate fairnessmaximum-port

⎯

set qos out-rate maximum ⎯

set qos out-weight fairness ⎯

set qos out-weight rate *1 ⎯

set reference-clock mode ⎯

set reference-clock priority ⎯

25-5



Appendix

Command



Shown by show all

set session ip-permit ⎯

set snmp ⎯

set snmp authen-trap ⎯

set snmp manager ⎯

set snmp trap-manager ⎯

set spantree ⎯

set spantree mode ⎯

set spantree port ⎯

set spantree port cost ⎯

set spantree port edge ⎯

set spantree port point-to-point ⎯

⎯ set spantree port priority

set spantree priority ⎯

set spantree time ⎯

set spantree txholdcount ⎯

set syslog map ⎯

set syslog remote ⎯

set syslog server ⎯

set system contact ⎯

set system daylight-time ⎯

set system location ⎯

set system name ⎯

set system timezone ⎯

set tdm group ⎯

set tdm group-name ⎯

set tdm path ⎯

set tdmop adaptive-clock ⎯

set tdmop admin ⎯

set tdmop connection ⎯

set tdmop format ⎯

set tdmop group ⎯

set tdmop jitter ⎯

set tdmop mode ⎯

set terminal logout ⎯

set terminal monitor × ⎯

set terminal prompt ⎯

set terminal scroll local × ⎯

set terminal scroll system ⎯

25-6



Appendix

Command



Shown by show all

set user account ⎯

set vlan ethertype ⎯

set vlan member × ⎯

set vlan name ⎯

set vlan portbase ⎯

set vlan swap ⎯

set vlan tagbase ⎯

show aggregation group ⎯

show aggregation port priority ⎯

show aggregation protection-time ⎯

show aggregation system priority ⎯

show aps information ⎯

show atm-fdb count pvc ⎯ ×

show atm-fdb count vid ⎯ ×

show atm-fdb table pvc ⎯ ×

show atm-fdb table vid ⎯ ×

show atm-loop config ⎯

show atm-loop information ⎯

show atm-oam config ⎯

show atm-oam status ⎯

show atmop format ⎯

show atmop in-port priority ⎯

show atmop out-port clp ⎯

show atm-qos aal5 ⎯

show atm-qos out-port clp ⎯

show atm-shaper information ⎯

show atm-shaper rate ⎯

show backup information ⎯

show command-mode ⎯

show config difference ⎯

show counter cell ⎯ ×

show counter cell f4 ⎯ ×

show counter cell f5 ⎯ ×

show counter cell ima-port ⎯ ×

show counter discard ⎯ ×

show counter ether-oam entry ⎯

show counter ether-oam value ⎯ ×

show counter port ⎯ ×

25-7



Appendix

Command



Shown by show all

show counter pvc entry ⎯

show counter pvc value ⎯ ×

show counter vlan entry ⎯

show counter vlan value ⎯ ×

show ether-oam fault last-change ⎯ ×

show ether-oam fault reason ⎯ ×

show ether-oam frame ⎯

show ether-oam lm ⎯

show ether-oam meg ⎯

show ether-oam mep ⎯

show ether-oam mip ⎯

show ether-oam reply-period ⎯

show ether-ps config ⎯

show ether-ps status ⎯

show ether-ring config ⎯

show ether-ring status ⎯

show fault auto-reboot ⎯

show fault past ⎯ ×

show fault present (Detailed showing) ⎯

show fdb agingtime ⎯

show fdb count all ⎯ ×

show fdb count port ⎯ ×

show fdb count vid ⎯ ×

show fdb limiter ⎯

show fdb table ⎯ ×

show fdb table mode ⎯

show fdb table port ⎯ ×

show fdb table vid ⎯ ×

show filter in-port ⎯

show filter out-port ⎯

show filter profile ⎯

show frame-size ⎯

show ifg over-rate ⎯

show igmp mac ⎯ ×

show igmp port ⎯ ×

show igmp status ⎯

show igmp vid ⎯ ×

show ima clock ⎯

25-8



Appendix

Command



Shown by show all

show ima group config ⎯

show ima group status ⎯

show in-band information ⎯

show ip config ⎯

show isolate port ⎯

show isolate pvc ⎯

show l2p-transparent reserved-mac ⎯

show l2p-transparent stp-bpdu ⎯

show line mode ⎯

show loopback atm keepalive config ⎯

show loopback atm keepaliveinformation

⎯

show loopback atm source-id ⎯

show mc information ⎯ (Outline showing)

show message transmit config ⎯

show mirror port ⎯

show ntp ⎯

show out-band information ⎯

show port cable-length ⎯

show port impedance ⎯ show port information ⎯

show port logical-interface ⎯

show port path-trace ⎯ ×

show port protection-time ⎯

show port trap ⎯

show pvc connection ⎯

show pvc information ⎯

show pvc-vlan table pvc ⎯

show pvc-vlan table vid ⎯ ×

show qos class-map ⎯

show qos class-map profile ⎯

show qos cos-map profile ⎯

show qos initial-class-map ⎯

show qos initial-priority ⎯

show qos in-port cos-map ⎯

show qos in-rate maximum ⎯

show qos maximum-mode ⎯

show qos measure-cycle ⎯

25-9



Appendix

Command



Shown by show all

show qos out-fairness-mode ⎯

show qos out-port cos-map ⎯

show qos out-rate maximum ⎯

show qos out-weight fairness ⎯

show reference-clock information ⎯

show reset ⎯ (Outline showing)

show resource cpu ⎯ ×

show resource memory ⎯ ×

show session ⎯

show session ip-permit ⎯

⎯ show snmp

show spantree info ⎯

show spantree mode ⎯

show spantree port ⎯

show spantree port edge ⎯

show spantree port point-to-point ⎯

show stm status ⎯

show switch status ⎯ ×

show syslog local ⎯ ×

show syslog map ⎯

show syslog server ⎯

show system bridge ⎯

show system date ⎯

show system information ⎯

show system module-id ⎯

show system revision ⎯

show system status ⎯

show system temperature ⎯

show tdm group ⎯

show tdm group-name ⎯

show tdm path ⎯

show tdmop adaptive-clock ⎯

show tdmop connection ⎯

show tdmop format ⎯

show tdmop information ⎯

show tdmop jitter ⎯

show tdmop status ⎯

show terminal config ⎯ ×

25-10



Appendix

Command



Shown by show all

show user account ⎯

show vlan ethertype ⎯

show vlan summary ⎯

show vlan swap ⎯

show vlan table port ⎯

show vlan table vid ⎯ ×

*1 Show running-config and show startup-config are output by set qos out-weight fairness.

: Shown

×: Not shown

⎯ : Not applicable

25-11



Appendix

Appendix 2 Line module type conditions

The table below lists operation restrictions on commands per line module.

Operation restrictions

Command

GbE GbE

PV2

FE PV

FX PV

ATM

155

ATMP ATMP TDMP TDMP

155

GbE8

PV 155 MUX

× × × × change aps × × ×

× × × × × × change aps reset ×

change ether-ps × × × × × × × ×

change ether-ps reset × × × × × × × ×

change external-clock ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

change switch ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

date ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

dm ether-oam × × × ×

× × × × linktrace ether-oam

lm ether-oam × × × ×

loopback atm × × × × × × ×

× × × loopback ether-oam ×

loopback ima × × × × × × × × ×

loopback mc × × × × × × × × ×

mirror port × × × × × ×

ous line ×

ous switch ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

reset line ×

reset reference-clock ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

reset switch ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

reset system ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

× × × × × × set aggregation group

× set aggregation port priority × × × × ×

set aggregation protection-time ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set aggregation system priority ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set aps × × × × × × ×

× × × × × × set aps lockout ×

set aps time × × × × × × ×

set atm-loop × × × × × × × × ×

set atm-oam × × × × × × ×

set atm-oam flow × × × × × × ×

set atmop format × × × × × × × ×

× × × × set atmop in-port priority × × × ×

set atmop mode × × × × × × × ×

set atmop out-port clp mode × × × × × × × ×

set atmop out-port clp priority × × × × × × × ×

25-12



Appendix


Command

GbE GbE

PV2

FE PV

FX PV

ATM

155

ATMP ATMP TDMP TDMP

155

GbE8

PV 155 MUX

× × × × × × × × × set atm-qos aal5

× × × × × × × × set atm-qos out-port clp ×

set atm-shaper mode × × × × × × × ×

set atm-shaper rate × × × × × × × ×

set backup schedule ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set backup server ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set command-mode ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

× × × × × × set counter ether-oam entry × ×

set counter pvc entry × × × × × × ×

set counter vlan entry × × × × ×

set enable password ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set ether-oam cc × × × ×

set ether-oam frame

set ether-oam lm × × × ×

set ether-oam meg ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

× × × × set ether-oam mep

× × × × × × × set ether-oam mip ×

set ether-oam peer-mep × × × ×

× × × × set ether-oam rdi

set ether-oam reply-period

× × × × × × × × set ether-ps

× × × × × × × set ether-ps control-vlan ×

set ether-ps lockout × × × × × × × ×

× × × × × × × × set ether-ps time

× × × × × × × set ether-ring ×

set ether-ring control-vlan × × × × × × × ×

× × × × × × × × set ether-ring rpl-owner

× × × × × × × set ether-ring time ×

set external-clock mode ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set fault auto-reboot ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set fdb agingtime ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

× × × × set fdb limiter ×

set fdb limiter static × × × × ×

set fdb table mode ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

× × × × × set filter in-port

× × × × set filter out-port ×

set filter profile ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set frame-size ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set ifg over-rate ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

× × × × × × × × × × set igmp

× × × × × × × × set ima clock ×

25-13



Appendix


Command

GbE GbE

PV2

FE PV

FX PV

ATM

155

ATMP ATMP TDMP TDMP

155

GbE8

PV 155 MUX

× × × × × × × × set ima group ×

set in-band admin ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set in-band vid ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set ip address in-band ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set ip address out-band ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set ip in-band mode ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set ip route ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set ip route default ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set ip virtual-address ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

× set isolate port

× × × × × × × × × set isolate pvc

× × × × × set l2p-transparent reserved-mac

set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

× × × × × × × × × set line mode atmp

× × × × × × × set line mode gbe ×

set line mode tdmp × × × × × × × × ×

set line mode tdmp155 × × × × × × × × ×

set line type ×

set login password ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set loopback atm keepalive × × × × × × ×

set loopback atm keepalive-mode ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ set loopback atm source-id ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set mc management × × × × × × × × ×

set message transmit ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set ntp access-time ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set ntp server ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set out-band flowcontrol ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set out-band speed ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set port admin ×

set port cable-length × × × × × × × ×

set port clock × × × × × × × ×

set port flowcontrol × × × × × ×

set port frame × × × × × × × ×

set port impedance × × × × × × × ×

set port link-trap ×

set port logical-interface × × × × × × × × ×

set port path-trace × × × × × × × × ×

set port protection-time × × × × × ×

set port speed × × × × × × ×

set port type × × × × × × × ×

set pvc admin × × × × × × ×

25-14



Appendix


Command

GbE GbE

PV2

FE PV

FX PV

ATM

155

ATMP ATMP TDMP TDMP

155

GbE8

PV 155 MUX

× set pvc connection × × × × × × ×

set pvc name

× × × × × × ×

set pvc port admin × × × × × × ×

set pvc static × × × × × × ×

set pvc-vlan mode × × × × × × × × ×

set pvc-vlan table × × × × × × × × ×

set qos class-map ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set qos class-map profile ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set qos cos-map profile × × × × ×

set qos in-class-map maximum × × × × × ×

set qos initial-class-map × × × × × ×

set qos initial-priority × × × × ×

set qos in-port cos-map × × × × ×

set qos in-priority maximum × × × × × ×

set qos in-rate maximum × × × × × ×

set qos maximum-mode × × × × × ×

set qos measure-cycle × × × × × ×

set qos out-class-map maximum × × × × × ×

set qos out-fairness-mode ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set qos out-port cos-map × × × × × ×

set qos out-priority fairness ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set qos out-priority maximum × × × × × ×

set qos out-rate fairnessmaximum-port

⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ×

set qos out-rate maximum × × × × × ×

set qos out-weight fairness ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set qos out-weight rate ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set reference-clock mode ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set reference-clock priority × × × × × ×

set session ip-permit ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set snmp ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set snmp authen-trap ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set snmp manager ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set snmp trap-manager ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set spantree ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set spantree mode ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

25-15



Appendix


Command

GbE

PV

GbE

PV2

FE PV

FX PV

ATM

155

ATMP

ATMP

155

TDMP TDMP

155

GbE8

MUX

set spantree port × × × × × ×

set spantree port cost

× × × × × ×

set spantree port edge × × × × × ×

set spantree port point-to-point × × × × × ×

set spantree port priority × × × × × ×

set spantree priority ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set spantree time ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set spantree txholdcount ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set syslog map ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set syslog remote ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set syslog server ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set system contact ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set system daylight-time ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set system location ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set system name ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set system timezone ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set tdm group × × × × × × × ×

set tdm group-name × × × × × × × ×

set tdm path × × × × × × × ×

set tdmop adaptive-clock × × × × × × × ×

set tdmop admin × × × × × × × ×

set tdmop connection × × × × × × × ×

set tdmop format × × × × × × × ×

set tdmop group × × × × × × × ×

set tdmop jitter × × × × × × × ×

set tdmop mode × × × × × × × ×

set terminal logout ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set terminal monitor ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set terminal prompt ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set terminal scroll local ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set terminal scroll system ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set user account ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

set vlan ethertype × × × × ×

set vlan member × × × × × ×

set vlan name ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

25-16



Appendix


Command

GbE

PV

GbE

PV2

FE PV

FX PV

ATM

155

ATMP

ATMP

155

TDMP TDMP

155

GbE8

MUX

set vlan portbase × × × × × ×

set vlan swap

× × × × × ×

set vlan tagbase × × × × × ×

: Operable

: Inoperable (commands can be entered)

×: Inoperable (commands cannot be entered)

⎯ : Set in UGSW

25-17



Appendix

(Blank page)

25-18



Index

Index

C

cd ............................................................................................................................................... 24-19

change aps .................................................................................................................................. 11-6

change aps reset ......................................................................................................................... 11-8

change ether-ps......................................................................................................................... 10-47

change ether-ps reset ................................................................................................................ 10-48

change external-clock .................................................................................................................. 18-9

change switch ............................................................................................................................ 23-13clear aggregation group............................................................................................................... 8-28

clear atm-fdb table pvc............................................................................................................... 12-26

clear atm-loop ............................................................................................................................ 12-30

clear atmop format ..................................................................................................................... 12-37

clear atm-qos out-port clp .......................................................................................................... 13-15

clear atm-shaper rate................................................................................................................. 13-10

clear backup server.................................................................................................................... 22-32

clear counter cell........................................................................................................................ 21-39clear counter ether-oam entry.................................................................................................... 21-43

clear counter port ......................................................................................................................... 21-5

clear counter pvc entry............................................................................................................... 21-22

clear counter pvc value.............................................................................................................. 21-26

clear counter vlan entry.............................................................................................................. 21-13

clear counter vlan value............................................................................................................. 21-19

clear enable password................................................................................................................... 1-7

clear ether-oam fault reason...................................................................................................... 10-32

clear ether-oam lm..................................................................................................................... 10-15

clear ether-oam meg.................................................................................................................... 10-5

clear ether-oam mep.................................................................................................................. 10-12

clear ether-oam mip ................................................................................................................... 10-21

clear ether-oam peer-mep ......................................................................................................... 10-17

clear ether-ring loop-detection ................................................................................................... 10-57

clear fault past............................................................................................................................ 22-41

clear fault warning...................................................................................................................... 22-38

clear fdb limiter............................................................................................................................. 9-20

Index-1



Index

clear fdb limiter static ................................................................................................................... 9-22

clear fdb table port ....................................................................................................................... 7-15

clear fdb table vid......................................................................................................................... 7-17

clear filter in-port .......................................................................................................................... 9-12

clear filter out-port........................................................................................................................ 9-16

clear filter profile............................................................................................................................. 9-8

clear igmp mac............................................................................................................................. 8-38

clear igmp vid............................................................................................................................... 8-41

clear ima group ............................................................................................................................ 15-8

clear ip address in-band................................................................................................................. 3-6

clear ip address out-band .............................................................................................................. 3-3

clear ip route ................................................................................................................................ 3-12

clear ip route default ...................................................................................................................... 3-8

clear ip virtual-address................................................................................................................. 3-21

clear login password ...................................................................................................................... 1-9

clear loopback atm keepalive..................................................................................................... 20-23

clear ntp server .......................................................................................................................... 19-38

clear pvc connection .................................................................................................................. 12-42

clear pvc name............................................................................................................................. 12-5

clear pvc static ............................................................................................................................. 12-3

clear pvc-vlan table.................................................................................................................... 12-12

clear qos cos-map profile............................................................................................................. 6-48

clear qos in-port cos-map ............................................................................................................ 6-51

clear qos in-rate maximum........................................................................................................... 6-19

clear qos out-port cos-map .......................................................................................................... 6-54

clear qos out-rate maximum ........................................................................................................ 6-35

clear qos out-weight fairness ....................................................................................................... 6-69

clear running-config line............................................................................................................. 22-27

clear session.............................................................................................................................. 19-24

clear session ip-permit............................................................................................................... 19-22

clear snmp manager .................................................................................................................. 19-15

clear snmp trap-manager........................................................................................................... 19-16

clear startup-config .................................................................................................................... 22-30

clear syslog local........................................................................................................................ 19-34

clear syslog map........................................................................................................................ 19-31

clear syslog server ..................................................................................................................... 19-28

clear system daylight-time ........................................................................................................... 2-12

Index-2



Index

clear tdm group............................................................................................................................ 16-6

clear tdm group-name................................................................................................................ 16-12

clear tdm path ............................................................................................................................ 16-18

clear tdmop adaptive-clock ........................................................................................................ 17-35

clear tdmop connection.............................................................................................................. 17-16

clear tdmop format ..................................................................................................................... 17-28

clear tdmop group........................................................................................................................ 17-9

clear tdmop mode ........................................................................................................................ 17-4

clear user account........................................................................................................................ 1-18

clear vlan name............................................................................................................................ 5-16

clear vlan swap ............................................................................................................................ 5-11

clear vlan tagbase.......................................................................................................................... 5-3

copy ........................................................................................................................................... 24-20

D

date................................................................................................................................................ 2-6

del .............................................................................................................................................. 24-22

dir ............................................................................................................................................... 24-16

disable............................................................................................................................................ 1-4

dm ether-oam............................................................................................................................. 10-37

download fpga line.............................................................................................................. 22-9, 24-5

download fpga switch.......................................................................................................... 22-8, 24-3

download running-config............................................................................................................ 22-11

download running-config external-memory................................................................................ 24-10

download software.............................................................................................................. 22-7, 24-2

download startup-config............................................................................................................. 22-13

download startup-config external-memory................................................................................. 24-11

E

enable ............................................................................................................................................ 1-3

end............................................................................................................................................. 24-15

exit ................................................................................................................................................. 1-2

Index-3



Index

L

linktrace ether-oam.................................................................................................................... 10-35

lm ether-oam.............................................................................................................................. 10-39

loopback atm................................................................................................................................ 20-9loopback ether-oam................................................................................................................... 10-33

loopback ima.............................................................................................................................. 15-11

loopback mc................................................................................................................................. 20-3

M

maintenance .................................................................................................................................. 1-5

mirror port .................................................................................................................................. 21-45mkdir .......................................................................................................................................... 24-17

O

ous external-memory ...................................................................................................... 23-22, 24-23

ous line....................................................................................................................................... 23-21

ous switch .................................................................................................................................. 23-20

P

ping .............................................................................................................................................. 3-18

R

rename....................................................................................................................................... 24-21

reset line .................................................................................................................................... 23-18

reset reference-clock ................................................................................................................... 18-8

reset switch................................................................................................................................ 23-16

reset system............................................................................................................................... 23-14

rmdir........................................................................................................................................... 24-18

S

set aggregation group.................................................................................................................. 8-24

set aggregation port priority ......................................................................................................... 8-31

Index-4



Index

set aggregation protection-time ................................................................................................... 8-33

set aggregation system priority .................................................................................................... 8-29

set aps ......................................................................................................................................... 11-2

set aps lockout............................................................................................................................. 11-4

set aps time.................................................................................................................................. 11-5

set atm-loop ............................................................................................................................... 12-27

set atm-oam................................................................................................................................. 14-2

set atm-oam flow.......................................................................................................................... 14-4

set atmop format ........................................................................................................................ 12-33

set atmop in-port priority ............................................................................................................ 13-16

set atmop mode ......................................................................................................................... 12-31

set atmop out-port clp mode ...................................................................................................... 13-20

set atmop out-port clp priority .................................................................................................... 13-21

set atm-qos aal5 ........................................................................................................................ 13-11

set atm-qos out-port clp ............................................................................................................. 13-13

set atm-shaper mode................................................................................................................... 13-2

set atm-shaper rate...................................................................................................................... 13-3

set backup schedule .................................................................................................................. 22-33

set backup server....................................................................................................................... 22-31

set command-mode ..................................................................................................................... 1-19

set counter ether-oam entry....................................................................................................... 21-40

set counter pvc entry.................................................................................................................. 21-20

set counter vlan entry................................................................................................................... 21-9

set enable password...................................................................................................................... 1-6

set ether-oam cc ........................................................................................................................ 10-26

set ether-oam frame................................................................................................................... 10-22

set ether-oam lm........................................................................................................................ 10-13

set ether-oam meg....................................................................................................................... 10-2

set ether-oam mep....................................................................................................................... 10-6

set ether-oam mip ...................................................................................................................... 10-18

set ether-oam peer-mep ............................................................................................................ 10-16

set ether-oam rdi........................................................................................................................ 10-28

set ether-oam reply-period......................................................................................................... 10-24

set ether-ps................................................................................................................................ 10-42

set ether-ps control-vlan ............................................................................................................ 10-44

set ether-ps lockout.................................................................................................................... 10-45

set ether-ps time ........................................................................................................................ 10-46

Index-5



Index

set ether-ring.............................................................................................................................. 10-53

set ether-ring control-vlan .......................................................................................................... 10-54

set ether-ring rpl-owner.............................................................................................................. 10-55

set ether-ring time ...................................................................................................................... 10-56

set external-clock mode............................................................................................................... 18-2

set fault auto-reboot................................................................................................................... 22-51

set fdb agingtime............................................................................................................................ 7-6

set fdb limiter................................................................................................................................ 9-17

set fdb limiter static ...................................................................................................................... 9-21

set fdb table mode ......................................................................................................................... 7-4

set filter in-port ............................................................................................................................... 9-9

set filter out-port ........................................................................................................................... 9-13

set filter profile................................................................................................................................ 9-4

set frame-size ................................................................................................................................ 7-2

set ifg over-rate............................................................................................................................ 7-18

set igmp ....................................................................................................................................... 8-35

set ima clock ................................................................................................................................ 15-9

set ima group ............................................................................................................................... 15-2

set in-band admin ........................................................................................................................ 3-13

set in-band vid.............................................................................................................................. 3-14

set ip address in-band.................................................................................................................... 3-4

set ip address out-band ................................................................................................................. 3-2

set ip in-band mode ..................................................................................................................... 3-22

set ip route ..................................................................................................................................... 3-9

set ip route default ......................................................................................................................... 3-7

set ip virtual-address.................................................................................................................... 3-19

set isolate port................................................................................................................................ 9-2

set isolate pvc ............................................................................................................................ 12-17

set l2p-transparent reserved-mac ................................................................................................ 8-22

set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu........................................................................................................ 8-20

set line mode atmp....................................................................................................................... 23-6

set line mode gbe....................................................................................................................... 23-10

set line mode tdmp....................................................................................................................... 23-3

set line mode tdmp155................................................................................................................. 23-8

set line type.................................................................................................................................. 23-2

set login password ......................................................................................................................... 1-8

set loopback atm keepalive........................................................................................................ 20-19

Index-6



Index

set loopback atm keepalive-mode ............................................................................................. 20-15

set loopback atm source-id........................................................................................................ 20-13

set mc management .................................................................................................................... 20-2

set message transmit................................................................................................................. 22-17

set ntp access-time.................................................................................................................... 19-35

set ntp server ............................................................................................................................. 19-36

set out-band flowcontrol............................................................................................................... 3-16

set out-band speed ...................................................................................................................... 3-15

set port admin ................................................................................................................................ 4-2

set port cable-length .................................................................................................................... 4-19

set port clock.................................................................................................................................. 4-9

set port flowcontrol......................................................................................................................... 4-6

set port frame............................................................................................................................... 4-10

set port impedance ...................................................................................................................... 4-26

set port link-trap ............................................................................................................................. 4-8

set port logical-interface............................................................................................................... 4-23

set port path-trace........................................................................................................................ 4-28

set port protection-time .................................................................................................................. 4-7

set port speed ................................................................................................................................ 4-3

set port type ................................................................................................................................... 4-5

set pvc admin............................................................................................................................... 12-6

set pvc connection ..................................................................................................................... 12-38

set pvc name................................................................................................................................ 12-4

set pvc port admin........................................................................................................................ 12-7

set pvc static ................................................................................................................................ 12-2

set pvc-vlan mode...................................................................................................................... 12-10

set pvc-vlan table....................................................................................................................... 12-11

set qos class-map........................................................................................................................ 6-37

set qos class-map profile ............................................................................................................. 6-40

set qos cos-map profile................................................................................................................ 6-43

set qos in-class-map maximum ..................................................................................................... 6-9

set qos initial-class-map............................................................................................................... 6-71

set qos initial-priority .................................................................................................................... 6-75

set qos in-port cos-map ............................................................................................................... 6-49

set qos in-priority maximum......................................................................................................... 6-12

set qos in-rate maximum................................................................................................................ 6-6

set qos maximum-mode................................................................................................................. 6-2

Index-7



Index

set qos measure-cycle................................................................................................................. 6-80

set qos out-class-map maximum ................................................................................................. 6-24

set qos out-fairness-mode ........................................................................................................... 6-55

set qos out-port cos-map ............................................................................................................. 6-52

set qos out-priority fairness.......................................................................................................... 6-57

set qos out-priority maximum....................................................................................................... 6-27

set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port ...................................................................................... 6-64

set qos out-rate maximum ........................................................................................................... 6-21

set qos out-weight fairness .......................................................................................................... 6-62

set qos out-weight rate................................................................................................................. 6-60

set reference-clock mode............................................................................................................. 18-5

set reference-clock priority........................................................................................................... 18-3

set session ip-permit.................................................................................................................. 19-20

set snmp .................................................................................................................................... 19-12

set snmp authen-trap................................................................................................................. 19-17

set snmp manager ..................................................................................................................... 19-13

set snmp trap-manager.............................................................................................................. 19-14

set spantree ................................................................................................................................... 8-2

set spantree mode ......................................................................................................................... 8-3

set spantree port .......................................................................................................................... 8-10

set spantree port cost .................................................................................................................. 8-12

set spantree port edge................................................................................................................. 8-15

set spantree port point-to-point .................................................................................................... 8-17

set spantree port priority .............................................................................................................. 8-11

set spantree priority ....................................................................................................................... 8-5

set spantree time ........................................................................................................................... 8-6

set spantree txholdcount................................................................................................................ 8-7

set syslog map........................................................................................................................... 19-29

set syslog remote....................................................................................................................... 19-25

set syslog server ........................................................................................................................ 19-26

set system contact ......................................................................................................................... 2-2

set system daylight-time ................................................................................................................ 2-8

set system location ........................................................................................................................ 2-4

set system name............................................................................................................................ 2-3

set system timezone ...................................................................................................................... 2-7

set tdm group............................................................................................................................... 16-2

set tdm group-name..................................................................................................................... 16-8

Index-8



Index

set tdm path ............................................................................................................................... 16-14

set tdmop adaptive-clock ........................................................................................................... 17-32

set tdmop admin ........................................................................................................................ 17-30

set tdmop connection................................................................................................................. 17-11

set tdmop format ........................................................................................................................ 17-23

set tdmop group........................................................................................................................... 17-5

set tdmop jitter ........................................................................................................................... 17-17

set tdmop mode ........................................................................................................................... 17-2

set terminal logout........................................................................................................................ 1-14

set terminal monitor ..................................................................................................................... 1-13

set terminal prompt ...................................................................................................................... 1-10

set terminal scroll local................................................................................................................. 1-12

set terminal scroll system............................................................................................................. 1-11

set user account........................................................................................................................... 1-16

set vlan ethertype......................................................................................................................... 5-13

set vlan member ............................................................................................................................ 5-8

set vlan name............................................................................................................................... 5-15

set vlan portbase............................................................................................................................ 5-4

set vlan swap ................................................................................................................................. 5-9

set vlan tagbase............................................................................................................................. 5-2

show aggregation group .............................................................................................................. 8-26

show aggregation port priority...................................................................................................... 8-32

show aggregation protection-time................................................................................................ 8-34

show aggregation system priority ................................................................................................ 8-30

show all ...................................................................................................................................... 22-24

show aps information................................................................................................................... 11-9

show atm-fdb count pvc ............................................................................................................. 12-22

show atm-fdb count vid .............................................................................................................. 12-24

show atm-fdb table pvc .............................................................................................................. 12-19

show atm-fdb table vid ............................................................................................................... 12-20

show atm-loop config ................................................................................................................. 12-28

show atm-loop information......................................................................................................... 12-29

show atm-oam config................................................................................................................... 14-6

show atm-oam status................................................................................................................... 14-8

show atmop format .................................................................................................................... 12-35

show atmop in-port priority......................................................................................................... 13-18

show atmop out-port clp............................................................................................................. 13-22

Index-9



Index

show atm-qos aal5..................................................................................................................... 13-12

show atm-qos out-port clp.......................................................................................................... 13-14

show atm-shaper information....................................................................................................... 13-8

show atm-shaper rate .................................................................................................................. 13-6

show backup information ........................................................................................................... 22-35

show command-mode.................................................................................................................. 1-20

show config difference ............................................................................................................... 22-16

show counter cell ....................................................................................................................... 21-27

show counter cell f4 ................................................................................................................... 21-31

show counter cell f5 ................................................................................................................... 21-34

show counter cell ima-port......................................................................................................... 21-37

show counter discard................................................................................................................... 21-6

show counter ether-oam entry ................................................................................................... 21-41

show counter ether-oam value................................................................................................... 21-44

show counter port ........................................................................................................................ 21-2

show counter pvc entry .............................................................................................................. 21-21

show counter pvc value ............................................................................................................. 21-23

show counter vlan entry ............................................................................................................. 21-11

show counter vlan value ............................................................................................................ 21-14

show ether-oam fault last-change.............................................................................................. 10-29

show ether-oam fault reason ..................................................................................................... 10-30

show ether-oam frame............................................................................................................... 10-23

show ether-oam lm .................................................................................................................... 10-14

show ether-oam meg ................................................................................................................... 10-3

show ether-oam mep ................................................................................................................... 10-8

show ether-oam mip .................................................................................................................. 10-19

show ether-oam reply-period ..................................................................................................... 10-25

show ether-ps config.................................................................................................................. 10-49

show ether-ps status.................................................................................................................. 10-51

show ether-ring config................................................................................................................ 10-58

show ether-ring status................................................................................................................ 10-60

show fault auto-reboot ............................................................................................................... 22-52

show fault past ........................................................................................................................... 22-39

show fault present...................................................................................................................... 22-36

show fdb agingtime........................................................................................................................ 7-7

show fdb count all ........................................................................................................................ 7-11

show fdb count port........................................................................................................................ 7-8

Index-10



Index

show fdb count vid ....................................................................................................................... 7-10

show fdb limiter ............................................................................................................................ 9-18

show fdb table.............................................................................................................................. 7-12

show fdb table mode...................................................................................................................... 7-5

show fdb table port....................................................................................................................... 7-13

show fdb table vid ........................................................................................................................ 7-16

show filter in-port.......................................................................................................................... 9-10

show filter out-port ....................................................................................................................... 9-14

show filter profile............................................................................................................................ 9-6

show frame-size............................................................................................................................. 7-3

show ifg over-rate ........................................................................................................................ 7-19

show igmp mac............................................................................................................................ 8-37

show igmp port............................................................................................................................. 8-40

show igmp status ......................................................................................................................... 8-36

show igmp vid .............................................................................................................................. 8-39

show ima clock........................................................................................................................... 15-10

show ima group config................................................................................................................. 15-4

show ima group status................................................................................................................. 15-5

show in-band information............................................................................................................... 3-5

show ip config .............................................................................................................................. 3-10

show isolate port ............................................................................................................................ 9-3

show isolate pvc......................................................................................................................... 12-18

show l2p-transparent reserved-mac ............................................................................................ 8-23

show l2p-transparent stp-bpdu .................................................................................................... 8-21

show line mode.......................................................................................................................... 23-11

show loopback atm keepalive config ......................................................................................... 20-16

show loopback atm keepalive information ................................................................................. 20-21

show loopback atm source-id .................................................................................................... 20-14

show mc information.................................................................................................................... 20-7

show message transmit config................................................................................................... 22-21

show mirror port ......................................................................................................................... 21-47

show ntp..................................................................................................................................... 19-37

show out-band information........................................................................................................... 3-17

show port cable-length................................................................................................................. 4-21

show port impedance................................................................................................................... 4-27

show port information................................................................................................................... 4-11

show port logical-interface ........................................................................................................... 4-25

Index-11



Index

show port path-trace .................................................................................................................... 4-31

show port protection-time............................................................................................................. 4-18

show port trap .............................................................................................................................. 4-16

show pvc connection.................................................................................................................. 12-41

show pvc information ................................................................................................................... 12-8

show pvc-vlan table pvc............................................................................................................. 12-13

show pvc-vlan table vid.............................................................................................................. 12-15

show qos class-map .................................................................................................................... 6-38

show qos class-map profile.......................................................................................................... 6-42

show qos cos-map profile ............................................................................................................ 6-46

show qos initial-class-map........................................................................................................... 6-73

show qos initial-priority................................................................................................................. 6-78

show qos in-port cos-map............................................................................................................ 6-50

show qos in-rate maximum.......................................................................................................... 6-16

show qos maximum-mode ............................................................................................................. 6-4

show qos measure-cycle ............................................................................................................. 6-81

show qos out-fairness-mode........................................................................................................ 6-56

show qos out-port cos-map.......................................................................................................... 6-53

show qos out-rate maximum........................................................................................................ 6-32

show qos out-weight fairness....................................................................................................... 6-66

show reference-clock information ................................................................................................ 18-6

show reset.................................................................................................................................. 23-19

show resource cpu..................................................................................................................... 22-53

show resource memory.............................................................................................................. 22-55

show running-config................................................................................................................... 22-14

show session ............................................................................................................................. 19-23

show session ip-permit .............................................................................................................. 19-21

show snmp................................................................................................................................. 19-18

show spantree info......................................................................................................................... 8-8

show spantree mode...................................................................................................................... 8-4

show spantree port ...................................................................................................................... 8-13

show spantree port edge ............................................................................................................. 8-16

show spantree port point-to-point ................................................................................................ 8-18

show startup-config.................................................................................................................... 22-15

show stm status ........................................................................................................................... 4-36

show switch status ..................................................................................................................... 24-24

show syslog local ....................................................................................................................... 19-32

Index-12



Index

show syslog map ....................................................................................................................... 19-30

show syslog server .................................................................................................................... 19-27

show system bridge ................................................................................................................... 22-44

show system date ........................................................................................................................ 2-11

show system information ............................................................................................................... 2-5

show system module-id ............................................................................................................. 22-45

show system revision................................................................................................................. 22-47

show system status.................................................................................................................... 22-42

show system temperature.......................................................................................................... 22-49

show tdm group ........................................................................................................................... 16-4

show tdm group-name............................................................................................................... 16-10

show tdm path............................................................................................................................ 16-16

show tdmop adaptive-clock........................................................................................................ 17-34

show tdmop connection ............................................................................................................. 17-13

show tdmop format .................................................................................................................... 17-25

show tdmop information............................................................................................................... 17-7

show tdmop jitter........................................................................................................................ 17-19

show tdmop status..................................................................................................................... 17-21

show terminal config .................................................................................................................... 1-15

show user account....................................................................................................................... 1-17

show vlan ethertype..................................................................................................................... 5-14

show vlan summary ..................................................................................................................... 5-12

show vlan swap............................................................................................................................ 5-10

show vlan table port ....................................................................................................................... 5-5

show vlan table vid......................................................................................................................... 5-7

U

update mc information ................................................................................................................. 20-6

upload all-information................................................................................................................... 22-5

upload all-information external-memory..................................................................................... 24-13

upload fault .......................................................................................................................22-6, 24-12

upload local-syslog .............................................................................................................22-4, 24-9

upload running-config .................................................................................................................. 22-2

upload running-config external-memory ...................................................................................... 24-7

upload startup-config ................................................................................................................... 22-3

upload startup-config external-memory ....................................................................................... 24-8

Index-13



Index

V

virtual-ping ................................................................................................................................... 3-20

W

write memory .................................................................................................................. 22-26, 24-14

Date post:	07-Aug-2018
Category:	Documents
Upload:	laholdelveca
View:	212 times
Download:	0 times

CX2600-220_Command_Reference_v7.6B_eng - Copy.pdf

Documents